Iohn Huighen van Linschoten. his discours of voyages into ye Easte & West Indies Deuided into foure bookes.

THE FIRST BOOKE. (Book 1)

CHAPTER. I.

The Voyage and trauailes of Iohn Hugen van Linschoten into the East or Portin∣gales Indies: Setting downe a briefe discourse of the said Landes, and sea coastes, with the principall Hauens, Riuers, Creekes, and other places of the same, as yet not knowne nor discouered by the Portingales: Describing withall not onely the manner of apparrell of the Portingales inhabiting ther∣in, but also of the naturall borne Indians, their Temples, Idols, houses, trees, Fruites, Hearbes, Spices, and such like: Together with the customes of those countries, as well for their manner of Idolatrous religion and worshipping of Images, as also for their policie and gouernment of their houses, their trade, and traffique in Marchandise, how and from whence their wares are sold, & brought thether: With a collection of the most memorable and worthiest thinges happened in the time of his beeing in the same countries, very pro∣fitable and pleasant to all such as are welwillers, or desirous to heare and read of strange thinges.

BEeing young, and liuing idlelye in my natiue Coun∣trie, sometimes applying my selfe to the reading of Histories, and straunge aduen∣tures, wherein I tooke no small delight, I found my minde so much addicted to sée & trauaile into strange Countries, thereby to séeke some aduenture, that in the end to satisfie my selfe I determi∣ned, & was fully resolued, for a time to leaue my Natiue Countrie, and my friendes (al∣though it gréeued me) yet the hope I had to accomplish my desire, together with the re∣solution, taken in the end ouercame my af∣fection and put me in good comfort, to take the matter vpon me, trusting in God that he would further my intent. Which done, be∣ing resolued, thereupon I tooke leaue of my Parents, who as then dwelt at Enckhuy∣sen, and beeing ready to imbarke my selfe, I went to a Fléet of ships that as then lay be∣fore the Tassell, staying the winde to sayle for Spaine, and Portingale, where I imbar∣ked my selfe in a ship that was bound for S. Lucas de Barameda, beeing determined to trauaile vnto Siuill, where as then I had two bretheren that had continued there cer∣taine yeares before: so to helpe my selfe the better, & by their meanes to know the man∣ner and custome of those Countries, as also to learne the Spanish tongue.

And the 6. of December, in the yere of our Lord 1576 we put out of y^e Tassel,* 1.1 (being in all about 80. ships) & set our course for Spain, and the ninth of the same month, wee passed betwéene Douer and Callis, & within thrée dayes after wee had the sight of the Cape of Finisterra, and the fiftéene of the same mo∣neth we saw the land of Sintra, otherwise called the Cape Roexent, from whence the riuer Tegio, or Tagus, runneth into the maine Sea, vppon the which riuer lieth the famous citie of Lisbone, where some of our Fleet put in, and left vs. The 17. day wee saw the Cape S. Vincent, & vppon Christ∣mas day after we entred into the riuer of S. Lucas de Barameda, where I stayed two or thrée dayes, and then trauailed to Siuill, & the first day of Ianuarie following, I entred into the citie, where I found one of my bre∣thren,

but the other was newly ridden to the Court, lying as then in Madrill. And al∣though I had a speciall desire presently to trauaile further, yet for want of the Spanish tongue, without the which men can hardlie passe the countrie, I was constrained to stay there to learne some part of their language: meane time it chanced that Don Henry (the last King of Portingale) died: by which meanes a great contention and debate hap∣ned as then in Portingale, by reason that the said King by his Will and Testament, made Phillip King of Spaine, his Sisters Sonne, lawfull Heire vnto the Crowne of Portingal. Notwithstanding y^e Portingals (alwaies deadly enemies to the Spaniards,) were wholly against it, and elected for their king, Don Antonio, Prior de Ocrato, bro∣thers Son to the King that died before Don Henry: which the King of Spaine hearing, presently prepared himselfe in person to goe into Portingale to receaue the Crowne, sending before him the Duke of Alua, with a troupe of men to cease their strife, and paci∣fie the matter: so that in the end, partly by force, and partly by mony, hee brought the Countrie vnder his subiection. Whereup∣on diuers men went out of Siuill and other places into Portingale, as it is commonlie séene that men are often addicted to changes and new alterations, among the which my Brother by other mens counsels was one: First trauelling to the borders of Spaine, be∣ing a cittie called Badaios, standing in the frontiers of Portingale, where they hoped to finde some better meanes, and they were no sooner ariued there, but they heard news that all was quiet in Portingale, and that Don Antonio was driuen out of the coun∣trie, and Phillip by consent of the Land re∣ceyued for King. Wherevpon my Brother presently changed his minde of trauelling for Portingale, and entred into seruice with an Ambassador, that on the Kings behalfe was to goe into Italie, with whome he rode: and ariuing in Salamanca hee fell sicke of a dis∣ease called Tauardilha, which at that time raigned throughout the whole Countrie of Spaine, whereof many thousands died: and among the rest my Brother was one.

This sicknesse being very contagious, raigned not onely in Spaine,* 1.2 but also in I∣talie, Germany, and almost throughout all Christendome, whereof I my selfe was sicke being as then in Italie, and by them it was called Coccolucio, because such as were troubled therewith, were no other∣wise troubled then in the throat, like vn∣to Hennes which haue the pip, after the which followed many pestilent feuers, with diuers strange fits, which continued not aboue foure dayes.

Not long before, the plague was so great in Portingale, that in two yeres space there died in Lisbone to the number of 80. thou∣sand people: after the which plague the saide disease ensued, which wrought great destruc∣tion throughout the whole Countrie of Spaine.

The fift day of August in the same yeare, hauing some vnderstanding in the Spanish tongue, I placed my selfe with a Dutch gentleman, who determined to trauaile into Portingal, to sée the countrie, and with him stayed to take a more conuenient time for my pretended voyage.

Vppon the first of September following we departed from Siuill, & passing through diuers Townes and Villages, within eight dayes after we ariued at Badaios,* 1.3 where I found my other Brother following the Court. At the same time died Anne de Au∣stria Quéene of Spaine, (Sister to the Em∣perour Rodulphus, and Daughter to the Emperour Maximilian) the Kings fourth and last wife, for whom great sorrow was made through all Spaine: her body was conuaied from Badaios to the Cloyster of Saint Laurence in Escuriall, where with great solemnitie it was buried. We hauing stayed certaine dayes in Badaios, departed from thence, and passed through a Towne called Eluas about two or thrée miles off, be∣ing the first towne in the kingdome of Por∣tingale, for that betwéene it and Badaios, the borders of Spaine and Portingale are limited: from thence we trauailed into diuers other places of Portingale, and at the last a∣riued at Lisbone, about the twenty of Sep∣tember following, where at that time wee found the Duke of Alua beeing Gouernour there for the King of Spaine, the whole Cit∣tie making great preparation for the Coro∣nation of the King, according to the custome of their countrie. Wee beeing in Lisbone, through the change of aire, and corruption of the countrie I fell sicke, and during my sick∣nes was seauen times let blood, yet by Gods help I escaped: and being recouered, not ha∣uing much preferment vnder the gentleman, I left his seruice, and placed my selfe with a Marchant vntill I might attaine to better meanes. About the same time the plague not long before newly begunne, began againe to cease, for the which cause the King till then had deferred his enterance into Lisbone, which wholly ceased vppon the first day of May, Anno 1581* 1.4 hee entred with great triumph and magnificence into the cittie of Lisbone, where aboue all others the Dutch∣men

had the best and greatest commendati∣on for beautiful shews, which was a Gate & a Bridge that stood vppon the riuer side where the King must first passe as hee went out of his Gallie to enter into the cittie, being beu∣tified and adorned with many costly and ex∣cellent thinges most pleasant to behold, euery stréet and place within the cittie being hang∣ed with rich clothes of Tapistrie and Arras, where they made great triumphes, as the manner is at all Princes Coronations.

The same yere the twelfth of December, the Duke of Alua died in Lisbone in the kings pallace, being high steward of Spaine, who during his sicknes for the space of four∣téene dayes, receaued no sustenance but only womens milke: his body beeing seared and spicen was conuaied into his countrie of Al∣ua.

The same month (the King beeing yet at Lisbone) died Don Diego Prince of Spaine and Portingale, the kings eldest son: his body béeing inbalmed, was conuaied to Madril, after whose death the king had but one Sonne named Don Phillip, and two Daughters liuing.

About the same time there ariued at Lis∣bone the kings sister, widdow to the decea∣sed Emperour Maximilian, and with her one of her daughters who beeing lame was after placed in a Monasterie of Nuns, they with great triumph were likewise receaued into the cittie. After the death of Don Die∣go the kings eldest sonne, all the Lordes and States of Spaine and Portingale, as well spirituall as temporal assembled at Lisbone, and there in the kings presence (according to the ancient custome and manner of the coun∣trie) tooke their oathes of faith and allegiance vnto Don Phillip the young Prince of Spaine, and next heire and lawfull successor of the lung his Father, in his dominions of Spaine, Portingale, and other landes and countries.

* 1.5The next yeare Anno 1582. a great na∣uie of ships was prepared in Lisbone, whose generall was the Marquesse de sancta Cru∣ce, accompanied with the principall gentle∣men and captaines both of Spaine and Por∣tingal: who at their own costs and charges therein to shew the great affection and desire they had to serue their Prince, sayled with the said Nauie to the Flemmish Ilandes, to fight with Don Antonio that lay about those Iles with a Fléet of frenchmen, whose Generall was one Phillip Strozzi: These two Fléets méeting together, fought most cruelly to the great losse of both parts, yet in the ende Don Antonio with his French men was ouerthrowne, and many of them taken prisoners: among the which were di∣uers gentlemen of great account in France; who by the Marquis commandement were all beheaded in the Island of Saint Micha∣els. The rest being brought into Spaine, were put into the Gallies, Don Antonio himselfe escaped in a small ship and the Gene∣ral Strozzi also, who béeing hurt in y^e battail died of the same wound. By this victory the Spaniards were so proud, that in Lisbone great triumph was holden for the same, and the Marquis de Sancta Crus, receiued therin with great ioy: which done and all thinges being pacified in Portingale, the King left his Sisters sonne Don Albertus Cardinall of Austria Gouernour of Lisbone, and the whole Countrie; and with the saide Cardi∣nals mother returned, and kept Court at Madrill in Spaine.

The 2. Chapter. The beginning of my voyage into the East or Portingale Indies.

STaying at Lisbone, the trade of Marchandize there not beeing great, by reason of the newe & fresh disagréeing of the Spani∣ards and Portingales, occasion being offered to accomplish my desire, there was at the same time in Lisbone a Monke of S. Domi∣nicks order, named Don frey Vincente de Fonseca, of a noble house: who by reason of his great learning, had of long time béene Chaplen vnto Sebastian King of Portin∣gale, who beeing with him in the battaile of Barbari••, where King Sebastian was slain, was taken prisoner, and from thence ran∣somed, whose learning and good behauiour beeing knowne to the King of Spaine, hee made great account of him, placing him in his own Chappel, and desiring to prefer him, the Archbishopricke of all the Indies beeing voide, with confirmation of the Pope he in∣uested him therewith, although he refused to accept it, fearing the long and tedious tra∣uaile hee had to make thether, but in the end through the Kings perswasion, hee tooke it vpon him, with promise within foure or fiue yeares at the furthest to recall him home a∣gaine, and to giue him a better place in Por∣tingale, with the which promise he tooke the voyage vpon him. I thinking vpon my af∣faires, vsed all meanes I could to get into his seruice, and with him to trauaile the voi∣age which I so much desired, which fell out as I would wish: for that my Brother that followed the Court, had desired his Master (beeing one of his Maiesties secretaries) to

make him purser in one of the ships that the same yere should saile vnto the East Indies, which pleased me well, in so much that his said Master was a great friend and acquain∣tance of the Archbishops, by which meanes, with small intreatie I was entertained in the Bishops seruice, and amongst the rest my name was written downe, wee being in all forty persons, & because my Brother had his choise which ship he would be in, he chose the ship wherein the Archbishop sayled, the bet∣ter to help each other, and in this manner we prepared our selues to make our voyage, being in all fiue ships of the burthen of four∣téene or sixtéene hundreth Tunnes each ship, their names were the Admirall S. Phillip: the Vize Admirall S. Iacob. These were two new ships, one bearing the name of the King, the other of his sonne, the other thrée, S, Laurence, S. Francisco, and our shippe S. Saluator.

* 1.6Vpon the eight of Aprill, beeing good Fri∣day in the yeare of our Lorde 1583. which commonly is the time when their ships set sayle within foure or fiue dayes vnder, or o∣uer, wee altogether issued out of the Riuer of Lisbone and put to sea, setting our course for the Ilands of Madera, and so putting our trust in God, without whose fauour & helpe we can doe nothing, and all our actions are but vaine, we sayled forwards.

Chapter 3. The manner and order vsed in the ships in their Indian Voyages.

THe shippes are commonlye charged with foure or fiue hundred men at the least, sometimes more, some∣times lesse, as there are souldiers and saylers to bée found. When they go out they are but light∣ly laden, onely with certaine pipes of wine & oyle, and some small quantitie of Marchan∣dize other thing haue they not in, but balast, & victuals for the company, for that the most and greatest ware that is commonly sent in∣to India, are rials of eight, because the prin∣cipall Factors for pepper doe euery yere send a great quantitie of mony, therewith to buy pepper, as also diuers particular Marchants, as being the least ware that men can carry into India: for that in these rials of eight they gaine at the least forty per cento: when the ships are out of the riuer, and enter into the sea, all their men are mustered, as well saylers, as souldiers, and such as are founde absent and left on land, being registred in the bookes, are marked by the purser, that at their returne they may talke with their su∣erties, (for that euery man putteth in suer∣ties,) and the goods of such as are absent, bée∣ing found in the ship are presently brought foorth and prised, and an Inuentorie thereof béeing made, it is left to bee disposed at the captaines pleasure. The like is done with their goods that die in the ship, but little of it commeth to the owners hands, being im∣beseled and priuily made away.

The Master and Pilot haue for their whole voyage forth and home againe, each man 120. Millreyes, euery Millreyes being worth in Dutch money seauen guilders, and because the reckoning of Portingale monie is onely in one sort of money called Reyes, which is the smalest money to bee founde in that countrie, and although it bee neuer so great a summe you doe receaue, yet it is al∣waies reckoned by Reyes, whereof 160. is as much as a Keysers gilderne, or foure ri∣als of siluer: so that two reyes are foure pence, and one reye two pence of Holland money▪ I haue thought good to set it downe, the better to shew and make you vnderstand the accounts they vse by reyes in the coun∣trie of Portingale. But returning to our matter, I say the Master and the Pilot doe receaue before hand, each man twenty foure millreyes, besides that they haue chambers both vnder in the ship, and cabbins aboue the hatches, as also primage, & certaine tunnes fraught. The like haue all the other officers in the ship according to their degrées, and al∣though they receaue money in hand, yet it costeth them more in giftes before they get their places, which are giuen by fauour and good will of the Proueador, which is the chiefe officer of the Admiraltie, and yet there is no certaine ordinance for their payes, for that it is dayly altered: but let vs reckon the pay, which is commonly giuen according to the ordinance and maner of our ship for that yeare.

The chiefe Boteswain hath for his whole pay 50. Millreyes, and receaueth ten in rea∣dy money: The Guardian, that is the quar∣ter master hath 1400. reyes the month, and for fraught 2800. and receaueth seuen Mill∣reyes in ready money: The Seto Piloto, which is the Masters mate, hath 1200. reyes, which is thrée duckets the month, and as much fraught as the quarter Master: two Carpenters, & two Callafaren which helpe them, haue each man foure duckets a month and 3900. Millreyes fraught. The Stew∣ard that giueth out their meate and drinke, and the Merinho, which is he that impri∣soneth men aborde, and hath charge of all the

munition and powder, with the deliuering forth of the same, haue each man a Millreyes the month, and 2340. reyes fraught, besides their chambers and fréedome of custome, as also all other officers, saylers, pikemen, shot, &c. haue euery man after the rate, and eue∣ry one that serueth in the ship. The Cooper hath thrée duckets a month, and 3900 reyes fraught: Two Strinceros, those are they which hoise vp the maine yeard by a wheele, and let it downe againe with a whéele as néedis, haue each man one Millreyes the month, and 2800. reyes fraught: Thirty thrée saylers haue each man one Millreyes the month, and 2800. reyes fraught, 37. rowers, haue each man 660. reyes the mo∣neth, and 1860. reyes fraught, foure pagiens which are boyes, haue with their fraught 443. reyes the month, one Master gunner, and eight vnder him, haue each man a diffe∣rent pay, some more, some lesse: The sur∣gion likewise hath no certaine pay: The fac∣tor and the purser haue no pay but only their chambers, that is below vnder hatches, a chamber of twentie pipes, for each man ten pipes, and aboue hatches each man his cab∣bin to sléepe in, whereof they make great profit. These are all the officers and other persons which sayle in the ship, which haue for their portion euery day in victuals, each man a like, as well the greatest as the least, a pound and thrée quarters of Bisket, halfe a Can of Wine, a Can of water, an Arroba which is 32. pound of salt flesh the moneth, some dryed fish, onyons and garlicke are ea∣ten in the beginning of the voyage, as being of small valew, other prouisions, as Suger, Honny, Reasons, Prunes, Ryse, & such like, are kept for those which are sicke: yet they get but little thereof, for that the officers kéepe it for themselues, and spend it at their pleasures, not letting much goe out of their fingers: as for the dressing of their meate, wood, pots, and pans, euery man must make his owne prouision: besides all this there is a Clarke and steward for the Kings souldi∣ers that haue their parts by themselues, as the saylers haue.

This is the order and manner of theyr voyage when they sayle vnto the Indies, but when they returne againe, they haue no more but each man a portion of Bisket and water vntill they come to the Cape de Bo∣na Esperance, and from thence home they must make their own prouisions. The soul∣diers that are passengers, haue nothing els but frée passage, that is roome for a chest vn∣der hatches, and a place for their bed in the or loope, and may not come away without the Viceroyes passeport, and yet they must haue béene fiue yeres souldiers in the Indies before they can haue licence, but the slaues must pay fraught for their bodies, & custome to the King, as in our voyage home againe we will at large declare.

The 15. of Aprill we espied the Iland of Madera and Porto Sancto, where the ships vse to seperate themselues, each ship kéeping on his course, that they may get before each other into India for their most commodities, and to dispatch the sooner; whereby in the night, and by tides they leaue each others company, each following his owne way.

The 24. of Aprill we fell vpon the coaste of Guinea which beginneth at nine degrées, and stretcheth vntill wee come vnder the E∣quinoctiall, where wee haue much thunder, lightning▪ and many showers of raine, with stormes of wind, which passe swiftly ouer, & yet fall with such force, that at euery shower we are forced to strike sayle, & let the maine yeard fall to the middle of the mast, & many times cleane down, sometimes ten or twelue times eueryday: there wee finde a most ex∣treame heate, so that all the water in the ship stinketh, whereby men are forced to stop their noses when they drinke, but when wee are past the Equinoctiall it is good againe, & the nearer wee are vnto the land, the more it stormeth, raineth, thundreth and calmeth: so that most commonly the shippes are at the least two monthes before they can passe the line: Then they finde a winde which they name the generall winde, and it is a South east winde, but it is a side wind, and we must alway lie side waies in the wind al∣most vntill wee come to the cape de Bona Speranza, and because that vpon the coast of Brasillia about 18. degrées, on the south side lieth great slakes or shallowes, which the Portingales call Abra••hos, that reach 70. miles into the sea on the right side, to passe them, the ships hold vp most vnto the coast of Guinea, and so passe the said Flattes, other∣wise if they fall too low and keepe inwardes, they are constrained to turne againe vnto Portingale, and many times in danger to be lost, as it hapned to our Admirall Saint Phillip, which in the yeare 1582.* 1.7 fell by night vpon the Flats, and was in great dan∣ger to be lost, yet recouered againe, & sayled backe to Portingale, and now this yeare to shunne the Flats shee kept so neare the coast of Guinea, that by meanes of the great calmes and raynes, shee was forced to driue vp and downe two months together, before shee could passe the line, & came two months after the other ships into India: Therefore men must take heed, and kéepe themselues from comming too neare the coast, to shun

the calmes and stormes, and also not to hold too farre of thereby to passe the Flats & shal∣lowes, wherein consisteth the whole Indian Voyage.

The 15. of May being about fiftie miles beyond the Equinoctiall line Northwardes, we espied a French ship, which put vs all in great feare, by reason that most of our men were sicke, as it commonly hapneth in those countries through the excéeding heate: & fur∣ther they are for the most part such as neuer haue beene at Sea before that time, so that they are not able to do much, yet we dischar∣ged certaine great shot at him, wherewith he left vs, (after he had played with vs for a smal time) and presently lost the sight of him, wherewith our men were in better comfort. The same day about euening, wee discried a great ship••, which wee iudged to bee of our Fleet, as after wee perceiued, for it made towards vs to speake with vs, and it was the Saint Francisco, wherewith wee were glad.

The ••6. of May, wee passed the Equi∣noctiall line which runneth through the mid∣dle of the Iland of Saint Thomas, by the coast of Guinea, and then wee began to sée the south star, and to loose the north star, and founde the sunne at twelue of the clocke at noone to be in the north, and after that wee had a south east wind, called a general wind, which in those partes bloweth all the yeare through.

The 29. of May being Whitsonday, the ships of an ancient custome, doe vse to chuse an Emperour among themselues, and to change all the officers in the ship, and to hold a great feast, which continueth thrée or foure dayes together, which wee obseruing chose an Emperour, and being at our banket, by meanes of certaine words that passed out of some of their mouthes, there fell great strife and contention among vs, which procéeded so farre, that the tables were throwne downe and lay on the ground, and at the least a hun∣dred rapiers drawne, without respecting the Captaine or any other for he lay vnder foote, and they trod vpon him, and had killed each other, and thereby had cast the ship away, if the Archbishop had not come out of his chā∣ber among them, willing them to cease, wherwith they stayed their hands, who pre∣sently commaunded euery man on paine of death, that all their Rapiers, Poynyardes, and other weapons should bee brought into his chamber, which was done, whereby all thinges were pacified, the first and principall beginners being punished & layd in irons, by which meanes they were quiet.

The 12. of Iune we passed beyond the a∣fore said Flats and shallowes of Brasillia, whereof all our men were excéeding glad, for thereby we were assured that we should not for that time put backe to Portingale a∣gaine, as many doe, and then the generall wind serued vs, vntill wee came to the riuer of Rio de Plata, where wee got before the wind to the cape de Bona Speranza.

The 20. of the same month, the S. Fran∣siscus that so long had kept vs cōpany▪ was againe out of sight: and the eleauenth of Iu∣ly after, our Master iudged vs to bee about 5••. miles from the cape de Bona Speranza: wherefore he was desired by the Archbishop to kéepe in with the land, that wee might sée the Cape. It was then mistie weather, so that as we had made with the lād about one houre or more, wee perceiued land right be∣fore vs, and were within two miles thereof, which by reason of the darke and misty wea∣ther we could no sooner perceiue, which put vs in great feare, for our iudgement was cleane contrarie, but the weather beginning to cleare vp, we knew the land, for it was a part or bank of the point called Cabo Falso, which is about fiftéene miles on this side the cape de Bona Speranza, towards Mossam∣bique the cape de Bona Speranza lieth vnder 34. degrées southward, there wee had a calme and faire weather, which continuing about halfe a day, in the meane time with our lines we got great store of fishes vppon the same land at ten or twelue fadoms wa∣ter, it is an excellent fish much like to Had∣docks, the Portingales call them Pescados.

The twenty of the same month wee met againe with Saint Francisco, and spake with her, and so kept company together till the 24. of Iune, when wee lost her againe. The same day wee stroke all our sayles, be∣cause wee had a contrarie wind, and lay two dayes still driuing vp and downe, not to loose anie way, meane time wee were against the high land of Tarradona••al, which beginneth in 32. degrees, and endeth in 30. and is di∣stant from Capo de Bona Speranza 150. miles, in this place they cōmonly vse to tak•• counsell of all the officers of the ship, whe∣ther it is best for thē to sayle through within the land of S. Laurenso, or without it, for that within the land they sayle to Mossam∣bique, and from thence to Goa, and sayling without it they cannot come at Goa, by rea∣son they fal down by meanes of the streame, and so must sayle vnto Cochin, which lieth 100. miles lower then Goa, and as the ships leaue the cape, then it is not good to make towards Mossambique, because they can∣not come in time to Goa, by reason of the great calmes that are within the land, but

they that passe the Cape in the month of Iu∣ly, may well goe to Mossambique, because they haue time inough there to refresh them∣selues, and to take in fresh water and other victuals, and so to lie at anker ten or twelue dayes together, but such as passe the cape in the month of August, doe come too late, and must sayle about towardes Cochin, thereby to loose no time, yet it is dangerous & much more combersome, for that commonly they are sicke of swolen legges, sore bellies, and o∣ther diseases. The 30. of Iuly, wee were a∣gainst the point of the cape called Das Co∣rentes, which are 130. miles distant from Terra Donatal, and lieth vnder 24. degrées Southwarde, there they begin to passe be∣twéene the Ilands.

[illustration] map of Madagascar

The Ile Madagascar, otherwise called Saint Laurence.

(The Iland of S. Laurenso, is by Mar∣cus Paulus named the great Iland of Ma∣gastar, by Andrea Theuet it is called Ma∣dagascar, and is the greatest of all the East Ilandes, for it is greater in compasse then eyther of the King∣domes of Castile or Portingale, and li∣eth on the other side of Africa as we passe the cape de Bona Speranza, it containeth in length (as Theuet describeth) 72 de∣grees, and in bredth eleauen degrees, and is in cōpasse (as some hold opinion) 3000 Italian miles, and as some write 4000. which should bee sixe or eight hundred Dutch miles. This Iland is iudged to be very temperate, and therefore well peop∣led, but beleeue in Mahomet. Marcus Paulus sayeth, that the Iland is gouerned by foure ancient men, it is full of wilde beasts and strange foules, whereof he wri∣teth many fables, not worthie the rehear∣sall. This Iland hath Elephants & all kind of beasts which haue but one horn, wher∣of one is called an Indian asse, with whole feet vnclouē, an other is called Orix, with clouen feet: it hath many snakes, efftes, & great store of woodes of redde Sandale, which are there little esteemed for the great abundance, there the Sea yeeld∣eth much Amber: it aboundeth also in Rice, Barley, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, & Millons, which are so great that a man can hardly gripe them, both red, white, & yellow, and better then ours, and much ginger which they eate greene, Hony & Sugar in such abundance, that they know not whether to send it, Saffron, many medicinable hearbs, and Indian nuts. It likewise yeeldeth Siluer, and hath manie Riuers, beautifull Fountaines, and diuers Hauens, whether many Sarasins & Mores doe bring their Marchandise, as clothes of gold & Siluer, Linnen made of cotton, wooll, and such like.)

From S. Laurenso to Mossambique, which lieth from the firme land of Das Co∣rentes 120. miles, and is an Iland of 220. miles long, stretching north & south, and in breadth 70. miles, beginning from the first point, vntill you come at the cape in 26. de∣grees,

and endeth in the North in 11. de∣grées. The people of the Iland are blacke like those of Mossambique, and goe naked, but the haire of their heades is not so much curled as theirs of Mossambique, and not full so blacke. The Portingales haue no speciall traffique there, because there is not much to be had, for as yet it is not very well known. The 1. of August we passed the flats called os Baixos de Iudea, that is, the Flats of the Iewes, which are distant from the cape das Corentes, 30. miles, and lie be∣twéen the Iland of S. Laurence & the firme land, that is from the Iland fiftie miles, and from the firme land seauenty miles, which Flats begin vnder 22. degrées and a halfe, and continue to twentie one degrées: there is great care to bee taken lest men fall vpon them, for they are very dangerous, and many ships haue bin lost there, and of late in Anno 1585.* 1.8 a ship comming from Portin∣gale called S. Iago beeing Admirall of the Fleet, and was the same that the first voiage went with vs from Lisbone for vice Admi∣rall, as in another place we shall declare.

The fourth of August we discried the land of Mossambique, which is distant from the Flattes of the Iewes nintie miles vnder fifteene degrées southwards. The next day we entred into the road of Mossambique, and as we entered we espied the foresaid ship called S. Iago which entered with vs, and it was not aboue one houre after we had de∣scried it, beeing the first time wee had séene it since it left vs at the Iland of Madera, where we seperated our selues. There wee found likewise two more of our ships, Saint Laure••zo and Saint Francisco, which the day before were come thether with a small ship that was to sayle to Malacca, which commonly setteth out of Portingale, a month before any of the ships do set sayle for India, only because they haue a longer voi∣age to make, yet doe they ordinarily sayle to Mossambique to take in sweete water & fresh victuals as their voiage falleth out, or their victuals scanteth: If they goe not the∣ther, thē they saile about on the back side of y^e Iland of saint Laurenso, not setting their course for Mossambique. Being at Mos∣sambique wee were foure of our Fléete in company together, only wanting the Saint Phillip, which had holden her course so nere the coast of Guinea, (the better to shun the Flats of Bracillia that are called Abrollios, whereon the yere before she had once fallen,) that she was so much becalmed that she could not passe the Equinoctiall line in long time after vs, neyther yet the cape de Bona Spe∣ranza without great storms & foule weather, as it ordinarilie happeneth to such as come late thether, whereby shee was compelled to compasse about & came vnto Cochin about two months after we were al ariued at Goa, hauing passed and endured much misery and foule weather, with sicknes and diseases, as swellings of the legs, and the scorbuicke, and paine in their bellies &c.

The 4. Chapter. The description of Mossambique, which lieth vnder 15. degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall line vppon the coast of Melinde, otherwise called A∣bex or Abexim.

MOssambique is a Towne in the Iland of Prasio with a safe, (although a small) hauen, on the right side towardes the cape: they haue the golden mines called Sofala, on the left side the rich towne of Quiloa: and by reason of the foggie mistes incident to the same, the place is both barren & vn∣holsome, yet the people are rich by reason of the situation. In time past it was inha∣bited by people that beleeued in Mahoo¦met, being ouercom & kept in subiection by the tirant of Quiloa, & his lieftenant (which the Arabians called Zequen) that gouerned them.

Mossambique is a little Iland, distant about halfe a mile from the firme land, in a corner of the said firme land, for that y^e firme land on the north side stretcheth further into y^e sea thē it doth, & before it there lie two smal Ilands named S. George & S. Iacob, which are euen w^t the corner of the firme land, and betwéene those two Ilands not inhabited, & the firme land the ships doe sayle to Mos∣sambique leauing the Ilands southward, on the left hand, and the firm land ••n the north, and so without a Pilot compasse about a mile into the sea to Mossambique, for it is déepe enough, and men may easily shun the sands that lie vpon the firme land, because they are openly séene. The ships harbour so neare to the Iland and the ••ortresse of Mos∣sambique, that they may throw a stone out of their ship vppon the land, and sometimes farther, and lie betwéene the Iland and the firme land, which are distant halfe a mile from each other, so that the ships lie there as safely as in a riuer or hauen. The Iland of Mossambique is about halfe a mile in com∣passe, flat land, and bordered about with a white sand: Therein growe many Indian palmes or nut trées, & some Orange, Apple,

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

Lemmon, Citron, and Indian Figge trées: but other kindes of fruit which are common in India are there verie scarce. Corne and other graine with Rice and such necessarie marchandizes are brought thether out of In∣dia, but for beasts and foule, as O••en, shéep, Goats, Swine, Hennes, &c. there are great aboundance and very good and cheape. In the same Iland are found shéepe of fiue quar∣ters in quantitie, for that their tayles are so broad and thicke, that there is as much flesh vpon them, as vpon a quarter of their body, and they are so fatte that men can hardlie brooke them. There are certaine Hennes that are so blacke both of feathers, flesh, and bones, that being sodden they séeme as black as inke: yet of very swéet taste, and are ac∣counted better then the other: whereof some are likewise found in India, but not so many as in Mossambique. Porke is there a ve∣ry costly dish, and excellent faire and swéete flesh, and as by experience it is found, it farre surpasseth all other flesh: so that the sicke are forbidden to eate any kinde of flesh but onely Porke, because of the excellency thereof.

MOssambique signifieth two places, one which is a whole kingdome lying in Africa, behinde the cape of Bona Spe∣ranza, betweene Monomotapa & Quiloa, the other certaine Ilands herafter drawne and described, lying on the south side of the Equinoctiall line vnder 14. degrees and a halfe, whereof the greatest is called Mossambique, the other two Saint Iacob and Saint George. These Ilands lie almost in the mouth of a riuer which in Africa is called Moghincats.

About Mossambique is a verie great & a safe hauen, fit to receiue and harbour all ships that come and goe both to & from Portingal & the Indies, and although both the Kingdome and the Iland are not ve∣ry great, yet are they very rich and abun∣dant in all kinde of thinges, as appeareth in the description of the same.

Mossambique the chiefe & greatest of them is inhabited by two maner of peo∣ple, Christians and Mahometanes, the Christians are Portingales, or of the Por∣tingales race, there is also a castle wherin the Portingales keepe garrison, from whence also all other castles and fortes thereabouts are supplied with their ne∣cessaries, speciallie Sofala, where the rich mine of Gold lieth: there the Portingale ships doe vse to harbour in winter time, when of wind or by meanes of foule wea∣ther, they cannot accōplish their voiage.

The Indian ships doe likewise in that place take in new victuals and fresh wa∣ter.

This Iland beeing first discouered by the Portingales, was the only meanes that they found the Indies: for that frō thence they vsed to take Pilots, which taught them the way: touching the manner and customes of these people, read the Au∣thors description at large, they are good shooters in musket and caliuer, and ex∣pert Fishermen.

Sayling along further by the coast to∣wardes the Indies you passe by Quiloa (which in times past was called Rapta) not great but verie faire by reason of the great trees that grow there, which are al∣waies fresh and greene, as also for the di∣uersities of victuals, & it is also an Ilande lying about the mouth of the great Riuer Coauo, which hath her head or spring out of the same lake from whence Nilus doth issue. This Iland is inhabited by Maho∣metans, and they are all most white appa∣relled in silk and clothes of cotton wooll: their women weare bracelets of gold and precious stones about their neckes and armes: they haue great quantitie of siluer workes, & are not so browne as the men, & well membered: their houses are com∣monly made of stone, chalke, and wood, with pleasant gardens of all kind of fruit and sweet flowers: from this Iland the kingdome taketh his name. This point asketh a larger discourse, which you shal finde in the leafe following.

They haue no swéet water in this Iland to drinke, but they fetch it from the firme land, out of a place called by the Portingales Cabaser, and they vse in their houses great pots which come out of India, to kéepe their water in.

The Portingales haue therein a verie faire and strong castle which now about 10. or 12. yeares past was fullie finished, and standeth right against the first of the vnhabi∣ted little Ilands, where the ships must come in, and is one of the best and strongest built of all the Castles throughout the whole In∣dies, yet haue they but small store of ordi∣nance or munition, as also not any souldiers more then the Captaine and his men that dwel therin. But when occasion serueth, the married Portingales that dwell in the I∣land, which are about 40. or 50. at the most, are all bound to kéepe the Castle, for that the Iland hath no other defence then onely that Castle, the rest lieth open and is a flat sand. Round about within the Castle are certaine 〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

whollie accustomed therunto as if they were Horses, Moyles, or Asses. I haue spoken with men that came from thence, and haue séen them, and affirme it for a truth.

But returning to our matter of the go∣uernmement and vsage of the Portingales and their Captaine, I say that the Captaine maketh the commoditie of his place within thrée yeares space that hee remaineth there, which amounteth to the value of 300. thou∣sand Duckets, that is nine tunnes of golde: as while we remained there, the Captaine named Nuno Velio Perena himselfe shew∣ed vs, and it is most in gold that commeth from Sofala & Monomotapa as I said be∣fore, from Mossambique they carrie into India Gold, Ambergris, Eben wood, and I∣uorie, and many slaues both men and wo∣men which are carried thether, because they are the strongest Moores in all the East coū∣tries, to doe their filthiest and hardest labor, wherein they onely vse them: They sayle from thence into India but once euery year, in the month of August till half September, because that throughout the whole countries of India they must sayle with Monssoyns, that is with the tides of the year, which they name by the windes, which blow certaine monthes in the yeare, whereby they make their account to goe and come from the one place to the other, & the time that men may commonly sayle betwéene Mossambique and India, is 30. dayes little more or lesse, and then they stay in India till the month of Aprill, when the winde or Monssoyn com∣meth againe to serue them for Mossambi∣que, so that euery yeare once, there goeth and commeth one shippe for the Captaine that carrieth and bringeth his marchandise, and no man may traffique from thence into India, but only those that dwel and are mar∣ried in Mossambique, for that such as are vnmarried may not stay there by speciall pri∣uiledge from the King of Portingall graun∣ted vnto those that inhabite there, to the end the Island should be peopled, and therby kept and maintained.

Behind Mossambique lyeth the coun∣trey of Prester Iohn, which is called by them the countrey of Abexines, wherevpon the coast of Mossambique vnto the red sea is commonly called the coast of Abex, and di∣uers men of Prester Iohns land do send men of that country, some being slaues, and others tree into India, which serue for Saylors in the Portingalles shippes, that traffique in those countries frō place to place, whose pic∣tures & counterfets, as also their religiō, ma∣ner of liuing, and customes doeth hereafter follow in the pictures of India. This coast of Abex is also by the Portingalles called the coast of Melinde, because that vpon the same coast lyeth a towne and a Kingdome of that name, which was the first towne and Kingdome that in the Portingals first disco∣uerie of those countries, did receiue them peaceably without treason or deceit, and so to this day doth yet continue.

Wee stayed at Mossambique for the space of 15. dayes, to prouide fresh water and victuails for the supplying of our wants, in the which time diuers of our men fel sicke and died, by reason of the vnaccustomed ayre of the place, which of it selfe is an vnholsome land, and an euill aire by meanes of the great and vnmeasurable heat.

The 20. of August wee set saile with all our companie, that is, our foure shippes of one fléete that came from Portingall, and a shippe of the Captaines of Mossambique, whose thrée yeares were then finished, his name was Don Pedro de Castro, in whose place the aforesaide Nuno Velio Pereira, was then come. The said Captain Don Pe∣dro returned w^t his wife & family again into India, for that the Kinges commandement and ordinance is, that after the expiration of their thrée yeares office, they must yet stay thrée years more in India at the commande∣ment of the Vice Roy of India, in the kings seruice, at their owne charges, before they must returne into Portingall, vnlesse they bring a speciall patent from the King, that after they haue continued thrée yeares in their office, they may returne into Portingal againe, which is very seldome séene, vnlesse it be by speciall fauour, and likewise no man may trauell out of India vnlesse hee haue the Vice Royes Pasport, and without it they are not suffred to passe, for it is very narrowly looked into.

The 24. of August in the morning wée descryed two Islandes, which are called In∣sula de Comora, and Insula de Don Ian de Castro. The Islande Comora lyeth di∣stant from Mossambique 60. miles, Northwardes vnder 11. degrées on the South side is a very high land, so high that in a whole dayes saile with a good winde wee could not lose the sight therof, the same day the shippes seperated themselues againe, ac∣cording to the ancient manner, for the occa∣sions aforesaid.

The third of September we once againe passed the Equinoctiall line, which runneth betwéene Melinde and Braua, townes ly∣ing vppon the coast of Abex, and the line is frō Mossambique Northwards 230. miles, and from the line to the Cape de Quarda∣fum are 190. miles, and lyeth vnder 12. de∣grées

on the North side of the Equinoctiall, vpon this coast betwéene Mossambique, and the Cape de Guardafum, lyeth these townes, Quiloa, in time past called Rapta Mombassa, which is a towne situate in a little Island of the same name, which shew∣eth a farre off to be high sandie downes, and hath a hauen with two fortes to defende it, Melinde, Pate, Braua, and Magadoxo, each being a kingdome of it selfe, holding the lawe of Mahomet: the people are some∣what of a sallower colour then those of Mos∣sambique, with shining hayre, gouerning their Citties after the manner of the Arabi∣ans, and other Mahometanes. This cor∣ner or Cape of Guardafum is the ende of the coast of Abex or Melinde, and by this cape East Northeast 20. miles within the Sea lyeth the rich Island called Socotora, where they find Aloes, which taketh the name of the Islande being called Aloe Socotorina, and is the verie best, being close and fast, and from thence is it carried and conueyed into al places.

By this corner and Island beginneth the mouth or enterance of the ••streito de Mec∣ka, for that within the same vpon the coast of Arabia lyeth the citie of Mecka, where the body of Mahomet hangeth in the ayre in an iron chest, vnder a sky made of Ada∣mant stone, which is greatly sought vnto, & visited by many Turkes and Arabians. This entery is also called the redde sea, not that the water is redde, but onely because there are certain redde hilles lying about the same, that yéeld redde marble stones: and be∣cause the sand in some places is redde, it is the same sea which Moyses with the children of Israel passed through on dry land.

From the hooke or cape de Guardafum, which lesseneth, and is narrow inwardes to∣wardes Sues, in time past called Arsinoe, (which is the vttermost town where the nar∣rownesse or straight endeth) are 360. miles, and from thence ouer land to the Mediterra∣nean sea in Italie are 90. myles, the straight or narrownes is in the entrāce, & also within the broadest place 40. miles, and in some places narrower: it hath also diuers Islands, and on the one side inwarde by Sues North∣ward Arabia deserta, on the other side south ward Aegipt, where the riuer Nilus hath her course, and somewhat lower towardes the Indian seas Arabia Felix: and on the other side right against it, the countrey of Abexy∣nes, or Prester Iohns land, vpon the hooke or corner of Arabia Felix, the Portingals in time past helde a fort called Aden, but nowe they haue none, whereby at this present the Turks come out of the straight or mouth of the redde sea, with Gallies that are made in Sues, and doe much hurt and iniurie vppon the coast of Abex or Melinde, as when time serueth we shall declare.

Hauing againe passed the line, we had the sight of the North Star, whereof vpon the coast of Guinea, from the Island of S. Tho∣mas vntill this tyme, wee had lost the fight. The 4. of September wee espyed a shippe of our owne fléete, and spake with him: it was the S. Francisco, which sayled with vs till the 7. day, and then left vs. The 13. of Sep∣tember wee saw an other shippe which was the S. Iacob, which sailed out of sight again and spake not to vs.

The 20. of September we perceiued ma∣ny Snakes swimming in the sea, being as great as Eeles, and other thinges like the scales of fish, which the Portingals call Vin∣tijns, which are halfe Ryalles of siluer, Por∣tingall money, because they are like vnto it: these swimme and driue vpon the sea in great quantities, which is a certain sign & token of the Indian coast.

Not long after with great ioy we descried land, and found ground at 47. f••dome déepe, being the land of Bardes, which is the vtter∣most ende and corner of the enterie of the Ri∣uer Goa, of being about thrée miles from the Citie: it is a high land where the shippes of India do anker and vnlade, and from thence by boates their wares are carryed to the towne. That day we ankered without in the sea about thrée miles from the land, because it was calme, and the fludde was past; yet it is not without danger, and hath round about a faire and fast land to anker in, for as then it beganne in those places to be summer.

The 21. being y^e next day, there came vnto vs diuers boats called Almadias, which bor∣ded vs, bringing w^t thē all maner of fresh vic∣tuailes from the land, as fresh bread & fruit, some of them were Indians that are christe∣ned: there came likewise a Galley to fetch the Archbishoppe, and brought him to a place called Pangijn, which is in the middle way, betwéene Goa and the roade of Bardes, and lyeth vpon the same Riuer: Here hee was welcommed and visited by the Vice Roy of India, named Don Francisco Mascareni∣as, and by all the Lordes and Gentlemen of the countrey, as well spirituall as tempo∣rall: The Magistrates of the towne desired him to stay there ten or twelue dayes, while preparation might bee made to receiue him with triumph into the cittie, as their manner is, which hee granted them. The same day in the afternoone we entred the Riuer, into the roade vnder the lande of Bardes, being the 21. of September Anno 1583. being

fiue monthes and 13. dayes after our put∣ting forth of the Riuer of Lisbone, (hauing stayed 15. daies at Mosambique (which was one of the spéediest and shortest voyages that in many yeares before and since that time was euer performed: There we founde the shippe named Saint Laurence, which arri∣ued there a day before vs: The 22. day the S. Iacob came thither, and the next day af∣ter arriued the S. Francis.

There dyed in our shippe 30. persons, a∣mong the which, some of them were slaues, and one high Dutchman, that had beene one of the King of Spaines garde: euery man had beene sicke once or twice and let bloode. This is commonly the number of men that ordinarily dyed in the ships, sometimes more sometimes lesse. About ten or twelue years since it chaunced that a Vice Roy for the King, named Ruy Lorenso Detauora say∣led for India, that had in his shippe 1100. men, and there happened a sicknes among them, so that there dyed thereof to the num∣ber of 900. and all throwne ouer borde into the sea, before they came to Mosambique the Vice Roy himselfe being one. Which was an extraordinarie sicknesse, and it is to be thought that the great number of men in the ship were the cause of bréeding the same: therefore in these dayes the shippes take no more so many men into them, for that with the number they carrie, they haue stinking ayre, and filth enough to clense within the shippe.

The 30. of September the Archbishoppe my maister with great triumph was brought into the towne of Goa, and by the Gentlemen and Rulers of the countrey, led vnto the cathedrall Church, singing Te De∣um laudamus, and after many ceremonies and auncient customes, they conuayed him to his pallace, which is close by the Church.

The 20. of Nouember our Admirall S. Phillip arriued at Cochin without staying to land in any place, hauing indured much mi∣serie by the meanes before rehearsed, hauing béene seuen monthes and twelue daies vnder saile.

The last of the same month of Nouember the shippes sayled from Goa to the coast of Malabar, and Cochin, there to receiue their lading of Pepper and other spices: some take in their lading on the coast of Malabar, as at Onor, Mangator, Cananor, &c. and some at Cochin, which can alwayes lade two shippes with Pepper. Cochin lyeth from Goa Southwarde about 90. miles: The shippes vnlade all their Portingall commo∣dities in Goa, where the Marchantes, and Factors are resident, and from thence the ships do sayle along the coast to take in their lading in Pepper, and to Cochin as it is said before. Each shippe doeth commonly lade eyght thousande Quintales of Pepper, little more or lesse Portingall waight: euery Quintale is 128. pound. Then they come to Cochin, whither the Factors also do tra∣uell and lade in them Cloues, Sinamon, and other Indian wares, as in my voyage home∣warde I will particularly declare, together with the manner of the same.

In the monthes of Ianuary and Febru∣arie Anno 1584.* 1.9 the shippes with their la∣ding returned from Cochin, some before, some after, towards Portingall, with whom my brother went, because of his office in the shippe, and I stayed with my maister in In∣dia certaine yeares, to sée and learne the ma∣ners and customes of the said lands, people, fruites, wares, and merchandises, with o∣ther thinges, which when time serueth, I wil in truth set downe, as I my selfe for the most parte haue séene it with mine eyes, and of credible persons, both Indians, and other in∣habiters in those Countries learned and re∣quired to know, as also the report and fame thereof is nowe sufficiently spread abroade throughout the world by diuers of our neigh∣bour countries and landes which traffique and deale with them, namely our countrey, the East Countries, England, Fraunce, &c. which likewise are founde and knowne by the Portingalles themselues, which dayly trafficke thither. But before I beginne to describe Goa, and the Indies, concerning their manners, traffiques, fruites, wares, and other thinges, the better to vnderstande the situation of the Countrey, and of the coasts lying on the East side, to the last and highest part of the borders of China, which the Portingales haue trauelled and discoue∣red, together with their Ilandes, I will first set downe a briefe note of the Orientall coastes, beginning at the redde, or the Ara∣bian sea, from the towne of Aden to Chinae and then the description of the coastes before named.

Chapter 5. The description of the coast of Arabia Felix, or the red Sea, to the Iland and fortresse of Ormus.

ADen is the strongest and fai∣rest towne of Arabia Felix,* 1.10 si∣tuate in a valley, compassed about vpon the one side with strong mines, on the other side with high mountaines, there are in it

fiue Castles laden with Ordinance, and a continuall Garrison kept therein, because of the great number of shippes that sayle before it, the Towne hath about 6000. houses in it, where the Indians, Persians, Aethiopians, and Turkes doe trafique: and because the Sunne is so extreame hotte in the daye time, they make most of their bargaines by night. About a stones cast from the towne there is a hill with a great Castle standing thereon wherein the Go∣uernor dwelleth. In times past this towne stoode vpon the firme land, but nowe by the labour & industrie of man, they haue made it an Iland.

Aden lieth on the North side, at the en∣trie of the red Sea on the coast of Arabia Felix, or fruitfull Arabia, and reacheth 60. miles more inwards then the corner or Cape de Guardafum the farthest part or corner of Abex, or Melinde as I said before: but the coast of Arabia, which taketh the beginning from Aden, is much more inwarde. Aden lieth vnder 13. degrées on the North side, and from thence the coast lyeth Northeast and by East till you come to Cape de Ro∣salgate, which lyeth vnder 22. degrées, and is the further corner of the lande of Arabia Felix, lying on the Indian Sea, which is di∣stant from Aden 240. miles: the towne of Aden standeth by the hill called Darsira, which men affirme to bee onely Cliffes of hard stones, and red Marble, where it neuer rayneth. The people of this coast of Arabia, are tawnie of colour, almost like those of the coast of Abex or Melinde, frō that Coun∣trie they bring great numbers of good horses into India, and also Frankensence, Mirhe, Balsam, Balsam woode, and fruite, and some Manna, with other swéete wares and Spi∣ces: they hold the law of Mahomet after the Persians manner.

From the Cape of Rosalgate inwardes, following the coast North-west to the Cape de Moncado, in times past named Albora are 70. miles. This point lyeth right against the Iland Ormus vnder 26. degrées. There beginneth the entrance of the straights of Persia, called Sinus Persicus, and the Iland Ormus lyeth betwéene them both, hauing on the one side Arabia, and on the other side Northward the Countrie of Persia, and is in breadth 20. miles. From the Cape de Moncadon, coasting the Arabian shore in∣wardes to the Iland of Barem, are 80. miles, and lyeth vnder 26. degrées & a halfe. There the Captaine of Ormus being a Portingal, hath a factor for the King, and there they fish for the best Pearles in all the East Indies, and are the right orientall Pearle. Coasting along this shore from Barem inwardes to the farthest and outermost corner of Persia, or Sinus Persicus, lyeth the towne of Balso∣ra, which are 60. miles: this Towne lyeth vnder 30. degrées, and a little about it the two ryuers Tigris and Euphrates do méete and ioyne in one, and runne by Bassora into the aforesaide Sinus Persicus. Thereabout do•• yet appeare the decayed buildings, and auncient Ruines of old Babylon, and as ma∣ny learned men are of opinion, thereabout stoode the earthly Paradice. From the towne of Balsora the coast runneth againe North∣ward towards Ormus, which is vnder the Dominion of the Persian, this Sinus Persi∣cus is about 40. miles broad, not much more nor much lesse, and hath diuers Ilands, and in the mouth therof lyeth the rich Iland Or∣mus, where the Portingales haue a Forte, and dwell altogether in the Ile among the naturall borne countrimen, and haue a Cap∣taine and other officers euery thrée yeares, as they of Mossambique.

Chapter 6. Of the Iland and Towne of Ormus.

ORmus lyeth vpon the Iland Ge∣ru, in times past called Ogyris, and it is an Iland and a kingdom which the Portingales haue brought vnder their subiection, whereas yet their King hath his residence, that is to saye, without the towne where the Portingales inhabite. These people obserue Mahomets law, and are white like the Persians. And there they haue a common custome, that he which is King doth presently cause al his bre∣thren and his kinsmen of the Male kinde to haue their eyes put forth, which done they are all richly kept and maintained during their liues, for that there is a law in Ormus, that no blinde man may bee their King nor Gouernour ouer them. Therefore the King causeth them all to haue their eyes put out, so to be more secure in their gouernmentes, as also to auoide all strife and contention, that might arise, and to hold and maintaine their countrey in peace.

The Island is about thrée miles great, ve∣ry full of cliffes and rockes, and altogether vnfruitfull. It hath neyther gréene leafe nor hearbe in it, nor any swéete water, but onely rockes of salte stones, whereof the walles of their houses are made: it hath nothing of it selfe, but only what it fetcheth from the firme lande on both sides, as well out of Persia as

from Arabia, and from the Towne of Bas∣sora, but because of the situation, and plea∣santnes of the Iland there is al things there∣in to bee had in great abundance, and greate traffique for that in it is the staple for all In∣dia, Persia, Arabia and Turkie, and of all the places and Countries about the same, & commonly it is full of Persians, Armenians, Turkes and all nations, as also Venetians, which lie there to buy Spices and precious stones, that in great abundance are brought thether out of all parts of India, and from thence are sent ouer land to Venice, and al∣so carried throughout all Turkie, Armenia, Arabia, Persia and euery way. There are likewise brought thether all manner of mar∣chandises from those Countries that is from Persia: out of the Countrie named Coraco∣ne and D••a••, and other places, great store of rich Tapestrie & Couerlets, which are called Alcatiff••s: out of Turkie all manner of Chamlets: out of Arabia diuers sortes of Drugges for Po••icaries, as Sanguis draco∣nis, Manna, Mirre, Frankinsence & such like, diuers goodly horses, that are excellent for bréeding, all manner of most excellent O∣rientall Pearles out of Mascatte a Hauen lying betwéene the Cape of Roselgate and Moncadon, vppon the coast of Arabia, di∣uers sorts of Dates, and Marmelades, which from Ormus is carried into India, and all places are serued therewith: likewise the mo∣ney called Larynen, (which hath as it were two legges, stretching out like a péece of sil∣uer wide that is beaten flat, printed about with certain small Characters, which is coy∣ned in Persia at a place called Lary, being fine Siluer) is brought thether in great quan¦tities, wherby there is as great dealing with them, as with other marchandises, because of the greate gaine that is gotten by them and in India they goe very high.

Now to know the cause of so great traf∣fique, and concourse of people in this Ilande of Ormus, you must vnderstand that euery yeare twice there commeth a great compa∣nie of people ouer land which are called Caf∣files or Car••anes, which come from Alep∣po, out of the Countrie of Surie thrée daies iornie from Tripoli which lyeth vppon the coast of the Mediterranean Sea, this com∣panie of people, or Caffila obserue this order, that is, euery yeare twice in the months of Aprill and September. There is a Captaine and certain hundreths of ••annisaries, which conuaye the said Caffila vntill they come to the Towne of Bassora, from whence they trauaile by water vnto Ormus. The mar∣chants know the times when the Caruana or Caffila will come, so that against that time they make and prepare their marchan∣dises in a readinesse, and then are brought thether diuers Cammels, Dromedaries, Moyles and horses euerye man his troope, which are there likewise to bee solde, so that there are assembled at the least fiue or sixe thousand persons all together, and ryde all in order like a battell that marcheth in the fielde two and two vpon a Cammell, or else ware hanging on both sides of the Cammel, as you shal sée in the Picture that followeth. With a good garde of ••anisaries, because they are often times set vpon by the Arabi∣ans which are great théeues, and come to robbe them, for they must trauaile in the woods at the least fortie daies together, wher in euery thrée or foure dayes they finde wels or pits, from whēce they prouide themselues of water which they carrie with them in beastes skins tanned, whereof they make Flaskes and Botles.

The people nowe of late yeares haue left off their robbing and stealing in the hiph waies, but long before the birth of Christ, they vsed it, as the Prophet Iere∣mie doth witnes saying in his third Chap∣ter and second verse, Lift vp your eyes, and behold what fornicatiō you commit in euery place, you sit in the streetes, and stay for your companions like the Ara∣bian in the woodes &c. I remember that wee fell among many thousande of these people, which in great pouertie dwell within the woodes, and sandie downes, that are altogether barren, where they liue, in the heate of the Sunnes lying with their Cammels, getting their lyuing only by robbing and stealing, their meate and best breade are Cakes which they bake vnder Cammels dung dried in the Sunne, which the Sand maketh hotte, and Cam∣mels Milke and flesh, with such like vn∣profitable meate, to conclude they liue like miserable men, as in truth they are.

Likewise ther are certaine victualers that follow this companie, which carrie all kinde of things with thē▪ as Honie, Dates, Shéepe Goates, Hens, Egges &c. and all other sorts of victuals and prouision, so that for money they may haue what they will, euery night they lie still and haue their Tents, wherein they sléepe, kéeping good watch, in this man∣ner they trauaile to the Towne of Bassora, and passe through Babylon now called Ba∣gedet, and through other places. Being at Bassora, they stay their certaine daies, wher againe they assemble themselues, to returne

home, and trauaile in the like sorte backe a∣gaine vnto Aleppo, whereby all manner of marchandises, out of all places are brought thether in great aboundance, by great num∣bers of traueling Marchants, of al nations whatsoeuer, except Spaniards, Portingals, and the King of Spaines subiects, which are narrowly looked vnto, although diuers times many of them passe among the rest, vnder the names of French men, English men, or Venetians, which nations haue their factors and seruants continually resident in Alep∣po, as also in Tripoli, where their dayly traffique is from Venice, Marsellis and Lon∣don and in Tripoli they vnlade their wares, and there the shippes take in their lading, and from thence they send their marchandises by land to and from Aleppo, where they vse great traffique, and haue many priuiledges and freedomes graunted them by the great Turke.

And for that wee are nowe speaking of Turks, I must not forget to shew you how, and in what sort the great Turke hath eue∣ry day newes and letters from all his king∣domes & Countries that are so great, wild, wast, and spread so farre abroad one from the other. You must vnderstand, that through∣out the whole Countrie of Turkie, they vse Doues or Pigeons, which are brought vp & accustomed thereunto, hauing rings aboute their legges. These Doues or Pigions, are borne from Bassora, and Babylon, vnto A∣leppo and Constantinople, and so from thence backe againe, and when there is any great occasion of importance to bee aduerti∣sed or sent, they make the letter fast vnto the ring, that is about the Pigions féete, and so let them flie, whereby the letter with the Doue is brought vnto the place whither it should goe, and they flie sometimes a thou∣sand miles, which men would thinke impos∣sible, but yet it is most true, and affirmed by such as come from thence: I haue séene of the Doues in India, that a Venetian my good friend shewed me, which for the strangenesse thereof had brought of them with him into India.

But let vs now returne vnto our matter of the Ile of Ormus, which lyeth vnder 27. degrées, and in Sommer time is so vnreaso∣nable and intollerable hotte, that they are forced to lie and sléepe in wooden Cesterns made for the purpose full of water, and all naked both men and women, lying cleane vnder water sauing only their heads: al their houses are flat aboue, and in the toppes ther∣of they make holes to let the ayre come in, like those of Cayro, and they vse certaine in∣struments like Waggins with bellowes, to beare the people in, and together winde to coole them withall, which they call Cat••a∣uentos.

Cayrus hath very high houses, with broad peint-houses, to yeelde shadowe,* 1.11 therby to auoide the heate of the Sunne: in the middle of these houses are greate Pipes of ten cubites longe at the least, which stand Northward, to conuaye and spread the colde ayre into their houses, specially to coole the lowest romes.

In winter time it is as colde with them as it is in Portingale, the water that they drinke is brought from the firme land, which they kéepe in great pots, (as the Tinaios in Spaine) and in Cesternes, whereof they haue verie great ones within the fortresse, which water for a yeare, or a yeare and a halfe, against they shall neede, like those of Mossambique. They fetch water by the Iland of Barein, in the Sea, from vnder the salt water, with instruments foure or fiue fadome déepe, which is verie good and excel∣lent sweete water, as good as any fountaine water.

There is in Ormus a sickenesse or com∣mon Plague of Wormes, which growe in their legges, it is thought that they procéede of the water that they drink. These wormes are like vnto Lute strings, and about two or thrée fadomes longe, which they must plucke out and winde them▪ aboute a Straw or a Pin, euerie day some part ther∣of, as longe as they féele them creepe: and when they hold still, letting it rest in that sort till the next daye, they binde it fast and an∣noynt the hole, and the swelling from whence it commeth foorth, with fresh Butter, and so in ten or twelue dayes, they winde them out without any let, in the meane time they must sit still with their legges, for if it should breake, they should not without great paine get it out of their legge, as I haue séen some men doe.

Of these wormes Alsaharanius in his practise in the 11. Chapter writeth thus▪ In some places there grow certaine Wor¦mes betweene the skinne and the flesh,* 1.12 which sicknesse is named the Oxen paine, because the Oxen are manye times grie∣ued therewith, which stretch themselues in great length, & creepe vnder the skin, so long till that they pearce it, the hea∣ling thereof consisteth in purging the bo∣dy of corrup fleame, &c. Reade further.

In my master the Archbishops house we had one of his seruants borne in Ormus new¦ly come from thence which drewe thrée or

〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

The 8. Chapter. Of the towne, fortresse and Island of Diu, in times past called Alambater.

THe Towne and Ilande of Diu lyeth distant from the ryuer Indo 70. miles vnder 21. degrées, close to the firme land: in times past it belonged to y^e King of Cam∣baia, in whose land and coast it lyeth, where the Portingals by negligence of the Kinge, haue built a fortresse, & in processe of time haue brought the Towne and the whole I∣land vnder their subiection, and haue made it very strong, & in a manner inuincible, which fortresse hath béene twice besieged by souldi∣ers of Cambaia and their assistants, first in Anno 1539.* 1.13 and secondly in Anno 1546.* 1.14 and hath alwaies béene valiantly defended by the Portingals, as their Chronicles rehearse. This Towne hath a very great Hauen, and great traffique, although it hath verye little or nothing at all of it selfe, more then the si∣tuation of the place, for that it lyeth betwéen Sinde and Cambaia, which Countries are abundant in all kind of things, wherby Diu is alwaies ful of strange nations, as Turks, Persians, Arabians, Armenians, and other countrie people: and it is the best & the most profitable reuenue the King hath through∣out all India, for that the Banianen, Gusa∣ratten, Rumos and Persians, which traf∣fique in Cambaia, & from thence to Mec∣ca, or the red Sea, doe commonly discharge their wares, and take in their lading in Diu, by reason of the situation thereof, for that it lyeth in the entrance of Cambaia, and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia, and so brought backe againe to Diu.

The Towne of Diu is inhabited by Portingals, together with the natural borne Countrimen, like Ormus and al the townes & places holden by the Portingals in Indi∣a, yet they kéepe their fortresse strong vnto themselues. This Iland aboundeth, and is very fruitfull of all kind of victuals, as Oxen Kine, Hogges, Shéepe, Hennes, Butter, Milke, Onions, Garlicke, Pease, Beanes, and such like, whereof there is great plentie, and that very good, and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries, but that the Fuell is not so well drest: they haue likewise Chéeses, but they are very drie and sault, much Fish which they sault, and it is almost like vnto salt Ling, or Codde, and of other sortes they make hanged flesh which is very good, and will continue for a whole Vi∣age: of all these victuals, and necessarie pro∣uisions they haue so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them, especially Goa, and Cochin, for they haue neither Butter, Onyons, Garlicke, Pease, Oyle nor graine, as Beanes, Wheat, or any séede: they must all bee brought from other places thether, as in the orderly des∣cription of the coast as it lyeth, I will shew you, what wares, goods, marchandises, vic∣tuals, fruites and other things each lande, Prouince or Countrie yéeldeth and affor∣deth.

From Diu sayling along by the coast a∣bout fiftéene or sixtéene miles, beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cam∣baia, which is at the entrie, and all along the said water about 18. miles broade, and 40. miles long, and runneth in North-east and by North, and at the farther ende of the wa∣ter is the Towne of Cambaia, whereof the whole Countrie beareth the name, and lyeth vnder twentie thrée degrées, there the King or Solden holdeth his Court.

The 9. Chapter. Of the kingdome and land of Cambaia.

THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Countrie in all India, and from thence pro∣uision of necessaries is made for all places round about it: whereby there is a greate traffique in the Towne, as well of the in∣habitants, as other Indians and neighbors, as also of Portingals, Persians, Arabians, Armenians &c. The King obserueth the law of Mahomet, but most parte of the people that are dwellers and naturall borne Coun∣trimen, called Gusarates and Baneanem, obserue Pythagoras law, & are the subtilest and pollitiquest Marchauntes of all India, whose counterfets and shapes are placed in this booke by those of India, with a descrip∣tion of their liuing, ceremonies & customes, as in time and place shall be shewed. This lande of Cambaia aboundeth in all kinde of victuals, as Corne, Rice and such like grain, also of Butter and Oyle, wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them. There is made great store of Cotton Lin∣nen of diuers sorts, which are called Canne∣quins, Boffetas, Iorims, Chau••ares and Cotonias, which are like Canuas, thereof do make sayles and such like things, and many other sortes that are very good and cheape.

They make some therof so fine, that you can not perceyue the thréedes, so that for finenesse it surpasseth any Holland cloth, they make likewise many Carpets, called Alcatiffas, but they are neyther so fine nor so good as those that are brought to Ormus out of Per∣sia, and an other sort of course Carpets, that are called Banquays, which are much like the striped Couerlits that are made in Scot∣land, seruing to lay vpon chestes & cubbords: They make also faire couerlits, which they call Godoriins Colchas, which are very fair and pleasant to the eye, stitched with silke, and also of Cotton of all colours and stitch∣inges: pauilions of diuers sorts and colours; Persintos that are stringes or bands, where∣with the Indians bind and make fast their bedsheddes, thereon to lay their beds: all kind of bedsteds, stooles for Indian women, and o∣ther such like stuffes, costly wrought and co∣uered with stuffes of all colours: also fine playing tables, and Chessebordes of Iuory, and shields of Torteux shelles, wrought and inlaide very workemanlike, many fayre sig∣nets, ringes, and other curious worke of I∣uorie, and sea horse téeth, as also of Amber, whereof there is great quantitie: They haue likewise a kind of mountain Christall, wher∣of they make many signets, buttons, beades and diuers other deuises. They haue diuers sorts of precious stones, as Espinellē, Rubies Granadis, Iasnites, Amatistes, Chrysolites, Olhos de gato, which are Cattes eyes, or Agats, much Iasper stone, which is called bloud and milke stone, and other kindes of stones: also many kindes of Drognes, as Amfion, or Opium, Camfora, Bangue, and Sandale wood, whereof when time serueth, I will particularly discourse, in setting down the spices and fruites of India, Alluijn, Cane Sugar, and other merchandises, which I cannot remember, and it would be ouer long and tedious to rehearse them all: Annell or Indigo groweth onely in Cambaia, and is there prepared and made ready, and from thence carried throughout the whole world, whereof hereafter I will say more: but this shall suffice for the description of Cambaia, and now I will procéede.

At the ende of the countrey of Cambaia beginneth India & the lands of Decam, and Cuncam, the coast that is the inwarde part thereof on the Indian side stretcheth from Cambaia to the coast of India, where the said inward part hath the beginning, which coast stretcheth Westwardes, Southwest, and by South to the Islande lying on the coast or entry of the said place, called Insula das Vaquas, being vnder 20. degrées, vpon the which corner and countrey, on the firme land standeth the towne and fortresse of Da∣man which is inhabited by the Portingalles▪ and vnder their subiection, distant from the Towne of Diu East and by South fortie miles.

The 10. Chapter. Of the coast of India, and the hauens and places lying vpon the same.

THe coast of India hath the beginning at the en∣try or turning of the lande of Cambaia from the Islande called Das Va∣guas, as it is saide before, which is the right coast, that in all the East Countries is called India: but they haue o∣ther particular names, as Mosambique, Melinde, Ormus, Cambaia, Choraman∣del, Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, &c. as when time serueth shall be shewed, whereof a part hath already béene described. Now you must vnderstande that this coast of India begin∣neth at Daman, or the Island Das Vaguas, and stretcheth South and by East, to the Cape of Comoriin, where it endeth, and is in all 180. miles, vppon the which coast lie the towns and hauens hereafter following which the Portingals haue vnder their subiections, and strong fortes therein: first Daman from thence fiftéene miles vpwardes vnder 19. de∣grées and a halfe the towne of Basaiin, from Basaiin ten miles vpwardes vnder 19. de∣grées the Towne and fort of Chaul, from Chaul to Dabul are tenne miles, and lyeth vnder 18. degrées: from Dabul to the town and Island of Goa are 30. miles, which ly∣eth vnder 15. degrées and a halfe: all these Townes and fortes aforesaide are inhabited by the Portingalles, except Dabul which they had, and long since lost it againe: The coast from Goa to Daman, or the turning into Cambaia, is called by those of Goa the Northerne coast, and from Goa to the Cape de Comoriin, it is called the southern coast, but commonly the coast of Malabar.

Concerning the towne of Goa and the situation thereof, as also the description of Decam & Cuncam, as touching their kings and progenies we will in another place par∣ticularly declare, with many other memora∣ble thinges, as well of the Portingalles, as of the naturall countrimen. Wherefore for this time we will passe them ouer, and speak of the other principal towns and hauens, fol∣lowing along the coast.

You must vnderstand that all the townes

aforesaid, Daman, Basaiin and Chaul, haue good hauens, where great traffique is done throughout all India: all these townes and countries are very fruitfull of Ryce, Pease, and other graines, Butter, and oyle of In∣dian Nuttes: but oyle of Oliues is not to be found in all the East Indies, onely what is brought out of Portingall, and other such like prouisions is there very plentifull: they make also some Cotton linnen, but very lit∣tle. The towne of Chaul hath great traf∣fique to Ormus, Cambaia, to the redde sea, to Sinde Masquate, Bengala, &c. & hath many rich Marchants, and shippes: there is a place by Chaul, which is the old towne of the naturall borne countrymen, where di∣uers kindes of silkes are wouen, of all sortes and colours, as Grogeran, Sattin, Taffata, Sarscenet, and such like stuffes, in so great aboundance▪ that India and all other places bordering the same▪ are serued therewith: whereby the inhabitantes of Chaul haue a great commoditie, by bringing the raw silke out of China, spinning and weauing it there; and againe being wouen, to carrie and distri∣bute it throughout all India. There are like∣wise made many and excellent faire deskes, bedsteds, stooles for women, couered with stuffes of all colours, and such like marchan∣dises, whereby they haue great traffique: There is likewise great store of Ginger, as also all the coast along, but little estéemed there: This land called the North part, hath a very holesome and temperate ayre, and is thought to be y^e soundest & healthsomest part of all India, for the towne of Diu, and the coast of Malabar is very vnholesome. These Indians, as also those of Cambaia which are called Benianen, and Gusarrates, and those of the lande that lyeth inwardes from Decam, which dwell vpon the hill, called Ballagatte, which are named Decaniins, and Canaras, are altogether of yellowe co∣lour, and some of them somewhat whiter, others somewhat browner, but those that dwel on the sea coast, are different and much blacker, their statures▪ visages and limmes are altogether like men of Europa, and those of the coast of Malabar, which stretcheth and beginneth 12. miles from Goa South∣ward, and reacheth to the cape de Comori∣in, whose naturall borne people are called Malabaren, which are those that dwell vpon the sea coast, are as blacke as pitch, with ve∣rie blacke and smoth haire, yet of bodies, lims and visages, in all thinges proportioned like men of Europa: These are the best soldiers in all India, and the principall enemies that the Portingalles haue, and which trouble them continually.

But the better to know the situation of the countrey, you must vnderstande that all the coast seuered from India, is the low land lying 8. or 10. miles vpon the coast, which is that whereof we speake, and is called Cun∣cam, and then there is a high or hilly Coun∣trey, which reacheth almost vnto the skies, and stretcheth from the one ende vnto the o∣ther, beginning at Daman or Cambaia to the Cape de Comoriin, and the vttermost corner of India, and all that followeth again on the other coast called Ghoramandel. This high land on the top is very flatte and good to build vpon, called Ballagatte, and De∣can, and is inhabited and diuided among di∣uers Kings and gouernors. The inhabitants and natural borne countrimen, are common∣ly called Decaniins, and Canaras, as in the description of Goa and the territories thereof shalbe particularly shewed, with the shapes, fashions and counterfeites of their bodies, Churches, houses, trées, Plantes, and fruites, &c.

The 11. Chapter. Of the coast of India, that is from Goa to the cape de Comoriin, and the furthest corner of the lande, which is called the coast of Malabar.

THe coast of Malabar be∣ginneth from Cape de Ra∣mos, which lyeth frō Goa Southwardes ten myles, and endeth at the Cape de Comoriin, in time past cal∣led Corii, which is 100. and 7. or 8. miles, whereon lie the places hereafter following, which are inhabited by the Portingals, and kept with fortresses: first from the said Cape de Ramos to the fortresse of Onor are tenne miles, lying full vnder 14. degrées, and is inhabited by the Portingalles. There is great quantity of Pepper, for that they are able euery yeare to lade a shippe with 7. or 8. thousand Quintalles of Pepper, Portin∣gal waight, & it is the best and fullest berries in all Malabar or India. This land belon∣geth to a Quéene named Batycola, which is a towne not farre from thence inwardes wherin she kéepeth her Court: it is she that selleth the Pepper, and deliuereth it vnto the Marchantes Factors, that lie in Onor, but they must alwaies deliuer their money sixe monthes before they receyue their Pepper, otherwise they get it not: then she deliuereth the Pepper, which by one of the Factors is

receyued and laid vp within the fortresse, till the shippes of Portingall come thether to take in their lading of Pepper: There is likewise much Ryce. This fortresse is not much frequented, but onely in the time of la∣ding of their Pepper. which within fewe yeares hath béene vsed to be laden there, for before they vsed not to lade any in that place.

From Onor to the towne of Barselor are 15. miles, and lyeth vnder 13. degrées: it is also inhabited by Portingalles as Onor is: there is great store of Ryce & Pepper: from Barselo•• to Mangalor are 9. miles, and ly∣eth vnder twelue degrées, and a halfe, which also is a fortresse inhabited as the others are by Portingals, and hath great store of Pep∣per and Ryce.

From Mangalor to Cananor are 15. myles, which lyeth right vnder 11. degrées and a halfe. This is the best fortresse that the Portingalles haue in all Malabar, and there is much Pepper: The Malabars without the fortresse haue a village, with many houses therein, built after their man∣ner; wherein there is a market holden euery day, in the which all kindes of victuailes are to be had, which is wonderfull, altogether like the Hollanders markets. There you find Hennes, Egges, Butter, Hony, Indian Oyle, and Indian figges, that are brought from Cananor, which are very great, and without exception the best in all India: of the which sorts of victuailes, with other such like they haue great quantities: also very faire and long mastes for shippes, such as bet∣ter cannot be found in all Norway, and that in so great numbers, that they furnish all the countries rounde about them. It is a very gréene and pleasant lande to beholde, full of faire high trées, and fruitfull of all thinges, so is the whole coast from Malabar all along the shore. Among these Malabars the white Mores do inhabite that beléeue in Ma∣homet, and their greatest traffique is vnto the redde sea, although they may not doe it, neyther any other Indian without the Por∣tingalles pasport, otherwise the Portingals army (which yearly saileth along the coasts, to kéepe them cleare from sea rouers) for the safetie of their marchants, finding them or a∣ny other Indian or nation whatsoeuer, at sea without a pasport, woulde take them for a prize, as oftentimes it happeneth that they bring shippes from Cambaia, Malabar, or from the Ile of Sumatra, and other places that traffique to the redde sea. These Mores of Cananor kéepe friendshippe with the Por∣tingalles, because of the fortresse which hol∣deth them in subiection, yet couertly are their deadly enemies, and secretly contribute and pay great summes of money to the other Malabars, to the ende that they shoulde mischiefe and trouble the Portingalles, by all the meanes they can deuise, whose forme and images do follow after those of Goa and Malabar.

From Cananor to Calecut are 8. miles, which lyeth full vnder 11. degrées: This towne of Calecut hath in times past béene the most famous Towne in all Malabar or India, and it was the chiefe towne of Ma∣labar where the Samoriin, which is the Emperour, holdeth his Court, but because the Portingalles at their first comming and discouering of India, were oftentimes decey∣ued by him, they resorted to the King of Cochin, who as then was subiect to the Sa∣moriin, being of small power. But when the Portingals began to prosper in their en∣terprise, and to get possession in the countrey, and so became maisters of the sea, Calecut beganne to decay, and to lose both name and traffique, and nowe at this time it is one of the townes of least account in all Malabar and Cochin to the contrarie, their King be∣ing very rich, and richer then the Samoriin, so that now he careth noe for him, by means of the fauour and help he findeth at the hands of the Portingalles.

From Calecut to Cranganor are tenne myles, and lyeth vnder tenne degrées and a halfe: there the Portingalles haue a For∣tresse.

From Cranganor to Cochin are tenne miles, and lyeth not full vnder tenne degrées. The towne of Cochin is inhabited by Por∣tingals, and naturall borne Indians, as Ma∣labars and other Indians that are christe∣ned: it is almost as great as Goa, very po∣pulous, and well built with faire houses, Churches, and cloysters, and a fayre and most pleasant Riuer, with a good channell, and a hauen: a little beyonde the towne to∣wards the land runneth a small riuer or wa∣ter, where sometimes men may passe ouer dry footed: on the further side whereof lyeth a place called Cochin Dacyma, and it is aboue Cochin, which is in the iurisdiction of the Malabars, who as yet continue in their owne religion: there the King kéepeth his Court: It is very full and well built with houses after the Indian manner, and hath likewise a market euery day, where all kind of thinges are to be bought, as in Cananor, but in greater quantities. The land of Co∣chin is an Island, and it is in many places compassed about, and through the Isle with small Riuers.

Right ouer against Cochin Northwarde lyeth an other Island called Vaypiin, which

is likewise compassed about with water, like the fortresse of Cranganor, all these landes and Countries are low and flat land like the Countrie of Holland, but haue no ditches nor downes but onely the flat shore vpon the Sea side, and within the shore & the Strand of the ryuer, nor without any high ground or shelters, and so it still continueth. The Countrie is verye great and pleasant to be∣hold▪ full of woodes and trees, it hath also woods of Cinamon trées, which are called Canella de Ma••es, that is wilde Cinamō, which is not so good as the Cinamon of Sey∣lo••, for when the Cinamon of Seylo•• is worth 1••0. Parda••ē or Dollers that Ci∣namon is worth but 5▪ or 3••. Parda••wen, and is likewise forbidden ••o bee carried into Portingale, notwithstanding: There is eue∣ry yeare great quantitie thereof shipped, but it is entred in the Custome bookes for Cina∣mon of Seylon, whereby they pay the King his full Custome for the best, Cochin hath also much Pepper, and can euery yeare lade two ships full, other shippes lade along the coast, at the fortresse aforesaid, & vse to come vnto Cochin, after they haue discharged all their Portingal wares and Marchandises, at Goa, and thether also come the Factors and Marchants and lade their wares, as in my Voyage homewards I will declare. With∣out Cochin, among the Malabares, there dwelleth also diuers Moores that belieue in Mahomet, and many Iewes, that are very rich, and there liue fréely without being hin∣dred or impeached for their religion, as also the Mahometans, with their churches which they cal Mesquiten, the Bramanes likewise (which are the Spiritualitie of the Malaba∣res & Indians) haue their Idols and houses of Diuels, which they call Pagodes. These thrée nations doe seuerally holde & maintaine their lawes and ceremonies by them selues, and liue friendly and quietly together kéeping good pollicie and iustice, each nation béeing of the Kinges counsell, with his Naires which are his gentilmen and nobilitie: so that when any occasion of importaunce is offered, then al those thrée nations assemble themselues to∣gether, wherein the King putteth his trust: of the which King and his Naires, Ma∣labare▪ and Ba••amenes &c. with their ma∣ners, customes, aparrell, Idols, pagodes, and ceremonies, in an other place I will shewe you more at large, together with their pictu∣res & coūterfetes: and for this time I cease to speake thereof, & wil procéede in the descripti∣on of the coasts, which I haue already begū.

From Cochin to Coulon are 12. myles, and lyeth vnder 9 degrées: it is also a fortresse of the Portingals, where likewise euery yere they lade a ship with pepper: from Cou••on to the cape de Comori, are 20. myles: this cor∣ner lieth full vnder 7. degrées & a half, which is the end of the coast of Malabar & of India.

The 12. Chapter. The description of the kings, the diuision of the land and coast of Malabar, and their originall.

TO vnderstand the gouern∣ment and diuisions of the lād of Malabar, you must know that in tymes past, (but long sithence) the whole land of M••labar was ruled by one King, being then but one kingdome, where now are manie, and as the Malabares saye, the last king that ruled the whole coūtry alone, was named Sarama Pe∣rimal, in whose time the Arabian Mahome∣tanes much frequented the coūtrie of Mala∣bar, because of the great trafique of Spices, which as then were sent from thence to the red sea, and so conueyed into all places of the world. Those Arabians by their subtilties delt in such manner with the King, that they perswaded him and many of his coūtry to be∣leue in the lawe of Mahomet, as they did al∣most throughout whole India, and other ori∣entall coūtries and Ilands, which is one of the principalest occasions why they can hard∣ly be brought to beleue in Christ, but rather seeke by all meanes to ouerthrowe the Chri∣stians, and to fight against the Portingales in those countries, as in the Portingal Chro∣nicles and Histories of the first discouery and conquest of the Indies▪ is at large described. But returning to our matter, this King Sa∣rama was so déepely rooted in his new sect of Mahometes law, that he determined in him selfe to leaue his kingdome, and goe on pil∣grimage to Mecca, to see Mahomets graue and there to ende his lyfe in so holy an exer∣cise, thinking thereby to be saued, which in the end he brought to effect. And because he had neither childrē nor heyres to possesse his king∣dome, he deuided the same among his chiefest & best seruāts & friēds, giuing to one Cochin, to an other Cananor, to the third Chale, to the fourth Coulon &c. and so he delt with all the other places of his dominions, making e∣uery one of those places a kingdome: The town of Calicut he gaue to one of his best beloued seruāts together with the title of Sa∣moriin, which is as much to say as Em∣perour

and chief of al the rest, and comman∣ded that they should all acknowledge him as their Soueraigne; and they his vassalles, and at his commandement: whereby, euen vntill this time, the King of Calicut holdeth the name of Samoriin, with the commandement and authoritie ouer the other kings through∣out the whole countrie of Malabar, by such means as you haue heard before, which done the king wēt on pilgrimage to Mecca, wher he ended his dayes: and the Samoriin with the other kings, continued each man in his newe kingdome, whose successors vntill this day doe continue, and gouerne the said king∣domes, onely the Samoriin is somewhat im∣based, and the king of Cochin exalted, since the Portingals ariued in the Indies, as it is said before.

These Malabares are excellent good soldi∣ours, and goe naked, both men and women, onely their priuy members couered, and are the principallest enemies that the Portingals haue, and which doe them most hurt: and al∣though commonlie they haue peace with the Samoriin, and hold so many forts vpon the land, as you haue heard before, yet the Mala∣bares haue their hauens, as Chale, Calicut, Cunhale, Panane, and others, from whence with boates they mak roads into the sea, and doe great mischief, making many a poore mer∣chant. The Samoriin likewise, when the toy taketh him in the head, breaketh the peace, & that by the counsell of the Mahometanes, who in all things are enemies to the Christi∣ans, & séeke to do them mischief: and because of the Malabares inuasions, the Portingall fléet is forced euery yeare to put forth of Goa in the summer-time, to kéepe the coast, and to preserue the merchants that trauaill those coūtries from y^e Malabars, for that the most traffique in India, is in Foists like galleyes, wherein they traffique from the one place to the other, which is their daylie liuing & occu∣pations, as it shalbe shewed at large: and yet there are continuall pyracies committed on the sea, what order soeuer they take, wherby poore marchāts are taken prisoners, & robbed of all they haue. The land throughout is very fruitfull, gréene and pleasant to beholde, but hath a very noysome and pestiferous ayre for such as are not borne in the countrie, and yet pepper doth onely growe on this coast, al∣though some groweth by Mallacca in certāe parts of the land, but not so much, for from hence is it laden and conueyed throughout the whole world.

The 13. Chapter. Of the Ilands called Maldyua, otherwise Maldyua.

RIght ouer against the cape of Comoriin 60. miles into the sea westward, the Ilands cal∣led Maldyua doe begin, and from this cape on the North syde they lie vnder 7. degrées, & so reach south south east, till they come vnder 3. degrées on the south side, which is 140. myles. Some say there are 11000. Ilands, but it is not certainely knowne, yet it is most true, they are so many, that they can not be numbred. The Inhabitants are like the Malabares: some of these Ilands are inhabited, and some not inhabited, for they are very lowe ground, like the countrie of Cochin, Cranganor. &c. and some of them are so lowe, that they are commonlie couered with the sea: the Mala∣bares say, that those Ilandes in time past did ioyne fast vnto the firme land of Malabar, & were part of the same land, and that the Sea in processe of tyme hath eaten them away, & so separated them from the firme land. There is no merchandize to be had in them, but only coquen, which are Indian nuttes, and cayro, which are the shelles of the same nuts, & that is the Indian hemp, wherof they mak ropes, cables, and other such like commodities: those are there to be found in so great aboundance, that with them they serue the whole country of India, and al the oriental coast: of the wood of the same trées they make themselues boats after their manner, with all things to them belonging: of the leaues they make sayles, sowed together with strings made of the nut∣shelles, without any iron nayles, and so being laden with the nuttes and other parts of the said trées, they come and trafficke with those of the firme land, their victuals in the ship be∣ing the fruite of the same trée: so that to con∣clude, the boate with all her furnitures, their marchandises and their victuals is all of this palme trée, and that maintaineth all the inha∣bitants of the Ilands of Maldyua, and there∣with they trafficke throughout India: there are some of these nuttes in the said Iland that are more estéemed then all the nuttes in In∣dia, for that they are good against all poyson, which are verie faire and great, and blackish: I saw some that were presēted vnto the vice roy of India, as great as a vessell of 2. tūnes Indian measure, and cost aboue 300. Par∣dawen, which were to send vnto the King of Spaine▪ Of this trée and her fruites, together with the vsage thereof, I will discourse more

at large in the declaring of the Indian trées & fruites, meane time I will returne to the de∣scription of the coasts with their situations.

From the cape of Comoriin the coast be∣ginneth North east to turne inwards again, till you come to the Cape of Negapatan, which lyes vnder 11. degrées, and is 60. myles distant from the cape of Comoriin.

From the cape of Comoriin South east & by South about 40 miles into the sea, lieth the furthest corner of the great Iland of Sey∣lon, and so reacheth North and by east, vntill you come right ouer against the cape of Ne∣gapatan, being distant from the firme land & the same cape 10. miles, and betwéene the firme land and that Iland there lyeth some drie groundes or lytle Ilands, whereby it is manie times dangerous for the Shippes that sayle vnto Bengala and the coast of Cho••a∣mandel, which commonly passe through that way. The Iland of Seylon is in length 60. miles, and in breadth 40. miles, from the first and vttermost corner North & by east, about 18. miles vnder 7. degrées and an halfe, lyeth a fort belonging to the Portingals, called Co∣lumbo, which by méere force & great char∣ges is holden and maintained, for that they haue no other place or péece of ground, no not one foot, but that in all the Iland: it is but a small fort, yet very strong and well guarded: The soldiers that are therein, are commonly such as are banished for some offence by them cōmitted, or such as haue deserued death: and some dishonest women, for some euill fact, are put in there to beare them company. They fetch al their necessaries out of India, and are often times assailed by their enemies, the In∣habitants of the Iland, and often times be∣sieged, but alwaies valiantly defend them∣selues.

The 14. Chapter. Of the Iland of Seylon.

THe Iland of Seylon is said to be one of the best Ilands that in our time hath béene discouered, and the fruitful∣lest vnder the heauens, well built with houses, and inha∣bited with people, called Cingalas, and are al∣most of shape and manners like to those of Malabar, with long wyde eares, but not so blacke of colour: they goe naked, onely their members couered: they were wont to haue but one King, but hauing murdered their king, they deuided their countrie into manie kingdomes, and not long since, a simple bar∣ber murthered their chief king, & with great tyrannie brought the kingdome vnder his subiection, driuing the other kings out of the countrie, whereof one that was a Christian, fled into India, and dwelleth at Goa, where he is kept & maintained at the kings charge. This barber, as it is said, hath made him∣selfe king, and the whole Iland vnder his sub∣iection, his name was Raju, he liueth verie warily, and is verie subtill, a good soldier, but trusting no man: the Chingalans are not his good friends, & yet they liue in obediēce vnder him, more through force and feare, then for loue or good wil: for that he causeth them with great tyrannie to be executed, so that no man dareth stirre against him: he is likewise a deadly enemie to the Portingall, and about a yeare before I came from India, he had be∣sieged the fort of Columbo with a great nū∣ber of Elephants, and men, but by meanes of y^e Portingals that came thither out of India, he was constrayned to breake vp his siege before the fortresse.

The Iland is full of hils, and there is one hill so high that it is reported to be the highest hill in all India, and is called Picode Adam, The Indians hold for certane that Paradice was in that place, and that Adam was cre∣ated therein, saying that yet vntill this daye, there are some of his footsteps foūd vpon that hill, which are within the stones, as if they were ingrauen, and neuer goe out.

The Iland is full of all sorts of Indian fruites and of al kind of wild beasts, as harts, hindes, wild bores, hayres, coneys, and such like in great abundance, of all sorts of foules, as peacoks, hennes, doues and such like: and for oringes, lemons, and citrons, it hath not onely the best in al India, but better then any are found either in Spaine or Portingal, to conclude, it hath many and almost all things that are found in India through all the seue∣rall prouinces and places thereof: it hath al∣so manie Indian palme trees, or nut trees, which are called cocken: and certane credible persons doe affirme, which told it mée, that in the same Iland are nutmegges, Cloues, and Pepper trées, although there is no cer∣taintie thereof, for that as yet they haue not béene brought, or vttered to sell among the Christians, but the best Cinamon in all the east countries is there to be had, where it groweth in whole woodes, and from thence is dispersed into all places of the world. The Captaine that kéepeth the fort is forced by stealth in the night time to issue forth & fetch this Cinamon into his fort, whereof he ma∣keth his principal profite, for much more pro∣fite hath he not. This Iland hath likewise al kindes of precious stones, except Diamonds,

but Saphires, Rubies, Topas••es, Sp••nelen, ••ranaden, Rob••ssen. &c. the best in all the East: it hath likewise a fishing for Pearles, but yet they are not so good as those that are at Bareiin by Ormus: it hath likewise my∣nes of Gold, siluer, and other metals. The Kings of the Iland will not digge it forth, but kéepe it for a great state & honor, I thinke rather it is but Latte••, because no man ven∣tureth for it: it hath also yron, Flaxe, Brim∣stone, and such like ware, also many Iuorie banes, and diuers Elephantes, which are ac∣counted for the best in all India, and it is by daylie experience found to be true, that the E∣lephantes of all other places and coūtries be∣ing brought before them, they honour and re∣uerence those Elephantes: the natural borne people or Chingalas are very cunning work∣men in Gold, Siluer, Iuory, Yron, and all kindes of metal, that it is wonderful: they are much estéemed for the same through al India, and beare the name and prayse aboue all the rest of the Indians: they make the fairest bar∣rels for péeces that may be foūd in any place, which shine as bright as if they were Siluer. My maister the Archbishop had a crucifixe of Iuorie of an elle long, presented vnto him, by one of the inhabitants of the Ile, & made by him so cunningly & ••rkmanly wrought, that in the hayre, beard, and face, it séemed to be aliue, & in al other parts so neatly wrought and proportioned in limmes, that the like can not be done in all Europe: Whereupon my maister caused it to be put into a case, and sent vnto the king of Spaine, as a thing to be wō∣dered at, and worthy of so great a Lord, to be kept among his costliest Iewels. In such things they are very expert and wonderful, and maruelous nimble and expert in iugling, as well men as women, and trauell through∣out the countrie of India, to get money, ca∣rying hobbyhorses with thē, very strange to behold. And this shall suffice at this present for the description of the Ile of Seylon, & now I will procéede to shewe you of the coast of Choramandel, where wée left before, being at the cape of Negapatan.

The 15. Chapter. Of the coast of Choramandel and the king∣dome of Narsinga or Bisnagar.

THe coast of Choramandel be∣ginneth from the cape of Nega∣patan, and so stretcheth North & by East, vnto a place called Mu∣sulepatan, which is 90. miles, and lieth vnder 16. degrées and a half. Betwéene these two places, vpon the same coast, lyeth a place cal∣led S. Thomas, vnder 13. degrées & an halfe, and is 40. miles distant from Negapatan. This place and Negapatan are inhabited by the Portingales, and in al the other places a∣long the coast, they haue traffique and dea∣li••▪ The aforesaid place called S. Thomas was in time past a towne of great traffique, and as then called by the name of Meliapor, and belonged to the kingdome of Narsinga, whose king is now commonly called king of Bisnagar, which is the name of his chief Ci∣tie where he kéepeth his court. This Towne lieth within the land, and is nowe the chief•• cittie of Narsinga and of the coast of Chora∣mandel. The naturall countrimen, are for manners, customes & ceremonies, like those of Ballagate, decamin•• & Canaras, for they are al one people, but only separate by seueral places & kingdoms: and y^e better to vnderstand wherefore this place was named S. Thomas, the Indians say, that in the time, when the Apostles were sent & spread abroad to preach the Gospell of our sauiour Christ throughout the whole world, that S. Thomas the apostle came into that kingdome of Narsinga, after he had bene in diuers places of India teach∣ing & preaching the word of God vnto those Indians and vnbeleuing people, but litle pro∣fited therein, for so say the Christians that are come of those same Countriemen, which S. Thomas conuerted and baptised in the faith of Christ, whom the Portingals found there at such time as they entered into the country and yet find many of them obseruing the ce∣remonies of the Gréek Church in the Chal∣dean tong, that by no meanes will ioine with the Portingales in their ceremonies: but not long sithence at the time of my béeing in In∣dia, there was one of their Bishops, that by land trauelled to Rome, and there submitted himself to the Romish Church, yet obseru∣ing and holding their ancient ceremonies and customes, which by the Pope was still per∣mitted vnto them: and when my Lord the Archbishop held a prouinciall counsell within the citie of Goa, where his suffraganes were assembled, that is to say, y^e bishops of Cochin, Malacca, and China, to authorize the same, the aforesayd Bishop was likewise called thether, who as then was newlie come from Rome, being made an Archbishop, and was personally in the counsell, but would not in a∣ny sort consent vnto the altering or changing of anie points of his Religion, or ceremonies from the suffraganes & from his Christians, which were commonly called S. Thomas Christians. But returning to our matter, they say that when S. Thomas had long preached, and taught in the kingdome of Nar∣singa,

〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

From Musulepatan the coast runneth a∣gain Northeast and by East, to the kingdom of Bengalen, which is 120. miles, and it is the lande and kingdome of Orixa, which stretcheth along the same coast vnto the Ri∣uer of Ganges, the beginning of the kingdom of Bengalen. This coast of Narsinga, Bis∣nagar and Orixa, are by the Portingalles commonly called (as also the coast of Nega∣patan and Saint Thomas) Choramandel, vntil you come to Bengalen, where the Por∣tingalles haue great traffique, for that it is a very rich and plentiful Country of all things, as Ryce and all manner of fowles, and beasts in great abundance. It is also a holesome countrey and a good ayre for strange nati∣ons, for that the Portingals and other coun∣treymen can better brooke it then other places in India: From these coastes they vse great traffique vnto Bengala, Pegu, Sian, & Ma∣lacca, and also to India: there is excellent faire linnen of Cotton made in Negapatan, Saint Thomas, and Musulepatan, of all colours, and wouen with diuers sorts of loome workes and figures, verie fine and cunning∣ly wrought, which is much worne in India, and better estéemed then silke, for that it is higher prised then silke, because of the finenes & cūning workmāship: they are called Recha∣tas & Cheylas, wherof the Christians & Por∣tingals in India do commōly make bréeches. They likewise make clothes thereof for wo∣men to put about them from their nauelles downeward, bound about their bodies, which they weare within the house, very finely made, the best sort are named clothes of Sa∣rasso, some being mingled with thréedes of golde and siluer, and such like stuffe of a thou∣sand sortes, very beautifull to behold, where∣with they cloath themselues in very comely manner. In this coast growe the great and thicke réeds, which are vsed in India to make the Pallankins, wherein they carry the wo∣men, as in the Indian figures you shall sée, which are so thicke, that a man can hardly gripe them with both his handes, very faire to looke vpon, and very high, being of diuers colours, as blacke, redde, &c. Whereof in an other place I will say more.

The 16. Chapter. Of the Kingdome of Bengalen, and the riuer Ganges.

AT the ende of the King∣dome of Orixa and the ••ast of ••horamandel beginneth the Riuer Ganges in the kingdom of Bengalen: This is one of the most famous Riuers in all the world, and it is not knowne from whence it springeth. Some are of opini∣on that it commeth out of the earthly para∣dise because of an old speech of the Bengalers, which is, that in time past a certaine King of Bengalen was desirous to know frō whence the riuer Ganges hath her beginning, to the which ende hee caused certaine people to bee brought vp and nourished with nothing but rawe fish, and such like foode,* 1.15 thereby to make them the apter to accomplish his desire, which people (hauing made boats fitte for the purpose) he sent vp the riuer, who were cer∣tain monthes vpon the water, so long til they came where they felt a most pleasant and swéete sauour, and founde a very cleare and most temperate skie, with still and pleasant water, that it séemed vnto them to bee an earthly paradise, and being desirous to rowe further vpwardes they could not, so that they were compelled (séeing no remedie) to returne againe the same way that they came, and be∣ing returned, certified the King what they had séene. They that will not credit this are hard of beliefe, for my parte I leaue it to the readers iudgement.

This Riuer hath Crocodiles in it, like the riuer of Nilus in Aegipt, the mouth or en∣try thereof lyeth vnder 22. degrées, and the coast runneth East and by South; to the Kingdome of Aracan, which is about 80. miles: it is an vneuen coast full of Islandes, sholes, hookes, and créekes, for the lande of Bengalen lyeth inwards of the gulf, which is called Bengala, for that frō Aracan, the coast beginneth againe to runne South and East outwardes towardes Malacca, and to the vttermost hooke which is called Singapura: But returning to Bengala and the Riuer Ganges, you must vnderstand that this riuer is holden and accounted of all the Indians to be a holy and a blessed water,* 1.16 and they do cer∣tainely belieue, that such as wash and bath themselues therein (bee they neuer so great sinners) all their sinnes are cleane forgiuen them, and that from thenceforth they are so cleane and pure from sinne, as if they were newe borne againe, and also that hee which washeth not himself therein cannot be saued, for the which cause there is a most great and incredible resorte vnto the same, from all the partes of India & the East countries, in great troupes, where they vse diuers strange cere∣monies, and superstitions, most horrible to heare, for they doe most stedfastly beléeue that they shall thereby merit eternall life.

From th•• Riuer Eastward 50. miles ly∣eth the towne of Chatigan, which is the chief towne of Bengala: The naturall borne peo∣ple of Bengala are in a manner like those of

Seylon, but somewhat whiter then y^e Chin∣galas: they are a most subtill and wicked peo∣ple,* 1.17 and are estéemed the worst slaues of all India, for that they are all théeues, and the women whores, although this fault is com∣mon throughout all India, no place excepted. They haue a custome that they neuer dresse or séeth meat twice in one pot, but haue euery time a new pot.* 1.18 Whensoeuer they are found in adulterie, they haue their noses cut off, and from that time forwarde they must leaue ech others company, which is most narrowly loo∣ked vnto by their law. The countrey is most plentiful of necessary victuails specially Rice, for that there is more of it in that countrey then in al the cast countries, for they do year∣ly lade diuers shippes therewith, which come thether from all places, and there is neuer a∣ny want thereof▪ and all other things in like sort, and so good cheape that it were incredi∣ble to declare; for that an O••e or a Cowe is there to be bought for one Lari••n, which is as much as halfe a Gilderne, Shéepe, Hens, and other things after the like rate, a Candit of Ryce,* 1.19 which is as much, little more or lesse as fourteene bushelles of Flemmish measure, is sold there for halfe a Gilderne, and for halfe a Doller: Sugar and other ware accor∣dingly, whereby you may wel conceiue what plentie they haue. The Portingalles deale & traffique thether, and some places are inha∣bited by them, as the hauens which they call Porto grande, and Porto pequeno, that is, the great hauen and the little hauen, but there they haue no Fortes, nor any gouernement, nor policie as in India they haue, but liue in a manner like wild men, and vntamed horses, for that euery man doth there what hee will, and euery man is Lord and maister, neyther estéeme they any thing of iustice, whether there be any or none, and in this manner doe certayne Portingalles dwell among them, some here, some there scattered abroade, and are for the most part such as dare not stay in India for some wickednesse by them commit∣ted: notwithstanding there is great trafficke vsed in those partes by diuers ships and mar∣chants, which all y^e year diuers times both go come to and from all the Orientall parts.

Besides their Ryce, much Cotton linnen is made there which is very fine, and much estéemed in India, and not only spread abroad and carryed into India and al the East parts, but also into Portingal, and other places: this linnen is of diuers sorts, and is called Saram∣puras, Cassas, Comsas, Beatillias, Sato∣passas, and a thousande such like names: They haue likewise other linnen excellently wrought of a hearbe, which they spinne like yearne: this yearne is to be s••ene at the house of Paludanus: it is yealowish, and is called the hearbe of Bengalen, wherewith they do most cunningly stitch their couerlits, pauilions, pillowes, carpets, and mantles, therein to christen children, as women in childbed with vs vse to doe, and make them with flowers and branches, and personages, that it is wonderfull to sée, and so finely done with cunning workemanshippe, that it can∣not be mended throughout Europe: likewise they make whole péeces or webbes of this hearbe, sometimes mixed and wouen with silke, although those of the hearbe it selfe are dearer and more estéemed, and is much fayrer thē the silke. These webs are named Sarrijn, and it is much vsed and worne in India, as well for mens bréeches, as dublets, and it may be washed like linnen, and being washt it sheweth and continueth as faire as if it were new.

From Bengala commeth much Algallia, or Ciuet, but by the subtiltie and villany of the Bengalians it is falsifyed, & mixed with filth, as salt, oyle, and such like stuffe, where∣by it is not much estéemed. Also in Bengala are found great numbers of the beasts, which in Latine are called Rhinocerotes, and of the Portingalles Abadas, whose horne, téeth, flesh, blood, clawes, and whatsoeuer he hath, both without and within his bodie, is good a∣gainst poyson, and is much accounted of throughout all India, as in an other place shall be shewed more at large. There grow∣eth likewise marble coloured Réedes, where∣of you may sée many sortes in the custodie of Paludanus, which the Portingalles call Ca∣nas de Bengala, that is, Réedes of Bengala: within they are full of pith, and are about the thicknesse of Spanish réedes, but some∣what thinner, and when they are gréene they bowe and bend like Willow twigges: they are outwardly of diuers colours and speckled as if they were painted. They vse them in Portingall for olde women to beare in their handes when they goe abroad or vppon the stones. There is another sorte of the same réeds which they call Rota: these are thinne like twigges of Willow for baskets, whereof Paludanus can shewe you great numbers, with the which in India they make many faire baskets, and a thousande other curious deuises, Sugar, Butter, and such like ware they haue in great quantitie as I said before: but this shall suffice for Bengala, whereof we leaue to speake, and returne to the description of the coast as it lyeth along the shore.

The 17. Chapter. Of the coasts and lands of Aracan, Pe∣gu and Sian, to the Cape of Singapura, & the towne and fortresse of Malacca.

BEyond the kingdome of Bengala, beginneth the kingdomes of Aracan & Pegu, which coast stretch∣eth from Bengala south and by East to the town and hauen of Martauan, in the land of Pegu, and is 70. miles: Mar∣tauan lyeth vnder 16. degrées, from whence beginneth the kingdome or land of Sian: these kingdomes of Aracan and Pegu are very rich & fruitfull of all things, besides Gold and precious stones, as Rubies, Espinels, Saf∣fires, Iacinthes, Emeraldes, Granates, and such like, as it is well knowne by the great numbers that are dayly brought out of those countries into all places. Likewise they make harde ware, which is carried throughout the world: There are greater number of Ele∣phantes in those countries, then in any other place of India, or the Orientall countries; & the Portingalles that traffique there, affirme that the king of Pegu hath a white Elephant which hee prayeth vnto, and holdeth it to bée holy. The Peguans haue a custome, that when any stranger commeth into their land to deale and traffique with them,* 1.20 of what na∣tion soeuer he bee: they aske him how long he meaneth to stay there, and hauing tolde them, they bring him many maides, that of them he may take his choice, and make con∣tract and agrée with the parentes of the maid that liketh him best, for the vse of her during his continuance there: which done he bring∣eth her to his lodging, and she scrueth him a∣bout all his affaires, both by day & by night, like his slaue or his wife, but hee must take heede that in the meane time hee keepeth not company with other women, for thereby hee may incurre great daunger, and stand in pe∣rill of his life. When the time of his residence is ended, he payeth the friendes or parents of the maid as much as he agreed for with thē, which done he departeth quietly away, and the maid returneth with credite home againe vnto her friendes, and is as well estéemed of as euer she was before: and if after that the same maide chance to marrie, were it with the principallest of the Countrey, and that the aforesaid stranger shold come to traffique in the same place againe, hee may againe de∣mand his woman, and he shall haue her with∣out resistance of her husband, or any shame vnto him, and she remaineth by the stranger as long as he abideth there, and he trauelling from thence, she goeth home againe vnto her husband, which among them is holden for a most sure and inuiolable law. Likewise when any gentleman or noble man will marrie with a maide, hee goeth to séeke one of his friendes, or a straunger, and intreateth him to lie with his bride the first night of their ma∣riage, and to take her maydenhead from her, which he esteemeth as a great pleasure & ho∣nour done vnto him, that another man wold take vpon him to ease him of so much payne: This custome is not onely vsed among the Gentlemen and chiefe nobilitie of the lande, but by the King himselfe. Also diuers of the Peguans weare a bell vpon their yarde, and some two, as bigge as an Acorne, which is made fast betweene the flesh and the skinne. Of the like Belles Paludanus can shew you one, which I brought out of India, and gaue it him; which bels haue a very sweet sounde: This custome of wearing Belles was ordai∣ned by them, because the Peguans in time past were great Sodomites, and vsing this custome of belles, it would be a meane to let them from the same. The women go altoge∣ther naked, onely with a cloth before their priuie members, which (as they go) openeth & vncouereth, shewing all they haue, which is by them ordayned, to the ende that by such meanes it should tempt men to lust after wo∣men, and to auoid that most abhominable & accursed sinne of Sodomie. There are like∣wise some among them that doe sowe vp the priuie member of their female children as soone as they are borne, leauing them but a little hole to auoid their water; and when she marrieth the husband cutteth it open, and maketh it as great or as little as hee will, which they with a certaine oyntment or salue can quickly heale. I saw one of those women in Goa whom the Surgeon of my Mayster the Archbishops house did cut open: men would iudge all these thinges to be fables, yet they are most true, for I doe not onely knowe it by the dayly trafficking of the Portingalles out of India thether, but also by the Pegu∣ans themselues, whereof many dwell in In∣dia, some of them being Christians, which tell it and confesse it for a truth, as also the neerenesse of place and neighbourhood ma∣keth it sufficiently knowne. The people of Aracan, Pegu, and Sian are in forme, manner, and visage, much like those of China, onely one difference they haue, which is, that they are somewhat whiter then the Bengalon, and somewhat brow∣ner then the men of China: The pictures 〈2 pages missing〉〈2 pages missing〉

songs after their manner whereby they are wondred at, which maketh them proude, and hee that dwelleth in India, and can not speake the Malayans speach, wil hardly with vs learne the French tongue, their forme and figures are heere set downe, together with those of the Ilands of Iaua, whereof hereaf∣ter we will speake more.

The 19. Chapter. Of the Iland of Sumatra, in times past called Taprobana.

[illustration] map of Sumatra

SVMATRA INSVLA

RIght ouer against Malacca, Southeast about 20. miles from the firme land by Malacca, wher the straight is at the narrowest, lieth the ••amous Ilande of Taprobana, now called Sumatra, by some Historiogra∣phers named Chersone••o Aurea, others af∣firme it to be Ophir, from whence Salomon had his Golde, as the Scripture rehearseth, and say that in times past it was firme land, and ioyned vnto the Countrie of Malacca. The Iland beginneth from the first pointe which lyeth right against the Gulfe of Ben∣gala vnder fiue degrees, on the North side, and stretcheth also before Malacca, South Southeast, vntill it passeth by the Iland cal∣led Iaua Maior, where it endeth vnder 6. de∣grées on the South side, and is in length 170 miles, and in breadth 60. miles. The Por∣tingals dwell not therein in any place, but deale and trafique in some places thereof, yet very few, for that the inhabitants themselues doe bring many of their commodities vnto Malacca.

The Iland hath many Kings, the princi∣pallest is the King of D. chem, which lyeth vpon a point of the land, vnder 4. degrees and a halfe on the North side. This Dachem is very mightie and a great enemie to the Por∣tingals, he hath often besieged Malacca, and done it great mischiefe, as it happened in the time of my biding in India, by stopping the passage of all victuals and other Marchandise comming to Malacca, as also by kéeping the passage of the straight betwéene Malacca and Sumatra, so that the shippes of Chi∣na, Iapen, and the Ilande of Molucco, were forced to sayle about, whereby they passed much danger, to the great discom∣moditie and hindrance of trauelling Mar∣chants, and they of Malacca and India, had many Gallies in the straights of Malacca, which some accursed Christians that haue no residence, had taught them to make, where∣by they did great mischiefe▪ and yet dayly doe, but by Gods helpe and the Portingals ayde out of India, all places were freed, and redu∣ced into their pristinate estate, as in another place we shall declare. It was long sithence concluded & determined by the King of Por∣tingale and his Viceroye, that the Ile of Su∣matra should bee conquered, and at this pre∣sent there are certaine Captaines, that to the same end haue the Kings pay, with the title

[illustration]

Malachae incolae sermone et moribus quam reliqui Indi cultioribus et magis comes.

In woonders van Mallacka welcke alle andere Indianen in taele courtosije en amoreushcÿt te boven gaen.

[illustration]

Insulanus e Iava gens durae cervicis. Een cÿlander wt ••ava welcks volck is hart: neckich en opstinaet.

of Generals and chiefe Captaines, or Ade∣lantado of this conquest, but as yet there is nothing done therein, although they doe still talke thereof but doe it not.

The Iland is very rich of mynes of Gold, Siluer, Brasse, (whereof they make greate Ordinance) precious stones, and other met∣tall: of all kinde of Spices, sweete woode, rootes, and other medicinable Herbes and Drugges: it hath a hill of Brimstone that burneth continually, and they saye, there is a fountaine which runneth pure & simple Bal∣same, it hath likewise great store of Silke. At the last besieging and troubles of Malacca, the Kinge of Acheijn sent a péece of Ordi∣nance, such as for greatnes length and work∣manship, the like is hardly to bee found in all Christendome, which hee gaue in marriage with his daughter to the King of Ior, a town lying by Malacca, vpon the coast of Sian, but this péece with his daughter were taken vp∣on the way by the Portingals, and brought into Malacca, which péece was after laden in the Ship that sayleth euery yeare from Ma∣lacca to Portingale, and sent vnto the King for a present, being so heauie that they were forced to lay it in the Balast of the ship. The same péece lyeth at this present in the Ile of Tarcera, because the said shippe stayed there, being in our companie as I returned out of India, also the Towne of Ior vpon the same occasion was by the Portingals besieged, and at the last wonne and by them rased to the ground, and for euer made wast, wherin they found about 150. Brasse péeces smal & great, some of them beeing no greater then a Mus∣ket, and some greater, and so of all sorts, ve∣rie cunningly wrought with Flowers and personages, which I haue purposely set down to let you know that they haue other kindes of Mettals, and know howe to handle them.

But returning to our matter, There are some places in this Iland where the Por∣tingales doe traffique, which are those that vse to traffique to Malacca, as a Towne cal∣led Pedir, which lyeth 20. miles from Ach∣ejin, vppon the coast right ouer against Ma∣lacca, from whence commeth much Pepper and Golde, & from an other place called Cam∣par, which lyeth almost vnder the Equinocti∣all line, vppon the corner on the South side, on the same side on the West coast of the I∣land lyeth a place called Manancabo, where they make Poinyards, which in India are called Cryses, which are very well accounted and estéemed of, and is thought the best wea∣pon in all the Orient, whereof those of Iaua & Malacca do make gret prouision for thēselus.

The 20. Chapter. Of the Iland of Iaua Maior, with their wares, Marchandises, and trades, waights, myntes, and prices thereof with other particularities.

[illustration] map of Java

IAVA MAIOR

SOuth Southeast right ouer against the last point or corner of the Ile of Sumatra, on the south side of the E∣quinoctiall line lyeth the Iland cal∣led Iaua Maior, or great Iaua, where there is a straight or narrow passage betweene Su∣matra and Iaua, called the straight of Sunda, of a place so called, lying not far from thence

within the Ile of Iaua: this Iland beginneth vnder •• degrées on the south side, and runneth east and by south 150 miles long, but touch∣ing the breadth, it is not found, because as yet it is not discouered, nor by the Inhabitants themselues well knowne. Some thinke it to be firme land, and parcell of the countrie cal∣led Terra incognita, which being so, shoulde reach from that place to the Cape de Bona sperāce, but as yet it is not certainly known, & therefore it is accoūted for an Iland: the in∣habitants say that within the land there is a Riuer, wherin if any wood doth fal, it turneth into stone. Through this straight or narrowe passage Thomas Candish an Inglish cap∣taine passed with his Ship, as he came out of the south parts, from Noua Spaigne. This Iland aboundeth with Rice, and all manner of victuals, as oxen, kyne, hogges, shéepe and hennes, &c. also Onyons, Garlicke, Indian nuttes and with al kind of Spices, as cloues, Nutmegges, and mace, which they carry vn∣to Malacca. The principall hauen in the I∣land is Sunda Calapa, whereof the straight beareth the name: in this place of Sūda there is much Pepper, and it is better then that of India or Malabar, wherof there is so great quantitie, that they could lade yearlie from thence 4 or 5 thousand kintales Portingale waight: it hath likewise much frankinsence, Beniom of Bonien called Folie, Camphora, as also Diamantes, to which place mē might very well traffique, without any impeach∣ment for that the Portingales come not the∣ther, because great numbers of Iaua come themselues vnto Malacca to sell their wares.

And although it be besyde the matter, yet doe I not esteeme it vnnecessary in briefe to shewe, in what sort they vse to buy, sell, and deall with ware, money and waight seing we are now in hand with the said Iland of Iaua. You must vnderstand that in Sunda there is no other kind of money then certaine copper mynt called Caixa, of the bignes of a Hollā∣des doite, but not half so thicke, in the middle whereof is a hole to hang it on a string, for that commonlie they put two hundreth or a thowsand vpon one string, wherewith they knowe how to make their accounts, which is as followeth▪ 200 Caixas is a Sata, and •• Satas are 1000 Caixas, which is as much as a Crusado Portingale money, or 3 Key∣sars guilders, Netherlandish money, Pepper of Sunda is solde by the sacke, and each sacke wayeth 45 Catten waight of China: euerie Catte is as much as 20 Portingale ounces, and euerie sacke is worth, as it is solde there, 5000 Caixas, and when it is at the highest, 6 or 7 thowsand Caixas, Mace, Cloues, nut∣megges, white and bla••k Beniamin, & Cam∣phora, are solde by the Bhar, each Bhar of Sunda weigheth 330 Catten of China. Mace that is good is commonlie worthe 100 or 120 thowsand Caixas, and good Cloues after the rate, but bad or foule Cloues of Ba∣ston are worth 70 or 80 thowsand Caixas the Bhar. Nutmegges are commonly worth 20 or 25 thowsand Caixas the Bhar: white and black Benioin is worthe 150 and 180 thowsand Caixas & 200 thousand the Bhar. The wares that are there by them desired in barter for their spices, are as hereafter follow¦eth, diuers and different sorts and colours of cotton lynnen, which come out of Cambaia, Choramandel and Bengala, as Sarasles de G••ba••es, and painted Tapen from S. Tho∣mas, of fyue elles the péece: they are clothes so called out of Bengala, white Cotton lyn∣nen, viz Sarampuras, Cassas, Sateposas, & blacke Satopasen, and some browne vnblea∣ched lynnen: out of Cambaia black Canne∣quiins red Turiaes, which are all clothes of cotton lynnen red Beyramen great and litle▪ which is verie like vnto Cambricke: and I am perswaded, if Clothe of Holland were there to be soulde, it would be more estéemed then Cotton lynnen out of India. These Ia∣uens are of a verie fretfull and obstinate Na∣ture, of colour much like the Malayers, brown, and not much vnlike the men of Bra∣silla, strong and well set, big limmed, flatte faces, broad thicke chéekes, great eyebrowes, smal eyes, little beard, not past 3 or 4 hayres vpon the vpper lippe & the chinne: the hayre on their heades very thyn and short, yet as blacke as pitche whose picture is to be séen by the picture of the M••layen of Malacca, because they dwell & trafficke much together.

Returning againe vnto the coast, East & by south about 25 miles beyond Iaua Maior, beginneth the Ilād of Iaua Minor or litle Ia∣ua, and somewhat further the Iland T••or, (wher sanders groweth in great abundance) and a thousand other Ilands bordering all a∣bout, which I can not particularly set down, yet are they all inhabited, and full of people, and are like the Iauer.

From Malacca they trauell to the Ilan∣des of Molucca, Banda & Amboyna, where the Portingales haue both sorts & captaines and trafficke with them: their way is from Malacca south east and by south, aboue 100 miles, betwéene many Ilands and th••••ugh many shallowes, so that they must anker e∣uerie night, to auoyd danger of sandes, which continueth almost all the waye to Mol••cca, and hauing in that sort passed those hundreth miles, they set their course eastward, and east and by north, 250 miles, to the Iland called Banda, which lyeth vnder 5 degrées on the

south side. In this Iland the Portingales doe trafficke, for in it are the best Nutmegges & Flowers. There likewise they doe preserue nutmegges, and make oyle thereof, which is brought to Malacca, and from thence into all other places: the trafficke there consisteth most in bartering, as it doth in Sūda & Iaua, but they are not to be trusted, you must kéep good watch, and goe not on land, but stay a∣bord the shippe, whether the Ilanders bring their marchandises, and deale with men as I said before, for it happeneth diuers times that they deceaue the Portingales, which trust them ouer much, for that one of my acquain∣tance and my friend being there, for captaine in a shippe, the shippe being cast away vpon that coast, was with all his men taken & put in prison, where for the space of two yeares he indured a most miserable life, and in the end was ransomed. All these voyages to Banda, Moluca, & those Ilands, and also any other way whatsoeuer in India, may no man make, without licence and speciall fauour of the King of Portingall, and their offices are giuen them in recompence of their seruice in the Indies, as also all other offices, as in an other place shall be declared.

About 20 miles beyond Banda North west, lieth the Iland called Amboyna, where the Portingales haue a small fort: this Iland hath not much spice, but the shippes that sayle from Malacca to Maluco, doe stay there, and take in fresh water. From this Iland Northwarde 70 miles, lyeth the Iland Ty∣dor, vnder one degrée ••th, and i•• the first Iland of the Moluca•• ••xe miles northward lyeth Malaco, & not farre thence Tarnate, and the Ilands of Cloues.

The 21. Chapter. Of the Iland of Maluc••.

THe Ilandes of Maluco are fiue, viz. Maluco, Tarnate, Tydor, Gelou∣lo, and an other where the Portingales haue 2 forts, that is in Tarnate and Tydor, which long since were discouered and wonne, where they trafficke from Malacca & out of India. The Spaniards haue sought diuers meanes to haue traffique there, and came from thence out of Noua Spaigne, in∣to the Iland called Tarnate, where in a storme they lost their shippe, and so could not get from thence againe, whereby they were by the Portingales most of them slayne, and the rest taken and sent prisoners into Por∣tingale, whereupon the King of Spaine and Portingale had a long quarrell and contenti∣on, touching the diuision of their Conquests, and discouery of the seas, which by the Popes meanes at the last was ended, in such sort▪ that at this present onely the Portingale tra∣fickes to those Ilands. These Ilands haue no other spice then cloues, but in so great abun∣dance, that as it appeareth, by them the whole world is filled therewith. In this Iland are found ••ie hilles, they are very dry & burnt land, they haue nothing els but victuals of flesh and fish, but for Rice, Corne, Onyons, Garlicke, and such like, and all other necessa∣ries, some are brought from Portingale, and some from other places thereabout, which they take and barter for cloues. The bread which they haue there of their owne baking is of wood or rootes like the men of Brasillia, and their cloathes are of wouen strawe or herbes, faire to the eye: in these Ilands on∣lie is found the bird, which the Portingales call passaros de Sol, that is Fowle of the Sunne, the Italians call it Manu codia∣tas, & the Latinists, Paradiseas, & by vs called Paradice birdes, for y^e beauty of their feathers which passe al other birds: these birds are ne∣uer séene aliue, but being dead they are found vpon the Iland: they flie, as it is said, alwaies into the Sunne, and kéepe themselues conti∣nually in the ayre, without lighting on the earth, for they haue neither féet nor wings, but onely head and body, and the most part tayle, as appeareth by the birdes that are brought from thence into India, and some from thence hether but not many, for they are costlie. I brought two of them with me, for Doctor Paludanus, which were male and female, which I gaue vnto him, for his cham∣ber. These Ilands lie among diuers other Ilands, and because there is no speciall notice of them, by reason of the small conuersation with them: I let them passe, and turne again vnto the coast of Malacca, which I left at the Cape of Singapura, and so will shewe the Coast along.

The 22. Chapter. From the Cape Singapura to the towne of Sian, and the coast of Cambaia, and Cauchinchina, and the Iles of Borneo, Lusons, Manillios or Philippinas.

FRom the Cape of Singapura to the hooke named Sinosura eastward, are 18 miles, 6 or 7 miles from thence lyeth a cliffe in y^e sea called Pedra bi∣anque, or white Rock, where the shippes that come and goe to and from China, doe oftentymes passe in great danger

and some are left vpon it, whereby the Py∣lots when they come thether are in great feare, for that other way then this they haue not.

From this hook Sinosura East & by South 40. miles beginneth the first corner of the Island Borneo, vnder one degrée in y^e North, and stretcheth 120. myles North east till you be vnder 7. degrées, the breadth as yet is not knowne nor discouered. This Isle is full of trées from whence Camfora is taken, and is the best in all the East countries. From Sinosura the coast reacheth North 30. miles to the towne of Pan, which lyeth vnder thrée degrées and a halfe: ten miles further by the same c••urse the coast runneth againe North Northwest for 50. miles, where the towne of Patane lyeth vnder 7. degrees and a halfe: These two towns Pan and Patane are kingdomes, but contributarie to Sian: From these places comes the wood called Pa∣la Dagula, and the costly swéet woode called Calamba, which being good, is waid against Siluer and Gold: they also haue Camphora, but not so good as that of the Island Borneo. There is founde some gold, and the stone cal∣led Bezars stone, which is very costly and proued to be good against poyson. There are likewise some Diamants, and also Nutmegs and flowers, and the wood Sapon, whereof also much is brought from Sian, it is like Brasill to die withall.

From Patane 120. myles North, the coast runneth backe againe vnto Sian, which lyeth vnder 14. degrées and a halfe from Sian, from the turning in South west 15. myles: The coast runneth again south east 70. miles to the towne of Cambaia: this towne lyeth vnder 10. degrées. From thence the coast runneth againe Northeast 60. miles, and 60. miles Northwest: frō whence it runneth West North west to the furthest parte in∣warde of the créeke of Cuchinchina: This coast of Cambaia is also called the coast of Chāpaa, this land hath much of y^e swéet wood Calamba: Through this kingdome runneth the riuer Mecom into the sea, which the In∣dians name Captaine of all the Riuers, for it hath so much water in the Summer, that it couereth and watereth all the countrey, as the riuer Nilus doth the countrey of Aegypt. The people of Cambaia beléeue that all crea∣tures both men and beastes of what sort soe∣uer they be, do here receyue reward for their worke whether it be good or bad. Vpwards in the land behind Cambaia and Sian are ma∣ny seuerall nations, as Laos, which are a great and a mightie people, others named Auas and Bramas, which dwel by the hilles: others that dwell vpon the hils called Gueos, which liue like wild men, and eat mans flesh, and marke all their bodies with hote iron, which they estéeme a fréedome: These coun∣treymen are such as are knowne, besides di∣uers others that are vnknowne.

From the coast of Cambaia or Champaa East or to seaward about 100. myles little more or lesse lie y^e Islands called the Lussons or Lussones, which were first discouered by the Spaniardes out of newe Spaigne, in an▪ 1564. and were called also las Manillas or Philippinas, because the principallest Hauen and Towne is called Manillia, and of others Lusson, whereof also they are named the L••s∣sons▪ and the Spaniardes gaue them the name of the King of Spaine, calling them y^e Philippinas. This towne of Lusson or Ma∣nillia lyeth vnder 14 degrées, by this towne and Iland of Lusson lie a great number of Ilands, which are all called the Manillians, Lussons or Philippinas, and are all at the commandement of the Spaniardes, whose Gouernour or Captaine lyeth in the towne of Manillia or Lusson, who was sent thether out of Noua Spaigne in the behalfe of the king of Spaine, and also a Bishop, as head o∣uer all the rest.

All these Ilands haue in time past béene vnder the crown of China, and vpon some oc∣casion left it, whereby there was no policie nor gouernment among the Inhabitants of the same, for that he that was the richest and of most power amongst them was maister, and liued together like beastes, whereby the Spaniardes had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 small labor to subdue them, whereof manie they baptised, and made them Christians, which euerie day increased: it is a very fruitful land, and hath much corne and al sorts of wilde beastes, as harts, hynd••, & such like: also cattle, as buffels, oxen, kyne, hogges, goates &c. they haue manie muske cattes, all kinde of fruites, as in China, abun∣dance of hony and fish: it is said also that there is all kindes of spices, but as yet there is no certaintie thereof, but onely that the Spani∣ardes giue it forth so: but you must thinke they doe it because they wil extol and set forth their things aboue all others, as their māner is. Those of China trafficke with these Ilāds, and bring thether all sortes of commodities out of their country, as al silkes, cottons, por∣selynes, powder for shot, sulphur, brimstone, yron, stéele, quicke siluer, and other metals, coper, meal nuttes, chasnuttes, bisquit, dates, al sorts of lynnen cloth, deskes, and such like, and of all curious things that may be found, & there cometh frō China thether euery year at least 20 shippes, and from thence is their marchandise by the Spaniardes shipped and sent into newe Spaine, & to Mexico, which 〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

countrie of Spaine. The land by meanes of y^e good ayre and temperatenes therof is fo fruit∣full, that al things are there to be had in great abundance, as Corne, Rice, and other such like graine or séedes, and is both sowen and mowed continually al the yeare long. With∣in the land ther are some Elephants, Lyons, Tygers, and such cruell beastes. There are also many beasts of Moseliaet, that is to say, Muske Cattes, which are of the bignesse and likenesse of a little Dogge, which they kill and burie for certaine daies, and being rotten, and well brused with blowes, whereby the flesh and bloud are mixed together, they make many round Balles of the same flesh & bloud so mixed, each Ball of an ounce waight, by the Portingals called Papo, which they car∣rie into all places. There are also in that land many Cattes of Algallia, or Ci••et Cattes, and some Amber. They haue also horses, but smaller then the horses in Europe. Géese, Hennes, Duckes and such like, are there in great aboundaunce, ryuer, and sea Fish are likewise plentifull, and all kind of necessaries whatsoeuer. The countrie hath many mines of Golde and Siluer, but the King letteth it not commonly be carried out of the countrie, but kéepeth it in his house for treasure, there∣fore they seeke and procure all things to bee brought into the land: notwithstanding they haue great riches in their houses, of Gold, Siluer, and other common Iewels, they est∣eeme more of Siluer then of Golde, because the Golde is of many values and prices, and the Siluer is alwaies of one price. It hath also many Pearles and Alioffar, which come out of the Iland and Prouince of Aynao, al∣so much Quick-siluer, Copper, Iron, Steele, Blick, Tin, Leade, Brimstone and other such like mettales, and Amber, besides all these riches, and innumerable rents that the King of China hath, it is said that he hath in euery chiefe shire or Prouince towne a great and vnknowne treasurie. It is a common custome in that countrie to weare, as we doe here, course and common cloth and linnen, as also Silke▪ Satin and Brocado, which is cloth of Golde and Siluer, with faire workes and borders, downe to their shooes, which they commonly vse, because of the great quantitie of Silke, that is within the countrie, for it is affirmed for a truth, that only from the town of Canton there is yearely carried into In∣dia, aboue thrée thousand Quintals of Silke, which are sold by waight, besides the Silkes that are yearely carried to the Ilands of Ia∣pa••, Lucon, or Phillippinas, and to the land of Si••n, and other countries bordering about the same: and yet there stayeth so much with∣in the countrie, that therewith might bee la∣den whole Fléetes of shippes, and would not be missed: there is also much Flax and Cot∣ton, and so good cheape, that it is almost in∣credible: the earthen Pots, Cuppes and ves∣sels that are made there, are not to bee num∣bred, which are yearely carried into India, Portingall, Noua Spaignia, & other waies, but the finest sorte may not be carried out of the land vpon paine of death, but serue onely for the Lords and Gouernours of the coun∣trie: which are so fine that Christall is not comparable vnto it. These Pots and Cups are made inwards in the lande, of a certaine earth that is verie hard, which is beaten smal and then layed to stéepe in Cesterns of stone full of water, made for the purpose, and when it is well stéeped and often stirred, (as we do milke to make Butter) of the finest thereof which driueth or swimmeth on the top they make the finest worke, and vse the courser ac∣cordingly▪ whereof some they paint, and then they are dried and baked in Ouens.

The maner to make Earthen Pots and Cups (called Porcelleyn-Cuppes) by Sca∣liger is set downe in his Booke of Subtil∣ties in this manner. In the 92. Exercise. The Cups and earthen Pots that are cal∣led Porceleynes, whereof also the Earth hath her name, are first beaten to small Poulder, which they steepe in water, and then forme their Pots, Cuppes and vessels out of the same, which done they burne them vnder the earth, and hauing layen in the earth 100, yeares, being then full baked and made, they are digged foorth and soulde, some say, that not the Cuppes &c. but the stuffe is buried, although Iohn Huyghens opinion seemeth to be true and according to their maner, saying, that they are made of Earth, as other Pots and Cannes are made in our countrie.

The land also aboundeth in Honie, Su∣ger and Waxe, of all sorts of Spices, rootes and plantes as also fruites, and much more then in Spaine: and other kindes of fruites also which are not knowne heere: there are Oranges that are swéeter then Suger: there is a kind of fruit called Lechyas, which are like Plums, but of another taste, and are very good & much estéemed, whereof I haue eaten, to conclude it hath of all things that man can wish or desire.

The rents and reuenewes of the King of China are so great, that it is incredible, for he hath onely in custome out of a riuer in the Prouince of Canton, for Salt that is made there, yearly a million and a halfe of Golde, whereby men may estéeme the rest accor∣dingly. All the Townes in that Countrie are walled about with stone walles, and haue

Ditches of water round about them for their securitie, they vse no fortresse nor Castles, but onely vppon euery Gate of the Towne they haue strong Towers, wherein they place their Ordinance for defence of y^e towne. They vse all kinde of armes, as Caliuers, Bowes, Pikes of diuers sortes, Rapiers, like Falceons, Cortlasses and Targets. The souldiers when they goe to warre, weare Coates downe to their knées, lyned with Cotton, so that the thrust of a Pike or a Ra∣pier will not readily enter, such as are soul∣diers are paide by the King, which are know∣en by wearing a red or a yellow Hat, where∣of there are so many, that the number is not knowne, they haue Captaines of 10. of 100 of 1000. 10000. 20000. &c. Which Cap∣taines may bee knowne by certaine tokens, one from the other, whereby they know how many men he hath vnder him. Euery month they Muster and are paide with Siluer mo∣ney, for they haue no other Coyne, and they are péeces of cut Siluer, in which sort they pay & receiue all their money, for the which purpose they doe alwayes carrie about them a paire of Ballaunce with an instrument to cut the Siluer. A souldier hath euery moneth, the value of a Ryall and a halfe of Spanish money in siluer, which is more in that coun∣trie (as the value and price of all things go∣eth there) then foure Ducates or twelue Guilders with vs. For Religion and cere∣monies they are Heathens, without any sparke or point of Mahomets law, or of any other sects.* 1.21 In many places they pray to the Diuell, onely because hee shoulde not hurt them. When any man lieth on his death bed, they set the picture of the Diuell before him, with the Sunne in his left hand, and a poin∣yard in the right hand, which Diuell is pain∣ted with a very fierce looke: and therfore they desire the patient or sicke man to looke well vpon him, that hee may bee his friend in the world to come, and that yeare hee may not hurt him. They pray to the Sunne and the Moone, which they thinke, are man and wife, and when any Eclipse happeneth, they make great sacrifices, fearing that God will take their liues from them, and cleane ouerthrow them, whereby they are in great feare. They doe all belieue the immortalitie of the soule, and that after their deathes, they shall re∣ceiue either good or euill reward in the world to come according to their workes. Where∣fore they vse faire and costly Graues, and be∣léeue that in the world to come men shall ne∣uer more die, but liue for euer, there are also in this land many and diuers faire Vniuersi∣ties, and Schooles for learning, where they studie Philosophie, and the lawes of the land, for that not any man in China is estéemed or accounted of, for his birth, family or riches, but onely for his learning and knowledge, such are they that serue in euery Towne, and haue the gouernment of the same, being ser∣ued and honoured with great solemnities, and worthinesse, liuing in great pleasure and estéemed as gods. They are called Lo••ias, and Mandorijns, and are alwaies borne in the stréetes, sitting in Chariots which are hanged about with Curtaines of Silke, co∣uered with Clothes of Golde and Siluer, and are much giuen to banketing, eating, drink∣ing & making good cheare, as also the whole land of China. No man may rule, gouerne, or vse any Office of Iustice in the Towne or place where he was borne, which they saye, the King doth, because their friendes or pa∣rents should not mooue or perswade them to doe any thing contrarie to Iustice, or to the hinderance of the Kings seruice. When any of the aforesaide gouernours or rulers die in China, they kill diuers of their seruants and wiues, and cause all kinde of victuals and ne∣cessaries with diuers Iewels to bee put into the Graue with them, whereby they thinke themselues well prouided, and to haue good companie with them, to liue withall in the other world.

The Countrie is verie temperate & good ayre, for it beginneth vnder 19. degrées, and is in some places higher then 50. degrées, whereby it is to be presumed, that it must of force be fruitfull, a great helpe thereunto is the earnest and continuall labour the coun∣trimen and inhabitants take, to build houses in their land, whereby there is not one foote of land lost, or that lyeth wast, for euen to the verie mountaines, it is both plowed & plan∣ted, because there are so many people in the Countrie. It is not in mans memorie, that euer there was plague in that Countrie, and they haue a law which is very straightly hol∣den, that no man may goe or depart out of the Countrie without licence, nor yet that a∣ny stranger may come into the land without leaue vpon paine of death. Likewise no man may trauaile through the Country to begge, whereof they haue a great care, and looke néerely vnto it. The people are well formed, and commonly fat and well liking of body, broade and round faces, smal eyes, great eye∣browes, broad foreheads, small and flat no∣ses, litle beards, seauen or eight hayres aboue their lippes and vnder their chinnes, and ve∣rie blacke haire, which they estéeme verie much, & haue great care in y^e keming thereof, and in keeping it cleane, as well men as wo∣men, and weare it as long as it will growe, and then binde it in a knot on the top of their

heads, and vpon it they put a péece of Silke netting. Those that dwell on the Sea side, with whome the Portingals traffique, that is in Machau and Canton, are a people of a brownish colour, like the white Moores in Africa and Barbaria, and part of the Spa∣niards, but those that dwell within the land, are for color like Netherlanders & high Dut∣ches. There are many among them that are cleane blacke, which haue great eyes and much beard, but verie few of them, as it may well bee thought, and as the men of China themselues report. Their ofspring was out of ••artaria, or from other of their neigh∣bours of straunge Countries, at such time when they had licence to trauaile into those Countries, and to haue conuersation with them by trade of marchandise, which nowe they may not doe, as it is saide before. They vse to weare the nayles of their left hands ve∣ry long, and on the right hand short, which they hold for an auncient ceremonie of their law and beliefe. Their apparell (as I said be∣fore) is most of Silke of all colours, that is such as are of welth, & indifferent rich, others & such as are poore, do weare apparel of Cot∣ton linnen, & of blacke and coloured Sayes, and such like stuffe: Cloth made of Wooll nor Veluet they can not make in all China, although there wanteth no wooll, and they haue many shéepe: notwithstanding, they know not how to vse it, and wonder much at it when the Portingalles bring it thether. The women goe verie richly apparelled, with long and wide Gownes, they weare many Iewels on their heades, within their haire, and also vppon their bodies, they doe commonly hold their hands couered, they are but little séene abroad, but sit most part with∣in the house, and estéeme it for a great beauti∣fying vnto them to haue small féete, to the which end they vse to binde their féete so fast when they are young, that they cannot grow to the full, whereby they can hardly goe, but in a manner halfe lame. Which custome the men haue brought vp, to let them from much going, for that they are verie iealous, and vn∣measurable leacherous and vnchast, yet is it estéemed a beautifying and comlinesse for the women. Those that are of any wealth or e∣state, are born in chaires through the stréets, hanged and couered with Silke, Sattin, and Damaske Curtins, wouen with siluer and golde thréedes, and haue small holes to looke through, so that they may sée and not be séene.

The 24. Chapter. Of the Prouinces, Townes, and other things worthie of memorie in the king∣dome of China.

THe kingdome of China is deuided into 15 prouinces, euery one being as great (as it is reported & founde written) as the best king∣dome in Europe, and are gouerned by a Viceroye or Gouernour, which by the Chinaes is cal∣led Cochin. Two of the said Prouinces are ruled by the King himselfe and his Councell, which are Tolanchia and Paguia, wher the King is alwaies resident. The other Pro∣uinces are called Foquiem, Olam, Sinsay, Xansay, Oquiam, Aucheo, Hona, Can∣ton, Quicheo, Chequeam, Saxi, Aynaon, Sus••an. Most of these Prouinces haue riuers and waters running through them, & haue conference and familiaritie by buying and sel¦ling with each other both by water and by land. It is recorded by the Chinaes them∣selues in their Chronicles, that in these fif∣téene Prouinces ther are 591. chiefe Citties 1593. other Citties, besides villages: where∣of some are so great as Citties: whereby you may consider the greatnesse of the land. Most of the Townes are built vppon riuers and running streames, and closed about with broade ditches, and thicke stone walles, Without the Walles betwéene them and the Ditches, is a walke, where sixe men on Horse backe maye ryde in ranke, and the like within, which space is made to mende and repaire the Walles when néede requireth, whereof they are very care∣full, and looke warily vnto them. The high waies and foote pathes throughout the whole kingdome, are fairely paued, and all along euen and smoth till you come to the hils, and the entrance or Frontespicio of the Citties, verie costly and workmanly built with thrée or foure Gates one by the other, all stricken ouer full of Iron, and the stréetes within the Citties and Villages very fairely paued, and playned as straight as a line, and euen in breadth, so that if you stand at the ende of a stréete, you may sée to the other ende, by rea∣son of the straightnes bee it neuer so long. At the end of euery stréete, are certaine Vaults made, wherein are wares and marchandises of all costly things, and prices that man can wish or desire. Ouer euery stréete there are diuers Arches made of stone, verie finely and cunningly Painted, which are set in the

stréetes, because that all their feas••es, p••ayes and spirituall ceremonies are done by night, and then those Arches are placed full of lights and Torches, which maketh a goodly shew. The houses commonly haue three doores to goe in at, whereof that in the middle is the greatest, the other somewhat lesse, they are commonly low without Sellers vnder groūd but within very large and broad, with great roomes and faire Gardens, full of all pleasure and delight. The towne where the King is resident, is called Xuntien or Taybjin which some men call Quinzay, this name Xuntien is as much to say in Chinish speach, as hea∣uenly Cittie, and lyeth in the Prouince of Paguia: of the greatnesse whereof they write wonders, for they affirme that within the walles the Towne is as long, from the one end to the other as a man on horsebacke may ride vpon a day, with a thousand other won∣ders, which for breuitie I omit. In this town the King hath his Palace, with all pleasures that may or can bee deuised, both for him selfe, his wiues, and his Courte. His wiues little or neuer goe abroad, so that they are sel∣dome or neuer séene, thereby to maintaine their authoritie, as also fearing that any mis∣chiefe should happen vnto them, there are not in all the countrie any Noble men of name or title, as Earles, Dukes, Viscounts or such like, nor that haue any vassales, commande∣ments, Iurisdictions, or proprieties to them∣selues, other then such as are giuen by the King, and when they die, it returneth again•• vnto the King, and if hee wil, he may take it from the children, but commonly hee letteth them haue it, so they be fit for the place, and that with a new gi•••• and bond to serue the King. In all the principall townes where the Viceroyes or Gouernours hold their states, there hangeth a picture of the King, couered with a Curtaine of cloth of Golde, whereun∣to all Officers, Commaunders, Loi••as, Mandorijns &c. dayly resort and doe it all re∣uerence and honour, such as belongeth to a King of such estate, as if the King himselfe were there in person▪ the Kings title is, King and Lord of the world, and Sonne of hea∣uen.

No man throughout all China may beare any weapons, nor yet haue them in his house but such as are appointed thereunto, and re¦ceiue the Kings pay, as souldiers, whose chil∣dren succeed their fathers in their places. The men of China are great and cunning worke∣men, as may well bee séene by the workman∣ship that commeth from thence. They make and vse waggons or Cartes with sayles (like Boates) and with wheeles so subtilly made, that being in the fielde they goe and are dri∣uen forwards by the winde, as if they were in the water, they are verie wittie in buying and selling. All the traders that kéepe shops, haue a Table hanging at their doores where∣in is written euery kind of ware they haue to sell. All Officers or handicrafts men haue ei∣ther of them a streete alone, and dwell by themselues, and their children must vse the like trade after their Fathers deaths, whe∣ther they were souldiers, Iustices or Gouer∣nours. When any man is very rich, he is li∣cenced not to work notwithstanding he must keepe workmen, and keepe open shoppe, the money that is vsed throughout all China is Golde and Siluer vnstamped, but cut in smal peeces to the value of a penie, and so receiued by waight, and in like sorte payed. Also all wares, of what sort soeuer they bee, not so much as Hennes, Géese, Fish, and such like, but are bought and solde by waight. They haue one wife which they call their lawfull wife, and as many other as they can well maintaine, the sonne of the lawfull wife in∣heriteth most part of their goods, and that which remaineth is equally deuided among the other children, they marrie with whome they will, except it be with their Sisters, or their Vncles children. The Bridegrome be∣fore he fetcheth the Bride home to his house, must indowe her with certaine goods, which he giueth to the Bride her selfe, and shee gi∣ueth them vnto her Father or mother in re∣compence of their charges for bringing her vp in her youth, which done shee goeth home with the Bridegrome, and the parents may do what they wil with that which they haue so receiued for their daughters dowrie, and spend it as they thinke good, and what re∣maineth thereof after the parents are deade, returneth againe vnto the daughter, whose husband gaue the same for his wife, so that he which hath most daughters, is the richest, as it is reported, by the Pictures heereafter following you may see the forme and manner of those of C••, as wel men as women, as also of the Mandorijns and mightie men or Gouernours, as they are carried in the stréetes, and goe to sport vppon the ryuers, where they refresh themselues with all kinds of dainties.

The men of China haue manie spéeches, but in writing they vnderstand each other in euerie place for they write euerie thing with figures and characters, whereof their alpha∣bets are sundrie and innumerable: these figu∣res with their paper of diuers colours, as also penne and inke, you may see at D. Paluda∣nus house, so that men had need of a good me∣morie, and long exercise, before they can vn∣derstand them all, and read what it is, which

is the cause that among them such as are learned are so much esteemed. Their paper is like that of Auro••a, but not so white, but thinner and smoother: they make also of all co∣lors, which is very saire, they write with pennes of Reedes, wherein there sticketh a pensell, such as Painters vse. Printing, pain∣ting & gun-powder, with the furniture there∣to belonging, haue beene vsed in China ma∣ny hundreth yeares past, and very common, so that it is with them out of memorie when they first began. Their Chronicles shewe that their first king, being a great Nigro∣mancer, who raigned manie thousand yeares past, did first inuent great ordinance with all things belonging thereunto: Printing is like∣wise very auncient with them, for that there are bookes found in those countries of China, which were printed at the least fiue or sixe hundreth yeares before printing was in vse with vs in Europe, so that it is not founde when it first began there. And there are ma∣ny bookes in China, for that they are very cu∣rious and desirous to write and register all thinges, as well that which is done in their kingdome, or which belongeth thereunto, as also other memorable things, cūning and fine deuises, lawes and ordināces, al policies & go∣uernments in their townes, wherein they much resemble and surpasse the ancient Gre∣cians and Romans. The manner of their banquetings and feastes are thus, as many persons as are inuited, so many tables are prepared and made ready, although they be a hundreth: the tables are verie faire and finely painted▪ with all kynd of imagerie and flow∣ers, most pleasant to behold, so that they vse no table-clothes, but round about the edges of the table there hangeth a cloth down to the ground, of silk, damaske, gold or siluer, euerie one according to his estate, and at the cor∣ners of the tables there hang diuers faire bas∣kets full of all sorts of sweete flowers, with ma••c••paine stuffe of all formes and fashions, gilded & very cunningly made. In the middle of the tables they place the meats, very cost∣lie and well drest, and in good order, all in dishes of fine earth, or els siluer. The meat both fish and flesh, or whatsoeuer it is, is all cut in peeces, the bones and sinewes cleane taken forth, which they neuer touch with their fingers, but onely vse to take it vp with two litle peeces of blacke wood made round, whereof you may see some at D. Paludanus ••o••se, that I gaue him: and these they vse in stead of ••orkes, which with them is so ready, y^t there falleth not one bit or crūme vpon the table, whereby they vse no napkins to wipe their handes, for they need them not, neither doe the•• soule either hand or mouth. Their drinke is wyne made of Rice, and brewed as we brew beer. They drinke often, but verie litle at a time, and will drinke at the least 20. times in one smal cup before it be empty: whē they are at their Feasts and banquets they haue much musicke. They haue likewise ma∣ny manners & customes of curtesies, which are these: The common people as they méet together, they shut their left hand, and couer it with their right hand, and so hold them to∣gether on their breast, with much bowing & stooping with their heads downwards, there∣by to shewe that they loue each other, and are as fast bound and vnited together in loue, as their hands are fast knit together, and that with all their harts, wherewith they vse ma∣nie courteous spéeches. Among the Nobles or Mandoriins, when they méet together, they presently shut both handes, and lay their fingers each vpon the other, and so with their armes make a hoop or bowe, and so stād still stooping and bowing their heads and bo∣dies with great curtesie, making choise who shal first go by, with many other ceremonies vsed among the Nobles, which were ouer long to rehearse. Wherefore at this present I will leaue them; and cease to write any fur∣ther of their ceremonies, and other customes, as necessitie requireth, for that if I should de∣scribe them all at large, it would be ouer te∣dious, and a hundreth quiers of paper would not suffice: yet if any man be desirous to sée more hereof, let him read the booke made by a Spanish Fryer named Fray Iuan Gon∣sales de Mendosa, of the description of Chi∣na, which booke is translated out of Spanish into Latine, although there are some falts, by wrong information giuen vnto the Author: notwithstanding it conteyneth many parti∣cular things worthie the reading.

The 25. Chapter. Of the town and Iland of Machau in Chi∣na, where the Portingales haue their re∣sidence, and trafficke with their mar∣chandises, wares, and some prices ther∣of, and the waight, measure, and money as well of China, as of Malacea, which continually come thether.

THe Iland and Towne of Machau or Makau, is in∣habited by Portingales, to∣gether with the naturall borne Countrimen of Chi∣na. They trafficke with the men of Canton, from whence the Chi∣nayes bring all their marchandises, and re∣sort

[illustration]

Habitus e China regno pretiosae elegantiae et rerum omnium affluentissimum

〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

[illustration]

Lectuli, et ratio, quibus Chinae proceres primarij▪ Mandorinos vocant gestantur, cvmbae{que} quibus ad oblectationem per fluvios vehuntur▪

[illustration]

Maniere als haer die Mandoryns van China welcke het princepael gover∣nement hebben laten draegen en op die revieren vermeyen vaeren.

[illustration]

Naves e China et Iava velis ex arundine contextis et anchoris ligneis.

[illustration]

Schepen van China en Iava met rietten seysen en houten anckers

sort thether to buy wares, but the Portin∣gals may not goe thither, but as any shippe commeth out of India to Machau, it is by the Mandorijn or Gouernour of Machau presently measured both breadth, length, and depth, which done, they know how to make their account for the receipt of their custome, and then they may lade what and how much so euer they will, without paying more, or concealing any Custome. They suffer the Portingals to chuse a Factor among them∣selues, who in all their names is licenced to goe to Canton, there to buy what they desi∣re: but in the night time hee must lye in the Suburbs without the towne, vpon paine of great punishment. This towne of Machau, hath a Portingall Bishop, who is Suffra∣gan to the Archbishop of Goa, as I saide be∣fore: thither commeth a shippe yearely out of India, by the King of Portingals particular licence the Captaines place whereof is giuen to a man of great authoritie, as the Captains places of the fortresses. And from Makau the saide shippe sayleth to Iapen and there dis∣chargeth▪ and then returneth againe to Ma∣kan, and from thence to Malacca, and so to Goa. No man may sayle that way but onely such as haue speciall licence from the Ringe, some one time, some an other, for that there must but one ship sayle that v••age euery yere, which is likwise giuen in recompence of some seruice done in India, as all other Officers in like sort are. But to China and Malacca onely, euery Marchant may fraight as many ships as they can, alwaies remembred, that to Iapen no man may do it but by the Kings permission, and in China or Malacca no man may lade nor vnlade, before such ships as are there for the King, haue receiued in the whole fraight, and are ready to depart, and after they haue laden euery man may doe his best, in what ships hee will, that is from China to Malacca and Goa. The Captaine of the ship that sayleth to Iapen doth greatly profit by his Voyage, for hauing a good summe of money to traffique thither withall, in a good ship which commonly is of 14. of 16. hun∣dreth Tunnes, hee may well gaine 15••. or 200. thousand Ducats by the Vyage, which continueth at the least three yeares. For in A∣pril they depart from Goa to Malacca, wher they must stay a certaine time for the winds, which at a certaine time blowe certaine months together: and these winds are called Monsoins. From Malacca they sayle to Ma∣kan, wher they stay at the least 9. Months for the Monsoins, and then they sayle to Iapen, where they must likewise stay certaine Mo∣neths againe, to returne with the Monsoins to Makau: wher againe they stay, as in their Viage outwards: so that the time of three yeares is fully expired before they haue made their Viage to and from Iapen. And all the time of the Captaine of this ship his residence as well in Iapen as Makau, he is there chief Ruler and Gouernour of the place, like the Viceroye in India, and the seuerall Cap∣taines in their Forts, for that when the one departeth from Makau to Iapen▪ there com∣meth an other to Makau from Goa▪ to make the same Viage, after the other hath perfor∣med his Viage. And when hee returneth a∣gaine from Iapen to Makau, the other say∣leth to Iapen, and so the first continueth Go∣uernour againe at Makau, vntil he departeth from thence to Malacca, and so to India, and in this sorte there is alwaies a Gouernour within the Towne of Makau, as I saide be∣fore.

The marchandise or ware that they carrie frō Makau to Iapen, are silks, & from Iapen they return nothing but siluer, whereby they doe greatly profit. And seing we are in hand with their trafficks, from Makau, I think it not impertinent to rehearse some of the ware which the Portingals vse commonly to buy there▪ and to traffique withall, together with the ordinarie prices therof, as also the waight and monyes, as well of China as of Malac∣ca, because of the neerenesse and common tra∣ffique that they dayly vse with each other, more then any other places of ••ndia, which I set downe in this place, because this waight and reckoning differeth from that of Portin∣gall and India. It is to be vnderstoode that in China there are three sorts of Silkes, that is, one sort called Lankijn which is esteemed for the best. The second called Fulcan, which is good also. The third and worst Silke is cal∣led Lankam, besides these there are other sorts of Silke, as Silke vnspunne, called raw Silke, and Silke that is spunne and made in thréedes, which the Portingals call Retre•• The white vnspunne Silke of Lankijn is worth the Pico (which is a certaine waight) which hereafter I will shew you about 1••5 or 150. Ryals of eight, or Rikes Dollors accounted after the rate of that money. The white vnspunne Silke of Fulcan is worth the Pico, 140. or 145. Ryals of eight, the vnspunne Silke of Lankam, is woorth the Pico 75. or 80. Ryals of eight, the Retres white Silke of Lankij is worth the Pico 150. or 170. Ryals of eight, the Retres white, and other Silke of Fulcam and Susu∣am, is worth the Pico 130. or 135. Ryals of eight, the Retres white of Canton is worth the Pico 50, or 55. Ryals of eight, the wrought Silke of al colours at the same price, the vnspunne Canton Silke in colours

is worth the Pico 50. or 60. Ryals of eight, white Lamparden Silk of 14. Els the péece are commonly worth one yeare with the o∣ther, 50. or 55. Ryalls of eight. The hun∣dred, the Mosseliat or Muske is commonly worth one yeare with the other the Caete, which is 20. ounces, sixe or seuen Ryalls of eight, other fine wares and marchandises of China, haue their different prices according∣ly, as the time serueth, and are not so com∣mon as these Silkes, for that with the Silks aforesaid is the Portingalles trade, and the principallest riches, that are brought out of C••ina to the countries bordering about it.

As touching the waight and money of China and Malacca, you must vnderstand, that the waight which in Malacca is called a Bha••, is three Picos, and euery Pico is 66 •• Caetes, so that ••. Picos which is a Bhar, are 200. Caetes, as well great as small waight, a Bhar of China is 300. Caetes, which waigh as much as 200. Caetes at Malacca small waight: for that three Cae∣tes of China, are in Malacca, two Caetes small waight: a Caete of China is 16. Ta∣eys Chinish waight, which are 14. Taeys in Malacca which is as much as 20. Oun∣ces •• Portingall waight. They vse likewise a waight which they cal a Hant, euery Hant is twelue Caetes smal waight and euery Ca∣ete is 22. Taeyes, and 16. Hantes and 8. Caetes, are iust 200. Caetes which is a Bhar of small waight, so likewise a Tael of Malacca is 16. Mases, and 10. Mases and ¼▪ is an Ounce of Portingall waight, and an Ounce and a halfe is iust 16. Mases, and the eight part of a Mase, by these Mases they sel the Bezars stones, for euery Mase two or thrée Ducats, according to their greatnesse and goodnesse. In Malacca are two sortes of waights, great and small, which heereafter follow. A Bhar great waight, is 200. Cates, and one Cates 26. Taeys, and one Taey is one Ounce ½▪ hard waight of Portingall, the small waight is a Bhar, which is also 200. Caetes, and one Caetes is 22. Taeys, and a ••ael is a full Ounce and a halfe Portingal waight. With their great waight they weigh P••per, Cloues, Nutmegs, Folio, red & white Sanders, Indico, Alum, Sanguis, draconis, Palo Dauguila, Siet, and Sapon. With the small waight they waigh Quicksiluer, Vermilion▪ Coper▪ Blie, Iuorie bones, Silk, Muske, Amber, Calamba, or Lignum Alo∣es, Tin, Lead, Lancua, Oyle of Nutmegs, and of flowers, Verdette, Rosamallia, Be∣soun▪ and Camphora &c. The marchandises that the Portingals carrie to China, where∣of they make most profite is Ryals of eight, which in China are worth aboue six testones, not for that they had rather haue it then o∣ther Siluer, but for that it is all Siluer▪ for it is presently cut in péeces, to pay it out after their manner as it is shewed before, they car∣rie likewise some Wines both Portingal and Indian Wine, and some Oyles of Oliues, which are there desired. Veluet, Cloth of Scarlet, whereof they haue none, nor yet can make any, although they haue both sheepe and wooll enough. Looking glasses, Iuorie bones, and all kinde of Christall and Glasse, are well solde there. But this shall suffice for that which concerneth the land of China, now I will procéede to the descripti∣on of the Iland of Iapan, which is the farthest Viage and last Orientall place by the Por∣tingals discouered or at this day knowne.

The 26. Chapter. Of the Iland of Iapan.

THe Iland or the land of Ia∣pan is many Ilands one by the other, and are seperated and deuided only by certaine small Créekes and riuers, it is a great land, although as yet the circuite thereof is not knowne, be∣cause as yet it is not discouered▪ nor by the Portingalles sought into, it beginneth vnder 30. degrées, and runneth till you come to 38 degrées, it lyeth East from the firme land of China, about 80. miles, and from Maccau by the waye that the Portingalles trauaile Northeast warde, is about 300. miles, and the Hauen where commonly the Portingals vse to traffique, is called Nangasache. They haue likewise other places where they traf∣fique and deale. The countrie is cold, procée∣ding of much rayne, Snow and Ice▪ that fal∣leth therein, it hath some Corne lande, but their common Corne is Ryce. In some pla∣ces the land is verie hillie and vnfruitfull, they eate no flesh but the flesh of wilde beasts, and such as is hunted, wherein they are verie ex∣pert, although there are Oxen, Cowes, Sheepe, and such like Cattell good store, yet they vse them to other things about their la∣bours, and because it is tame flesh, which they cannot brooke, they refuse it as wee doe horse flesh, they doe likewise refuse to eate Milke, as wee doe bloud, saying that Milke although it is white, yet it is verie bloude. They haue much Fish, whereof they are ve∣rie desirous, as also all kinds of fruites, as in China. Their houses are commonly couered with wood, and with strawe, they are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and workmanlike builte, specially the rich

mens houses, they haue their Chambers hanged and flowred with Mattes, which is their best hangings. The Iapens are not so curious nor so cleanly as the men of China, but are contente with a meane, yet for the most part they goe verie well apparelled in Silke, almost like the Chinos. The countrie hath some mines of siluer, which from thence is by the Portingals yearely brought vnto China, and there bartered for Silke, and o∣ther Chinish wares, which the Iapeans haue néede of. The countriemen are verie skilfull to search for Siluer, and to sell their wares. They haue among them verie good handi∣crafts men, and cunning workemen in all kind of handie workes, they are sharpe wit∣ted, and quickly learne any thing they sée, as by experience it is found in those parts which the Portingales haue discouered. The com∣mon people of the lande are much different frō other nations, for that they haue among them as great curtesie and good policie, as if they had liued continually in the Court, they are verie expert in their weapons as néed re∣quireth, although they haue little cause to vse them, for that if anye of them beginneth to brawle or to drawe his sworde, hee is put to death, they haue not any prisons, for that who soeuer deserueth to be imprisoned, is pre∣sently punished, or banished the countrie. When they meane to lay holde vpon a man, they must doe it by stealth and by deceipt, for otherwise he would resist and doe much mis∣chiefe. If it bee any Gentleman or man of great authoritie, they beset his house about with men, and whether hee chaunce to slay himselfe or not, they enter the house by force, and kill al they find therin. Which to auoid, he suffereth himself often times to be killed by his seruantes. And it is often séene that they rip their own bellies open, which often times is likewise done by their seruants for the loue of their Masters, therein to shew their Ma∣sters the loue they beare vnto them, so little estéeming their owne liues, to pleasure and serue them. The like doe young Boyes in presence of their parents, onely for griefe or some small anger. They are in all their acti∣ons very patient and humble, for that in their youthes they learne to indure hunger, colde, and all manner of labour, to goe bare headed, with few cloathes, as well in Winter as in Summer, and not onely the common people, but the principall Gentlemen and Nobles of the countrie. They account it for great beau∣tie to haue no haire, which with great care they doe plucke out, onely keepe a bunch of haire on the crowne of their heades, which they tie together. Touching their traffique, manners, speach, and all their ceremonies, concerning life and curtesie, they are cleane contrarie vnto all other nations, speciallie from those of China, and till this day obserue the same as an infallible law, which groweth vpon this occasion.

A long time since, there was in China a great & mightie familie, which together with all their friends and acquaintance secretly conspired and agréed to ryse vp against the King of China, to driue him out of his king∣dome and to kill him, and hauing so done, to place themselues therein: but it could not so secretly be contriued and wrought, but in the end it was knowne: whereupon the king pu∣nished them most gréeuously, and caused di∣uers of the principall conspirators to be put to death, and all others he found to be consen∣ting therunto should haue felt the like paine, which gréeued the Counsell and other Noble men of the countrie, for that diuers of their néerest kinsmen were of that conspiracie, so that with humble and long petition to the King, they besought him to let them liue, and to punish them with some easier punishment then death: but that which they sought & de∣sired at the king, all things considered, was little better then death, which was that he would banish them and all their posteritie for euer out of the countrie, into the Ilands of Ia∣pen, which as then were not inhabited, and this as they desired was done: whereby there is so great enuie and hatred betwéene them and the men of China, that they hate each o∣ther to the death, and doe all the mischief one vnto the other that they can imagine or de∣uise, euen vntill this time. The men of Iapen haue done much mischief vnto the men of China, and many times fallen vpon their coasts, and put all to fire and sword, and now at this present haue not any conuersation with them, but onely they trafficke with the Portingales, and to shewe themselues whol∣lie their deadlie enemies, in all their actions they are cleane contrary vnto the men of China, and to the same end haue changed all their customes, ceremonies and manners of curtesie from the men of China. To recite the particulars would be ouer long, yet I will in briefe set down some fewe examples of the customes and manners therein. One is where the China vseth the curtesie of salu∣tation to a man with the head and hand, whē they méet together: the Iapens to the contra∣rie put off their shoes, whereby they shewe them reuerence, and as the Chinaes stand vp when they minde to receyue any man▪ and to doe him reuerence, they to the contrarie set themselues down, accounting it a verie vn∣séemely thing to receyue or bid a man wel∣come standing on their féet: and as we put on

our clokes when we meane to goe abroad into the towne or countrie, they put them off when they goe forth, putting on great wyde bréeches, and coming home they put them off again, and cast their clokes vpon their shoul∣ders: and as among other nations it is a good sight to see men with white and yealow hayre and white teeth, with them it is estéemed the filthiest thing in the world, and séeke by all meanes they may to make their hayre and téeth blacke, for that the white causeth their grief, and the blacke maketh them glad. The like custome is among the women, for as they goe abroad they haue their daughters & maydes before them, and their men seruants come behind, which in Spaigne is cleane con∣trarie, and when they are great with childe, they tye their girdles so hard about them, that men would thinke they shuld burst, and when they are not with Childe, they weare their girdles so slacke, that you would thinke they would fall from their bodies, say∣ing that by experience they do finde, if they should not doe so, they should haue euill lucke with their fruict, and presently as soone as they are deliuered of their children, in stéed of cherishing both the mother and the child with some comfortable meat, they presently wash the childe in cold water, and for a time giue the mother very little to eate, and that of no great substance. Their manner of eating and drinking is: Euerie man hath a table alone, without table clothes or napkins, and eateth with two peeces of wood, like the men of Chi∣na: they drinke wine of Rice, wherewith they drink themselues drunke, and after their meat they vse a certaine drinke, which is a pot with hote water, which they drinke as hote as euer they may indure, whether it be Winter or Summer.

* 1.22The Turkes holde almost the same māner of drinking of their Chaona, which they make of certaine fruit, which is like vnto the Bakelaer, and by the Egyptians called Bon or Ban: they take of this fruite one pound and a half, and roast them a little in the fire, and then sieth them in twentie poundes of water, till the half be consumed away: this drinke they take euerie morning fasting in their chambers, ••ut of an e••rthen pot, being verie hote, as we doe here drinke aquacomposita in the morning: and they say that it strengthen∣eth and maketh them warme, breaketh wind, and openeth any stopping.

The manner of dressing their meat is al∣together contrarie vnto other nations: the a∣foresaid warme water is made with the pow∣der of a certaine hearbe called Chaa, which is much estéemed, and is well accounted of among them, and al such as are of any coun∣tenance or habilitie haue the said water kept for them in a secret place, and the gentlemen make it themselues, and when they will en∣tertaine any of their friends, they giue him some of that warme water to drinke: for the pots wherein they sieth it, and wherein the hearbe is kept, with the earthen cups which they drinke it in, they esteeme as much of them, as we doe of Diamants, Rubies and o∣ther precious stones, and they are not estee∣med for their newnes, but for their oldnes, and for that they were made by a good work∣man: and to know and kéepe such by them∣selues, they take great and speciall care, as also of such as are the valewers of them, and are skilfull in them, as with vs the goldsmith priseth and valueth siluer and gold, and the Iewellers all kindes of precious stones: so if their pots & cuppes be of an old & excellēt workmās making, they are worth 4 or 5 thousād ducats or more the peece. The King of Bungo did giue for such a pot, hauing thrée feet, 14 thousand ducats, and a Iapan being a Christian in the town of Sacay, gaue for such a pot 1400 ducats, and yet it had 3 peeces vpon it. They doe likewise estéeme much of any picture or table, wherein is pain∣ted a blacke trée, or a blacke bird, and when they knowe it is made of wood, and by an an∣cient & cūning maister, they giue whatsoeuer you will aske for it. It happeneth some times that such a picture is sold for 3 or 4 thousand ducats and more. They also estéeme much of a good rapier, made by an old and cunning maister, such a one many times costeth 3 or 4 thousand Crowns the péece. These things doe they kéeepe and estéeme for their Iewels, as we estéeme our Iewels & precious stones▪ And when we aske them why they estéeme them so much, they aske vs againe, why we estéeme so well of our precious stones & iew∣els, whereby there is not any profite to be had, and serue to no other vse, then only for a shewe, & that their things serue to some end.

Their Iustice and gouernment is as fol∣loweth: Their kings are called Iacatay, and are absolutely Lords of the land, notwith∣standing they kéepe for themselues as much as is necessary for them and their estate, and the rest of their land they deuyde among o∣thers, which are called Cunixus, which are like our Earles and Dukes: these are appoin∣ted by the King, and he causeth them to go∣uerne & rule the land as it pleaseth him: they are bound to serue the King as well in peace, as in warres, at their owne cost & charges, according to their estate, and the auncient lawes of Iapan. These Cunixus haue others vnder them called Touis, which are like our

Lords and Lieutenants, with whome like∣wise they deuide and part the land by the king giuen vnto them. And these Toms doe yet deuide their parts among their friends & such are their soldiers, and take an oath to be re∣die at the commandement of their heads and chief gouernors, as wel in peace as in warre at their own proper costes & charges: & euery one must maintayne himself, and be content with that part which is allotted vnto him: wherewith euerie one of them according to his estate and qualitie may liue well, and e∣uerie one of them hath so much power and authoritie ouer those that are vnder him, that he may punish, banish, and put them to death, and doe with them, if they offend, as it best pleaseth him, be it with right or with wrong, without any appeale or answering before a∣ny man: this power is not giuen onely to the Gouernors, Captaines and Officers ouer their subiects, Vassalles and Soldiers vnder their charges, gouernments and offices (as I said before) but also to maisters of houses and fathers ouer their children, seruants & family: so that they may kill, beate, ••acke & hewe thē as they thinke good, and at their pleasures, without any resistance or correction for the same.

The rents and reuenues belonging to the King are very small, and are nothing else but rice, which is their liuing: he hath euery yere onelie 500 thousād packes or sackes of Rice, and not any other customes, rents and reue∣nues, whereof he giueth to 10 or 12 Cunixu•• each man 30 or 40 thousand sackes, the rest is for his owne costes and charges, to the maintenance of his estate, and the Cunixus must distribute of their parts among the Toms, and the Toms among the soldiers, wherewith they maintaine themselues, euery man in his estate. Their spéech is different from the Chinish, so that they vnderstand not each other, but in writing they differ not, for that they vse all the self same figures and cha∣racters: they vse likewise manie kindes of vowels, and in their writing manie courte∣ous spéeches, to euery man according to his estate & calling, with seuerall titles & words: whereby their spéech is hardly to be learned by a straunger. Their religion is much like vnto those of China: they haue their Idolles and their ministers, which they call Bonses, and hold them in great estimation: but since the time of the Iesuites being among them, there haue bene diuers baptised and become Christians, which daylie doe increase, among the which were 3 Kings, that is the king of Būgo, which is one of the principallest kings of Iapan, although there are many in the countrie, wherewith the Portingales, as yet haue had no conference: the second the King of Arryma: the third, the King of Omura▪ Those thrée Kings sent their sonnes and Ne∣phewes with the Iesuites into India, from thence to trauell into Portingale, and so to Rome, to submit themselues vnto the Pope, and departing out of Iapan, in anno 1582.* 1.23 they ariued in India, in the citie of Goa An. 1583.* 1.24 the same yeare that I ariued in India, so that we found them yet in Goa, and the next yeare after they sayled vnto Portingal, & from thence to Madril, where by the king & nobles of Spaine, they were with great tri∣umph & honour welcomed and receiued, and presented with many gyftes. From thence they trauelled to Rome vnto the Pope, who likewise did them great honor, and bestowed many presents vpon them, as also all the Cardinals and Lords of Italie, for that they trauelled throughout all Italie to Florence, Venice, Ferrara, &c. which being done, they returned againe vnto Madril, with letters from Pope Sixtus, and some holie reliques of the crosse that Christ died vpon, to present the same vnto the Christian Kings of Iapan, as an holie present: in the end they ariued in In∣dia againe, during my being there, which was in anno 1587,* 1.25 being with great ioy re∣ceiued, and so set sayle vnto Iapan, where they ariued again with great admiration of all the men of Iapan: which the Iesuites did, to the end (as they said) the better to moue the Iapans to be christened, and to make them knowe the magnificence of the countrie of Europa, because they would not beléeue it be∣ing shewed them: but the principallest cause and intent of the Iesuites was, thereby to reape great profit, and to get much praise and commendation, for that most of the gifts which the princes of Iapan had giuen them, fell to their shares: they likewise obtained of the Pope and the king of Spaine, that no mā might dwell in Iapan, either Portingale or Christian, without their licence and consent, so that in all Iapan there are no other orders of Munkes, Fryers, Priests, nor any o∣ther religious persons remaining or resident there, but Iesuites alone. They haue onely a∣mong them certaine handie crafts men, by them brought out of India, with whome they haue to doe, but for other men, as marchants and others, they may but goe and come, and not stay there, without the Iesuites licence. They haue almost all the countrie vnder their subiection, such I meane as are conuer∣ted to the faith of Christ, as well spirituall as temporall, making the Iapans beléeue what they list, wherby they are honored like gods, for that the Iapans make so great account of them, that they doe almost pray vnto them,

as if they were Saints. They had obtained so much fauour of the Pope, that hee gran∣ted them a Bishoppe of their order, (which is contrarie to their profession) who came out of Portingale to be Bishop in Iapon, but dy∣ed in the way, betwéene Portingale and In∣dia: Since that they haue procured an other, so that to conclude, they haue all the praye vnder their clawes. As likewise they doe en∣ioy and possesse the principallest places of Re∣ligion in all India, where they builde most princely houses, which no man dareth with∣stand or refuse them, neither any of the Reli∣gious orders, haue the meanes or wealth to doe the like. This they know full well howe to bring to passe, for that there is not any thing, from whence they will not sucke or draw out some profit or aduantage, or else they haue the slight, and cunning how to get it as well from the King, and from other No∣blemen and estates as also from the common people, it séemeth in a manner that they be∣witch men with their subtill practises and de∣uises, and are so wel practised and experimen∣ted in trade of marchandises, that they sur∣passe all worldly men. To conclude, there is not any commoditie to be had or reaped tho∣roughout all India, but they haue their part therein, so that the other orders and Religi∣ous persons, as also the common people, doe much murmur thereat, and séeme to dislike of their couetous humors.

A little beyond Iapon vnder 34. and 35. degrées, not farre from the coast of China, lyeth an other great Iland, called Insula de Core, whereof as yet there is no certaine knowledge, neither of the greatnesse of the countrie, people, nor wares that are there to be found.

From Makau East Northeast, distant aboue 90. miles lye certaine Ilandes, called Lequeo Pequeno, or little Lequeo, and lye about 20. miles distant from the firme land of China, and 90. miles farther in the same course, lye other Ilands, called Lequeo Ma∣ior, or great Lequeo. All these Ilandes are trauelled vnto, and inhabited by those of Chi∣na, whereof we will now cease to speake, till an other time, (hauing particularly made a briefe discourse in an other place, of all their manners, customes, wares, and marchan∣dises, according to the truest instructions I could find) and so will returne againe to the description of Goa, together with the places bordering about the same.

The 27. Chapter. A short relation of the land lying behind Goa: in the iurisdiction whereof lyeth the said towne of Goa, and of the Ori∣ginall of their Kings and Gouernours, with their names, by true information giuen by the inhabitants themselues, together with their Histories.

BEfore I begin to write of the towne and Ilande of Goa, with the coastes, su∣perstitions, and other cu∣stomes of the countrie, ly∣ing behinde and rounde a∣bout Goa, as well where the Portingales inhabit, as where the natiue countrie men are resident, I thought it con∣uenient to begin with the same somwhat fur∣ther off, then at the present time, the better to vnderstand the originall of the people, toge∣ther with the principall causes of the diuisi∣ons of the same countries and nations, as al∣so their Kings names and surnames. Then you must vnderstand that about 300. yeares past, there was a mightie King of the coun∣trie of Deli, which lyeth within the land be∣hind Goa on the Northside, and bordereth vpon the land of Coracone, belonging to the King of Persia, wherein are made the rich Couerlets and hangings, by the Portingales called Alcatyffas, which land of Deli is ve∣rie colde, and hath Snow and Ice in it like the Netherlands. This king of Deli brought vnder his subiection, all the countries border∣ing about him, among the which were De∣cam, Cuncam, Ballagate, and the lande of Goa. At the same time the countrie of Cam∣baia, which is distant from Goa about 100. miles Northward, was ouerrunne and ta∣ken f••rcibly by the Moores, & Mahometans, and brought the naturall countrimen, called Reysbutos being heathens, with great tyra∣nie vnder their subiection. The land of Balla∣gate, and Decam was before inhabited by heathens, that were verie mightie and of great power, whose successors are now cal∣led Venesares, and others that yet dwell within the countrie called Colles: which Colles, Venesares, and Reysbutos of Cam∣baia doe yet liue by robbing and stealing, and those of Cambaia pay tribute to the saide Re∣ysbutos, because they should not robbe and spoyle them, but suffer them to liue in peace. The Colles and Venesares also receiue tri∣bute of the men of Decam and Ballagate: for that the Kings could neuer as yet ouercome

them, although they make no shew thereof, but still dissemble with them, for that of what soeuer they robbe and steale, they haue their parts. After this King of Deli had brought all these kingdomes and countries vnder his subiection: then came the Tartarians, which the Indians call Mogoren, and ouercame most part of the countrie of Deli. At the same time there dwelt in the kingdome of Benga∣len a Noble Gentleman, whose brother the King of Bengallen had wrongfully put to death, whereby this Gentleman sought and deuised all the meanes hee could to bee reuen∣ged, and did not onely bring it to passe by be∣reauing the King of his life, but also tooke the whole kingdome from him, and brought it vnder his subiection, and being in this sorte become absolute Lord and King of Bengalla, was not therewith content, but desiring to augment his kingdome, and thereby to win great fame, did inuade the countrie of Deli, (bordering vpon him) with a great armie of men, and by force draue the Tartarians or Mogoros out of the countrie, and so conque∣red both that lande and all the countries bor∣dering thereabouts, as Decam, Ballagate, and Cuncam, as farre as to the kingdome of Cambaia, and for a time was the greatest Prince in all those quarters. For the Indi∣ans affirme that hee had in Compasse vnder his subiection aboue 800. miles of land. This King raigning for a time ouer al these lands and countries, in the end desiring to liue qui∣etly, and to returne vnto his kingdom of Ben∣gala, thinking it too troublesome for him to rule so great a countrie, did inuest one of his cosins, with the countries of Decam, Bal∣lagate, and Cuncam, with the land of Goa, and the countries bordering about the same, which done, he returned into his land of Ben∣gala, leauing his saide cosin King and com∣mander of the aforesaid countries. This man was alwaies a great friende and wel-willer to strange nations, as Arabians, Turkes, Ruynes, and Corasones, & parted his coun∣tries among Gouernours and Captaines, to on whereof beeing called Idalham, whome the Portingales call Hidalcam, he gaue the Gouernment of Angedina, which lyeth 12. miles from Goa Southwards, stretching to∣wards the North, till you come to a place called Siffardan which are 60. miles, where∣in is contained the towne and Iland of Goa: to an other Captaine called Nisa Maluco, hee gaue the coast of Siffardan stretching Northwards, to Negotana which are 20. miles, and lyeth inwards to the land of Cam∣baia: so that those two Captaines had their gouernments in the countrie of Cuncam, which lyeth on the Sea coast, and seperateth it selfe from the land of Decam, by great and high hils, called Guate. These hils are verie high, and haue many corners and hookes of land, and doe stretch towardes Cambaia, to the Cape de Comorin, and from thence backe againe to the coast of Choramandel. The hill of Guate is so high, that men may easily sée it within Goa, and all the coast a∣long, though commonly it is couered with clouds, and it is the more to bee wondred at, for this respect, because all other hils are vn∣euen, high and low, and this is faire and flat land on the top, with great & goodly fields: & is by the Indians called Ballagate, that is to say, aboue the hill, for Balla is aboue, and Gate is a hill, whereby the Portingals doe commonly cal the whole countrie Ballagate, although the principall part, and the land it selfe is called Decam, and also Canara, wher∣of the inhabitants are called Decanijns and Canaras, as the Kings also in times past v∣sed to beare titles, and call themselues Kings of Decam.

But returning to the diuision of the rest of the countries, he deuided likewise the land of Ballagate or Decam, into Prouinces, gi∣uing one part to Imademaluco, by the Por∣tingales called Madremaluco, and an other part to Cotalmoluco, and an other to Me∣lique Verido. All the said Captaines were strangers, as Turkes, Ruines, and Cora∣sones, except Nisamalucode, who was Sonne to a Gentleman of the Kings house, and because the King had laine with the mo∣ther of Nisamaluco, therefore hee boasted himselfe to be of the linage of the king of De∣cam, all the other Captaines were slaues and seruants, which the King had brought, and placed in those roomes, as putting great trust in them, thinking that they would acknow∣ledge it, and bee thankfull vnto him for the same. But it fell out otherwise, as wee see it commonly doth, and that good is requited with euill, for these Captaines in time, get∣ting credite, authoritie and power, were in great estimation, and as it were, absolute Kings and Gouernours of their Prouinces, for that the king neuer troubled himselfe ther∣with, but layde all the charge vppon them, whereby they beganne to bee puffed vp with pride, and determined to vsurpe the Prouin∣ces vnder him, for them and their successors: And because it grieued them to be in subiecti∣on to an other, and at his commaundement, they all met together, and among them, a∣gréed to take their Lord and King prisoner, and so euery one of them to be sole comman∣ders of the coūtries they had in charge, which they easily brought to effect, for that they had all the meanes they would wish or desire, as 〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

did honour them with the name of Xa, which is to say a King, whereby they had the names of Adelxa, Nisamoxa, and Con∣tumixa, and all the Kings continued so with the name of Xa, which in Persia is a King, and Ismael is a proper name, whereby Xa Ismael, and Xa Thamas are as much to say as King Ismael, and King Thamas, and of the Turkes and Rumes are called Suffy or Soffy, which signifieth a great Captaine. The Kings of Decam also haue a custome when they will honor a man, or recompence their seruice done, and rayse him to dignitie and honour. They giue him the title of Nay∣que, which signifieth a Captaine, as Salua Nayque and Acem Nayque. And whē they will giue a man an honourable title, or salu∣tation, they call him Rau, as Chitarau, which is to say, strong King, and such like ti∣tles, which among them is a great honour. Also Adelham or Hidelcam, is called Sa∣bayo, which signifieth Seigneur or Lord, for the Iland of Goa had a Captaine or Gouer∣nour, that was Lord of the towne, when the Portingales wanne it first, called Sabayo, as the Portingales Chronicles of their Indian conquests doe make mention, whose house or Palace to this day in the Cittie of Goa, is the inquisition house, and a place which stan∣deth betwéene the great Church and the same house, is as yet called the Pallace of Sabayo.

The 28. Chapter. Of the towne and Ilande of Goa, chiefe Cittie of India.

THe Citie of Goa, is the Me∣tropolitan or chiefe Cittie of all the Orientall Indies, where the Portingales haue their traffique, where also the Viceroye, the Arch bish∣op, the Kings Councel, and Chauncerie haue their residence, and from thence are all pla∣ces in the Orientall Indies, gouerned and ruled. There is likewise the staple for all In∣dian commodities, whether all sorts of Mar∣chants doe resort, comming thether both to buy and sell, as out of Arabia, Armenia, Persia, Cambaia, Bengala, Pegu, Sian, Malacca, Iaua, Molucca, China, &c. The Cittie and Iland of Goa, lyeth vnder 15. de∣grees, on the North side, and is distant from the Equinoctiall, (by the way that the Por∣tingales shippes do come thether from Mos∣sambique) 400. miles. It is an Iland whol∣ly compassed about with a riuer, and is aboue thrée miles great, it lyeth within the coast of the firme lande, so that the Iland, with the Sea coast of the firme land, doe both reach as farre each as other into the Sea. It is on∣ly seperated from the firme land, by an arme of the Sea, or of the ryuer, that runneth in by the North side of the towne, and so round about the Iland to the South side, where it entereth againe into the Sea, and is in forme almost like a halfe Moone. The ryuer runneth euen vnto the Towne, and is indif∣ferent broade, there are betwéene the firme land and the Iland, certaine small Ilandes that are all inhabited by the naturall borne countrimen, and on the other side of the town the ryuer is there so small, that in Summer time, by wading to the knées in water, a man may passe it ouer on foote. On the which side the Iland hath a wall with certaine Bul∣warkes, which y^e Portingales of late yeares haue caused to be made, to defend them from the firme land in time of warre, as it often happeneth, for it hath diuers times béene be∣sieged by Dialcan or Hidalcam, at the mouth and the entrie of the ryuer. On the North side lyeth the land of Bardes, which is high land, vnder which land the Portingales doe Anker safely out of all danger, and there they haue a place to lade and vnlade their wares. This land of Bardes is also vnder the Portingall subiection, and is full of Villages inhabited with people that are of the firme land, lying aboue it, called Canarijns, who for the most part are Christians, but obserue their owne manner of apparell, which is to goe all naked, their priuie members onely co∣uered. This land is full of Indian Palme trées, whereon the Indian Nuts called Co∣cos doe grow, as also all the other Ilands ly∣ing in the ryuer. This land of Bardes, is se∣perated from the firme land by a small riuer, which is so little, that it cannot almost be dis∣cerned from the firme land. On the South side of the Iland of Goa, wher the riuer run∣neth againe into the Sea, there commeth e∣uen out with the coast a land, called Salset∣te, which is also vnder the subiection of the Portingales, and is inhabited, and planted both with people and fruite, like the land of Bardes, and is likewise parted with a little ryuer from the firme land. Betwéene this land of Salsette, & the Iland of Goa, lie also some small Ilands, all full of Indian Palme trées, and by the mouth or issue of the ryuer, lyeth an Iland which is called Goa Velha, that is old Goa, from whence there commeth no speciall thing, neither is it much inhabi∣ted. Those lands of Bardes and Salsette, are by the Kings of Portingale let out to farme, and the rents therof are imployed to the pay∣ment of the Archbishop, Cloysters, Priests,

Viceroy, & other the Kings Officers, yearely stipends, which is graunted them, by speciall Priueledges and Patents from the King. The Iland is verie hillie, and in some places so desert and rough, that on some sides men can hardly trauell ouer land (but with great labour) to the towne of Goa, the Iland euen to the Sea side is full of Villages, and inha∣bited by the Canarijus, which are the natu∣rall borne people of the land, and doe altoge∣ther liue by working vpon the land, and by their Palme trees. The villages and dwell∣ings of these Canarijus, are most rounde a∣bout the Iland, and on the water sides, or by small Lakes, whereof there are some fewe, within the Iland, and the cause why they dwell thus, is for that the Palme trées will not grow in any other place but vpon low ground, by the waters, specially in sandie ground: so that there are no Palme trées to be found on the high land within the countrie vnlesse it bee vpon sandie groundes on the Sea coast, or ryuers sides. On the East side of the towne of Goa vpwardes, into the ry∣uer, about thrée miles from the towne of Bar∣des, lyeth a place wher the Portingals ships doe Anker, the ryuer hath some créekes, and a ship of 200. Tunnes or there abouts, may easily discharge before the Towne, but the Portingales great ships must discharge them selues at Bardes: which being done, they may i•• they will fréely goe and lie before the town. The towne is well builte with faire houses and stréetes, after the Portingall manner, but because of the heate they are somewhat lower. They commonly haue their Gardens and Orchards at the backe side of their hou∣ses, full of all kinde of Indian fruites: as also the whole Iland through, they haue many pleasant Gardens and farmes, with houses to play in, and trées of Indian fruites, whether they goe to sport themselues, and wherein the Indian women take great delight. The towne hath in it all sortes of Cloysters and Churches as Lisbone hath, onely it want∣eth Nunnes, for the men cannot get the wo∣men to trauell so farre, where they should be shut vp, and forsake Venus, with whome (so that they may enioy and fulfill their lustes) they had rather loose their liues, whereof they make small account. The Iland is both win∣ter and Summer all alike gréene, and hath alwaies some kinde of fruite in season, which is a great pleasure, the towne lyeth vppon some hils and dales like Lisbone, it hath in times past béene verie small, and walled, with a drie Ditch round about it, wherein there is no water, but when it rayneth, the walles are yet standing, but no Gates remaining, and the towne is now built round about with houses, so that it is, at the least twice as big without the walles, as it is within, and lyeth open without walles or closures, sauing one∣ly that the Iland hath a wal on the East side, which beginneth ouer against the land of Sal∣sette, and so runneth along vntill you come at Bardes, and is onely to defend them from the firme land, where the Portingales haue no commaundement. The whole Iland hath no other defence, but onely vpon the corner of the land of Bardes, at the mouth of the ry∣uer, where there standeth an olde ruinous Castle, wherein lyeth two or thrée Iron pée∣ces, and one man that in the night time kée∣peth the watch, the Iland on the Sea side is verie high, full of stonie Cliffes, but the land of Bardes hath on the Sea side a verie faire white Sand, about halfe a mile long, and somewhat more: the defence of the Ilande consisteth herein, that on the East side there are thrée or foure passages or Gates, that stand vpon the water side, on the vttermost part of the Iland, right against the firme land, Salsette and Bardes, euerie gate or passage hath a Captaine and a clarke, which kéepe watch, that no man may passe into the other side, but by their licence. And the Indi∣ans, Decanijus, and other Moores and hea∣thens, that are resident in Goa, and therein haue their habitation, when they goe into the firme land to fetch their necessarie proui∣sions, comming to those places which are cal∣led Passos, they must euerye man haue a marke, which is Printed on their naked armes, and so they passe ouer to the other side, and at their returne againe they must shew the same marke, whereby they may fréely enter, for the which they pay two Ba∣sarukes, which is as much as a Hollanders Doit, and this is the profit that the Captain and Clarke of the said Passos doe make. In the night they haue a Boy, that kéepeth watch, and hath a small Bell, which hangeth ouer the gate, which Boylyeth downe, and tieth the string of the Bell at his foote and so ringeth it often times, to shew that hee wat∣cheth, which is all the watch they hold tho∣roughout the whole Iland. There are fiue of these Passos, one vpon the South side of the Iland, where men passe to the firme lande, and to the land of Salsette, and is called Be∣nesterijn, commonly named Passo de Saint Iago, because the Parish of Saint Iacobs standeth ther: The Tebe de Passo is on the East side of the Iland, where men doe onely passe into. The firme land called O Passo Secco, which is the drie passage, for in that place the ryuer is at the narrowest and shal∣lowest. The third Passo on the South side of the Iland, ioyneth almost to the Towne,

called O Passo de Daugijn, or of Madre de Deus, and so farre goeth the wall, begin∣ning at Passo de Benesterijn, or S. Iago, and from thence the whole Iland is without any wall or closure: from this Passo, right o∣uer against it, they passe ouer to an Iland, which is hard by the firme land, where is al∣so a Passo called O Passo de Norwa: the fift or last Passo lyeth in the middle way of the Riuer downwards towards Bardes, which is the strongest of them all, and best looked vnto, but no otherwise made then all the rest, & is called O Passo de Pangijn, frō thence they passe to Bardes, and also all the boates and ships that passe in and out of the riuer, must stay there & be searched, and this is all their watch and strentgh in the Iland.

Touching the Portingales iustice and ordinances, as well in worldly as spirituall causes, they are al one as they are in Portin∣gale. They dwell in the towne among all sorts of nations, as Indians, Heathens, Moores, Iewes, Armenians, Gusarates, Benianes, Bramenes, and of all Indian na∣tions and people, which doe all dwell and tra∣ficke therein, euerie man holding his owne religion, without constrayning any man to doe against his conscience, onely touching their ceremonies of burning the dead, and the liuing, of marrying & other superstitious & de∣uelish inuentions, they are forbidden by the Archbishop to vse them openly, or in the Il∣and, but they may fréelie vse them vpon the firme land, and secretly in their houses, there∣by to shunne and auoid all occasions of dislike that might be giuen to Christians, which are but newlie baptised: but touching the worldly policie or good gouernement of the countrie, and executing of iustice, as also for the ruling of the townes men in the citie: it is common to them all, and they are vnder the Portin∣gales law, and he that is once christened, and is after found to vse any heathenish supersti∣tions, is subiect to the Inquisition, what so e∣uer he be, or for any point of Religion what so euer.

The Iland hath nothing of it self to nou∣rish it withall, but onely some cattle, hennes, goates, doues, &c. but very fewe, because of the barrennesse and euil situation of the place, which is a most hillie, barren, and wild coun∣trie, and full of wast ground: all their neces∣saries, as beastes, hennes, hogges, egges, milke, &c. come from Salsette and Bardes, but most part out of the firme land, Corne, Rice, and other grayne: also Oyle, and all o∣ther necessaries come from other countries, and are brought in by the Riuer, as frō Cam∣baia on the North side, and from the coast of Malabar and other places, as in the descrip∣tion of the coast we haue in part declared: of wyne called wyne of palme trées, they haue inough, and so much that they haue to spare for other places. They haue but little fresh water, but only one Well called Banganiin, which stādeth about a quarter of a mile with out the Cittie, wherewith the whole towne is serued, which the slaues fetch in pots & sel it in the towne, and is verie good to drinke: for water to dresse meat, wash, and doe other thinges withall, they commonly haue Wels within their houses: the land of it self is verie stonie and drie, hauing a kinde of red earth, so that some Italian Alchymistes haue pro∣mised to get Copper & Gold out of the same, which neither y^e king nor Vice-roy would e∣uer cōsēt vnto, fearing least the report of such treasure would be occasion of greater troble vnto them by their enemies that are round a∣bout them, through the desire that they haue of riches, and therefore they haue deferred to séeke for it: by the mappe hereafter following you may sée the situation of the Iland and Towne of Goa, with all the stréetes, Chur∣ches and places liuely described.

The 29. Chapter. Of the customes of the Portingales, and such as are issued from them, called Me∣sticos, or half countrimen, as wel of Goa, as of all the Oriental countries.

THe Portingales in India, are many of them marryed with the naturall borne women of the countrie, and the children procéeding of them are called Mesticos, that is, half countrimen. These Mesticos are commonlie of yelowish colour, notwithstanding there are manie women a∣mong them, that are faire and well formed. The children of the Portingales, both boyes and gyrls, which are borne in India, are cal∣led Castisos, and are in all things like vnto the Portingales, onely somewhat differing in colour, for they draw towards a yealow colour: the children of those Castisos are yea∣low, and altogether like the Mesticos, and the children of Mesticos are of colour and fashion like the naturall borne Countrimen or Decaniins of the countrie, so that the po∣steritie of the Portingales, both men and womē being in the third degrée, doe séeme to be naturall Indians, both in colour & fashion. Their liuings and daylie traffiques are to Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, Cambaia, China, and euerie way, both North and South: also in Goa there is holden a daylie assemblie or

méeting together, as wel of the Citizens and Inhabitants, as of all nations throughout India, and of the countries bordering on the same, which is like the méeting vpō the burse in Andwarpe, yet differeth much from that, for that hether in Goa there come as well Gentlemen, as marchants and others, and there are all kindes of Indian commodities to sell, so that in a manner it is like a Faire. This méeting is onely before Noone, euerie day in the yeare, except Sondayes and holie dayes: it beginneth in y^e morning at 7. of the clocke, and continueth till 9. of the clocke, but not in the heate of the day, nor after Noone, in the principal stréete of the Citie, named the straight stréete, and is called the Leylon, which is as much to say, as an outroop: there are certain cryers appointed by the Citie for y^e purpose, which haue of al things to be cryed and sold: these goe all the time of the Leylon or outroop, all behangd about with all sorts of gold chaines, all kindes of costly Iewels, pearles, rings, and precious stones: likewise they haue running about them, many sorts of captiues and slaues, both men and women, young and old, which are daylie sould there, as beasts are sold with vs, where euerie one may chuse which liketh him best, euerie one at a certaine price. There are also Arabian horses, all kinde of spices and dryed drugges, sweet gummes, and such like things, fine and costly couerlets, and many curious things, out of Cambaia, Sinde, Bēgala, China, &c. and it is wonderfull to sée in what sort many of them get their liuinges, which euery day come thether to buy wares, and at an other time sel them again. And when any man di∣eth, all his goods are brought thether & sold to the last pennie worth, in the same outroop, who soeuer they be, yea although they were the Viceroyes goods: and this is done to doe right and iustice vnto Orphanes & widdows, and that it may be sold with the first, where euerie man may sée it, so that euerie yeare there is great quantitie of ware sold within that Citie, for that there die many men with∣in the Towne, by meanes of their disordered liuing, together with the hotenes of the coū∣try: the like assemblie is holden in all places of India, where the Portingales inhabite. There are some married Portingales, that get their liuings by their slaues, both men and women, wherof some haue 12, some 20, and some 30, for it costeth them but little to kéepe them. These slaues for money doe labour for such as haue néede of their helpe, some fetch fresh water, and sell it for money about the stréetes: the women slaues make all sorts of confectures and conserues of Indian fruites, much fyne néedle worke, both cut and wrought workes, and thē their maister send the fairest and the youngest of them well drest vp with their wares about the stréetes to sell the same, that by the neat∣nes & bewtie of the said women slaues, men might be moued to buy, which happeneth more for the affection they haue to the slaues & to fulfill their pleasure with them, then for any desire to the conserues or néedle workes: for these slaues doe neuer refuse them, but make their daylie liuing thereby, and with the gaines that they by that meanes bring home, their maisters may well kéepe and maintaine them. There are others that vse exchanging of moneyes, and to buy money when it cometh, as tyme serueth to fell it a∣gaine, for they buy the Rials of eight, when the shippes come from Portingale, whereof some buy at the least 10 or 12 hundreth, and kéepe them till the Moneth of April, which is the time when the shippes sayle to China, for then are the Rials of eight sought for to carry thether, and are commonly worth 25 or 30 in the hundreth profite, and then they receiue for them a certain money, which at the same time is brought frō Ormus, called Larriins, that come out of Persia, which they buy for 8 or 10 in the hundreth profite, & kéepe them til the Portingales on the moneth of Septē∣ber come thether, and so deliuer them againe for 20 or 25 in the hundreth profite, in ex∣change for Rials of eight, as I said before, for they must haue these Larriins with them to Cochin, to buy pepper and other wares, for that it is the best and most profitable money. There are yet other sorts of money called Pagodes, Venetianers, & Santhones, which are gold, al which they doe likewise buy & sel, so y^t there are manie that doe nothing els, & become rich, speciallie he that hath a good stocke. This exchange cometh most cōmon∣lie from the Spiritualtie, who do secretly vse it, by other mens meanes, without any let or hinderance. Some there are that liue vpon their rents which they haue by their palme trées, whereon the Indian nut called Cocus doth grow, whereof they may very well liue and haue well to maintaine themselues, for that it is the principall commoditie of that Iland.

There are some that let out their trées, and haue euery day for each trée half a Pardawe or more, which is as much as a Carolus Guilderne, and some haue 300 or 400 trées and more vpon one ground, which they let out vnto the Canariins, as we let out our pastures, medowes & corn grounds. The Portingales and Mesticos in India neuer worke, if they doe, it is but very little,

[illustration]

Indorum casae, villae, et vici circa Goam.

[illustration]

Indische hutte Lanthuÿsen en dorpen ontrent Goa.

〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

[illustration]

Contenancijen en habyten der Portugeesers so burgers als Soldaten in oost Indien als se op die straten comen.

[illustration]

Hoc habitu, qui e Lusitanis Nobilitate aut dignitate clariores in India fere conspiciuntur per plateas obequitant.

[illustration]

Op dese maniere ryden gemeenlick over stracten die Portugee∣sche Edellieden Regierders en̄ Raetsheeren.

[illustration]

Hac forma Lusitanorum nobiliores et qui opulen∣tiores se gestari jubent

[illustration]

Op dese maniere laeten haer die Portugeesen draegen die van affcomtste en vermoegen zÿn.

〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

[illustration]

Fusten welcke die Portugeesen en haer vianden dic Malabaren gebruÿcken ter oorloch, en om coopmanschap te voeren

and that not often, but the most part of them liue in such sort, as I haue shewed you, al∣though there are some handie crafts men, as Hat-makers, Shoe-makers, Saylemakers, and Coopers: but most of them haue their slaues to worke in their shops, and the mais∣ters when they walke vp and downe the stréetes, goe as proudlie as the best: for there one is no better then an other, as they think, the rich and the poore man all one, without a∣ny difference in their conuersations, curtesies and companies. All other handie crafts men and workmen, are most Indians, Heathens, and Christians of the land: no man is permit∣ted to the liberties of being a frée Citizen of the towne, but such as are marryed and resi∣dent therein.

There are among them but two manner of people, that is, married men and soldiers, for that all young men vnmarried are named soldiers, which is the best name that a man can haue, not that the soldiers are any waies bound or vnder the commandement and regi∣ment of any Captain, which throughout In∣dia, is not vsed but when the Portingalles come into India out of Portingall, and are ariued there, euery man goeth where hee thinketh best, although in Portingall euery mans name that goeth in the shippe is writ∣ten and registred, which is done in this sorte: euery man is written vp, both his name and sirname, with a note what pay they receyue of the King, whereof some beare the tytle of Fidalgo da Caza del Rey nossas Senor, that is, a Gentleman of the Kinges house, which is the chiefest title: there are others named Mozos Fidalgos, which is also an honorable title, and they are commonly Gen∣tlemens sonnes, or by the kinges fauour ad∣uaunced therevnto: There are yet others that are named Caualhiero Fidalgo, which is not so much as the other two, yet it is an honorable title, and is the title of a knight, who for some valiant act by him done is made knight, which they do for a small matter: for that if he do any act to be accounted of, or bee in a manner at such an action doing, present∣ly he is of a Captaine or a Gentleman made a knight, whereof they much boast them∣selues: and it is nowe growne so common a∣mong them, that very Cookes boyes and o∣thers as meane as they, are made knightes: there are others also that are named Mosos da Camara, do Numero, e do Seruiço, which is seruantes to the King, some of his chamber, some of his accounts, and some for his seruice, this is the first title or degrée of credite, whereby through their good seruice they attaine vnto better, and are more glori∣ous of their titles, then of all the riches in the world. There are also that are named Escu∣deros Fidalgos, that is Esquires, which is likewise a degrée of credit: Others are named Hommes honorados, which is mē of honor, and the poorest among them (which are not named by any title) are set downe for soldiers, which are the common and rascall sort: these are euery man paide their wages according to their titles, and may each man in his qua∣litie (by long seruice, or some good action, but most by fauour) rise to higher degrée; for that according to their tytles their seruice is re∣warded. The Portingalles which saile for India, being thus registred & written downe, the said Register at their arriuall there, is de∣liuered to be kept by one of the kinges Offi∣cers therevnto appointed, which euery three yeares is likewise changed, as other offices are, and is called the chiefe Clearke of the Matricola Generall, and hath thrée or foure vnder Clearks at his commandement. Now in India when summer time commeth, and that it is néedefull or necessary to send out an armie for some expedition to be done, or for to kéepe the coast, to conuoy and safe-conduct the trauelling Marchants that dayly sayle to and from India, thereby to defend them and to let the Malabares their enemies from issuing forth to hurt them (as notwithstanding they yearly doe:) then against September (which is the beginning of their Sommer) the drum is stricken vp, and it is proclaimed, that who∣soeuer will serue the king in his fléete by sea, let him come to the Matricola Generall to receyue his money, and then by the Viceroy there is ordained a chiefe Captaine, and other vnder Captains for euery Fuste and Galley: and in euery galley there is about a hundreth men, and in euery Fuste thirtie men, little more or lesse. These are all paide by the Ma∣tricola, according to their tytles euery man as they are registred, when they come out of Portingal: and this pay is made euery quar∣ter, each quarter contayning thrée monthes, that is, the common soldier seuen Pardawen, called Xeraffins (euery Pardawe thrée te∣stones Portingall money) and a man of ho∣nor nine Pardawen. The Moso da Camara or seruant of the chamber eleuen Pardawen, & so by degrées: which done the Captaines bidde their soldiers to a banket, and of their own purses giue them something beside their pay, for that euery Captaine séeketh to haue the best soldiers, and buy much victuailes and other thinges at their owne charges, thereby to haue their soldiers good willes, and to vse them wel. They sit altogether at one table in the Fustes or Gallies, where the Captaine vseth the soldiers with great fauour and curte∣sie, for otherwise they woulde not much e∣stéeme

him, nor yet obay him. The fléet be∣ing out, it sayleth backewarde and forwards along the coast, and sometimes into some ha∣uens till the Month of Aprill, and about the last of that Month they enter againe into the riuer of Goa, where they winter, and then the soldiers are frée, and euery man goeth his way, without any further pay of the king. Then the Viceroy maketh a certificate for the Generall of the fléete, wherein he testifi∣eth that such a Captaine by his commaunde∣ment hath béene so many Monthes in the kings seruice at sea, & hauing done any matter of importance, it is therein set down at large, and how that hee out of his owne purse hath spent and laid out much money for the seruice of his Maiestie, and according to this certifi∣cate the Captaine Generall maketh certifi∣cates for euery one of his vnder Captaines and soldiers, in the same sort. There are like∣wise some Gentlemen that in winter time keepe open houshold for all soldiers that will come thether to meate, whereof also they haue certificates, and for all things that they doe, which certificates they kéepe till they be some ten, twelue, or twentie, and with the Viceroyes licence go therewith to Portin∣gall, asking some recompence for their serui∣ces, according to their certificates: withall they must bring a certificate from the Matri∣cola General of that their residence in India, and that there hath not any deuise or subtilty béene vsed about setting downe their titles. The like must they haue from all other offi∣cers, receiuers and accountants both for mu∣nition and armour wherewith they serued in warre, for victuails also and such like, where∣of many times the captaines and soldiers doe make but badde accounts, and many of them are aforehande with the king, which is pre∣sently registred vnder the title of him that hath committed the fault: from these Offi∣cers also they must haue certificates, that there is no such thing committed by them: with these certificates they sayle to Portin∣gall, where there is an office of remembran∣ces, to aske their rewardes by, as their qua∣lities and seruices are or shalbe rewarded: but if they haue any friend in the court to speake for them, & by greasing their hands to procure dispatch: then doe they obtaine those offices for thrée yeares as Captaynes, Factors, Clearkes, Iudges, &c. and all other offices and places in India, but they must serue the place themselues in person. Some of them by fauour get licences to passe them away, to sell them, or to giue them with their daugh∣ters in mariage, and then the patent for such offices are registred in the Kings Chancery, and sent into India where they must be con∣firmed by the Viceroy. These offices are al∣waies giuen in reuersion after him that hath it promised before them, and then the Regi∣ster is searched, to sée how many are before him that asketh the said places, & when their time is out, or that they chaunce to die before they come to it, or be absent (as many times it happeneth) then he which is next in reuersi∣on hath the place, and is ready to receyue it. And this in briefe is the manner of their go∣uernement and policie for martiall affaires: their other gouernment for iustice and equitie is as they vse it in Portingall. By the table hereafter following you may sée the descrip∣tion of the strait streete in Goa, with the day∣ly méeting therein, which they call Leylon, liuely portrayed.

The 30. Chapter. Of the Portingalles and Mesticos, their houses, curtesies, mariages, and other customes and manners in India.

THe Portingals, Mesticos, and Christians kéepe wor∣shipfull and bountifull hou∣ses, hauing commonly (as it is said before) fiue, sixe, ten, twentie, some more, some lesse slaues, both men and women, in their houses euery man accor∣ding to his estate and qualitie, I meane mari∣ed men. They are very cleanly and swéet in all things belonging to their houses, specially in their linnen, for that euery day they change shirtes and smockes both men and women, and their slaues and seruants likewise with o∣ther thinges that they weare, which they doe because of the great heat in that land. The Portingals are commonly serued with great grauitie, without any difference betwéene the Gentleman & the common Citizen, townes∣man or soldier, and in their going, curtesies, and conuersations, common in all thinges: when they go in the stréetes they steppe very softly and slowly forwards, with a great pride and vaineglorious maiestie, with a slaue that carrieth a great hat or vaile ouer their heads, to keepe the sunne and raine from them. Also when it raineth they commonly haue a boy that beareth a cloke of Scarlet or of some o∣ther cloth after them, to cast ouer them: and if it bee before noone, hee carrieth a cushin for his maister to knéele on when hee heareth Masse, and their Rapier is most commonly carried after them by a boy, that it may not trouble them as they walke, nor hinder their

[illustration]

Goensi se quanta foro viden area pandat Plana frequens tectis splendida dives opum?

[illustration]

Ʋt mercem hic properet gemmis auroque nitentem Ille abducta procul vendere mancipia?

Congesta huc videas Ga•• 〈…〉〈…〉 Insulae et Eoo max•• 〈…〉〈…〉

[illustration]

Fori Goensis tabernarum mercium et mer∣catorum illud frequentantium aperta ex∣plicatio per ••Linschoten.

〈…〉〈…〉

grauities. When they méete in the stréetes a good space before they come together, they be∣ginne with a great Besolas manos, to stoope with their bodies, and to thrust forth their foot to salute each other, with their hattes in their hands, almost touching the ground: likewise when they come into the Church where they haue their stooles ready, which their slaues haue prepared for them: all that are by him that commeth in do stande vp, and with the same manner of bowing of their bodies doe him great reuerence, and if it chaunceth that any doeth him reuerence (as the manner is) & that he to whom it is done doth not greatly estéeme thereof, so that he doeth him not the like curtesie, they do altogether for that cause go after him, and cut his hatte in péeces, say∣ing that he had disgraced the partie, wherein it is not for them to aske wherfore they shold so do; for it would bee the greatest shame and reproch in the world vnto them if they should not reuenge so great an iniury: & when they seeke to bee reuenged of any man that hath shewen them discurtesie, or for any other cause whatsoeuer it bee, they assemble ten or twelue of their friends, acquaintance or com∣panions, and take him wheresoeuer they find him, and beat him so long together, that they leaue him for dead, or very neare dead, or els cause him to be stabbed by their slaues, which they hold for a great honor and point of hone∣stie so to reuenge themselues, whereof they dare boast and bragge openly in the stréetes, but if they desire not to kil him, they baste him well about the ribs and all his body ouer with a thicke réede, as big as a mans legge, which is called Bambus, whereby for eyght dayes after and more he hath inough to do to kéepe his bed, and sometime in that manner they leaue him for deade. This is their common custome, and is neuer looked vnto or once cor∣rected. Also they vse long bagges full of sand, wherewith they will giue such blowes each vpon other, that therewith they will breake each others limmes, and for euer after make them lame. When any man goeth to visite an other in his house, although he which is vi∣sited be one of the principal Gentlemen of the Citie, and the visitor but a simple soldier, or some other man, it is the manner that hee which is visited commeth vnto the doore of his house, with his hatte in his hand, and with great curtesie to receyue him that commeth to visite him, and so leadeth him vp into his hall or chamber, wherein he will speake with him, where hee offereth him a chaire to sitte downe, and then hee himselfe sitteth by him, then hee asketh him what hee woulde haue, which hauing vnderstoode hee bringeth him downe againe to the dore in the like sort, and so with a Besolas manos biddeth him fare∣wel, and if he should not doe so, or when hee giueth him a stool, shold giue him one vnlined, or one y^t is lesse or lower then that hee taketh for himselfe, he that visiteth him woulde take it in euil parte, estéeming it a great scorne, & séeke to be reuenged on him for the same.

When they haue any weddinges and are married, whosoeuer they be if they haue any wealth, all the friendes and neighbours come together, euery man on horsebacke, and hee that hath not a horse wil borrow one, and are euery man very costly apparelled, at the least some 50. or 100. horses little more or lesse, as the person is of qualitie, and so they ride alto∣gether in good order vnto the Church with their seruantes, and euery man his hatte for the Sunne, the parentes and friendes in the hinder part, and in y^e last row the bridegroome betwéene two of them, whom they call gos∣sops: after them followeth the bryde betwéen two Commeres, each in their Pallamkin, which is most costly made, and after them fol∣lowe the slaues both men and women going in troupes, as if they ranne to hunt, and so comming to the Church, and being married according to the order vsed in the Church of Rome: they are in the same order brought home again, and passing through the stréets, the neighbours leaning vppon Indian Car∣pets looke out of the windowes, and throwe Rose water vpon the Bryde & Bridegroome, and other sweet smelling waters, with Roses and Sugar Comfets, or corne. In the mean time their slaues play vppon Shalmes and Trumpets most pleasant and melodious to heare, and comming to the house where the Bride and the Bridegroome dwel, with great reuerence and curtesie bowing downe their bodies, they take their leaues of all the com∣pany, which are all on horsebacke about the dore. And so the Bride, the Bridegroome and the Commeres go vp & sit with great graui∣tie in a window, and then beginne the horse∣men that led them to Church, in honor of the married couple, one after the other to runne a course, the gossops beginning first, and the rest following twice or thrice one after the o∣ther, with continuall playing on Shalmes, which are very common in India, for that he which is of any wealth hath them of his own within his house. This being ended, they all passe before the window where the Bride and Bridegroome sit, with a great reuerence, and so passe on all sauing the Gossoppes, for they go vp to the Bride and Bridegroome, and bid God giue them ioy, then is there some Com∣fets and Marchpane brought forth, to drinke a cuppe of water withall, and after some cur∣teous salutations and congratulations to the

〈…〉〈…〉 couple, they take their leaues & 〈…〉〈…〉 so there remaineth with the Bride & ••idegroom but three or four of their nearest friendes and kinsemen, for whome there is a dinner prepared, with little meate, yet very costly, which they passe ouer very lightly, and not many wordes, which done they presently bring the Bride to bed, without any other ce∣remonies or charges, wherewith the mari∣age is done and ended. Oftentimes it chaun∣ceth that they go to bed at y^e least two houres before Sunne setting, not hauing the pa∣tience to stay so long as we do in these coun∣tries. When a childe is to be christened, it is likewise in the same sorte led to Church with horses, & last of all commeth the father alone, after whom followeth two men on foote, the one with a great siluer or guilt vessell full of bread baked like cracklinges, which in Por∣tingall are called Rosquilhos, and in the mid∣dle a great Ware candle, well made and gil∣ded, thrust through with some peeces of mo∣ney of golde and siluer, for an offering to the Priest that baptiseth the childe, and all ouer strowed and couered with Roses: the other carryeth a great siluer or gilt saltseller in one of his handes, and a lampe of the same stuffe in his other hande, each with rich and costly Towels on their sholders: after that follow∣eth two Pallamkins, on the one side y^e Com∣mere, on the other side the Midwife with the child, couered with a costly mantle, made for the purpose, and so the ceremonies of baptis∣me being ended in the Church, it is againe in the like sort brought home, and beeing there, they haue the like manner of musicke and shalmes, running and leaping with their hor∣ses before the window where the Commere sitteth, with the same ceremonies as at the wedding. This is the manner and custome of those that are married and keepe house.

But concerning the souldier that is vnma∣ried, thus it is. They goe in the summer time into the Armado lying on the water, and be∣ing within the townes and on the land, they are very stately apparrelled, and goe verie grauely along the streets with their slaues or men hired for the purpose, that beare a hatte ouer them for the sunne and raine: for there are many Indiās that are daily hired for the purpose, and haue 12. Basarucos the day, which is as much as two s••iuers or a stoter, & they serue such as haue no slaues, and that will not keepe any to that end. The souldi∣ers dwell at least ten or twelue in a house, where they haue among them a slaue or hi∣••ed Indian or two which serueth them, and washeth their shirts, and haue foure or fiue stooles with a table, and euery man a Bedde. Their meate is Rice sodden in water, with some salt fish, or some other thing of small value (without breade) and cleare fountaine water for their drinke, wherewith they are well pleased. They haue amongst them all one or two good sutes of apparell, all of silke as the manner is there, and when one goeth abroad, the other stay at home, for in the house they haue no néede of clothes, (but sit whosoeuer they bee) in their shirts & a paire of linnen bréeches, and so as it were naked by reason of the great heate, for if some of them haue occasion to goe out twenty times in one day, they must so often lend him their appa∣rel, and hee must likewise put off his clothes, as often as he commeth home againe. Some souldiers haue a Gentleman or Captaine to their friendes which lendeth them monie to apparell themselues withall, to the end when summer time commeth, they may be ready to goe with them in Fléet to sea, as also to haue their friendship, by night and at other times to beare them company, or to helpe them to bee reuenged of any iniury by them receiued, as I said before: for that he which in India hath most souldiers to his friends, is most re∣garded and feared. So that to bee short, in this manner they doe maintaine themselues in common, whereby they are able to come in presence of the best of the countrie. Manie and most of them haue their chiefe mainte∣nance from the Portingales and Mesticos wiues, as also the Indian Christians wiues, which doe alwaies bestow liberall rewardes and giftes vppon them to satisfie and fulfill their vnchaste and filthie desires, which they know very well how to accomplish, and se∣cretly bring to passe. There are some like∣wise that get their liuings by their friends, trauelling for them from place to place with some wares and marchandises, and they are called Chattims. These doe giue ouer and leaue the office of a souldier in the Fléete, and the Kinges seruice: for as it is said, there is no man compelled thereunto, although their names be registred in the office, yet doe they still keepe the name of souldier, as long as they trauaile abroad and are not married. The souldiers in these dayes giue themselues more to be Chattims, and to deale in Mar∣chandise, then to serue the King in his Arma∣do, because the Captaines and Gentlemen begin to be ••lacke in doing good vnto them, as in times past they vsed to doe. Also they giue themselues to rest and pleasure: wherefore if they can deuise any meanes for it, they had rather trauaile & deale in trade of Marchan∣dise, and to marie and be quiet, in respect that the common souldiers in these dayes are but slackely paide: for that when they haue at the least ten or twenty certificates to shew

for their former seruices, then haue they not the meanes to furnish themselues with pro∣uision to make a voyage into Portingale, or to take any presents with them there to be∣stow them: for without such meanes, they are neyther heard nor yet regarded, and if it fall out that they doe procure the reuersion of any offices, it is so long before the time com∣meth that they doe enioy them, beeing many in reuersion, that oftentimes they die before they can obtaine them. Againe the long tra∣uaile and great voyage maketh many to stay in India, and to employ their time to other trades, as they can best prouide themselues. By these meanes the wars in India are not so hot, nor so throughly looked into, neyther a∣ny other countries sought into or founde out, as at first they vsed to doe. Now they doe onely striue to get praise and commendation, and to leaue a good report behinde them: and now likewise they are all giuen to scraping & catching, as well the Viceroy, Gouernours, and others, as also the Church men and spi∣ritualtie, little passing or esteeming the com∣mon profit or the seruice of the King, but on∣ly their particular profits, making their ac∣count, that the time of their abode is but thrée yeares: wherefore they say they will not doe otherwise then those that were before them did, but say that others which come after thē shall take care for all: for that the King (say they) gaue them their offices, thereby to pay them for their seruices in times past, and not for the profit of the common wealth: there∣fore there is no more countries in India won or new found out, but rather heere and there some places lost, for they haue enough to doe, to hold that they haue alreadie, and to defende it from inuasion, as also that they doe scoure the Sea coastes, and yet many Marchants haue great losses euery yeare, by meanes of the sea rouers, and together with the euill gouernment of the Portingales, and it is to be feared, it will bee worser euery day then o∣ther▪ as it is euidently séene. This shall suf∣fice for the manners and customes of the In∣dian Portingales, and their warlike gouern∣ments, which is commonly by sea, for by land they cannot trauaile, by reason of the diffe∣rent kingdomes, and nations consisting of di∣uers seuerall sortes of people, which are al∣waies enemies, and neuer liue in peace, and some of them being friends, other enemies to the Portingales: for the Portingales haue only some Townes, places and fortresses, with their Hauens on the sea coast, without holding any thing within the land, as in the description of the coast wee haue alreadie de∣clared.

By the pictures hereafter following may be séene the formes and portraitures of the Portingales that are maried, and of the soul∣diers in India, as they walke in the streetes: as also howe they ride, not onely gentlemen, but euery man that hath the abilitie to keepe a horse, as well Marchantes as handicraftes men▪ of what sort soeuer they bee, and howe they cause themselues to bee carried in P••l∣lamkins, in the streetes and throughout the townes, when they will not ride nor goe on foote. You may likewise sée their fustes wher∣with they go to warre vpon the water which the Malabares their enimies doe likewise vse, (for they haue no other sorts of scutes nor shippes,) and doe much mischiefe there∣with: they are verie light, as well to saue as to row, they vse them also for Marchandise, because of the fitnes of the same, to passe from place to place.

The 31. Chapter Of the maner and customes of Portin∣gale and Mesticos women in India.

THe Portingales, Mesticos, and Indian Christian wo∣men in India, are little séene abroad, but for the most part sit still within the house, and goe but sel∣dome forth, vnlesse it be to Church▪ or to visit their friends, which is likewise but verie lit∣tle, and when they goe abroad, they are well prouided not to be seene, for they are carried in a Pallamkin couered with a mat or other cloth, so that they cannot be seene.

When they goe to church, or to visit any friend, they put on very costly apparrell, with bracelets of gold, & rings vpon their armes, all beset with costly Iewels & pearles, and at their eares hang laces full of Iewels. Their clothes are of Damaske, Veluet, and cloth of gold, for silke is the worst thing they doe weare. Within the house they goe bare hea∣ded, with a wastcoate called Baju, that from their shoulders couereth their nauels, and is so fine that you may see al their body through it, and downewards they haue nothing but a painted cloth wrapped three or foure times a∣bout their bodies. These clothes are very faire, some of them being very costly wrought with loome worke, and diuers figures and flowers of all colours, all the rest of the body is naked without any hose, but onely bare footed in a paire of moyles or pantos••es, and the men in like sort. This is their manner in the house both old, and young, rich, & poore, none excepted, for they goe forth but very lit∣tle, and then they are both couered and carri∣ed,

and what they néed abroad, that the slaues both men and women doe fetch in. The wo∣men eate no bread or very little, nor yet the slaues, not that they refuse it for the deare∣nes or want of bread, (for they haue enough and great aboundance) but they are so vsed to eate rice, that they desire no other, which they seeth with water and eate it with some salt fish, or a kinde of salt fruit called Man∣gas, or with some other composition both of fish and flesh, with pottage which they powre vpon it, and so eate it with their handes: for there they eate nothing with spoones, and if they should sée any man doe so, they would laugh at him. When they drinke they haue certaine pots made of blacke earth very fine and thin, much like those that we vse in Hol∣land for flower pottes, hauing in the necke thereof a partition full of holes with a spout, (and these cruses are called Gorgoletta,) to this end, that when they drinke, they may hold the potte on high, and touch it not with their mouthes, but the water running from the spout falleth into their mouthes, neuer spilling drop, which they doe for cleanlinesse, because no man should put it to his mouth, & when any man commeth newly out of Por∣tingall, and then beginneth to drinke after their manner, because he is not vsed to that kinde of drinking, he spilleth it in his bosome, wherein they take great pleasure and laugh at him calling him Reynol, which is a name giuen in iest to such as newlie come from Portingall, & know not how to behaue them selues in such graue manner, and with such ceremonies as the Portingales vse therein India: so that at the first they are much whooped and cried at in the stréets, vntill by vse and practise they haue learned the Indian manner, which they quicklie doe. The men are very iealous of their wiues, for they will neuer bring any man into their houses, how speciall a friend soeuer hee bee, that shall sée their wiues or their daughters, vnlesse it bee some gossip or any other married man with his wife in companie. When they will goe together to some place to sport and solace thē∣selues, they are alwaies well garded by their slaues, both men and women both for their safety and seruice. If any man commeth to the doore to aske for the master of the house, presently the wiues and their daughters run to hide them, and so leaue the man to answer him that standeth at the dore: likewise they suffer no man to dwell within their houses, where the women and daughters bee, howe neere kinsman soeuer he be vnto them, being once 15. yeares of age, nor their owne sons, but haue certaine chambers and places be∣neath, or besides their house where they lye, & may in no sort come among the women, and thether they send them their meate and other prouisions, for it hath oftentimes béene séene in those countries, that the vncles sonne hath laine by his aunt, and the brother by the bro∣thers wife, and the brother with his sister: whereof I haue knowne some that haue bin taken with the manner, and that both they and the woman haue beene slaine by the hus∣bands. The women are verie luxurious and vnchaste, for there are very few among them, although they bee married, but they haue be∣sides their husbands one or two of those that are called souldiers, with whome they take their pleasures: which to effect, they vse al the slights and practises they can deuise, by send∣ing out their slaues and baudes by night, and at extraordinary times, ouer walles, hedges, and ditches, how narrowlie soeuer they are kept and looked vnto. They haue likewise an hearbe called Deutroa, which beareth a séed, whereof brusing out the sap, they put it into a cup or other vessell, and giue it to their hus∣bands, eyther in meate or drinke, and pre∣sently therewith, the man is as though hee were halfe out of his wits, and without fee∣ling, or els drunke, doing nothing but laugh, and sometime it taketh him sleeping, where∣by he lieth like a dead man, so that in his pre∣sence they may doe what they will, and take their pleasure with their friends, and the hus∣band neuer know of it. In which sort he con∣tinueth foure and twentie houres long, but if they wash his féete with colde water hee pre∣sently reuiueth, and knoweth nothing there∣of, but thinketh he had slept.

Deutroa of some called Tacula, of o∣thers Datura, in Spanish Burla Dora, in Dutch Igell Kolben, in Malaba Vumata Caya, in Canara Datura, in Arabia Mara∣na, in Persia and Turkie Datula. Of the description of this hearbe and fruit you may read in the Herballes, if any man re∣ceaueth or eateth but halfe a dramme of this feed, hee is for a time bereaued of his wits, & taken with an vnmesurable laugh∣ter.

There are many men poysoned by their wiues, if they once be mooued: for they know howe to make a certaine poyson or venome, which shall kill the person that drinketh it, at what time or houre it pleaseth them: which poyson being prepared, they make it in such sort, that it will lye sixe yeres in a mans bo∣dy, and neuer doe him hurt, and then kil him, without missing halfe an houres time. They make it also for one, two, or thrée yeares, monthes or dayes, as it pleaseth them best, as I haue seene it in many, and there it is ve∣ry common. There are likewise many wo∣men

[illustration]

[illustration]

Ʋirginis Lusitanae in India gestus et amictus.

Cleedinge en dracht van een Portugeesche Dochter ofte Maecht in Indien.

Matronarum et conjugatarum foras prode∣untium vestitus et ornatus.

Der Portugeesen gehoude Ʋrouwen, habyt en cÿraet.

[illustration]

Viduarum Lusit. amictus quem iterum nuptae deponunt resumpto nuptar habitu.

Cleedinge en dracht der Portugeescher We duwen welcke weder houwende afleggē. weder aen nemende der gehouder dracht

Vestitus et comptus Mulierum cujus cunque ordinis et aetatis intra aedes.

Der Ʋrouwen cleedinge en hulsel binnen shuys van wat staet en ouder dom die zyn.

[illustration]

Lectuli quibus Vxores et Filiae Lusitanorum contecte gestantur▪

[illustration]

Coetskens daer de Portugeesche Ʋrouwen en Dochters bedeckt in gedraegen worden.

[illustration]

Ratio qua coelo pluvio et alias Lusitanae gestantur comutantibus ante retro et utrium{que} famulis

[illustration]

M••aniere vandie Portugeesche vrouwen en dochters te draegen alst regent en oock op ander tyden met haer slaven en dienaers voor achter en besyden

[illustration]

Lusitana▪ templa noctu invisura, comitata marito, et servis.

[illustration]

Een Portugeesche vrouwe verselschapt met harc man en slaven des snachts die kercken besoeckende.

brought to their ends by meanes of their husbandes, and slaine when soeuer they take them in adulterie, or that they doe but once suspect them, if they doe presently they cut their throats, and bring three or foure wit∣nesses to testifie that strange mē entred into their houses by night, at vnaccustomed times, or els by day, and had their pleasures of their wiues, or in other sort as they will deuise it, whereby they are presently discharged of the crime according to the lawes and ordinances both of Spaine and Portingall, and presently may marrie with another wife. This not∣withstanding is no meanes to make the wo∣men feare, or once to leaue their filthie plea∣sures, although there are euerie yeare manie women without number so dispatched and made away by their husbands, and it is so cō∣mon with them, that no man thinketh it strange, or once wondereth thereat, because of the custome. The womē also for their part say and ••••atly affirme, that there can be no better death, then to die in that manner, say∣ing that so they are sacrificed for loue, which they thinke to be a great honour vnto them. The women are by nature verie cleanelie and neat, as well in their houses as in appa∣rell, for that although all whatsoeuer she put∣teth on her bodie euery day, is both white, cleane and fresh: yet they haue a manner eue∣rie day to wash themselues all the body ouer, from head to foote, and some times twyse a day, in the morning and at euening: and as of∣ten as they ease themselues or make water, or else vse the companie of their husbands, e∣uerie time they doe wash themselues, were it a hundreth times a day and a night: they are no great workers, but much delighted in swéet hearbs, and in perfumes and frankin∣cense, and to rub their bodies and their fore∣heads with swéet sāde•••• and such like woods, which with water they doe stéep or breake in péeces: also the whole day long they d••e no∣thing, but sit and chawe leaues or hearbes, called B••ttele, with chalke and a certaine fruite called Arrequa, whereof in an other place among fruites and hearbs I wil speake more. This Arrequa, some of it is so strong, that it maketh men almost drunke, & wholly out of sense, although in shewe and in taste it is almost like wood or rootes: these 3 thinges they sit all the whole day chawing in their mouthes, like oxen or kyne chawing the cud: they let the sap goe down into their throats, and spit the rest out of their mouthes, where∣by they make their mouthes so red and blac∣kish, that to such as know it not it is strāge to sée: all which, with their washing, frankin∣scence, and rubing with s••nders, they haue learned & receiued of the Indian Heathens, which haue had those customes of long time, and yet till this day vse them: they say it pr••∣serueth the téeth, and kéepeth them sound, good for the mawe, and against a stincking mouth and euill breath, insomuch as they are so vsed to chaw it, that wheresoeuer they goe or stand, they must alwaies haue of those leaues carryed with them, and the women slaues do likewise goe alwaies chawing, and are so v∣sed thereunto, that they verily thinke, that without it they can not liue, for their commō worke is to sit all day, when their husbands are out of doores, behind the mat, which han∣geth at the window, alwaies chawing the hearbe Bettele, séeing those that passe by in the stréetes, and no man séeth them: but as a∣ny man passeth by which liketh them, & they will let them haue a sight, they lift vp the mat, whereby they doe the passinger a great fauour, and with that manner of shewing themselues and casting lookes, they make their beginnings of loue, which by their sla∣uish women they bring to effect: to the which end they haue all deuelish deuises that possible may be inuented, for that both night and day they do practise nothing else, but make it their onely worke, and to make nature more liuely to abound and moue them thereunto, they do vse to eate those Betteles, Arrequas & chask, and in the night it standeth by their bed sides, this they eate whole handfuls of Cloues, Pepper, Einger, and a baked kind of meat called ••hachunde, which is mixed and made of all kindes of Spices and hearbs, and such like meates▪ all to increase their leache••y.

Cachunde in m•• opinion is made of the mixtures called Galiae Moscat••,* 1.26 with the sape of sweet wood: they are blacke cakes whereon certaine characters are printed, at the first very bitter of taste, but in the end verie pleasant and sweet, they strēgthen the hart & the mawe, and make a sweet breath.

And they are not content therewith, but giue their husbandes a thousand hearbs for the same purpose, to ea••e, they not knowing thereof, thereby to fulfill their pleasu••es, and to satisfie their desires, which can not by any meanes be satisfied. They are likewise much vsed to take their pleasures in Bathes, by swimming therein, which they can very well doe, for there are very few of them, but they would easilie swimme ouer a riuer of halfe a myle broad.

This shall suffice for their women now I will proceed to other matters. And the better to vnderstand the shapes and formes of their women, together with their apparell, you may behold it here, when they goe to Church and els where, both wiues, maids and wid∣dows,

euerie one by themselues, as also how they goe in their houses, with their dish of Bettele in their hands, being their daylie chawing worke: also how they are carried in Pallākins through the stréet, with their wo∣men slaues round about them: also with their husbands and slaues by night, going to anie sport, or els to Church, which they vse after y^e māner of pilgrimes, for thē they go on foot, whereby they thinke to deserue greater re∣ward, which by day is not permitted them, for they are not so much trusted: these visita∣tiōs or night pilgrimages they hold & estéem for a great recreation and fréedome, for that they hope, watch and looke for the same, as children doe for wake-dayes and other play∣ing times: likewise the women slaues doe make some account thereof, because they doe neuer go abroad, but only at such times, or to Church on festiuall dayes behind their Pal∣lamkins, vpō the which dayes they aduertise their louers, and leaue their mistresses in the Churches, or slip into some shoppe or corner, which they haue redie at their fingers endes, where their louers méet them, and there in hast they haue a sport, which done they leaue each other: and if she chance to haue a Por∣tingal or a white man to her louer, she is so proud, that she thinketh no woman compa∣rable vnto her, and among themselues doe bragge thereof, and will steale both from ma∣ster & mistresse to giue them, with the which manie Soldiers doe better maintaine them∣selues, then with the kinges pay: and if it chaunceth that these slauish women be with child, they are their maisters children, who are therwith very wel content, for so they are their captiues, but if the father be a Portin∣gale, or some other frée man, when the childe is borne, he may within 8 dayes challenge it for his, paying the maister a small péece of money for it, as much as by law is thereun∣to ordemed, and so the child shall euer after be frée, but not the mother: but if he stay aboue 8 or 10 dayes, and within that time no man cometh to challenge it, although it be a free mans child, and he after that shall come to aske it, then it is the mothers maisters slaue, and he may hold it at as high a price as plea∣seth him, without constraint to sell it, and it falleth out verie little, or else neuer that the mother destroyeth her child, or casteth it a∣way, or sendeth it to the father, be she neuer so poore free or captiue, for they delight more in their children, and take more pleasure in carrying them abroad, specially when it is a white mans child, then in all the riches of the world, and by no meanes will giue it to the father, vnlesse it should be secretly stollen frō her, and so conueyed away. The nursing and bringing vp of the Portingales Mesticos children is, that from the time of their birth they are kept naked onely with a little short shyrt (like the womens Bain, which they weare about their bodies,) and nothing else, till they be of yeares to weare breches, or o∣ther clothes. Some of them are nurssed by their slaues, and some by Indian women, which they hire, whose shape and forme you may sée, following the Palamkin wherein the wife is carried, euen as they goe bearing their children.

The 32. Chapter. Of the Viceroy of Portingall, and of his gouernment in India.

EVerie 3. yeares there is a new Viceroy sent into India, and some time they stay longer, as it pleaseth the King, but verie few of them, hee continueth in Goa (which is the chiefe Cittie of India) where he hath his house and continuall resi∣dence, and from thence all other townes in India: haue their direction and gouernment. From Goa euerie yeare the Portingall ar∣mie is prepared and sent out, as I said before, he hath his counsell, Nobles, Chancerie, and Iustices, as they vse in Portingall, and all lawes and Iustice, are by him executed and fulfilled in the Kings nam••, yet if there be a∣ny matter of importante, which concerneth the Ciuill lawes, they may appeale to Por∣tingall, but in criminall causes no man may appeale, but such as haue the degrée of a Gen¦tleman, such the Viceroy may not iudge, but being prisoners, send them into Portingall, vnlesse it be by the Kings commaundement, he is verie magnificent in his estate, and go∣eth little out, but sometimes on Sundaies, or holy daies, when hee goeth to Church, and when hee goeth out of his house, the Trum∣pets and Shalmes, standing in the Gallerie of his house do sound, he is accompanied by all the Gentlemen and townes men of Goa, that haue or kéepe horses, with a Ga••de of Halbardiers on foote, both on each side and behinde him, and being in the Church, he•• hath his seate in the Quier, lyned with Vel∣uet, and nayled with gylt nayles, and a cloth with two Veluet cushins, vnder his féete and knées, and before him a bench, with a Veluet Cushen to leane his armes vpon, his Gentlemen sit by him, but without the Qui∣er, and by him standeth his Chaplen, that prayeth for him. The Archbishop (when hee is at the Church) sitteth on his left hand, in

the same manner, vpon Carpets, Cushens, and bench of Veluet, where they are serued in all ceremonial order, as the Kings of Por∣tingall in their Churches vse to be, and when he commeth home againe, the Trumpets and Shalmes doe sound, as when he went out. In the hall of his Palace stand the Gard, and in the great hall, where his Councell sit, are painted all the Viceroyes, that haue gouer∣ned in India, since the first discouery and con∣quest thereof, and as they new come, their pictures are likewise placed there. Also in the entrie of the Palace are painted al the ships, that since the first discouerie of India, euer came out of Portingall into those countries, euery yeare by it selfe, and the names and surnames of their Captaines, with a note o∣uer euerie shippe which was cast away, or had any mischaunce, all liuely set foorth, for a perpetuall memorie, and euerie yeare as any ship commeth thether, they are set by the rest.

The Viceroyes in the last yeare of their gouernment, do vse to visite the Forts lying round about the countrie, fiftie, sixtie, or eigh∣tie miles long, on the North and South side of Goa, to see how they are gouerned, they looke well vnto them, but commonly an o∣ther supplyeth their place, and if they doe it themselues, it is more to fill their purses, and to get presents, then to further the common∣wealth, these Viceroyes haue great reue∣newes, they may spend, giue, and kéepe the Kings treasure, which is verie much, and doe with it what pleaseth them, for it is in their choyse, hauing full and absolute power from the King, in such sort, that they gather and horde vp a mightie quantitie of treasure, for that besides their great alowance from the King, they haue great presents & giftes, be∣stowed vpon them. For it is the custome in those countries, when any Viceroy commeth newly ouer, that all the Kings bordering a∣bout Goa, and that haue peace and friend∣ship with the Portingales, do then send their Ambassadours vnto him, to confirme their leagues with great and rich presents, there∣with likewise to bid the Viceroy welcome, which amounteth to a great masse of trea∣sure: these presents in this sort giuen, the Ie∣suites by their practises had obtained of the King, and for a time enioyed them at their pleasure (looking verie narrowly vnto them, that they might not bee deceiued) vntill long time since, a Viceroy named Don lois de T••ide Earle of Atougia came thether, and refused to let them haue them, saying that the King being in Portingall knew not what was giuen him in India, and that those pre∣sents were giuen vnto the Viceroy and not to the King, and said the King had no power to giue them to the Iesuites: so that hee kept them for himselfe, which the Iesuites tooke in euill part▪ and said, the Viceroy was an he∣reticke. Yet from his time euer since, the Viceroyes haue vsed to keepe them for them selues. When the Viceroyes haue continued out their time, which is assone as an other Viceroy ariueth at Bardes, or any other Hauen in the countrie, they doe presently dispatch their Leiuetenants▪ with full power and authoritie in the name of their maisters, to receiue possession of the gouernment of In∣dia, and prepare the Palace for him, so that there stayeth not a stoole or bench within the house▪ nor one pennie in the treasure, but they leaue the house as bare and naked as possible may be, so that the new Viceroy must make prouision for to furnish it, and gather a new treasure. In the same shippe wherein the new Viceroy commeth thether, the old returneth home, and because their time of gouernment is so short, and that the place is giuen them in recompence of their seruice, and thereaf∣ter not to serue any more, there is not one of them, that esteemeth the profit of the com∣monwealth, or the furtherance of the Kings seruice, but rather their own particular com∣modities, as you may verie well thinke, so that the common speach in India is, that they neuer looke for any profite or furtheraunce of the common wealth by any Viceroy, as long as the gouernment of thrée yeares, is not al∣tered. For they say, and it is found to be most true, that the first yeare of the Viceroyes time, hee hath enough to doe to repaire and furnish his house, and to know the manners and customes of the countries, without any further troubling of himselfe. The seconde yeare to gather treasure, and to looke vnto his particular profits, for the which cause he came into India. The third and last yeare to prepare himselfe and set al things in order, that he bee not ouertaken or surprised by the new Viceroy when he commeth, but that he may returne into Portingall with the goods which he had scraped together. The same is to bee vnderstoode of all the Captaines in the Fortes, and of all other officers in India. Wherefore it is to bee considered, how they vse themselues in their places and the Kings seruice, whereof the inhabitants and marri∣ed Portingales doe continually speake, but they are farre from the Kings hearing, who knoweth not, but that his Officers doe him good seruice, whereby there is small remedie or amendement to be hoped for.

The 33. Chapter. Of the heathens, Indians and other stran∣gers dwelling in Goa.

IN the towne and Iland of Goa, are resident many Heathens, Moores (which are Mahometans) Iewes, and all strange nations bordering thereabout, euerie one of them v∣sing seuerall customes, and superstitions in Religion. The Moores hold Mahomets law, and the Iewes Moyses law. There are also many Persians, Arabians, and Abexij••s, some of them Christians, and some of them Moores. There is in Goa many Armenians that are Christians, and others that goe and come to traffique there, as Persians, Arabi∣ans, Banianes, of Cambaia, Gusarates, and Decani••ns &c. The Moores eate all things except Swines flesh, and dying are buried like the Iewes, but the Heathens, as De∣cani••••s, Gusarates, and Canaras, and other Indians being dead, are burnt to ashes, and some women being aliue are burned with them, that is such as are Gentlemen or No∣blemen, and the wiues of the Bramenes, which are their Idolatrous Préestes. Also for the Marchantes some of them eate all things, except Cowes or Buffles flesh, which they esteeme to be holy Others eate not any thing whatsoeuer, that hath either life or bloud in it, as those of Gusarata, and the Banianes of Cambaia, which obserue Py∣thagoras lawe: most of them pray vnto the Sunne and Moone, yet they doe all acknow∣ledge a God that made, created and ruleth all things, and that after this life there is an other, wherein men shall be rewarded accor∣ding to their workes. But they haue Idoles and Images, which they call Pagodes, cut and formed most vgly, and like monstrous Deuils, to whome dayly they offer, and say, that those holy men haue béene liuing among them, whereof they tell so many miracles, as it is wonderfull, and say that they are in∣tercessors betwéene them and God. The De∣uill often times answereth them out of those Images, whome they likewise know, and doe him great honour by offering vnto him, to keepe friendshippe with him, and that hee should not hurt them. They haue a custome, when any maide is to bee married, and that they will honour their Pagode, for the more credite to the Bridegrome, they bring the Bride with great triumph and Musicke be∣fore their Pagode, which is made with a Pinne of Iuorie bone, to whome the neerest friends and kinswomen of the Bride, together with the Bride doe goe, and by force make the Image to take the Brides maydenhead, so that the bloud remaineth still vpon the I∣mage, for a remembrance thereof, and then after other deuelish superstitions and ceremo∣nies, hauing made their offrings, they bring the Bride home, where she is deliuered to the Bridgrome, he being verie ioyfull and proud, that their Pagode hath honored him so much and eased him of so much labour. They haue for the most part a custome to pray vnto the first thing they méete withal in the morning, and all that day after they pray vnto it, be it Hogge, or any other thing▪ And if in the mor∣ning when they goe out, they chaunce at the first sight to sée a Crow, (whereof there are great numbers in India) they will not goe forth of their doores all that day, no not for all the goods in the world, for they estéeme it an euill signe, and an vnluckie day. They pray likewise to the new Moone, and when shee first appeareth, they fall vppon their knées, and salute her with great deuotion, there are among them certaine people called Iogos, which are such as we call Hermits, and those doe they estéeme for holy men, these men liue a verie strict life with great abstinence, and make the common people belieue many strange things. They haue likewise many Southsayers and Witches, which vse Iug∣ling, and trauell throughout the countrie, ha∣uing about them many liue Snakes, which they know how to bewitch, and being shut vp in little baskets, they pull them out and make them daunce, turne, and winde at the sound of a certaine Instrument, wheron they play, and speake vnto them. They winde them about their neckes, armes, and legges, kissing them, with a thousand other deuises, onely to get money. They are al for the most part verie skilfull in preparing of poysons, wherewith they doe many strange things, and easily poyson each other, their dwellings and houses are verie little and lowe, couered with straw, without windowes, and verie low and narrow doores, so that a man must almost créepe vpon his knées to goe in, their houshold stuffe is Mats of straw, both to sit and lie vpon, their Tables, Table-clothes, and Napkins, are made of the great Indian Figge leaues, they serue them not onely for Tables, Shéetes, and other linnen, but also for Dishes, wherein they put their meate, which you shall likewise sée in the Grocers, and Pothecaries shops, to put and wrap in all things whatsoeuer they haue within their shops, (as we doe in paper.) They likewise ioyne them together in such sort, that they can put both butter, oyle, & such liquid stuffes

therein▪ and also whatsoeuer cōmeth to hand. To dresse their meat they haue certaine ear∣then pots wherein they séeth Rice, and make holes in the ground, wherein they stampe it, or beate it with a woodden pestel made for the purpose, and they are so miserable, that they buy the Rice in the Huskes, as it grow∣eth on the grounde, and some of them haue Rice sowen behinde their house to serue their necessarie vse. They vse to drinke out of a copper Canne with a spout, wherby they let the water fall downe into their mouths, and neuer touch the pot with their lippes. Their houses are commonly strawed with Cowe dung, which (they say) killeth Fleas. They are verie cleane on their bodies, for euery day they wash themselues all their body ouer, as often as they ease themselues or make water, both men and women, like the Moores or Mahometans. They wash themselues with the left hand, because they eate with the right hand, and vse no spoones. They doe kéepe and obserue their ceremonies and superstitions, with great deuotion, for they neuer goe forth without praying, when they trauaile by the way. They haue on euery hill, cliffe, hole, or denne their Pagodes and Idols in most diui∣lish and deformed shapes, cut and hewed out of the stones and rockes, with their furnises hard by them, and a cesterne not farre from them, which is alwaies full of water, and e∣uery one that passeth by, washeth their féete therein, and so fall downe before their Idoll, some setting before him for an offering fruits, Rice, Egges, Hennes, &c. as their deuotions serue, & then commeth the Bramenes their Priest and taketh it away and eateth it, ma∣king the common people beléeue that the Pa∣gode hath eaten it.

When they will make a voyage to Sea, they vse at the least fourtéene dayes before they enter into their ships, to make so great a noyse with sounding of Trumpets, and to make fiers, that it may be heard and seene both by night and day, the ship being hanged about with flagges, wherewith (they say) they feast their Pagode, that they may haue a good Voyage. The like doe they at their returne for a thankesgiuing fourtéene dayes long, and thus they vse to doe in all their feastes, affaires, mariages, childbirths, and at other times of the yeare, as sowing, and mowing, &c.

The heathenish Indians that dwell in Goa are verie rich Marchants, and traffique much, there is one stréete within the towne, that is full of shops kept by those Heathenish Indians, that not onely sell all kindes of Silkes, Sattins, Damaskes, and curious workes of Porselyne from China and o∣ther places, but all manner of wares of ve••∣uet, Silke, Sattin and such like, brought out of Portingall, which by meanes of their Brokers they buy by the great, and sell them againe by the péece or elles, wherein they are verie cunning, and naturally subtill. There are in the same steéet on the other side, that haue all kindes of linnen, and shirts, with o∣ther clothes ready made for all sortes of per∣sons, as well slaues as Portingales, and of all other linnen worke that may bee desired. There are Heathens that sell all kindes of womens clothes, and such like wares, with a thousand sorts of clothes and cottons, which are like Canuas for sayles and sackes. There is also another street where the Benianes of Cambaia dwell, that haue all kinds of wares out of Cambaia, and all sortes of precious stones, and are verie subtill and cunning to bore and make holes in all kinds of stones, pearles, and corrals, on the other side of the same street dwell other heathens, which sell all sortes of bedstéedes, stooles, and such like stuffe, very cunningly couered ouer with Lacke, most pleasant to behold, and they can turne the Lacke into any colour that you wil desire. There is also a stréet full of gold and Siluer Smithes that are Heathens, which make all kinde of workes, also diuers other handicrafts men, as Coppersmithes, Car∣penters, and such like occupations, which are all heathens, and euery one a stréet by them∣selues. There are likewise other Marchantes that deale all by great, with Corne, Rice, and other Indian wares and Marchandises, as wood and such like. Some of them farme the kinges rents and reuenewes, so that they are skilfull euery way to make their profites. There are also many Heathen Brokers, ve∣ry cunning and subtill in buying and selling, and with their tongues to pleade on both sides.

The Heathens haue likewise their shops with all kinde of spices, which they sell by re∣taile, both by waight and measure, as Gro∣cers and Potticaries doe with vs, and this is onely vsed among them. They haue likewise of al sorts of wares whatsoeuer, but yet with lesse curiositie then with vs, for it is mingled with dust and garbish. These are commonlie the Brainenes, which serue likewise for Priestes and Idolatrous Ministers, & haue their shops throughout the Cittie. In euerie place and corner, and vnder pentises, whereby euery man may haue to serue him at his néed.

There are likewise many barbers, which in euery end of the streetes doe call to those that haue cause to vse them. They kéepe no shoppes, but for a small peece of money come 〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

In the Month of September when winter endeth, the bankes of sand doe fléete and vade away out of the Riuer, so that not onely smal shippes may come in and go out, but also the great Portingall ships of 1600. tunnes may fréely enter without a Pilot, for it is déepe enough and without daunger. In winter it is a heauie and melancholike being there, for there is no other exercise to be vsed, but onely to sitte in their shirtes, with a paire of lin••en bréeches, and goe & passe the time away with their neighbours, in playing and such exerci∣ses, for that throughout the whole town there is no other doing. The women and Mesti∣cos take great pleasure in the winter time when it rayneth, with their husbandes and slaues to go into the fieldes, or some garden, whether they carry good store of victuailes, & there in their gardens haue many Cesternes or pondes of water, wherein they take their delightes to swimme and to bath themselues. In this time most of their Indian fruit is in season. The summer beginneth in Septem∣ber, and continueth till the last of Aprill, and is alwaies clear sky & fair weather, without once or very little raining: Then all the ships are rigged and made ready to saile for all pla∣ces, as also the Kinges armie to kéepe the coast, and to conuoy Marchantes, and then the East winds beginne to blow from off the lande into the seas, whereby they are called Terreinhos, that is to say, the land windes. They blow very pleasantly & coolly, although at the first by chaunging of the weather they are very dangerous, & cause many great di∣seases, which do commonly fall in India, by y^e chaunging of the time. These winds blow alwaies in summer, beginning at midnight, and continue till noone, but they neuer blowe aboue tenne miles into the sea, from off the coast, and presently after one of the clocke vn∣till midnight the west winde bloweth, which commeth out of the sea into the lande, and is called V••rason. These winds are so sure and certaine at their times, as though men helde them in their handes, whereby they make the land very temperate, otherwise the heate would bee vnmeasurable. It is likewise a strange thing that when it is winter vpon the coast of India, that is from Di•• to the Cape de Comorin, on the other side of the Cape de Comorin on the coast called Choraman∣del, it is cleane contrarie, so that there it is summer, and yet they lye all vnder one height or degrées, and there is but 70. miles by land betwéene both the coasts, and in some places but 2••. miles, and which is more, as men trauel ouer land from Cochin to S. Thomas (which lyeth on the same coast of Chora∣mandel) and comming by the hill of Balla∣gatte where men must passe ouer to goe from the one coast vnto the other: on the one side of the hil to the top thereof it is pleasant clear sunne shining weather, and going downe on the other side there is rayne, winde, thunder and lightning, as if the worlde should end and be consumed: which is to be vnderstood, that it chaungeth from the one side to the other, as the time falleth out, so that on the one side of the hilles it is Winter, and on the other side Summer: and it is not onely so in that place and countrey, but also at Ormus, on the coast of Arabia Felix by the Cape of Rosalgatte, where the shippes lie: it is very still, cleare, and pleasant water, and faire summer time, and turning about the Cape on the other side, it is raine and wind with great stormes and tempests, which with the times of the yeare doe likewise change on the other side, and so it is in many places of the Orientall coun∣tries.

The sicknesses and diseases in Goa, and throughout India, which are common, come most with the changing of the times and the weather, as it is said before: there raigneth a sicknesse called Mordexim, which stealeth vppon men, and handleth them in such sorte, that it weakeneth a man, and maketh him cast out all that he hath in his bodie, and ma∣ny times his life withall. This sicknesse is very common, & killeth many a man, where∣of they hardly or neuer escape. The bloody Flixe is there likewise very common and daungerous, as the plague with vs. They haue many continuall feuers, which are bur∣ning agues, and consume mens bodies with extreame heate, whereby within foure or fiue dayes they are eyther whole or dead. This sicknes is common and very daungerous, & hath no remedie for the Portingalles but let∣ting of blood: but the Indians and heathens do cure themselues with hearbes, Sanders, and other such like oyntments, wherewith they ease themselues. This sicknes consu∣meth many Portingalles euery yeare, some because they haue little to eat, & lesse to drink of any meat or drink that is nourishing, & vse much company of womē, because y^e land is na∣turall to prouoke thē thervnto, as also y^e most part of the soldiers by such means haue their liuing and their maintenance, which often times costeth them both life and limme, for although men were of iron or steele, the vn∣chaste life of a woman, with her vnsatiable lustes were able to grinde him to powder, and swéep him away like dust, which costeth ma∣ny a mans life, as the Kinges Hospitall can wel beare witnes, wherein they lodge, when∣soeuer they are sicke, where euery yeare at the least there entered 500. liue men, and ne∣uer

come forth till they are dead, and they are only Portingals for no other sick person may lodge therin, I mean such as are called white men, for the other Indians haue an Hospi∣tall by themselues. In this Hospitall they are verie well looked vnto by Iesuites, and Gen∣tlemen: whereof euery month one of the best is chosen and appointed, who personally is there by them▪ and giueth the sicke persons whatsoeuer they will desire, and sometimes spend more by foure or fiue hundred Duckats of their owne purses, then the Kings allow∣ance reacheth vnto, which they doe more of pride and vaine glorie, then for compassion, onely to haue the praise and commendation of liberalitie. It is no shame there to lie in the Hospitall, for many men go thether wil∣lingly, although they haue wherewith to keepe themselues in their houses, and haue both wife and children. These Hospitals in India are very necessarie for the Portingals, otherwise they shold consume away like mise∣rable men, but by y^e means they are relieued, whatsoeuer they haue, eyther sicknesse, wounds, secrete diseases, pockes, piles, or a∣ny such like, there they are healed, and some∣times visited by the Viceroy himselfe, when he thinketh vpon them, and that his commo∣dities come in. He that wil not lie there, and hath any woundes▪ or priuie diseases, may come thether twice euery day and be drest, & goe his way againe without any question or deniall. When they die therein, they are by two slaues carried into the Church yarde, without eyther singing or ringing, onely one man followeth after them, & throweth some holy water vppon the graue: but if the sicke man chanceth to leaue any goods behind him, and speaketh vnto the Priestes to bring him to his graue, and to say Masses for his soule, then they runne thither by heapes, and burie him like a man of countenance eyther in the Church or chauncell, according to his will, and then hath hee singing and ringing e∣nough.

But returning to our matter of sicknesse, pock••s and piles, with other secret diseases, they are in those countries verie common & not hidden or concealed, for they thinke it no shame, more then to haue any other disease. They heale them with the roote China: there are some that haue had them at the least thrée or foure times, and are not any thing at all shunned or disliked for the same, but dare both boast and bragge thereof. It is not any thing perillous for the bodie, insomuch that they had rather haue them, and feare them lesse then any of the foresaid diseases. The plague hath neuer béen in India, neither is it known vnto the Indians, but poysoning, witchcraft, & such like, whereby some lose their healthes, and some their liues, is their dayly exercise, and very common with them. The stone gra∣uel, and rupture raigneth much among them, specially among married men, by reason of the great quantitie of water that they drinke being giuen to all pleasure and riotousnes, en∣ioying all what their hearts desire, sitting al∣wayes with their bellies open in their shirtes in a gallerie, recreating themselues with the wind which cooleth them, sometimes hauing a slaue to scratch and pare their nayles and féete, another the head, the third holds a Fan to driue away the flées. Their is the common vse for two houres after noone, where like∣wise they take an afternoones sléepe, and euer as they haue thirst, they bring him a dish of conserues, or other comfets, that the water shoulde not worke too much in his bodie, but taste the better. With such and the like exer∣cises they do passe the day til night comes on, so that commonly they haue all swollen bel∣lies like Bacchus, whereby the soldiers and other Indians call them Barrigois, that is, bellies, or great bellies.

The day both Summer and Winter is there all of a length, not much difference, one∣ly in the chaunge they haue about an houres difference. The sunne riseth at sixe, and set∣teth at sixe. When it is noone, commonly they haue the Sunne in the middle of the ele∣ment iust ouer their heades, and it giueth no shadowe, although it stretcheth somewhat out as the Sunne taketh his course. In Goa you may sée both the Poles of the world, the North and South starres stande not farre a∣boue the Horizon. And this shall suffice for the times and seasons of the yeare, sicknesses and other diseases in India, as breuitie requi∣reth.

The 35. Chapter. Of the money, waight, and measure of India, and Goa.

THe principall and com∣monest money is cal∣led Pardaus Xeraphi∣ins, and is siluer, but very brasse, and is coy∣ned in Goa. They haue Saint Sebastian on the one side, and thrée or foure arrowes in a bun∣dle on the other side, which is as much as thrée Testones, or thrée hundred Reijs Por∣tingall money, and riseth and falleth little

lesse or more, according to the exchange. There is also a kinde of reckoning of money which is called Tangas, not that there is any such coined, but are so named onely in telling, fiue Tangas is one Pardaw, or Xeraphin badde money, for you must vnderstande that in telling they haue two kinds of money good and badde, for foure Tangas good money are as much as fiue Tangas bad money. Wher∣fore when they buy and sell, they bargaine for good or badde money. There is likewise a reckoning of Vintiins, which is not likewise in coyne, but onely named in telling: of these foure good, and fiue badde doe make a Tan∣gas. The lowest and smallest money is cal∣led Bazaruco, these are fiftéene badde, and eightéene good to a Vintiin, and three Baza∣rucos are as much as two Rei••s Portingal money: It is molten money of badde Tinne, so that 375. Bazarucos are one Pardaw or Xeraphiin. There is also a kinde of money out of Persia, called Lariins, which are long, very good and fine siluer, without any allay. These are worth 105. and 108. Bazarucos, as the exchaunge goeth, little more or lesse. They haue a kind of money called Pagodes, which is of Gold, of two or three sortes, and are aboue eight Tangas in value. They are Indian and Heathenish money, with the pic∣ture of a Diuell vpon them and therefore are called Pagodes. There is another kinde of gold money, which is called Venetianders: some of Venice, and some of Turkish coine, and are commonly 2. Pardawes Xeraphins. There is yet another kind of golde called S. Thomas, because Saint Thomas is figured theron, & is worth about 7. & eight Tangas: There are likewise Rialles of 8. which are brought from Portingal, and are called Pa••∣dawes de Reales: Other money of Portin∣gall is not currant there. They are worth at their first comming out of Portingall 436. Reyes of Portingall, and after are raysed by exchaunge, as they are sought for when men trauell for China, but they are worth neither more nor lesse. They vse in Goa in their buy∣ing and selling a certaine maner of reckoning or telling. There are Pardawes Xera∣phins, and these are siluer. They name like∣wise Pardawes of Gold, and those are not in kinde or in coyne, but onely so named in tel∣ling and reckoning: for when they buy and sell Pearles, stones, golde, siluer and horses, they name but so many Pardawes, and then you must vnderstand that one Pardaw is sixe Tangas: but in other ware, when you make not your bargaine before hand, but plainely name Pardawes, they are Pardawes Xera∣phins of 5. Tangas the péece. They vse also to say a Pardaw of Lariin••, and are fiue Lariins, for euery Pardaw▪ This is the mo∣ney and reckoning of Goa, wherewith they buy, sell, receiue, and pay. Many of them know wel how to gaine by these kinds of mo∣neys, by exchanging, buying and selling of them. There is great falshoode in the Par∣dawes Xeraphins, which is the principallest and currantest money: wherefore there are in euery stréete and corner of the Cittie, Iewes that are Christians, called Xaraffes, who for verie small profit looke vppon the moneyes, & are so perfect therein, that as they let the mo∣ney passe through their handes in telling, they knowe the false peeces without once looking vpon them, or taking them vp: yea although it lay among a thousande peeces: and if ano∣ther should take it in their handes and tell it a thousande times, yet coulde they neuer per∣ceiue it, but in ringing it, a man may know it very well. These are coyned in the firme lande by the Heathenish Indians, to deceyue the Portingalles withall, where∣fore no man dares receiue money, were it but halfe a Pardaw, except he shew it to those Xaraffes. They tell money very readily and swiftly, and telling it do looke vpon it to sée if it be good, and do giue their promise that if it be found too short, or any false money therein after they haue tolde it, they will make it good howe much soeuer it be. They are also very ready to exchange money, or to doe whatsoeuer men néede touching the same. They sitte at the corners of the stréetes, and before mens houses, and a table with heapes of money standing before them, euery heape being a Tanga, which is ••5. Bazarucos, & when any man will change a Pardaw, they giue him two or thrée, sometimes 8. or 10. Bazarucos more then the 375. Bazarucos, for they know how to make it vp againe, and so do they with all other money according to the rate.

The waight of Goa is also in diuers kinds, as in Portingal, with Quintales, Arrobas, and poundes. They haue likewise another wayght called Mao, which is a Hand, and is twelue pounds, with the which they weigh Butter, Hony, Sugar, and all kind of wares to be solde by waight. They haue likewise a waight wherewith they weigh Pepper & o∣ther spices, called a Bhar, and is as much as thrée Quintales & a halfe Portingal waight. They haue a measure called Med••da, that is to say, euen waight. It is about a spanne high, and halfe a finger broade, whereof 24. measures are a Hand, and 20. Handes are one Cand••il, and one Cand••l is little more or lesse thē 14. bushels, wherewith they mea∣sure Ryce, Corne, & all graine, or other com∣modities to be sold by measure, and the ships

are fraighted after the same rate, for they say a shippe or sente of so many Cand••ls or so many P••l••r••. There is Rice, which they sell by the ••rden: it is broght in round bundels, wrapped in strawe, and bounde about with cordes: Euerie Fardo is commonly thrée ••nd and a halfe. This Rice is better then that which commeth not in Fardens, and is called G••rasall, Ryce, which is the best, and beareth the highest price: and there is another sorte, which is of a lesse price & slighter called Chambasal. Ther are also diuers other sorts of Rice, of a lesse price & slighter then the other Ryce, and is called Batte, and is almost like Barley▪ it hath but little huske. This is com∣monly the dayly foode of the countreymen in the villages called Canariins, & of the com∣mon and poorer sort which stampe and beate it themselues. It serueth also for Hennes and Doues to eate in stead of Barley. There are diuers particular sortes of moneyes in many places of India, and inwardes in the lande a∣mong the heathens, which are currant onely among them, euery coine in their seueral pla∣ces: For by Bengala they haue in place of B••••aru••os a small kinde of money called A∣mandeles, wherewith they get their liuings, and buy and sell therewith, and diuers other such like coines in seuerall places of the Ori∣entall countries, but the money waights and measures aforesaid, are those which they doe generally and ordinarily vse throughout all 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and principally in Goa, being the heade towne and stapell of all the Orientall countries.

The 36 Chapter. Of the Indians called Bramenes, which are the ministers of the Pagodes, & In∣dian Idoles, and of their manner of life.

THe Bramenes are the honest∣est and most estéemed nation amonge all the Indian hea∣thens: for they doe alwaies serue in y^e chiefest places about the King, as Receyuers, Stewards, Ambas∣sadors, and such like offices. They are like∣wise the priestes and ministers of the Pago∣des, or diuelish Idoles. They are of great authoritie among the Indian people, for that the King doth nothing without their counsell and consent, and that they may be knowne from other men, they weare vppon their na∣ked body, from the shoulder crosse vnder the arme ouer their body downe to the girdle, or the cloth that is wrapped about their middle, ••. or 4. strings like sealing thréede, whereby they are knowne: which they neuer put off although it shoulde cost them their liues, for their profession & religion will not permit it. They go naked, sauing onely that they haue a cloth bounde about their middles to hide their priuie members. They wear sometimes when they go abroad a thinne cotton linnen gowne called Caba••a, lightly cast ouer their sholders, and hanging downe to the grounde like some other Indians, as Benianes, Gu∣sarates, and Decaniins. Vpon their heads they weare a white cloth, wounde twice or thryce about, therewith to hide their haires, which they neuer cut off, but weare it long & turned vp as the women do. They haue most commonly rounde rings of golde hanging at their ears, as most of y^e Indians haue. They eat not any thing that hath life, but féed them selues with hearbes and Ryce, neyther yet when they are sicke will for any thing bee let blood, but heale themselues by hearbes & oint∣mentes, and by rubbing their bodies with Sanders, and such like swéet woods. In Goa and on the sea coasts there are many Brame∣nes, which commonly doe maintaine them∣selues with selling of spices and other Apothe∣carie ware, but it is not so cleane as others, but full of garbish and dust. They are very subtil in writing and casting accounts, wher∣by they make other simple Indians beleeue what they will.

Touching the pointes of their religion, wherein the common people beléeue them to be Prophetes: whatsoeuer they first meete withal in the streets at their going forth, that doe they all the day after pray vnto. The wo∣men when they goe forth haue but one cloth about their bodies, which couereth their heades, and hangeth downe vnto their knées: all the rest of the body is naked. They haue ringes through their noses, about their legs, toes, neckes, and armes, and vpon each hand seuen or eight ringes or bracelettes, some of siluer and gilt, if they be of wealth and ability: but the common people of glasse, which is the common wearing of all the Indian women. When the woman is seuen yeares olde, and the man nine years, they do marrie, but they come not together before the woman bee strong enough to beare children. When the Bramenes die, all their friends assemble toge∣ther, and make a hole in the ground, wherein they throw much wood and other things: and if the mā be of any accompt, they cast in swéet Sanders, & other Spices, with Rice, Corne, and such like, and much oyle, because the fire should burne the stronger. Which done they lay the dead Bramenes in it: then cometh his wife with Musike & many of her néerest frēds all singing certain prayses in commendation of her husbands life, putting her in comfort, & encouraging her to follow her husband, & goe with him into the other world. Then she ta∣keth

al her Iewels, and parteth them among her frends, & so with a chéerefull countenance, she leapeth into the fire, and is presently coue∣red with wood and oyle: so she is quickly dead, & w^t her husbands bodie burned to ashes: and i•• it chance, as not very often it doth, that any womā refuseth to be burnt with her husband, then they cut the haire cleane off from her head: and while she liueth she must neuer af∣ter wear any Iewels more, & from that time she is dispised, and accounted for a dishonest woman. This manner and custome of bur∣ning is vsed also by the Nobles and principal∣lest of the Countrey, and also by some Mar∣chantes: notwithstanding all their dead bo∣dies in generall are burnt to ashes, and the women after their husbands deathes doe cut their haire short, & weare no Iewels, where∣by they are knowne for widowes. The first cause and occasion why the women are burnt with their husbandes, was, (as the Indians themselues do say) that in time past, the wo∣men (as they are very leacherous and incon∣stant both by nature and complexion) did poy∣son many of their husbands, when they thou∣ght good, (as they are likewise very expert therein:) thereby to haue the better means to fulfill their lusts. Which the king perceiuing, & that thereby his principal Lords, Captains, and Souldiers, which vphelde his estate and kingdome, were so consumed and brought vn∣to their endes, by the wicked practises of wo∣men, sought as much as hee might to hinder the same: and therevpon he made a law, and ordayned, that when the dead bodies of men were buried, they shold also burne their wiues with them, thereby to put them in feare, and so make them abstaine frō poysoning of their husbands: which at the first was very sharp∣ly executed, onely vpon the nobles, gentlemen and souldiers wiues, as also the Bramenes (for that the common people must beare no armes, but are in a manner like slaues.) So that in the ende it became a custome among them, and so continueth: whereby at this day they obserue it for a part of their law and ce∣remonies of their diuelish Idoles, & now they do it willingly, being hartened and strengthe∣ned thereunto by their friendes. These Bra∣menes obserue certain fasting daies in y^e year, and that with so great abstinēce, that they eat nothing all that day, and sometimes in 3. or 4. daies together. They haue their Pagodes and Idoles, whose ministers they are, where∣of they tell and shew many miracles, and say that those Pagodes haue béen men liuing vp∣on earth, and because of their holy liues, and good workes done here in this world, are for a reward therof, become holy mē in the other world, as by their miracles, by the Diuel per∣formed, hath béene manifested vnto them, and by their commandementes their formes and shapes are made in the most vgly & deformed manner that possible may bee deuised. Such they pray and offer vnto, with many diui∣lish superstitions, & stedfastly beléeue y^t they are their aduocates & intercessors vnto God. They beléeue also that there is a supreame God aboue, which ruleth all things, and that mens soules are immortall, and that they goe out of this worlde into the other, both beastes & men, and receyue reward according to their workes, as Pythagoras teacheth, whose dis∣ciples they are.

The 37. Chapter. Of the Gusarates, & Banianes of Cambaia.

THe Gusarates and Banianes are of the country of Cambaia: many of them dwel in Goa, Diu, Chaul, Cochin, & other places of India, because of their trade and traffick in marchā∣dise, which they vse much with all kindes of wares, as corne, cotton linnen, anil, Rice, and other wares, specially all kinde of precious stones wherein they haue great skill. They are most subtill and expert in casting of ac∣counts, and writing, so that they do not onely surpasse and goe beyond all Iewes and other nations thereabouts, but also the Portingals▪ & in this respect they haue no aduantage, for that they are very perfect in the trade of mar∣chandise, & very ready to deceiue men. They eate not any thing that hath life or blood in it, neither would they kil it for all the goods in y^e worlde, how small or vnnecessarie soeuer it were, for that they stedfastly beléeue, y^e euery liuing thing hath a soule, & are next after men to be accounted of, according to Pythagoras law, & know it must die: and sometimes they do buy certain fowles or other beastes of the Christians or Portingals, which they meant to haue killed, & whē they haue bought them, they let them flée and run away. They haue a custome in Cambaia, in the high wayes, & woods, to set pots w^t water, and to cast corne & other graine vpon the ground to féed birds & beastes withal: & throughout Cambaia they haue hospitals to cure and heale all maner of beasts & birds therein whatsoeuer they a••le, & receiue them thether as if they were men, and whē they are healed, they let them flie or run away whither they will, which among them is a work of great charity, saying, it is don to their euen neighbors. And if they take a flea or a Lowce, they wil not kil it, but take or put it into some hole or corner in the wall, and so let it go, & you can do them no greater iniury then to kil it in their presence, for they wil ne∣uer leaue intreating and desiring withall cur∣tesie not to kill it, and that man shoulde not

séeme to commit so great a sinne, as to take a∣way the life of that, to whom God had giuen both soule and body: yea, and they will offer much money to a man to let it liue, and goe away. They eate no Radishes, Onions, Garlicke, nor any kinde of hearbe that hath any colour of red in it, nor Egges, for they thinke there is blood in them. They drinke not any wine, nor vse any vineger, but onely water. They are so dangerous of eating and drinking with other men which are not their Countriemen, that they would rather starue to death then once to doe it. It happeneth oftentimes that they saile in the Portingales ships from Goa to Cochin to sell their wares, and to traffique with the Portingales, and then they make their proui∣sions for so long time as they thinke to stay vpon the way, which they take aboard with them, and thereupon they féede, and if the time falleth out longer, then they made ac∣count of their water and prouision beeing all spent, as it hapned when I sailed from Goa to Cochin, they had rather die for hunger and thirst then once to touch the Christians meate, they wash themselues before they eate, as the Bramenes doe, as also euery tyme when they ease themselues or make water. They are of a yellowe colour like the Bramenes and somewhat whiter, and there are women among them which are much whiter and clearer of complection than the Portingale women. They are formed and made both in face, limmes, and all other thinges like men of Europe, colour only ex∣cepted. Their apparrell is a thinne white gowne vppon their naked bodies, from the head to the féet, and made fast on the side vn∣der their armes, their shooes of red leather, sharp at the toes, and turning vp like hookes, their beardes shauen like the Turkes, sauing only their moustachios, they weare on their heades a white cloth thrée or foure times wrapped about like the Bramenes, and vn∣der their haire a starre vpon their foreheads, which they rub euery morning with a little white sanders, tempered with water, and 3. or 4. graines of rice among it, which the Bramenes also doe as a superstitious cere∣monie of their law. Their bodies are com∣monly annoynted with sanders & other swéet woods, which they doe very much vse, as also all the Indians. Their women are apparel∣led like the B••amenes wiues, they eate like the Mahometans, and all other Indians vp∣on the ground. In their houses or assemblies they sit on the ground vppon mattes or car∣pets, and alwaies leaue their shooes without the dore, so that they are alwaies barefoote in their houses: wherefore commonly the héeles of their shooes are neuer pulled vp, to saue labour of vntying or vndoing them; they haue a thousand other heathenish superstiti∣ons which are not worth the rehearsall, whereof we haue told you the most principall and therby you may well enough vnderstand what the rest are.

The 38. Chapter. Of the Canaras and Decanijns.

THe Canaras and Decani∣ins are of the countrie of Decam, commonly called Ballagate, lying behinde Goa. many of them dwell in Goa, where their wares and shops are, of all sorts of Veluets, Silkes, Sattins, and Damaskes, which they buy by great of the Portingales, also al kinds of cotton linnen, porselyne, and all kindes of wares and marchandises of Cambaia, Chi∣na, Bengalla, &c. which they likewise buy of the Portingales, and other nations, and sell it againe by retaile: for the which purpose they haue brokers of their owne Countri∣men, which looke for all kindes of wares and commodities. These bring likewise all victu∣als and necessaries out of the firme land, into the towne and Island of Goa. They haue their Indian ships wherewith they traffique to Cambaia, Sunda, and the read sea. Many of them are gold and siluer smithes, & worke in Copper, wherein they are very cunning. They haue also diuers other handicrafts, as Barbers, Phisitions, Carpenters, and such like, as dwell in Goa, so that they are almost as great a number as the Portingale Me∣sticos, and Christians. Their apparrell is like the Gusurates & Benianes, except their shooes, which they weare like Antiques with cut toes, and fastned aboue vpon their naked féete, which they call Alparcas. They weare their beards and their haire long, as it grow∣eth without cutting, but only turne it vp, and dresse it as the Benianes and Bramenes vse to doe, and are like them for colour, forme, & making. They eate all thinges except Kine, Hogges, and Buffels, flesh and fish. They account the Oxe, Cow or Buffel to be holie, which they haue commonly in the house with them, and they besméere, stroke, and handle them with all the friendship in the world, and féed them with the same meat they vse to eate themselues, and when the beastes ease them∣selues, they hold their hands vnder their tails and so throw the dung away. In the night time they sléepe with them in their houses, & to conclude, vse them as if they were reasona∣ble creatures, whereby they thinke to doe God great seruice. In their eating, sitting in the house, washing, making cleane, and other

ceremonies and superstitions they are altoge∣ther like the Bramenes, Gusurates, and Ba∣nianes. In their mariages they contract ech with other at 7. yeres, & at 11. or 12. yeares they are maried, and dwell together. When they are to be maried, they begin fourtéene dayes before to make a great sound with trumpets, drummes and fires, which conti∣nueth day and night for all those fourtéene dayes, with so great a noise of songs and In∣struments, that men can neyther heare nor sée: On the w••dding day, all the friends and kindred on both sides doe assemble together, & sit vpon the ground, round about a fire, and goe seauen times about it vttering certaine wordes, whereby the wedding is done. They giue their daughters no houshold stuffe, but only some Iewels, as bracelets, eare-rings, and such like of small valew, wherewith their husbands must bee content, for the Daugh∣ters are no heires, but the Sonnes inherite all, but they kéep and maintaine their daugh∣ters and sisters till they marie: when they die, they are likewise burnt, and some of their wiues with them, but not so many as of the Bramenes. Euery one of them followeth his fathers occupation, and marieth with the daughters of such like trades, which they name kindreds. They haue their fasting daies, and ceremonies like the Bramenes, for they are as the laytie, and the Bramenes as the spiritualty, the Ministers, Priests, & Pro∣phets of their Idols. They hire and farme the customes and rents of the Portingales, & the Kings reuenewes in the land of Bardes, Salsette, and the Island of Goa, so that often times for any question or strife they must ap∣peare in law, where they alwaies come with∣out Counsellor or Atturney, and knowe so well how to place their words, according to the lawes of Portingall, not onely tem∣porall but spirituall, that they are able to set downe, and shew where it standeth written, as well as any Counsellor could doe, & make their petitions & requests without any mans aduise, that the Portingales doe wonder at their readie wits, as I haue oftentimes found in them. When they are to take their othes to beare witnes with any man, they are set within a circle made of ashes vpon the paue∣ment where they stand, still laying a fewe ashes on their bare heades, holding one hand on their heads, the other on their breasts, and then in their own spéech sweare by their Pa∣gode, that they wil tell the truth without dis∣simulation, whatsoeuer shall bee asked them, for that they certainely beleeue they should be damned for euer, if as then they should not say the truth, but conceale it. These are their principall customes and ceremonies, yet are there many others, which for breuity I omit

The 39. Chapter. Of the Canarijns and Corumbijns of India.

THe Canarijns & Corum∣bjins are the Countrimen, and such as deale with til∣ling the land, fishing & such like labors, to get their li∣uings, & look vnto the Indiā Palme trées, whereon the Cocos doe grow. There are some among them that doe nothing els but wash cloathes, which is there vsed like another occupation, they are called Maynattos: there are others that are called Patamares, which serue onlie for Messengers or Posts, to carie letters from place to place by land, in winter time when men can not trauaile by sea. These Canarjins and Corumbjins are the most contemptible, and the miserablest people of al India, and liue very poorely, maintaining thē∣selues with little meate. They eate all kinde of things, except Kine, Oxen, Buffels, Hogs, and Hens flesh, their religion is like the De∣canijns and Can••ras, for they are all of one Countrie and custome, little differing: they goe naked, their priuie members onely coue∣red with a cloth. The womē go with a cloth bound about their middles beneath their na∣uels, and hanging downe to the middle of their thighes, and the other end thereof they cast ouer their shoulders, wherby halfe their breasts are couered. They are in a manner blacke, or of a darke browne colour, many of them are Christians, because their chiefe ha∣bitation and dwelling places are on the Sea side in the countries bordering vpon Goa, for that the palme trées doe grow vpon the Sea coasts, or vpon y^e bankes by riuer sides. The rice is sowed vppon low ground, which in winter time is couered with water, where∣with those Canarijns doe maintaine them∣selues: these bring hennes, fruit, milke, egges and other such like wares into the towne to sell. They dwell in little straw houses, the dores whereof are so low, that men must créepe in and out, their houshold stuffe is a mat vpon the ground to sléepe vpon, and a pit or hole in the ground to heate their rice in with a pot or two to féeth it in, and so they liue and gaine so much as it is a wonder. For commonly their houses are full of small chil∣dren, which crall and créepe about all naked, vntill they are 7. or eight yeares old, & then they couer their priuie members. When the Women are readie to trauaile with Childe, they are commonly deliuered when they are all alone, and their husbands in the fieldes, as it fortuned vppon a time, as I and some other of my friends went to walke in the fieldes, & into the villages where the Canarijns dwell

and hauing thirst, I went to one of the Ca∣narijns houses to aske some water, there∣with to refresh vs, (which they commonly drinke out of a Copper Canne with a spout, thereat to drinke without touching it with their mouthes, which is all the mettell they haue within their houses,) & because I was verie thirstie, I stooped downe and thrust my head in at the doore, asking for some water, where I espied a woman alone within the house, tying her cloth fast about her middle, & before her hauing a woodden trough, (by the Portingales called Gamello) full of water, where she stood and washed a childe, whereof as then she had newly bin deliuered without any help: which hauing washt, she laid it na∣ked on the ground vpon a great Indian figge leafe, and desired mee to stay and shee would presently giue mee water. When I vnder∣stood by her that she had as then newly béene deliuered of that Child without any help, I had no desire to drink of her water, but went vnto another to aske water, and perceiued the same woman not long after going about her house, as if there had bin no such matter, and the children are brought vp in that man∣ner cleane naked, nothing done vnto them, but onely washed and made cleane in a little cold water, and doe in that sort prosper and come vp as well as man would wish, or as any child within these countries can do with all the tending they haue, & liue many times vntill they be a hundreth yeares old, without any headach, or toothach, or loosing any of their téeth. They weare onley a tuske of haire on the toppes of their heads, which they suffer to grow long: the rest of their haire is cut short, they are very expert in swimming and diuing, they row vp and downe the Ri∣uers in boates called Almadias, whereof some of thē are hewen out of a péece of wood, and so narrow that a man can hardly sit in them, and it chanceth oftentimes that they turne ouer & ouer twice or thrice before they passe the riuer, and then they leape out into the water and turne them vp, and so pow∣ring out the water they get into them again. They are so miserable, that for a penny they would indure to be whipped, and they eate so little, that it séemeth they liue by the aire, they are likewise most of them leane and weake of limmes, of little strength & very cowardes, whereby the Portingales doe them great outrage and villanie, vsing them like dogges and beasts. In their mariages and deathes they obserue the manner of the Decan••ins & Canaras, as also in their religion & ceremo∣nies. When the man is dead his body is burnt, and the woman cuts her haire off, and breaketh all her Iewels, although they be but few & small, for they are most of glasse.

By the pictures following you may see the Decanijns or Canaras, or the Marchantes of Goa, also the Banianes or Gusurates of Cambaia, with the Bramenes & his wife, in what sort all the women doe goe, as wel Be∣nianes as Decaniins, Moores & Indian wo∣men that inhabite the countrie. How those of Goa and Ballagate kéepe their weddings a∣mong the Decaniins and Canaras, with the manner how the liuing women burne them∣selues with their dead husbands, what estate the Embassador of Hidaleam holdeth in Go∣a, & how he is caried in the stréets, also a true description of the Canariin with his wife, & the manner how the Indian heathenish chil∣dren are brought vp: also of the soldier of Bal∣lagate, which is called Lascariin, with the heathenish whore called Balliadera, who is a dancer, because shee is commonly vsed there∣vnto, in any feast or open playes, & are ready to be hired for a small péece of mony, where∣of many of thē dwell in Goa, with the maner of the dwellings & houses of the Decaniins, Canariins, & Corumbiins, & how they row in the riuers with their scutes, whereby I haue placed the maner of the boats vsed by those of the Malabares in Cochin, so that I shall not néede to make a seuerall Chapter of them by themselues.

The 40. Chapter. Of the Arabians and Abexiins dwelling in India.

THere are many Arabians & Abexi∣ins in India. The Arabians obserue Mahomets law, & the Abexiins some are Mahometans, some christians, after their manner, for they are of Prester Iohns land, which stretcheth behind Mosambique in Ae∣thiopia vnto the red sea, and the riuer Nilus in Egypt, and by their common traffique and conference with the Moores and Mahome∣tans, there are diuers of them infected with the same sect. There are many of them in India that are slaues and captiues, both mē and women which are brought thether out of Aethiopia, & sold like other Oriental Na∣tions, the Abexiins that are christians haue on their faces 4. burnt markes in manner of a Crosse, one ouer their nose in the middle of the forehead, betwéene both their eyes, on each of their chéekes one, betwéene their eies, and their eares, and one vnder their neather lip, downe to the chin: and this is their Bap∣tisme, when they are made Christians, which they vse in stead of water. These Abexiins, and Arabians such as are frée doe serue in al India for saylers and sea faring mē, with such marchants as saile from Goa to China, Ia∣pon, Bengala, Mallaca, Ormus, and all the Oriental coast: for that there they haue no o∣ther saylers, nor there are no other because

the Portingalles (although they serue for Saylers in the Portingalles shippes that come into India, and haue neuer bene other in Portingale but Saylers, yet are they a∣shamed to liue in that order, and thinke it a great discredite vnto them, together with a great diminishing of their authorities & esti∣mations, which they account themselues to hold in India, so that they giue themselues out for maisters of shippes, and by their cap∣taines are also called Pilots and chief Bote∣sonnes, but not lower: for if they should de∣scend but one step lower, it would be a great blot and blemish vnto them all their liues af∣ter, which they would not indure for anie thing in the world. These Abexijns and A∣rabians serue for small money, and being hyred are verie lowlie and subiect, so that of∣ten times they are beaten and smitten, not as slaues, but like dogs, which they beare very patientlie, not once speaking a word: they cō∣monlie haue their wiues and children with them in the shippe wherein they are hyred, which continually stay with them, what voyage soeuer they make, and dresse their owne meat, which is Rice sodden in water with salt fish among it. The cause why the women sayle in the ship, is, for that in Sum∣mer and not else, their shippes goe to sea, whē they alwayes haue calme water and faire weather, with good windes: they haue com∣monlie but one Portingale or two for Cap∣taine, maister and Pilote, and they haue a chief Boteson, which is an Arabian, which they cal Mocadon, and he is ruler of the A∣rabians & Aberijns, that are saylers, whome he hath vnder his subiection, euen as if they were his slaues or subiects. This Mocadon is he that conditioneth and maketh bargaine with the owners of the ship▪ to haue so manie saylers, and he receiueth the monethlie mo∣ney for their wages, and accounteth with the saylers particularlie, but for gouernment of the ship he hath not to doe, neither troubleth himselfe therewith. The shippes when they sayle, vse no caske for water, because there is not any throughout all India, nor any made there, saue onely such as come out of Portin∣gall, and vsed in the Portingall shippes: but in stéed of pypes they vse a great foure cor∣nered woodden cesterne, y^t stādeth by the main maste, at the very foote therof, vpon the keele of the shippe, which is verie well pitched, and made fast, wherein they lade as much water as they thinke will serue them for their voy∣age. The captaine, maister or Pilote, Mar∣chants and passingers, haue euerie man their meat by themselues▪ and their water in great Indian pots called Martauans, whereof in y^e description of Pegu I haue alreadie spoken. These people are so seruiceable and willing to doe any thing, that if there chanceth but a hat, or any other thing, to be blowen ouer, or fall into the water, they will presently leape, cloathes and all into the sea, to fetch it again, for they swimme like fishes, when the ships lie within the hauen or riuer, and that they will all goe on land, then they goe into the boate, and so row to shore, which done one of them roweth backe againe with the boate, which he tyeth fast to the ship and swimmeth to land: and when they will goe abord again, if any of the saylers be vnwilling to swimme to fetch the boate, they are by the Mocadon or the maister, with strokes compelled to doe it: but they cōmonlie neuer stay till it cometh so ••arre, but rather striue who shall be first in the water to shew their diligence: and when they doe any thing abord, as hayling ropes and other things, they sing & answere each other very sweetlie, so y^t it séemeth to be very good Musick. Their exercise on land is, all the day to drinke, and to sit in tipling houses with their wiues and children, and then they goe hand in hand through the stréets, réeling here and there, making a great noise with singing and gaping after their manner: there womē weare breeches like the Arabians and Ma∣hometans.

The 41. Chapter. Of the blacke people of Mosambique, which are called Caffares, and of their manners and customes.

THe black people or Ca••fa∣res of the land of Mosambi∣que, and all the coast of E∣thiopia, and within the lād to the Cape de bona Spe∣rāza, go al naked, although those of Mosambique, (that is the women) do a little couer themselues, which they do by meanes of the daylie conuersation they haue with the Portingales, who for Gold, siluer and Iuory bones, and such like, doe exchange Cotton lynnen brought out of India, that within the land, and to the cape, they vse in those countries: otherwise they couer them∣selues with the like apparell that Adam and Eua did weare in Paradice. They are all as black as pitch, with curled and singed hayre, both on their heads and beards, which is ve∣ry little, their noses broad, flat and thicke at the end▪ great bigge lippes: some haue holes, both aboue & vnder in their lippes, and some times besides their mouthes through their cheekes, wherein they thrust small bones, which they esteeme a bewtifying: there are some among them that haue their faces and

all their bodies ouer rased and seared with irons, and al figured like rased Sattin or Da∣maske, wherein they take great pride, think∣ing there are no fairer people then they in all the world, so that when they see any white people, that weare apparell on their bodies, they laugh and mocke at them, thinking vs to be monsters and vgly people: and when they will make any deuelish forme and pic∣ture, then they inuent one atfer the forme of a white man in his apparell, so that to con∣clude, they thinke and verily perswade them∣selues, that they are the right colour of men, and that we haue a false and counterfait co∣lour. There are among them that file their téeth as sharp as nedles, which they likewise estéeme for a great ornament. Many of them hold the law of Mahomet, that is to say, such as dwell on the coast of Abex or Melinde, and round about those places, as also in Mo∣sambique, by reason the red sea is so néere vnto them, together with the Arabian Ma∣hometans, with whome they dayly traffique, as they also did in al places, & Ilāds through∣out the Orientall countries, before the Por∣tingales discouery and conquest of India, whereby all the Orientall countrie where they trafficked, was infected with their deue∣lish law, and their poyson spread and throwne abroad in all places, which is one of the prin∣cipall occasions that the Gospell taketh no better effect in those countries, their pestise∣rous law beeing as it were rooted and in∣grafted in their mindes. There are some of them that are become Christians since the Portingales came thether, but there is no great paines taken about it in those coūtries, because there is no profite to be had, as also that it is an infectious and vnholesome coun∣trie: and therefore the Iesuites are wary inough not to make any houses or habitati∣ons therein, for they sée no great profite to be reaped there for them, as they doe in India & the Ilands of Iapan, & in other places, where they find great quantities of riches, with the sap whereof they increase much and fill their beehyues therewith to satisfy their thir∣sty & insatiable desires: most part of the Caf∣fares liue like beastes or wild men, yet they haue their houses in troups or heaps, like coū∣try vilages▪ wher they assēble & dwel together and in euery Village they haue a Lord or King, to whome they are subiect and obedi∣ent, they are commonly in warres one with an other, and one place or Village against an other, and haue law and Iustice among them with some small Policie, concerning their worldly affaires and gouernment: but as concerning Religion and faith, they know not what it meaneth, but liue like beastes without any knowledge of God, or any like∣lyhoode or shadow thereof, they maintaine themselues by hunting, which they doe in the woods, where they take all that they finde, they eate Elephants flesh and all other kind of wild beastes, and of the Elephants téeth, they make their weapons, instéede of Iron and Stéele, they doe commonly make warre one against the other, and some of them eate mens flesh, and some there are also that eate it not, but such as deale with the Portingals. When they take any man prisoner in the warres, they sell him to the Portingales, or exchaunge and barter him for Cotton linnen, and other Indian wares. They haue a cust∣ome among them, that when they goe to warre against their enemies, if they win the battaile, or ouerthrow each other, he that ta∣keth or killeth most men, is holden and ac∣counted for the best and brauest man among them, and much respected, and to witnesse the same before their Kings, of as many as they haue slaine or taken prisoners, they cut off their priu••e members, that if they bee let goe againe, they may no more beget children, which in processe of time might mischiefe them, and then they drie them well, because they should not rot: which being so dried, they come before their Kings with great reue∣rence, in the presence of the principall men in the Village, and there take these members so dried one by one in their mouthes, and spit them on the ground at the Kings feete, which the King with great thankes accepteth, and the more to reward and to recompence their valour, causeth them all to bee taken vp and giuen to them againe, for a signe and token of honour, whereby euer after from that time forwards they are accounted as Knights, and they take all those members, wherewith the King hath thus honoured them,* 1.27 and tie them all vpon a string like a Bracelet or Chaine, and when they marrie, or go to any wedding, or feasts, the Bride or wiues of those knights doe weare that Chaine of mens members about their neckes, which among them is as great an honour, as it is with vs, to weare the golden Fléece, or the Garter of England, and the Brides of such Knightes, are there∣with as proude, as if they were the mightiest Queenes in all the world.

From Mosambique great numbers of these Caffares are caried into India, and many times they sell a man or woman that is growne to their full strength, for two or three Ducats. When the Portingales ships put in there for fresh water and other necessa∣ries, then they are dearer, by reason of the great numbers of buyers, the cause why so many slaues and Captaines of all nations

are brought to sell in India, is, because that euerie ten or twelue miles, or rather in euery Village and towne, there is a seuerall King, and ruler of the people, one of them not like an other, neither in law, spéech nor manners, whereby most part of them are in warres, one against the other, and those that on both sides are taken prisoners, they kéepe for slaues, and so fell each other like beastes: hee whose euill fortune is such, that hee is one of the captiues, must be patient, wherein they shew not much dislike, for when they are ask∣ed, how they can content themselues with that yoke of bondage, they answere that they can beare it well enough, séeing their Planet will haue it so, and for that their friends and neighbours shall reuenge their cause against those that haue done it. Also in time of pouer∣tie or dearth the fathers may sell their chil∣dren, as it happened in my time, that there was such a dearth, and scarsitie of victualls in the firme lande, and countries bordering vppon Goa, that the men of India came to Goa (and other places where the Portin∣gales are resident) to sell their children, in great numbers, and for small prices▪ to buy them victuals. I haue séene Boyes of eight, or ten yeares, giuen in exchange for fiue or sixe measures of Rice, and some for thrée or foure Ducats the péece, and some came with their wiues and children to offer themselues to bee slaues, so that they might haue meate and drinke to nourish their bodies. And be∣cause the Portingales haue traffique in all places, (as we haue béene in many) it is the cause why so many are brought out of all countries to be solde, for the Portingales doe make a liuing by buying and selling of them, as they doe with other wares. What con∣cerneth the Caffares in Mosambique, I haue in an other place declared, in the descrip∣tion of Mosambique. Hereafter followeth the pictures of the Arabians and Abexijns, with their wiues, as they goe in India, also the pictures and manners of the Caffares, both men and women, as they goe in Mo∣sambique, all liuely portracted.

The 42. Chapter. Of the Malabares and Nayros in India, with their manners and customes.

THe Malabares are those that dwel on the Sea caost, betwéene Goa, & the Cape de Comorijn Southward from Goa, where the Pep∣per groweth. They haue a spéech by themselues, and their countrie is di∣uided into many kingdomes, as in the descrip∣tion of the country, we haue already declared, these are the greatest, and worst enemies that the Portingales haue, and by Sea doe them great mischiefe, they are strong and very cou∣ragious, they goe all naked onely their priuie members couered, the women likewise haue but a cloth from their Nauell downe to their knées, all the rest is naked, they are strong of limmes, and verie arrogant and proude, of colour altogether blacke, yet verie smoth both of haire and skin▪ which commonly they annoint with Oyle, to make it shine; they weare their haire as long as it will grow, ty∣ed on the top or crowne of their heads with a Lace, both men and women: the lappes of their eares are open, and are so long that they hang downe to their shoulders, and the lon∣ger & wider they are, the more they are estée∣med among them, and it is thought to bee a beautie in them. Of face, body, and limmes, they are altogether like men of Europ, with∣out any difference, but onely in colour, the men are commonly verie hayrie, and rough vpon the breast, and on their bodies, and are the most leacherous and vnchast nation in all the Orient, so that there are verie few wo∣men children among them, of seuen or eight yeares olde, that haue their maiden-heades: They are verie readie to catch one from an other, though it bee but for a small penie. In their houses they are not verie curious, their houses and houshold stuffe, differeth not much from the Canarijns & Corumbijns of Goa. Their Idolatrie, ceremonies and superstiti∣ons, are like the other Heathens. Of these Malabares there are two manner of people, the one is Noblemen or Gentlemen, called Nayros, which are souldiers▪ that doe onely weare and handle armes, the other is the common people called Polias, and they may weare no weapons, nor beare any armes, the Nayros must in all places where they goe or stand, weare such armes as are appointed for them, and alwaies bee readie at the Kings commaundement, to doe him seruice, some of them doe alwaies beare a naked Rapier or Courtelas in their right hands, and a great Target in their left hand, those Targets are verie great, and made of light wood, so that when they wil they can couer their whole bo∣dies therewith, they are so well vsed thereun∣to, that they esteme it nothing to beare them, and when they trauell on the way, they may be heard a great way off, for that they com∣monly make a great knocking with the Hilt of their Rapier, against the Target, because they would bee heard. There are some that carrie a bow and a venimous arrow vppon

their shoulder, wherein they are verie expert, others carrie long Pikes, some Péeces, with the Match readie lighted, and wound about their armes, and haue the best lockes that possible may bee found in all Europe, which they know so well how to vse, that the Por∣tingales can haue no aduantage against them. Wheresoeuer they goe, they must al∣waies haue their armes with them, both night and day. Not any of them are married, nor may not marrie during their liues, but they may freely lie with the Nayros daugh∣ters, or with any other that liketh them, what women soeuer they bee, yea though they be married women. When the Nayro hath a desire thereunto, hee entreth into a house where he thinketh good, and setteth his armes in the stréete without the doore, and goeth in and dispatcheth his businesse, with the good wife or the daughter, the doore stan∣ding wide open, not fearing that any man should come in to let him, for whosoeuer pas∣seth by, and séeth the Nayros armes stan∣ding at the doore, although it be the goodman himselfe, hee goeth by, and letteth him make an end▪ and hauing done, he taketh his armes and departeth thence, and then the husband may come to the house, without making any words, or once moouing question about it. In that manner they goe where they will, and no man may denie them. As these Nayros goe in the streetes, they vse to crie Po, Po, which is to say, take héede, looke to your selues, or I come, stand out of the way, for that the other sort of people called Polyas, that are no Nayros, may not once touch or trouble one of them, and therefore they al∣waies crie, because they should make them roome, and know that they come, for if any of the Polyas should stand still, and not giue them place, whereby hee should chaunce to touch their bodies, hee may fréely thrust him through, and no man aske him why he did it. And when they are once touched by any Po∣lya••, or by any other nation except Nayros, they must before they eate, or conuerse with other Nayro•• wash and clense their bodies with great ceremonies and superstitions. Likewise they must not bee touched by any Christian, or any other man. And when the Portingales came first into India, and made league and composition with the King of Cochin, the Nayros desired that men shold giue them place, and turne out of the way, when they mette in the stréetes, as the Poly∣as and others vsed to doe, which the Portin∣gales would not consent vnto, thinking it to be against their credits and honors, for them to be compared to the Polyas and vnprofi∣table sort of people, whereas they estéemed themselues better then the Nayros, both in person and armes: therefore they would haue the Nayros to giue them place, whereby they could not agrée, in the end it was concluded, (to pacifie the matter, and to kéepe peace and quietnes among them) that two men should be chosen, one for the Nayros, and the other for the Portingales, that should fight body to body, and he that should be ouerthrowne, that nation should giue place vnto the other, this was done in the presence of both nati∣ons, and the Portingall ouercame the Nay∣ro, whome hee slew, whereupon it was a∣gréed, that the Nayros should giue place vn∣to the Portingall, and stand a side vntill hee be past, where soeuer they meete. The Nay∣ros weare the nayls of their hands very long, wherby they shew that they are Gentlemen, because the longnesse of the nayles doth let and hinder men from working or doing any labour. They say likewise that they do it, the better and faster to gripe a thing in their hands, and to holde their Rapiers, which some Portingales and Mesticos doe likewise vse, and hold the same opinion with the Nay∣ros, whereof there are many in India, which let their nayles grow for the same cause. The principallest or chiefest of those Nayros, which are leaders or Captaines of certaine numbers of Nayros, weare a Gold or Siluer bracelet, or ring about their armes, aboue their elbowes: as also their Gouernours, Ambassadours, and Kings, whereby they are knowne from other men, for otherwise they goe all naked. Also their Kings, rulers, and other Captaines and leaders, when they goe abroad, are garded and accompanied by other Nayros. They are verie good and stout souldiers, and wil set vpon a man verie fierce∣ly, they are also verie full of reuenge, so that whensoeuer they fight against their enemies either by water or by lande, and that they chaunce to bee thrust into the body with a Pike, they are not presently therewith con∣tent to lie downe, but if they cannot spéedily plucke the Pike forth, they will not spare to pull it forth with both their hands, and draw it through their bodies, therewith to set vp∣on them that gaue them the wound, and to be reuenged on them.

The King may not iudge nor execute those Nayros openly, for if they haue deser∣ued death, he causeth them by other Nayros to be put to death. The daughters of the Nay∣ros, may not haue the companie of any man, but onely of Nayros, although secretly they haue the company of many Portingales and Christians, but if the Nayros once perceiued it, or find them in the déede doing, they might kill them without further question. In eue∣rie

[illustration]

Habitus et facies Mercatorum Goensium Indorum▪ qui mutandis mercibus valde industrij

Habyt en gedaente der ••ndiaensche Coopluyden welcke in hare handel seer cloeck zyn

Banjanes e Cambaja populus ••s••andis gemmis, scribendo, supputandoque valdé ••ercitatus.

Banjanen vun Cambajen int ke•• van gesteenten schryven en rekenen zeer ge••

[illustration]

Bramenes Idolorum in India Sacerdotes

Bramenes der Indiuenscher affgoden Papen ofte Priesters.

〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

[illustration]

[illustration]

M••aniere van bruylost int Lant van Ballagate achter Goa gelegen.

[illustration]

[illustration]

Bramenes cum mortuus est. secundum eorum legem crematur. uxor autem ejus. proe amore. sese vivam in ignem cum illo conjicit.

[illustration]

De Bramene doot wesende wort nae haer wet verbrant. en zyn vrouwe wt liefde haers mans. verbrant haer levendich met hem.

[illustration]

[illustration]

Agricola Indus Canaryn dictus

Een Indiaens sant ofte bouwman genaemt Canaryn

Indorum liberi pro eorum consuetu••••••••, pudendis tantum rariori tela contectis

Indiaensche kinderen als slants manier is 〈…〉〈…〉en die scha: melheyt met een dun linnen doecksken be〈…〉〈…〉 hebbende.

[illustration]

Miles Indus quem lascarin nominant

Een Indiaens soldaet lascarin geheeten.

Inda meretrix, saltando et canendo victum queritans.

Een Indiaensche lichte vrouwe met dans sen en singen haer cost winnende.

[illustration]

[illustration]

Legati Regis Ballagatte in urbe Goa comitatus.

[illustration]

Die staet des Ambassateurs van den Coninck van Ballagatte binnen Goa

[illustration]

[illustration]

Scaphae piscatoriae Goensium et Cochinensium, alterae ex solido trunco exca vatae, alterae, e pluribus funibus coagmentatae, priores Almadias, alteras Tones et Paleguas vocant. implent et hash••drijs aquae recentis, quam ad naves deferentes di vendant. quarum magnus illic numerus.

[illustration]

S〈…〉〈…〉huÿten diemen te Goa. en Cochÿn. gebruÿckt om te visschen, d'eene wt een hout wtgeholt. lander wt veel struÿcken, met coorden tsamen gebonden. déerste worden Almadias. ••'andere Tones, en Paseguas, genaemt, die daer in groot getal zÿn, welcken verladen ••et cruÿcken vol soet waters daer in gestort. om aende schepen te vercoopen

[illustration]

[illustration]

Naute Arabes quibus naves suas regendas Lusitani committunt in quibus cum uxoribus ut plurimum habitant.

Ar••bischer scheepluÿden, welcke die Portugeesen. haer schepen vertrouwen te regeren. in welcken sij oock met haer wyven meest woonen.

[illustration]

Habitus Abissinorum quibus loco S. Baptismatis frons nutiritur

Habÿten der Abissÿnen wt paep tan slant welcke in plaets van doop gebruÿcken brantmercken int aensicht.

〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

[illustration]

Moerianen wt Mocambÿcke en die omliggende contreÿen diemen Caffres noemt sommighe zÿn Christenen sommighe Heydenen en t••neestendeel Machometisten.

place where they dwell, they haue a pit or Well digged, wherein they doe holde water, which standeth openly in the way, where euerie man passeth by, wherein euery morning when they ryse, they wash them∣selues all ouer, beginning first at the foote and so rysing vp to the head, as well men as wo∣men, without being ashamed to be séene of such as goe by, or looke vpon them, and the King himselfe likewise: which water is so gréene, slymie and stincking, that a man can not chuse but stop his nose as he goeth by it: and they certainlie beléeue, that when soeuer they should forget to wash themselues in that water, that they should then be whollie vn∣cleane and full of sinne: and this washing or making cleane must not be done in any run∣ning water, but it must be in a place where the water standeth in a pit or Well, and by their Bramenes coniured with many words and ceremonies, otherwise it were of no ver∣tue but whollie vnprofitable, for their Idola∣trous seruices. They are like the other Hea∣thens, and are burned when they are dead: their sonnes may not be their heyres, because they haue no wiues, but vse al womē, where and when they will, doubting which is their owne sonne: for the Bramenes also haue the kings wyues at their pleasures, and doe him great honour when it pleaseth them to lye with their Quéene. Their heyres are their sisters sonnes, for they say, although they doubt of their fathers, yet they know their sisters are the mothers of them. This much touching the Nayros and Gentlemen or Soldiers.

The other common people of the Mala∣bares, called Polyas, are such as are the coū∣trie husband men and labourers, men of occu∣pations, fishers, and such like: those are much contemned and dispised, they liue very misera∣bly, and may weare no kind of weapon, ney∣ther yet touch or be cōuersant with the Nay∣ros, for as the Nayros go on the stréetes, and they heare him call, they step aside, bowing their armes, and stooping with their heades down to the ground, not daring so much as once looke vp before the Nayros be past: in o∣ther thinges they obserue the customes of the other Indians, for that euery man followeth the occupation of his Elders, and may not change it for any thing.

The 43. Chapter Of the Moores and Iewes in India.

THere are great numbers of Moores and Iewes in al places of India, as at Goa, Cochin, & within the land, some com∣ing out of other places, and the rest borne of Iewes and Moores in that country, and so by birth right Indians, who in times past by conuersation and company of those Iewes & Moores, haue bene brought to their sect and opinion. In their houses and apparell they follow the manner of the land wherein they are resident: amongst the Indi∣ans they haue their Churches, Synagogues and Mesquitas, wherein they vse all ceremo∣nies according to their law: but in the places where the Portingales inhabite and gouern, it is not permitted vnto them to vse them o∣penly, neither to any Indian, although they haue their families and dwelling houses, and get their liuings, and deal one with the other: but secretly in their houses they may doe what they will, so that no man take offence thereat: without the townes and where the Portingales haue no commandement, they may fréely vse and exercise their ceremonies and superstitions, euery one as liketh him best, without any man to let or deny them: but if they be founde openlie doing it in the Portingales townes and iurisdictions, or that they haue any point of Christian ceremonies mingled among theirs, both men and womē die for it, vnlesse they turne vnto the christian faith, as it oftentimes happeneth without the towne of Cochin, where the King kéepeth his Court: there the Iewes and Moores haue frée libertie to vse their sects and ceremonies openlie, for there the Iewes haue made and built very fair stone houses, and are rich mar∣chants, and of the king of Cochins néerest Counsellers: there they haue their synagogue with their hebrue Bible, and Moses Lawe, which I haue had in my hand: they are most white of colour, like men of Europa, & haue many faire women. There are manie of them that came out of the country of Pa∣lestina & Ierusalem thether, and speake ouer all the Exchange verie perfect and good Spa∣nish: they obserue the Saboth day, and other iudiciall ceremonies, and hope for the Messi∣as to come.

The Moores like wise haue their Mes∣quitos, wherein they pray, and aboue the Church they haue manie sellers and gal∣leries, where they learne their children their

principles of Religion before they goe to Church: they wash their féet, for the which purpose they haue alwaies a cesterne with water standing without the Church, & leaue their Alparcos (which are their shoes) stand∣ing at the Church dore before they goe in, and being in the Church they fall flat on the ground vpon their faces, and so with their armes & handes lifted vp, make manie coun∣terfait faces. They are also circumcised like the Iewes, & eate no hogges flesh, and when they are dead they are buried. In their chur∣ches they haue not any Images, but onelie some stones or round pillers standing vpright with certaine Chaldean letters (out of their Alcaron) grauen vpon them. As I and a friend of myne chāced to go out of the town, we were desirous to sée their Mahometicall Church, and their manner of seruice, which was denyed vs by the kéeper of the dore, that bad vs put off our shoes, but because wee would not, he said it was not lawfull for vs to enter in that sort into the Church: but to let vs sée it, he suffered vs to stand within the dore, and opened some of the windowes, that we might sée what was within it: then the Portingale asked him for their God & their Saintes which they vsed to pray vnto, be∣cause he sawe the Church emptie, as I sayd before: then the Moore answered him, that they vsed not to pray to stockes and stones, but to the liuing God, which is in Heauen, and said that the proude Portingale Christi∣ans, and the Heathens were all of one Reli∣gion, for that they prayed to Images made of wood and stones, and giue them the glo∣rie which onely appertaineth to the liuing God: with the which answere the Portingal was so angrie, that he began to chide & make a great noyse, and to giue him manie hard words, wherewith manie Iewes & Moores assembled about them, so that there had growne a great quarrell, had it not bene for me, that got him to hold his peace, and so brought him away, and let the matter rest in that sort. These Moores traffique much with spices to the red sea, and other places, both by water and by land. And although manie of them dwell among the Portingales and traffique much with them, yet secretly they are their most deadly enemies, and doe them much mischief, and are the principal occasion that there are no more Christians conuerted to the faith of Christ, séeking all the wayes and meanes they can to withdraw and dis∣swade them from it, whereby the In∣dians doe both vse and followe their cu∣stomes and Religion.

By the Picture following you may sée the state and maiestie of the king of Cochin sitting vpon an Elephant, when he rydeth a∣broad with his Nayros, or Gentlemen and soldiers that guard and conduct him, also the other Malabares, both men and women, called Polyas, which the Mores and Maho∣metans that dwell in Cananor, among the Malabares, as I said before. You shall also sée the Christians that are called S. Thomas Christians, whereof many dwell among the Malabares, with one great legge, as they are borne, as in the description of the coast I haue alreadie shewed, likewise the pi∣cture of the men of Pegu, and the Ilandes of Molucos.

The 44. Chapter. Of the Pagodes and Indian Idoles form∣ing, keeping ceremonies and superstiti∣ons in generall, brieflie described.

THe Pagodes and Images are many and innumerable throughout the Orientall countries, whereof some are holden in great reuerence & estimation, more then the cō∣mon sort, and from all places are sought vn∣to▪ and visited both by Indians & Heathens, in manner of pilgrimages to purchase par∣dons, which aboue all others, are verie costly made and richlie set forth: of those onlie doe I meane to speak as néed requireth, that you may know them from the rest. By the towne of Bassaym, which lyeth northwards from Goa, vpō the coast of India, and is in∣habited by Portingalles, there lyeth an I∣land called Salsette. There are two of the most renowmed Pagodes, or temples, or ra∣ther holes wherein the Pagodes stand in all India: whereof one of their holes is cut out from vnder a hill of hard stone, and is of com∣passe within, about the bignes of a village of 400. houses: when you come to the foote of the hill; there is a Pagodes house, with Ima∣ges therein cut out of the very rockes of the same hill, with most horrible and fearefull formes and shapes, whereat this day the Gray Fryers haue made a Cloyster called S. Michaels: and as you goe in vnder the hill, in the first circle you may sée many Pa∣godes, and stepping somewhat higher it hath an other circle or Gallerie of Chambers and Pagodes, & yet higher it hath such an other Gallerie of Chambers and Pagodes, al cut out of the hard rockes: and by these chambers standeth a great cesterne with water, and hath certain holes aboue, wherby y^e rain wa∣ter falleth into it: aboue that it hath an other

[illustration]

[illustration]

Cochini Rex elephante vectus, cum procerum comitatu, quos Nairos vocant.

[illustration]

Die Coninck van Cochin op een elephant geseeten verselschapt met sijn edelen diemen Nairos noemt

[illustration]

[illustration]

Provinciae Pegu incola, auri adamantum et rubinorum ferax, undelacca sigillatoria advehitur,

Een wt Pegu, waer veel gout diamanten en robynen gevonden en het zegellack gemaeckt ••ort

Incola ex Insulis Moluco▪ ubi Carijop••ijlla magnâ copiâ crescunt, quorum vestes e stramine sunt factoe.

Een inwoonder wt die Eylanden van Mo••uco, daer die Garyophyl nagelen over vloedich groÿen▪ welcks cleede••en van stroy zyn▪

[illustration]

Penequais familioe, a Divo Thoma execratae intotam ut Indi referunt pro geniem

Ʋan penekays geslachten van S. Thomas als die ••dianen seggen gantselicken vervlocekt

[illustration]

[illustration]

Inquilini e Cananor Mahometani infectiss. Lusitanorum hostes

Die Machometisten van Cananor en doot vianden vande Portugeesen

[illustration]

Incolae Malabarae maritimi inter Goam et Cochina apud quos piper nascitur▪

Inwoonders van Malabar tusschen Goa en Cochyn aende Zeecant daer die peeper wast

[illustration]

[illustration]

Horrendae Idolorum effigies, quae in omnibus viarum angulis obuia Indi prostrati passim adorant et donarijs prosequutur, a Bramenis sacerdotibus, ob sapientioe opinionem, apud illos magni habitis. Pagodes dicta.

Scrickelicke be••denisse der Indiaensche affgoden gestest op alle hoccken van de weegen welcke sij ha••r offer hande doen en seer de voetelicken aenbidden van haer papen Bramenes die om opinie van wysheyt daer seer geacht sijn Pagodes genaemt

[illustration]

Mesquita seu templum Indorum Mahometistarum quae secta totum fere, orientem pervasit.

Mesquita ofte tempel der Machometische Indianen welcke seckte bynaer geheel Orienten doordrongen heeft

Gallery with Chambers and Pagodes, so that to be briefe, all the chambers and houses within this compasse or foure Galleries, are 300. and are al full of carued Pagodes, of so fearefull, horrible and deuelish formes and shapes, that it is wonderful to behold. The o∣ther temple or hole of Pagodes in this Ilād, is in an other place, hewed also out of hard rockes, and very great, al ful of Pagodes, cut out likewise of the same stones, with so euill fauored and vglie shapes, that to enter therin it would make a mans hayre stand vpright. There is yet an other Pagode, which they hold & estéem for the highest & chiefest Pago∣de of all the rest, which standeth in a little Il∣and called Pory▪ this Pagode by the Portin∣gals is called the Pagode of the Elephant. In that Iland standeth an high hill, & on the top thereof there is a hole, that goeth down into the hill, digged & carued out of the hard rock, or stones as big as a great cloyster: within it hath both places and cesternes for water, ve∣ry curiously made, and round about the wals are cut out & formed, the shapes of Elephāts, Lions, tigers, and a thousand other such like wilde and cruel beasts: also some Amazones and many other deformed thinges of diuers sorts, which are all so well and workmanlike cut, that it is strange to behold. It is thought that the Chinos (which are verie ingenious workemen) did make it, when they vsed to traffique in the Countrie of India. These Pagodes and buildings are now whollie left, ouergrowne, and spoyled, since the Por∣tingales had it vnder their subiections. By these places may it bee coniectured, that their Pagodes are still within the land, e∣uen till this day, speciallie where the Kings and gouernours are all of that Religion, and keepe their Courtes and Palaces.

In the Iland of Seylon, whereof I haue alreadie spoken, there is a high Hill called Pico d'Adam, or Adams Hill, vpon the top whereof standeth a great house, as big as a Cloyster: wherein standeth a Pa∣gode of great account. In this place in time past there was a Toothe of an Ape, shrined in Gold and precious stones, and therein was kept this Toothe, which for costlynes and worthynes was estéemed the holyest thing in all India, and had the greatest resort vnto it from all the countries round about it: so that it passed both S. Iames in Galisia, and S. Mi∣chae••s Mount in France, by reason of the great indulgences & pardons that were there daylie to be had: for which cause it was sought vnto with great deuotion by all the Indians within 4 or 500 miles round about in great multitudes: but it happened an. 1554 whē y^e Portingales made a road out of India and entred the Iland of Seylon, they went vp vpon the hill, where they thought to finde great treasure, because of the fame that was, spread abroad of the great resort and offering in that place, where they sought the Cloyster and turned vp euerie stone thereof, and found nothing but a little Coffer, made fast with many costly precious stones, wherein laye the Apes tooth. This bootie or relique they tooke with them vnto Goa, which when the Kings of Pegu, Sion, Bengala, Bisnagar, and others heard of, they were much grieued that their so costly Iewell was in that man∣ner taken from them, wherupon by common consent they sent their Ambassadors vnto the Viceroy of India, desiring him of all friend∣ship, to send them their Apes tooth againe, offering him for a ransome (besides other pre∣sents, which as then they sent vnto him) 700. thousand Ducats in Golde, which the Vice∣roy for couetousnesse of the money was min∣ded to doe. But the Archbishop of Goa called Don Gaspar, my Lords predicessor, disswa∣ded him from it, saying, that they being Chri∣stians, ought not to giue it them againe, be∣ing a thing whereby Idolatrie might be fur∣thered, and the Deuill worshipped, but rather were bound by their profession, to roote out and abolish all Idolatrie and superstition, as much as in them lay. By which meanes the Viceroy was perswaded to change his mind,* 1.28 and flatly denied the Ambassadours request: hauing in their presence first burnt the Apes tooth, the Ashes whereof hee caused to bee throwne into the Sea. Whereupon the Am∣bassadors fearing some further mischief, tooke their leaue and departed, being much astoni∣shed that hee refused so great a summe of mo∣ney, for a thing which hee so little estéemed that hee burnt it, and threw the Ashes into the Sea. Not long after there was a Beni∣ane (as the Benianes are full of subtiltie) that had gotten an other Apes tooth, and made the Indians and Heathens belieue, that hee had miraculously found the same Apes tooth, that the Viceroye had, and that it was reuealed vnto him by a Pagode in a vis••on, that assu∣red him it was the same, which hee said the Portingales thought they had burned, but that he had béene there inuisible and taken it away, laying an other in the place. Which the Heathens presently belieued, so that it came vnto the King of Bisnagars eares, who thereupon desired the Beniane to send it him, and with great ioy receiued it, giuing the Be∣niane a great summe of Golde for it, where it was againe holden and kept in the same honour and estimation, as the other that was burnt, had béene.

In the kingdome of Narsinga, or the coast called Ch••ramandel, there standeth a Pa∣gode, that is verie great, excéeding rich, and holden in great estimation, hauing manye Pilgrimages and visitations made vnto it from all the countries bordering about it, where euerie yeare they haue many faires, feastes, and processions, and there they haue a Wagon or a Carte, which is so great and heauie, that thrée or foure Elephants can hardly draw it, and this is brought foorth at faires, feastes, and processions. At this Carte hang likewise many Cables or Ropes, wher∣at also all the countrie people, both men and women of pure deuotion doe pull and hale. In the vpper part of this Carte standeth a Ta∣bernacle or seate, wherein sitteth the Idoll, and vnder it sit the Kings wiues, which after their manner play on all instruments, mak∣ing a most swéete melodie, and in that sort is the Carte drawne foorth, with great deuoti∣ons and processions: there are some of them, that of great zeale and pure deuotion doe cut péeces of flesh out of their bodies, and throwe them downe before the Pagode: others laye themselues vnder the whéeles of the Carte, and let the Carte runne ouer them, whereby they are all crushed to péeces, and pressed to death, and they that thus die, are accounted for holy and deuout Martyrs, and from that time forwardes are kept and preserued for great and holy Reliques, besides a thousand ••ther such like beastly superstitions, which they vse, as one of my Chamber fellowes, that had seene it, shewed me, and it is also wel knowne throughout all India.

Vpon a time I and certaine Portingales my friends hauing licence from the Viceroy were at a banket and méeting, about fiue or sixe miles within the firme land, and with vs wee had certaine Decanijns, and naturall borne Indians, that were acquainted with the countrie, the chiefe cause of our going, was to see their manner of burning the deade Bramene, and his wife with him, being aliue because we had béene aduertised, that such a thing was to be done. And there among other strange deuises that we saw, wee came into some Villages, and places inhabited by the Indians where in the way, and at euerie hil, stonie Rocke or hole, almost within a Pater noster length, wee found a Carued Pagode, or rather Deuils, and monsters in hellish shapes. At the last wee came into a Village, where stoode a great Church of stone, where∣in wee entered, and found nothing in it but a great Table that hung in the middle of the Church, with the Image of a Pagode, pain∣ted therein so mishaped and deformed, that more monsterous was neuer séene, for it had many hornes, and long téeth that hung out of his mouth down to the knées, and beneath his Nauel and belly, it had an other such like face, with many hornes and tuskes. Vppon the head thereof stoode a triple Crowned My∣ter, not much vnlike the Popes triple crown, so that in effect it séemed to be a monster, such as are described in the Apocalips. It hung before a Wall, which made a partition from an other Chamber, in manner of a Quier, yet was it close made vp without windowes, or any place for light, in the middle whereof was a little narrow close doore, and on both sides of the doore, stoode a small Furnace made within the wall, wherein were certaine holes or Lattisses, thereby to let the smoke or sa∣uor of the fire to enter into that place, when any offering should bee made. Whereof wee found some there, as Rice, Corne. Fruites, Hennes, and such like things, which the In∣dians dayly offered, but there came so filthie a smoke and stincke out of the place, that whosoeuer went néere it, was almost readie to choke, the said place being all black, smerie and foule there with Before this doore being shut, in the middle of the Church, there stoode a Calfe of stone, whereon one of our compa∣nie leaped, and laughing, began to crie out, which the Bramene that kept the Church, perceiuing, began to call and crie for helpe, so that presently many of the neighbours ranne thether, to sée what the cause might bee, but before the thrung of people came, we dealt so well with the Bramene (acknowledging our fault, & saying it was vnaduisedly done) that he was well content▪ & the people went home againe. Then wee desired the Bramene to o∣pen vs the doore that stoode shut, which after much intreatie he yeelded vnto, offering first to throw certaine Ashes vpon our foreheads, which we refused, so y^t before hee would open vs the doore, wee were forced to promise him that we would not enter further in, thē to the doore. The doore of their Sancta Sanctorum, or rather Diabolo••ū, being opened, it shew∣ed within like a Lime kill, being close vaulted round about, ouer the heade without either hole or window to cast in light, but onely at the doore, neither was ther any light in al the Church, but that which came in at the doore we entered by. Within the said cell or vault, there hung at the least 10••. burning Lamps, in the middle whereof stoode a little Altar and couered ouer with cloth made of cotton wool, & ouer that with pure golde, vnder the which (as the Bramene told vs sat the Pagode be∣ing of cleane golde, of the bignes of a Puppet or a Baby solde in faires: hard by the Church without the great doore, stood within y^e Earth a great foure cornered or square Cesterne,

he wed out of frée stone, with staires on each side to goe downe into it, full of gréene, filthie and stinking water, wherin they wash them selues when they meane to enter into the Church to pray. From thence we went fur∣ther, and still as we went, in euery place wee found Pagodes hewed out of hard stones, & standing in their holes, of such liuely shapes and figures as wee tolde you before. These stand in the waies vnder certaine couertures, without the Churches, and haue hard by each of them a small Cesterne of water, cut out of the stone to wash their féete, with halfe an Indian Nut, that hath a handle and hangeth there to take vp water withall. And this is ordained for the trauellers, that passe by, who commonly at euerie one of those Pagodes do fall downe and make their praiers, and wash their féete in those Cesternes. By the said Pa∣godes, commonly doe stand two little Fur∣naces, with a Calfe or Cow of stone, before the which they set their offerings, which are of such things, as are to be eaten, euerie man as his deuotion serueth, which they think the Pagode eateth in the night, but it is taken away by the Bramene. We found in euerie place such offerings standing, but we had lit∣tle desire once to taste therof, it looked so fil∣thily, and as we had sufficiently beholden their mishapen figures and monstrous Images, we returned againe vnto the village, where∣in we saw the stone Church, because the Bra∣mene. had aduertised vs, that the same day a∣bout Euening, the Pagode should be caried in procession, to sport it selfe in the fieldes, and to fetch a circuite, which we desired to sée. And about the time which he appointed, they rung a little Bell, which they had gotten of the Christians, wherewith all the people began to assemble, and tooke the Pagode out of his diabolicall Cell, which with great reuerence, they set in a Palamkin borne by the chiefe men of the towne, all the rest with great de∣••otion following after, with their vsual noyse and sounds of Trumpets and other instru∣ments, wherewith they went a reasonable way round about a field, & then brought him to the stone Cestern, where washing him ve∣rie cleane (although he were verie filthy stin∣king) they caried him againe into his Cel, lea∣uing him shut herein withall his Lampes, to make good cheare, and hauing made a foule smoke and stincke about him, and euery man left his offering behind him, they went home to their houses, leauing the Bramene alone, who in stéed of the Pagode, made good cheare at their costs, with his wife and family.

This is the maner of their ceremonies and daily superstitions, worshippings of false gods, wherein the Deuill hath so blinded them, that thereby they are without all doubt perswa∣ded to obtaine eternall life, and tell many mi∣racles of their Idols, whereby wee are moo∣ued and put in mind, to call to remembraunce how much herein we are bound to God, and to giue him thankes, that it hath pleased him to illuminate vs, with the truth of his holy Gospel, and that we are not borne or brought vp among those Heathens, and diuelish Ido∣laters, and to desire God that it would please him of his gracious goodnesse, to open their eyes, and to giue them the truth of his holy word among them, as hee is our onely trust, for they are in all things like vs, made after Gods owne Image, and that when his good pleasure is, hee will loose them out of the bands of Sathan, and giue both them and vs that which is most necessarie for our soules, Amen. The better to vnderstand the maner of their diuelish shapes and figures of Pago∣des, I haue hereunto annexed the picture thereof, euen as they openly stand in the high wayes or hilles, with a Cow or Calfe of stone by them, also their Church cal∣led Meskita, belonging to the Mahome∣tans and Moores, dweling in Malabar, with the Cesterne of water wherein they wash themselues.

The 45. Chapter. Of all the kinde of beastes, Cattell, and foules in India.

THere is ouer all India great store of Cattell, as Oxen, Kine, Shéepe, Hogges, Goates, Kids, and such like, and verie good cheape, and in great aboundance, although the flesh is not of so good a tast as that in Eu∣rope, which procéedeth from the heate of the countrie, & therfore it is not much estéemed. A man may buy the best Cow in Goa, for fiue or sixe Pardawes. Oxen are there little killed to eate, but are most kept to til the land, all o∣ther things as hogges, shéepe and goates, are sold after the rate. Mutton is little estéemed of, and not much vsed to be eaten for it is for∣bidden to such as are sicke, & the Hogs flesh is much better & sounder, which is rather per∣mitted vnto sicke persons then Mutton. Ther are shéepe in that countrie of fiue quarters in quantity, for that the tayle is as great, & hath as much flesh vpon it, as any of the quarters, there are many Buffles, but nothing good to be eaten, vnles it be by poore people, but their Milke is very good, and is very well solde and ordinarily eaten, for you shall sée the slaues & Canarijns in great numbers, all day going a∣bout the stréetes to sell the Milke of Buffles,

and Goates, and excellent swéete Creame, and fresh butter in small péeces. They make likewise some small white Cheeses, but they are very salte and drie: wilde Bores, some Hares, Conies, Harts and Hindes are there also to be found, but not many▪ Cockes, Ca∣pons, Pheasantes and Doues are there in great abundance and good cheape. In the Is∣land of Goa and there about are Sparrows, and some other small birdes, yet not many: but on the coast of Cochin and Malabar there are very few Sparrows, nor any such like small birdes. There are in India many Battes, and some of them so great, that it is incredible to tell. They doe great mischiefe to trées, fruites and hearbes, whereby the Canariins are constrained to set men to watch in their trées, and yet they can hardly ridde them away. The Indians eate them, and say they are as good meat as a Partridge. There is a most wonderfull number of black Crows, which do much hurt, and are so bold, that oftentimes they come flying in at their windowes, and take the meat out of the dish, as it standeth vpon the table, before them that are set downe to eate: and as I my selfe sate writing aboue in a chamber of the house, the windowes being open, one of those Crowes flew in at the window, and picked the cotton one of mine Inke horne, and blotted all the paper that lay on my table, do what I could to let him. They sitte commonly vppon the Buffles backes, and pecke off their haire, so that you shal find very few Buffles that haue any haire vpon their backes, and therefore to auoide the Crowes they get themselues into marishes, and watrie places, where they stand in the water vppe to the neckes, other∣wise they could neuer be rid of them. There are likewise great numbers of Rattes, and some as bigge as young Pigges, so that the Cattes dare not touch them. Sometimes they digge downe the houses, for that they vndermine the walles & foundations through and through, wherby many times the houses fall downe and are spoyled. There is another sort of Rattes, that are little and reddish of haire: They are called sweet smelling Rattes, for they haue a smell as if they were full of Muske. Of Ants or Pismires there is so great aboundance throughout al India, and so noy∣some, that it is incredible to such as haue not seene it: for that men may set nothing what∣soeuer it be▪ that is to be eaten, or fattie, nor yet their clothes nor linnen, but you shall pre∣sently find at the least a thousand vpon it, and in the twinckling of an eye they wil presently consume a loafe of bread: wherefore it is the manner throughout India, to make all the Cubbords wherein they kéep their victualls, and chests, where their linnen and apparrell lyeth, with foure féete or pillers, and vnder e∣uery foot or piller a stone or woodden Cestern full of water, and place the Cubbord or chest in the middle of the roome, not néete the wall, whereby they cannot come at it, otherwise it would be spoyled, and if they do neuer so little forget to powre water into the Cesternes, if it be but a Pater noster while, presently ther will be so many Pismires crawling all ouer it, that it is wonderfull: so that it séemeth to bee a curse or plague of God sent vppon that countrey. There are some likewise that vse such Cesternes of water vnder their bedstéed, because they wold not be troubled with them as they lie in their beds, and also vnder their tables. Some men which kéep Canary birds, or such small fowles (that are brought thither from Portingall, or out of Turkey and Per∣sia for their pleasures) are forced to set them on a sticke or pearch made for the purpose, with a Cesterne of water vnder it, otherwise it would presently be killed by the Pismires: and though it hangeth in the top of the house, yet they will come at it, if it haue a string, to hold it by. The soldiers and poore people that haue not the meanes to buy Cubbordes with Cesternes) put the bread and other victua••les which they leaue (which is not ouer much) into a cloth tyed on knots, and hang it on a nayle against a wall, and make a circle about it of Charcoale, so that the Pismires cannot get ouer, nor come at it. There is another sorte of Pismires which are almost a finger long, and reddish of colour: they runne into the fields & do great hurt to the herbes, fruites and plants. Moathes & wormes which créepe and eate through mens cloathes, are there in great aboundance, whereby men must vse no more cloathes nor linnen in those countries then that he necessarily and dayly weareth on his back, otherwise they are presently moath∣eaten and spoyled. They can hardly kepe any paper or bokes from wormes, which are like eare wormes, but they do often spoyle & con∣sume many papers & euidences of great im∣portance. There are also many Wall-lyce.* 1.29 There is a kind of beast that flyeth, twice as bigge as a Bee, and is called Baratta: These creatures also do much hurt, and are commō∣ly in Sugar, Hony, Butter, Oile, and al fatte wares and swéet meats. Many of them like∣wise come into their chestes among their clothes and linnen, which they doe also spoyle and spot. They are in great numbers and ve∣rie hurtfull. There can bee nothing so close shut or made fast, but they wil get in & spoile it, for where they lie or be, they spot all things with their egges, which stick as fast as sirop vpon a paper, so that ther may bee estéemed 〈3 pages missing〉〈3 pages missing〉

they are to draw, they binde the fat or packe fast with a rope that he may féele the waight thereof, and then the keeper speaketh vnto him: whereuppon hee taketh the corde with his snout, and windeth it about his teeth, and thrusteth the end into his mouth••, & so draw∣eth it hanging after him, whether they desire to haue it. If it be to be put into a boate, then they bring the boate close to the shore of the Key, and the Elephant putteth it into the boate himselfe, and with his snout gathereth stones together, which he laieth vnder the fat pipe, or packe, & with his teeth striketh & thru∣steth the packe or vessell, to see if it lie fast or not. It will draw any great shot or other I∣ron work, or mettall being made fast vnto it, be it neuer so heauie, they draw fustes, small Gallies, and other great boats, as Caruels, and such like, as easily out of the water vpon the land, as if no man were in them: so that they serue their turnes there, euen as our slids or carts with horses doe here to carrie our wares and marchandises, their meat is rice and water, they sléepe like kine, oxen, horses, and all foure footed beastes, and bow their knées and all their members as other beasts doe. In winter when it beginneth to raine, then they are vnquiet, and altogether mad, so that their kéepers cannot rule them, and then they are let some whether out of the towne to a great trée, and there tyed vnto it by the legs with a great iron chaine, where they cary him meate, and so hee lieth in the open aire, as long as he is mad, which is from Aprill to September, all the Winter time when it raineth, and then he commeth to him selfe, and beginneth to serue againe as tame∣ly, that a mā may lie vnder his bellie, so you doe him no hurt: but he that hurteth him, hee must take héede, for they neuer forget when any man doth them iniurie, vntill they be re∣uenged. Their téeth which is the Iuor bone, is much vsed in India, specially in Cambaia, whereof they make many curious péeces of workemanship▪ the women weare manillas, or arme bracelets therof, ten or twelue about each arme, whereby it is there much worne, and are in great numbers brought out of Ae∣thiopia, Mosambique and other places. In the Island of Seylon and Pegu, they fight most vpon Elephants, and bind swords vpon their teeth, they haue likewise woodden Ca∣stles vppon their backes, wherein are fiue or sixe men that shoot out of them with bowes, or peeces, and also cast out wildfire. They doo no other hurt but onely serue to put the ene∣mie out of order, and to scatter them out of their rankes, but if any one of them once tur∣neth his backe, then they all begin to turne & runne ouer their owne people, and put them all out of order. They are very fearefull of a rat or a mouse, and also of the Pismyres, be∣cause they feare they would créepe into their snouts. They are likewise afraide of gunne shot and of fire, vnlesse by length of time they be vsed vnto them. When they haue the com∣panie one of the other, the male Elephant standeth vpon the higher ground, and the fe∣male somewhat lower. As they goe along the way, although you see them not, you may heare them a farre off by the noyse of their féet and clapping of their eares, which they cōtinually vse. They are as swift ingoing al∣most as a horse, and are very proud, and desi∣rous of honour. When there is any great feast or holiday kept in Goa, with solemne procession, commonly the Elephants go with them, the yong before, and the old behind, and are all painted vppon their bodies with the Armes and Crosses of Portingall, & haue euery one fiue or six trumpetters or players vpon the Shalmes, sitting vppon them that sound very pleasantly, wherewith they are as well pleased, and goe with as great grauitie, and in as good order as if they were men. It hapned in Goa, that an Elephant shuld draw a great fust out of the water vnto the land, which fust was so great and heauie, that hee could not doe it alone, so that they must haue another to help him: whereupon the keeper chid him, vsing many hard wordes, saying, that he was idle and weak, and that it would be an euerlasting shame for him, that they must fetch another to helpe him, wherewith the Elephant was so desperate, that he thrust away his fellow (which was brought to help him) and beg••n freshly againe to draw, with so great a force, more then hee was well able to doe, that with extreame labour hee burst and fell downe starke dead in the place. At such time as I was to make my voyage frō Cochin to Portingall, the Rudder of our ship was out of order, so that it must of force be brought on land to make it fit againe, and so it was drawn to the riuer side at the sterne of the boat, which the Elephant should draw on land vppon two bordes, that it might slide vp, and because it was heauie, (as the Rud∣der of a ship of 1400. or 1600. tunnes requi∣reth) as also that the Elephant was as yet but yong, and not growne to his ful strength, so that he could not draw it out alone, yet he did the best hee could: but seeing hee could not doe it, he fell on his fore legges, and began to crie and weepe, that the teares ran out of his eyes, and because many of vs stoode vpon the shore to behold this sight, the kéeper began to chide him, and with hard words to curse him, because he shamed him thus in presence of so

many men, not to be able to draw vp such a thing: but what strength or labour soeuer the Elephant vsed, he could not doe it alone, but when they brought another Elephant to help him, they both together drewe it halfe out of the water, so that it lay partly vppon the bordes. The first Elephant, perceiuing that with his head and teeth thrust the other Ele∣phant away, and would haue no more helpe, but drew it out himselfe: whereby it may bee considered, that they are in vnderstanding, and desire of commendation like vnto men.

They are likewise very thankefull and mindfull of any good done vnto them. When new yeares day cōmeth, their kéepers vse of cōmon custome to aske new yeres gifts of the Viceroy, the Archbishop, and other gouer∣nours and Gentlemen, and then the Ele∣phants come to the dore and bow their heads downe, and when any thing is giuen, they knéele on their knees with great lowlinesse, and thankefulnesse, for the good déedes so done vnto their keepers (which they thinke to bee done vnto themselues.) They vse as they passe by such houses, to bow their heads at the dores, as also when they passe by the Church doores, and by Crosses, which their Masters teach them. They haue a custome that they goe often into the market where herbes are sold, as Reddish, Lettice, Colworts, and such like stuffe, and those that are liberall to the Elephant, doe vse to throw something before him. Among the rest there was one Hearb wife which alwaies vsed to throw something of her wares before the Elephant. Now whē the time came on that the Elephant groweth mad, as I said before, they vse to goe with them thrée or foure dayes or a weeke about the stréets before they bind them vp, (beeing as then but halfe mad) to ask something of e∣uery body for the féeding of the mad Elephāt in the winter time. And going thus about the stréetes, the master is not able to rule him, for hee runneth about with his head downe∣ward, and by his roaring giueth the people warning to beware, and when he findeth or séeth no man, hee leapeth and ouerthroweth whatsoeuer he méeteth withall, whereby he•• maketh great sport and pastime, much like to the baiting of Oxen in Spaine, which ne∣uer ceaseth, vntil one, two, or more of them be slaine, the like rule is kept with the mad Elephant in India. It chanced in this run∣ning about, that the Elephhnt ran through the stréets, and in haste at vnwares came in∣to the market, throwing downe all that was in his way, whereat euery man was abasht, and leauing their ware, ranne to saue them∣selues from being ouer run by the Elephant, and by meanes of the noyse and prease of peo∣ple, they fell one ouer another, as in such ca∣ses is commonly seene. Among them was this woman, that alwaies vsed to giue the Elephant some thing to eat, which had a lit∣tle childe in the market lying by her in a bas∣ket, and by the hastie rising vp and throng of the people, the woman ran into a house, not hauing time to snatch vp her Child, and take it with her, and when the Elephant was a∣lone in the market place, where he roared vp and downe, ouerthrowing all thinges that were before him, hee came by the child (that as I said) lay still in the market, and as euery man looked, specially the mother, which cried out, & verily thought that the Elephant had taken it and cast it on his shoulder and spoiled it as he did all other thinges. Hee on the con∣trarie notwithstanding all his madnesse, bée∣ing mindfull of the good will and liberalitie of the childes mother dayly vsed vnto him, tooke vp the child handsomlie and tenderly with his snout, and layde it softly vpon a stall by a shop side, which done, hee began againe to vse the same order of stamping, crying, and clapping as he had done at the first, to the great won∣dering of al that beheld it, specially to the ease and ioy of the mother, that had recouered her child sound and well againe. These and such like examples do often happen in India, which would be too long to rehearse, and ther∣fore I thought good onely to set these thrée or foure before your eyes, as things worthy me∣morie, thereby to teach vs to bee mindfull of all good déeds done vnto vs, and with thank∣fulnes to requite them, considering that these dumbe beastes doe shew, vs as it were in a glasse, that wee should doe so as they doe, not onley when they haue their sence and vnder∣standing, but (which is more to bee wondred at) when they are out of their wits & starke mad: whereas men many times hauing all their vnderstanding, and their fiue wits soūd, do cast the benefits, which they haue receiued behind their backs, yea, and at this day doe reward all good déedes with vnthankfulnesse, God amend it.

The 47. Chapter. Of the Abadas or Rhinoceros.

THe Abada or Rhinoceros is not in India, but onely in Bengala, and Patane. They are lesse and lower than the Elephant. It hath a short horne vpon the nole, in the hinder part sōwhat big, & toward the end sharper, of a browne blew, and whi∣tish colour, it hath a snout like a hogge, and the skin vppon the vpper part of his body is all wrinckled, as if it were armed with Shields or Targets. It is a great enemie of the Elephant. Some thinke it is the right Vnicorne, because that as yet there hath no other bin found, but only by hearesay, and by the pictures of them. The Portingales and those of Bengala affirme, that by the Riuer Ganges in the Kingdome of Bengala, are many of these Rhinoceros, which when they will drinke, the other beasts stand and waite vpon them, till the Rhinoceros hath drinke, & thrust their horne into the water, for he can∣not drink but his horne must be vnder the wa∣ter, because it standeth so close vnto his nose, and muzzle: and then after him all the other beastes doe drinke. Their hornes in India are much estéemed and vsed against all ve∣nime, poyson, and many other diseases: like∣wise his teeth, clawes, flesh, skin and blood, and his very dung and water and all whatsoeuer is about him, is much estéemed in India, and vsed for the curing of many diseases and sick∣nesses, which is very good and most true, as I my selfe by experience haue found, but it is to be vnderstood, that all Rhinocerotes are not a like good, for there are some whose hornes are sold for one, two, or thrée hundred Par∣dawes the péece, and there are others of the same colour and greatnes that are sold but for three or foure Pardawes, which the Indians know and can discerne. The cause is that some Rhinocerotes, which are found in cer∣taine places in the countrie of Bengala haue this vertue, by reason of the hearbes which that place only yéeldeth and bringeth foorth, which in other places is not so, and this esti∣mation is not onely held of the horne, but of all other things in his whole body, as I saide before. There are also by Malacca, Sion, and Bengala some goates that are wild, whose hornes are estéemed for the best hornes a∣gainst poyson, and all venime that may bee found: they are called Cabras de Mato, y^t is, wilde Goates. These hornes are of great ac∣count in India, and much estéemed, and are oftentimes by experience found to bee verie good, wherof I my self am a good witnes, ha∣uing prooued the same. In the yeare 1581. as king Phillip was at Lisbone, there was a Rhinoceros and an Elephant brought him out of India for a present, and he caused them both to be led with him vnto Madril, where the Spanish Court is holden. This shal suf∣fice as touching beastes and birdes in those countries, although there are many others which are not so well knowne: therefore I haue heere set downe none but such as are dayly séene there in the land, and well known by euery man in the countrie.

The 48. Chapter. Of the Fishes and other beastes in the Seas of India.

FIsh in India is verie plen∣tifull, and some very plea∣sant and swéete. The best Fish is called Mordexiin, Pampano, and Tatiingo. There is a fish called Piexe Serra, which is cut in round péeces as we cut Salmon, and salt it. It is very good, and wil indure long to carie ouer sea in ships for vic∣tuals. Most of their fish is eaten with rice, that they séeth in broth which they put vpon the rice, and is somewhat sowre, as if it were sodden in gooseberries, or vnripe grapes, but it tasteth well, and is called Car••iil, which is their dayly meat, the rice is in stead of bread: there are also good Shads, Soles, and other sortes of fishes. The Garnaten is the best & greatest that euer I saw any, for that with a dozen of them a man may make a good meale. The Crabs and Creuishes are verie good and maruellous great, that it is a won∣der to tell, and that which is more wonderful, when the moone is in the full, here with vs it is a common saying, that then Crabbes, and creuishes are at the best, but there it is cleane contrarie: for with a full moone they are emp∣tie and out of season, and with a new moone good and full. There are also Muskles and such like shelfishes of many sorts, oysters ve∣ry many, specially at Cochin; & from thence to the cape de Comoriin. Fish in India is very good cheape, for y^e with the valew of a s••iuers of their money, a man may buy as much fish and rice to it, as will serue fiue or sixe men for a good meale, after the Spanish manner, which is very good cheape, in respect

of their victuals in Spaine and Portingall.

There is in the riuers and also in the Sea along the coast of India great store of fishes, which the Portingalls call Tubaron or Ha∣yen. This fish doth great mischiefe, and de∣uoureth many men that fish for pearles, and therefore they dare not swimme in the riuers for feare of these fishes, but doe vse to bath themselues in cesternes, made for the same purpose, as I said before. As our ship lay in the Riuer of Cochin, readie to sayle from thence to Portingall, it hapned that as we were to hang on our rutter, which as then was mended, the master of the ship, with 4 or 5. saylers, went with the Boat to put it on, and an other Sayler beeing made fast with a corde about his middle, and tied to the Ship, hung downe with halfe his body into the water to place the same vpon the hookes, and while he hung in the water, there came one of those Hayens, and bit one of his legs, to the middle of his thigh, cleane off at a bit, notwithstanding that the Master stroke at him with an oare, and as the pore man was putting downe his arme to feele his wound, the same Fish at the second time for another bit did bite off his hand and arme aboue the elbow, and also a péece of his buttucke.

The Master and all the Saylers in the Boate not being able to help him, although they both stroke and flang at it with staues and oares, and in that miserable case the pore man was carried into the Hospitall, where we left him with small hope of life, and how he sped after that, God knoweth, for the next day we set sayle and put to Sea. These and such like chances happen dayly by those fishes in India, as well in the sea, as in the Riuers, specially among the Fishers for Pearles, whereof many loose their liues.

In the Riuer of Goa in Winter time when the mouth of the Riuer was shut vp, as commonly at that time it is, the fisher∣men tooke a fish of a most wonderfull and strange forme, such as I thinke was neuer seene eyther in India, or in any other place, which for the strangenes therof was presen∣ted to my Lord the Archbishop, the picture whereof by his commandement was pain∣ted, and for a wonder sent to the King of Spaine.

It was in bignes as great as a middle si∣zed Dogge with a snout like a hogge, small eies, no eares, but two holes where his eares should bee, it had foure féet like an Elephant, the tayle beginning somewhat vppon the backe broad, and then flatte, and at the verie end round and somewhat sharpe. It ranne a a long the hall vppon the flore, and in euerie place of the house snorting like a hogge. The whole body, head, taile, & legs being couered with s••ales of a thumb breadth, harder than Iron, or steele: Wee hewed and layd vppon them with weapons, as if men should beate vpon an Anuill, and when wee stroke vppon him, hee rouled himselfe in a heape, head and féete altogether, so that hee lay like a round ball, wee not beeing able to iudge where hee closed himselfe together, neyther could wee with anie instrument or strength of hands o∣pen him againe, but letting him alone and not touching him, hee opened himselfe and ranne away as I said before.

And because I am now in hand with Fishes of India, I will here declare a short and true Historie of a Fish, although to some it may seeme incredible, but it standeth pain∣ted in the Viceroyes Pallace in India, and was set downe by true and credible witnes∣ses that it was so, and therefore it standeth there for memorie of a wonderfull thing, to∣gether with the names and surnames of the ship, Captaine day, & yere when it was done, and as yet there are many men liuing at this day, that were in the same shippe and aduen∣ture, for that it is not long since, and it was thus. That a ship sayling from Mosam∣bique into India, and they hauing faire weather, a good fore winde, as much as the Sayles might beare before the winde for the space of fourteene dayes together, directing their course towards the Equinoctiall line, euery day as they tooke the height of the Sunne, in stead of diminishing or lessening their degrées, according to the Winde and course they had and held, they found them selues still contrarie, and euery day further backewards then they were, to the great ad∣miration and wondering of them all, and contrarie to all reason and mans vnderstan∣ding, so that they did not only wonder theraf, but were much abasht beeing stedfastly per∣swaded that they were bewitched, for they knew very well by experience, that the streame or course of the water in those coun∣tries did not driue them backe, nor withholde them contrarie to all Art of Nauigation, whereupon they were all in great perplexity and feare, standing still and beholding each o∣ther, not once knowing the cause there∣of.

At y^e last the chiefe Boteson whō they call the masters mate, looking by chance ouer∣bord towards the beakhead of the ship, he es∣pied a great broad taile of a Fish that had winded it selfe as it were about the beake∣head the body therof beeing vnder the keele,

and the heade vnder the Ruther, swimming in that manner, and drawing the shippe with her against the wind and their right course: whereby presently they knewe the cause of their so going backewards: so that hauing at the last stricken long with staues and other weapons vppon the fishes taile, in the ende they stroke it off, and thereby the fish left the ship▪ after it had layne 14 dayes vnder the same, drawing the ship with it against wind and weather: for which cause the Viceroy in Goa caused it to be painted in his pallace for a perpetuall memory, where I haue often read it, with the day and time, and the name both of the shippe and Captaine, which I can not well remember, although it bee no great matter.

There are many other fishes in those seas and riuers. In the Riuer of Bengala called G••a••, and by Malacca there are Croco∣diles, and other sea Serpents of an vnspeake∣able greatnes, which often times doe ouer∣turne smal fisher boates and other sentes, and deuoure the men that are therein: and some of them creeping out of the water vnto the lande do snatch vppe diuers men, which they hale after them, and then kill them and eate them, as it dayly happeneth in those Coun∣tries. There are by Malacca certaine fish shelles found on the shore, much like Scalop shelles, so great and so heauie that two strong men haue enough to doe with a Leauer to draw one of them after them. Within them there is a fish which they of Malacca do eate. There were some of those shelles in the bal∣last of the shippe that came from Malacca, & kept company with vs from the Island of S. H••len••, to the Islande of Tercera, where the shippe was cast away, and some of the shelles taken out of her, which the Iesuites of Malacca had sent vnto Lisbone, to set in the wals of their church and Cloyster, which they there had caused to bee made, and most sumptuously built. The like happened to a shippe called S. Peter, that sayled from Co∣•• towardes Portingall, that fell vpon a sande, which at this day is called after the same ships name S. Peters sande lying from Goa South Southeast vnder 6. degrees vp∣on the South side, where it was cast away, but all the men saued themselues, and of the woode of the shippe that was cast away, they made a small Barke or Caruell, wherewith they all arriued in India: & while they were busied about building of their ship, they found such great Crabbes vpon that sand, and in so great numbers, that they were constrained to make a sconce, and by good watch to de∣fend themselues from thē, for that they were of an vnreasonable greatnes, so that whom∣soeuer they got vnder their claws, it cost him his life: this is most true and not long since done, for that in the same shippe wherein I came out of India into Portingal, there were two of the Saylors that had beene in the same shippe called S. Peter, and affirmed it for a truth, as it is likewise paynted in di∣uers places in Goa, for a perpetual memory, which I thought good to set downe, to shewe the strangenesse of those fishes: and it is to be thought that there are many other fishes and sea monsters, as yet to vs not known, which are dayly found by such as continually vse to sea, and doo often meete with them. And this shall be sufficient for the fishes & sea monsters of India.

The 49. Chapter Of all fruits, trees, plants, and common hearbs in India, and first of a certain fruit called Ananas.

ANanas by the Canarijns cal∣led Ananasa,* 1.30 by the Brasili∣ans Nana, and by others in Hispaniola Iaiama: by the Spaniards in Brasilia Pinas, because of a certain resemblance which the fruite hath with the Pineapple. It commeth out of the Prouince of San∣cta Croce, first brought into Bra••lia, thē to the Spanish Indies, and afterwardes into the East Indies, where nowe they grow in great abundance, of the bignes of Citrones, or of a common Melon. They are of a faire colour, of a yellow greene, which greennes when it is ripe vadeth away. It is sweet in taste, & plea∣sant in smell, like to an Abricot, so that by the very smell of them a man may know the houses wherein these fruites are kept. A far off they shew like Arti∣ch••kes, but they haue no such sharpe prickes on their leaues: the plants or stalkes whereon they grow are as bigge as a Thistle, and haue a roote also like a Thistle, wheron groweth but one Nut in the middle of the stalke, and rounde about it certaine small stalkes whereon some fruite likewise doeth often times grow. I haue had some of the Slips here

in my garden, that were brought mee out of Brasilia, but our colde countrey could not brooke them. This fruite is hot and moist, and is eaten out of wine like a Peach, light of disgesture, but su∣perfluous in nourishing: It inflameth and heateth, and consumeth the gums; by reason of the small threedes that run through it. There are many sortes of this fruite among the Brasilians, which according to the difference of their speeches haue likewise differēt names, whereof three kindes are specially na∣med and written of. The first called Iaiama, which is the longest & the best of taste, and the substance of it yellow. The second Bomama, that is white within, and not very sweet of taste. The thirde Iaiagna, which is whitish within, and tasteth like Renish Wine. These fruites likewise do grow some of them∣selues as if they were planted, and are called wilde Ananasses, and some growe in gardens, whereof we now make mention. The wilde growe vppon stalkes of the length of a pike or Speare, rounde, and of the bignesse of an Orange, ful of thorns: the leaues likewise haue sharpe pricks, and round about full of soft 〈…〉〈…〉 the fruite is little eaten, although they are of an in∣different pleasant taste. The whole plantes with the rootes are ful of iuyce, which being taken about seuē or eight of the clocke in a morning, and drunke with Sugar, is holden for a most cer∣taine remedie against the heate of the liuer and the kidneyes, against exulce∣rated kidneyes, mattery water and ex∣coriation of the yarde. The Arabians commend it to be good against Saynt Anthonies fire, and call it Queura. He that is desirous to reade more hereof, let him reade Costa in the proper Chap∣ter of Ananas, and Ou••edius in the eight booke, and eighteenth Chapter: and Theuetius in his obseruations of Ameri∣ca, in the six and fortieth Chapter. A∣nanas preserued in Sugar are like Co∣cumbers, whereof I haue had many.

Ananas is one of the best fruites, and of best taste in all India, but it is not a proper fruit of India it selfe, but a 〈…〉〈…〉 fruite, for it was first brought by the ••ortingalles out of Brasill••, so that at the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it •• is sold for a noueltie, at a 〈…〉〈…〉, and sometimes more, but now there are so ma∣ny growen in the Countrey, that they are very good cheape. The time when they are rype is in Lent, for then they are best and sweetest of taste. They are as bigge as a Melon, and in forme like the heade of a Di∣staffe, without like a Pine apple, but softe in cutting: of colour redde and greenish: They growe about halfe a fadome high from the grounde▪ not much more or lesse. the leaues are like the Hearbe that is brought out of Spayne, called Aloe, or Semper viua, because it is alwayes greene, and therefore it is hanged on the beames of houses, but somewhat smaller, and at the endes somewhat sharpe, as if they were cut out. When they eate them, they pull off the shell, and cutte them into shees or pee∣ces, as men desire to haue them drest. Some haue small kernelles within them, like the kernelles of Apples or Peares. They are of colour within like a Peach, that is ripe, and almost of the same taste, but in sweete∣nesse they surpasse all fruites. The iuyce thereof is like swéete Muste, or newe Re∣nish Wyne: a man can neuer satisfie him∣selfe therewith. It is very hotte of nature, for if you let a knife sticke in it but halfe an houre long, when you draw it forth again, it will bee halfe eaten vppe, yet it doeth no particular hurte, vnlesse a man shoulde eate so much thereof, that hee surfet vpon them, as many such greedie and vnreasonable men there are, which eate all thinges without any measure or discretion. The sicke are forbidden to vse them. The common way to dresse the common Ana∣nasses, is to cut them in broad round cakes or slyces, and so being stooped in wine, it is a ve∣ry pleasant meat.

The 50. Chapter. O•• Iaqua or Iaacca.

THis fruite groweth in Calecut, and in some o∣ther places of India, neere to the Sea,* 1.31 and vpon ryuers or waters sides. It is a certaine fruite that in Malabar is called Iaca, in Canara and Gusurate, Panar and Panasa, by the Arabians, Panax, by the Persians, Fanax. This fruite groweth vpon great trees, not out of the branches like other fruites, but out of the body of the tree, aboue the earth, and vnder the leaues. The leaues are as bigge as a mans hand, greenish, with a thick hard veine that goeth cleane thorough the length of them. The smallest of this fruite, spe∣cially that which groweth in Malabar, and is the best of all, is greater then our greatest Pumpians, (I meane of Por∣tingall.) They are without couered with a hard shell, of colour greene, o∣therwise it is much like the Pine apple, saue onely that the shell or huske see∣meth to be set ful of pointed Diamants, which haue certaine greene and short hookes at the endes, but at the verie points are blackish, and yet are neither sharpe not pricking although they see∣me so to be. These fruites are like Me∣lons, and sometimes greater, outwardly greene, and inwardly Yelow, with ma∣ny soft prickles, apparrelled (as it were) like a Hedgehog. Those that grow in Goa are not so good, nor of so good a taste as those in Malabar. This fruit be∣ing ripe, which is commonly in De∣cember, smelleth very sweete, and is of two sorts, wherof the best is called Bar∣ca, the other Papa, which is not so good, and yet in handling it is soft like the o∣ther. The best cost about 40. Maruedies, which is somewhat more then a Ryall of plate, and being ripe they are of a blackish colour, and with a hard huske, the outward part thereof which com∣passeth the Nut, is of many tastes, some times it tasteth like a Melon, somtimes like a Peach, and somewhat pleasanter, (but in taste it is most like vnto the Peach) somtimes like a Hony Combe, sometimes like a Citron, but they are hard to digest, & doe commonly come vp againe out of the stomacke vndige∣sted, euen as they were eaten. This fruit being cut vp and opened longwise in the middle, is white within, and full of meate, with many partitions ful of long Nuts, thicker and greater then Dates, with a graye s••n, the Nut white, like our Chesnuts. Being greene they eate earthy, and sharpe of taste, and ingen∣der much Wine, but being rosted or soden they are like our Chesnuts & are verie pleasant▪ they increase lust, for the which cause they are most vsed to bee eaten: They stop the Flux of the belly, the skin about them is heauie for the maw, and corrupting therein, doth breed many euil and pestilent humors, wherof such as eate much of this fruit, doe easily get the Plague, which the Indians call Morxi. He that desireth to see more hereof, let him Reade Lodoui∣cus Romanus, in his fifth Booke and fif∣teene Chapter of his Nauigations, and Christopherus a Costa in his Cap. of Iaca, & Gracia ab Horto, in the second booke and fourth Chapter.

Iaaca grow on great trées like Nut trees, & onely on the sea shores, that is to say, in such countries as border on the seas, cleane contrarie vnto al other fruites, for they grow aboue the earth, vpon the trunkes or bodies of the trees, & vpon the great thick branches, but where the branches spread abroad, being small and full of leaues, there groweth none: they are as big as a great Melon, and much like it of fashion, although some of them are as great as a man can well lift vp, and out∣wardlie are like the Ananas, but smoother, and of a darke gréene colour, the fruit within is in huskes, like Chesnuttes, but of an other forme, and euerie huske hath a Nutte, which is half white, the rest yealowish, and sticketh to a mans handes like honnie, when it is in the beehyues among the waxe, and for toughnesse & in taste for sweetnes not much vnlike. The fruite is on the out side like a Chesnutte, and in forme or fashion like an Acorne, when the gréene knob that groweth vnder it is taken away, and of that bignesse and some what bigger: this fruite that is out∣most

being eaten, the rest is good to be rosted or sodden, and are not much vnlike in taste to the Chesnuts of Europa. There are of these huskes in euery Iaacca a hundreth and more, according to the greatnes thereof. There are two sorts of them, the best are called Girasal, and the common and least estéemed, Cham∣basal, although in fashion and trées there is no difference, saue that the Girasals haue a swéeter taste. By this name Girasal & Chā∣basal, the Indians doe make difference of their Ryce, and other things: they call the best Girasal and the worst Chambasal, after the which names they haue their prices: the Iaaccas continue all the yeare.

The 51. Chapter. Of Mangas.

MAngas growe vppon great trees like Iaca trees, they haue many branches, and are of quantitie as bigge as a great Goose Egge,* 1.32 and in some places of India doe weigh two pounds, and more the peece. And ma∣ny times there are of seuerall colours vpon one tree, some being a light green, others Yelow, & some a reddish green, and for smel and taste pleasant, and not being perished, are of better tast then a∣ny Peach. As touching their name, they are commonly called Mangas, in Ca∣narijn Ambo, of the Turkes and Persi∣ans, Amba. They beare fruit vpon the trees, from Aprill to Nouember, accor∣ding to the situation of the place, they growe in many places, but the best in Ormus, where before all other fruites they are desired, next vnto them are those that grow in Gusarate, which for their goodnes are called Gusarates, they are smaller then the other, but of better taste & sauor, within they haue a small Nut, or kernell. A thirde sort there is that groweth in Balagatte, and those are the greatest, for there are of them that waigh two pound & a quarter, of a ve∣rie pleasant taste. Euen so are those that grow in Charanna, Quindor, Madanagor, and Dultabado, being the chiefe townes in the kingdome of Nisamoxa, and like vnto them are the Mangas of Bengala, Pegu, and Malacca. The shel of them be∣ing taken off, is eatē in slices with wine▪ and also without Wine, as wee eate Peaches, they are also preserued; the better to keepe them, either in Suger, Vineger, Oyle, or Salt, like Oliues in Spaine, and being a little opened with a Knife, they are stuffed with greene Ginger, headed Garlike, Mustard or such like, they are sometimes eaten on∣ly with Salt, and somtimes sodden with Rice, as we doe Oliues, and being thus conserued and sodden, are brought to sell in the market. This fruite is colde and moyst, although commonly they esteeme it to bee hotte, & say, it ingen∣dereth a paine and griping in the maw, of such as eate it, and more ouer the Heathen Physitians say, it is hotte, and reiecte, or refuse it, because it ingen∣dereth Saint Anthonies fire, Car∣buncles, hotte burning Feauers, and swellings, with scabbes and scuruines: which I thinke happeneth to men that eate this fruite, and being eaten, lyeth corrupted in their Mawes, or rather by reason of the great heate and season of the yeare. At the time when this fruite is ripe, many doe fall into the forena∣med diseases, although they eate none of this fruite. Before this fruite is fully ripe, it is somewhat hard of taste, speci∣ally the inner part next to the Nut, but being ripe, verie sweete and sauorie. The Nut that is within it, hath a hard huske or shell, with hard threeds about it, wherein groweth a long Nut, as big as an Acorne, white within, and out∣wardly couered with a thin white skin. Being raw it is bitter of tast, therefore it is good against wormes, and loose∣nes of the belly: against wormes when it is eaten raw, and against loosenesse of the belly when it is rosted, and then it tasteth like a rosted Acorne. There is an other kinde of this fruite without stones which is very pleasant. There is also a third sorte, which is wilde, called Mangas Brauas, and is verie poyson, wher-with they poyson each other, for whosoeuer eateth but a small quantitie thereof, dyeth presently. They doe

sometime mingle Oyle with it, to make it stronger, and being taken in that sort, howsoeuer it be, it killeth very quickly, and as yet there was neuer any reme∣die found against it. This fruite is light greene, and somewhat bright, full of white milky Iuice, and but a litle meate. The Nut is couered with a hard shel as bigge as a Quince.

Mangas groweth vpon trées like Iaaca trées: they are as big as a great Peach, but somewhat long, and a little crooked, of colour cleere, gréen, somewhat yealowish, and some times reddish: it hath within it a stone bigger then a Peach stone, but it is not good to be eaten: the Mangas is inwardly yealowish, but in cutting it is waterish, yet some not so much: they haue a verie pleasant taste, better then a Peach, and like the Annanas, which is y^e best & y^e most profitable fruit in al India, for it yeeldeth a great quātity for food & suste∣nance of the countrie people, as Oliues do in Spaine and Portingale: they are gathered when they are gréene, and conserued, and for the most part salted in pots, and commonlie vsed to be eaten with Rice, sodden in pure water, the huske being whole, and so eaten with salt Mangas, which is the continuall food for their slaues and cōmon people, or else salt dryed fish in stéed of Mangas, without bread, for Rice is in diuers places in stéed of bread. These salted Mangas are in cutting like the white Spanish Oliues, and almost of the same taste, but somewhat sauorie and not so bitter, yet a little sowre, and are in so great abundance, that it is wonderful: there are others that are salted and stuffed with small péeces of gréene Ginger, and Garlike sodden: those they call Mangas Recheadas or Machar: they are likewise much vsed, but not so common as the other, for they are cost∣lie and more esteemed: these are kept in pots with Oyle and Vineger salted. The season when Mangas are ripe is in Lent, and conti∣nueth till the Moneth of August.

The 52. Chapter. Of Caions.

THis fruite groweth on great trees, not much vn¦like Apple trees (but the yong trees haue leaues, like Lawrell or Baylea∣ues) they are of a pale greene and thicke, with white blossoms like Oringe trees, but thicker of leaues, yet not so sweete of smell. The fruit is in greatnesse and forme like a Goose Egge, or a great Apple, verie yellow & of good sauor, moyst or spungie with∣in, and ful of Iuice, like Lemmons, but without kernels: sweete of taste, but yet harsh in a mans throate, they seeme not to haue beene common in East India, but brought thether from Brasillia, where those Nuts are much eaten, al∣though Theuet in his description of A∣merica (61. Chapter) writeth otherwise. At the end of this fruit groweth a Nut, of forme like the Kydney of a Hare, whereof I had many brought me by a Pylot of Portingall of an Ash colour, or when they are ripe of a reddish Ash co∣lour. These Nuts haue two partitions, betweene which two partitions, there is a certain spongious fattie matter like Oyle, hotte and sharpe, but in the in∣nermost part thereof is a white kernell very pleasant to eate, like Pistaccios, with a gray skin ouer it, which is pulled off. These Nuts being a little rosted are ea∣ten in that sort, & vsed to prouoke lust. The fruit and also the Nuts are vsed in bankets, being eaten with wine & with∣out wine, because of their good taste. They are good for the weaknesse of the Maw, and against perbreaking, and loa∣thing of meate, but such as will not vse them to that ende, doe eate them only dipped or steeped in a little water, the sharpe Oyle betweene both the partiti∣ons is verie good for Saint Anthonies fire, and flashing in mens faces. The Brasilians vse it against scurffes, this tree was at the first planted of the very Nut but the first and greatest fruite, had nei∣ther seede nor kernell, some thinke it to bee a kind of Anacardy, because it is very like it, for the sharpe iuyce that is betweene the partitions. Reade more hereafter in Carolus Clusius his obserua∣tions vppon Graciam. (first Booke and third Chapter.)

Cajus groweth on trées like apple trées, and are of the bignes of a Peare, at one end by the stalk somewhat sharp, and at the head thicker, of a yelowish colour, being ripe they

are soft in hādling: they grow very like aples, for wher the apples haue a stalke, these Cajus haue a Chesnut, as big as the fore ioynt of a mans thumb: they haue an other colour and fashion then the Chesnuts of Iaqua, and are better & more sauorie to eate, but they must be rosted: within they are white like y^e Ches∣nuts of Europa, but haue thicker shelles, which are of colour blewish and dark gréene. When they are raw and vnrosted, you must not open them with your mouth, for as soone as you put them to your mouth, they make both your tongue and your lippes to smart, whereby such as know it not are deceiued: wherefore you must open their shelles with a knife, or rost them, and then they wil péele. This fruite at the end wher the stalke grow∣eth, in the eating doth worke in a mans throate, and maketh it swel, yet it is of a fyne taste, for it is moyst and full of iuice, they are commonlie cut in round slices, and layd in a dish with water or wyne, and salt throwne vpon them, for so they do not worke so strōg∣lie, but are verie good and sauorie to eate: the time when they are ripe is in Lent, and in Winter time, like Mangas, but not so good as Mangas or Ananas, and of lesse account. They are likewise in great numbers ouer all India.

The 53. Chapter. Of Iambos.

IN India ther is an other fruit that for the beautie, pleasant taste,* 1.33 smell, and medicinable vertue thereof, is worthie to bee written of, and is of great account in India, being first brought out of Ma∣lacca into India. The tree whereon this fruite groweth, is as great as the greatest Orange tree in all Spaine, with manye branches which spread verie broade, and make much shadow, and is faire to behold. The bodie and great branches thereof haue an ash colour-gray barke, the leaues are faire & soft, longer then the breadth of a hand, they are some∣what like the point of a Speare or Pike, with a thicke threed or veine in the mi∣dle, and many small veines or branches in the sides: outwardly verie greene; and inwardly somewhat bleaker, with blossomes of a liuely darke Purple co∣lour, with many streekes in the middle, verie pleasant to beholde, and of taste like the twynings or tendrels of a Vine. The fruite is as bigge as a Peare, or (as some are of opinion) of the bignesse and colour of a great Spanish Wal-nut, they tooke their name of a King. Ther are two sorts of this fruit, one a browne red, seeming as though it were blacke, most part without stones, and more sa∣uory then the other which is a palered, or a pale Purple colour, with a liuely smell of Roses, and within it hath a lit∣tle white hard stone not verie rounde, much like a Peach stone, white, and co∣uered with a rough skin. This is not ful so great as the other, yet are they both fit for such as haue daintie and licorous mouthes. They smel like sweete Roses▪ they are colde and moyst, and altoge∣ther soft, couered with a thinne Rinde, which cannot be taken off with a knife. The Iambos tree taketh deepe roote, & within foure yeares after it is set, doth beare fruit, and that many times in one yeare, and is neuer without fruite or blossomes, for that commonly euerie branch hath both ripe and vnripe fruit, and blossomes all at once, contrarie to the nature of all other trees: and euerie day as the blossomes fall (whereby the earth vnder it seemeth to bee painted red) there growe new on, and when some of the fruite begin to grow, then others are almost ripened, and others being ripe are greater. The tree being lightly shaken, the ripe fruit falleth ea∣sily off, by reaching the nether bowes. This fruite is ordinarily eaten, before other meate be set vpon the Table, and also at all times of the day. The Mala∣bares and Canarijns, call this fruite Iam∣boli, the Portingales inhabiting there, Iambos, the Arabians, Tupha Indi, the Persians Tuphat: the Turkes Alma, the trees are called by the Portingales Iam∣beiro. The blossomes and the fruite are conserued with Suger, and are vsed for hotte Agues to c••le mans thirst.

The trées whereon the Iambos do grow are as great as Plumtrees, and verie like vn∣to them: it is an excellent and a verie pleasant fruite to looke on, as bigge as an apple: it hath a red colour and somewhat whitish, so cleare

and pure that it seemeth to be painted or made of waxe: it is very pleasant to eate, and smel∣leth like Rose water, it is white within, and in eating moyst and waterish, it is a most daintie fruite, as well for bewtie to the sight, as for the swéet sauour and taste: it is a fruite that is neuer forbidden to any sicke person▪ as other fruites are, but are freelie giuen vnto sicke men to eate, that haue a desire thereun∣to, for it can doe no hurt. The blossomes are likewise very faire to the sight, and haue a swéet smell: they are red and somewhat whi∣tish of colour. This trée beareth fruite thrée or foure tymes euery yeare, and which is more wonderfull, it hath commonly on the one side or halfe of the trée ripe Iambos, and the leaues fallen off, and on the other side or half it hath all the leaues, and beginneth a∣gaine to blossome, and when that side hath fruite, and that the leaues fall off, then the o∣ther side beginneth again to haue leaues, and to blossome, and so it continueth all the yeare long: within they haue a stone as great (and very néere of the same fashion) as the fruite of the Cipres trée.

The 54. Chapter. Of other fruites in India.

THere is a fruite called Iango∣mas, which groweth on trées like Cherrie trées: they are in bignes like smal roūd plūmes of a darke red colour, they haue no stones in them, but some small kernels: they are of taste much like plūmes, whereof there are very many, but not much esteemed of.* 1.34

The fruit Iangomas groweth on a tree not vnlike in greatnesse and fashion to our Plum trees, as also in leaues and white blossoms, saue onely that these trees are ful of Prickles or thornes, they grow of them selues in euerie place, & also in gardens at Bachaim, Chaul and Balequala, the fruits are like Sorben smal and round, they are harsh in the throat like Slowes or vnripe Plums, and haue no stone within them, but some small kernels, when they come first out, they are like Pistaccios. The fruit being ripe, must first bee brused and crushed with mens fingers, before it can bee eaten, yet it looseth thereby none of his ver∣tue of binding, and therefore they are thought good to stop the Flux withall, although they are but little esteemed by the Indians. They say, that this fruite is eaten by certaine foules, and being voyded out againe & set in the ground together with the same Birdes dung, it wil grow the sooner and be the fruit∣fuller.

There is an other fruite called Caram∣bolas, which hath 8 corners, as bigge as a smal aple, sower in eating, like vnripe plums, and most vsed to make Conserues.

The fruite which the Malabares and Portingales call Carambolas, is in Decan called Camarix, in Canar,* 1.35 Camarix and Carabeli: in Malaio, Bolumba, and the Persians Chamaroch. It groweth on trees that are like Quince-trees, hauing lea∣ues greater and longer then our apple-trees, verie greene and bitter of taste, with small blossomes, of fiue leaues a peece, reddish without any white, and of no speciall smel, but faire to the eye, and of taste like Sorrell. The fruit is like a great Hond••s bey, long and yellow, and as if it were parted into foure parts, the Coddes are somewhat deepe, & presse the fruite together, in the middle they haue some small kernels, which for the sharp tast are pleasant to eate. This fruit is conserued in Suger, & much eaten in medicines, and with meate. The ripe are vsed for hotte Feauers, in steede of Sirop of Vineger, which wee vse in these countries. The Canarijns vse the Iuyce with other medicines, there growing which are mixed with it, to make colours thereof, wherewith they take spots and blemishes out of mens eyes. Costa writeth that he knew a mid∣wife in India, which vsed this fruite dryed and beaten to poulder, with Bet∣tele leaues, to make women to auoide their dead fruite out of their wombes, this fruite is al••o kept in pickle, because it is pleasing to the taste, and procureth an appetite.

There are yet other fruites, as Brindoi∣jns, Durijndois, Iamboloe••, Mangesta∣ins, and other such like fruites, but because they are of small account, I thinke it not re∣quisite to write seuerallie of them, but onelie of two of them.* 1.36

There is also in East India a fruit cal∣led

[illustration]

Fructuum Mangas, Cajus, Iambos, Iaquas, et Annanas, qui in India nascuntur, qui esusuaves, et Zimziberis, cujus e copia magna illic vilitas, virentis viva imago.

[illustration]

Die fruyten die in Indien wassen en seer lieffelick zyn om te eten als Mangas▪ Cajus▪ Iambos▪ Iaquas. en Annanas met die Gember welcke om der menichte weynich geacht is affconterfeytinge naert leeven gelyck die staen en wassen.

Brindoijns, which outwardly is a lit∣tle red, and inwardly bloud red, verye sowre of taste. There are some also, that are outwardly blackish, which procee∣deth of their ripenesse, and not so sow∣er as the first, but yet as red within. Ma∣ny Indians like well of this fruit, but be∣cause of the sowrenesse, it is not so well accepted of. The dyers doe vse this fruite.

The Barkes of these trées are kept and brought ouer sea hither and are good to make Vineger withall, as some Portingales haue done.

Of the fruit called Iambolijns.

The trees that beare this fruit, haue a barke like Lentiscus or the Mastick tree to the shew much like a Mirtle,* 1.37 but in leaues, like the Arbutus of Italy. It grow∣eth of it self in the wilde fields, the fruit is like great ripe Oliues of Cordoua, and harsh in a mans throate. This fruite is little vsed by Physitions, but is much kept in pickle, and eaten with sodden Ryce, for they procure an appetite to meate, but this fruit (as also Iaka) is by the Indians not accounted among wholesome fruits.

There is also a fruite that came out of the Spanish Indies, brought from beyond y^e Philippinas or Lusons to Malacca, & frō thence to India, it is called Papaios, and is very like a Mellon, as bigge as a mans fist, and will not grow, but alwaies two toge∣ther, that is male and female: the male trée neuer yéeldeth any fruite, but onely the fe∣male, and when they are deuided, & set apart one from the other, then they yéeld no fruite at all. It is a trée of the hight of a man, with great leaues. This fruite at the first for the strangenes thereof was much estéemed, but now they account not of it. There are like∣wise in India some fig trées of Portingal, al∣though the fruite doth neuer come to good perfection. Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, and such like fruite, are throughout all India in great abundance, and for goodnes and taste surpasse those of Spaine. Grapes are not ther to be found, but onelie vpon some houses, as we haue thē in netherlād: yet against Christ∣mas and Lent, there are raysins brought in∣to Goa, by the Decanaes and Indians out of the firme land, and from Ballagate, but they are not so good as those in Spaine, and verie fewe they are, but for price as good cheape as other fruites. There are also in India manie Melons, but not so good as those in Spaine, for that they must be eaten with Suger, if you wil haue any swéetnes in thē: but ther is an other sort like Melons, called Patecas or Angurias, or Melons of India, which are outwardlie of a darke gréene colour, inward∣lie white with blacke kernels: they are verie waterish and hard to byte, and so moyst, that as a man eateth them, his mouth is full of water, but yet verie swéet, and verie cold and fresh meat, wherfore manie of them are eatē after dinner to coole men. Cucumbers and Radishes are there in great numbers, also Colewortes, but not so good as in Europa, for the Colewortes neuer grow to their full growth, but are loose with their leaues open. They haue likewise some sallet hearbs, but verie little: hearbs whereof men make Por∣ridge are not there to be had, nor manie swéet smelling hearbs nor flowers, as Roses, lillies, rosemary, or such like sorts of flowers & plants there are none, yet they haue some fewe Roses, and a little Rosemarie, but of no great smell. The fields neuer haue any o∣ther flowers in them, but onelie grasse, and that is in Winter when it rayneth, for in Sūmer it is cleane burnt off with the ex∣céeding heat of the Sunne. There is onelie a kinde of blossomes of trées, which grow all the yeare long, called Fulle, that smell verie swéet: the women doe ordinarily throw them among their Lynnen and apparell to make them swéet. They likewise make Collers or strings ful of them, which they weare about their necks, and strew them in their beds, for they are verie desirous of swéete sauors, for other sorts of swéet flowers & hearbs, where∣of thousands are found in Europe, they are not in India to be had: so that when you tell them of y^e sweet flowers and herbes of these countries, they wonder much thereat, and are verie desirous of them.

By these pictures you may sée the forme and fashions of the fruites called Iaacka, A∣nanas, Mangas, Caius, & Iambos, which are the fyue principallest & most estéemed fruites in all India, for others are but of small ac∣count: of Ginger also as it groweth, whereof in an other place I will say more, when I make mention of the spices and drie wares of India: all which are set down according to the life, although the leaues are not altoge∣ther so proportionable with their strings and veynes, as they should be, or as the Physiti∣ons and Doctors in their Herbals haue de∣scribed them, hauing onely shewed the forme and growth of the fruites, as I haue seene and vsed them,

The 55. Chapter. Of the Indian Figges.

INdian Figges there are manie & of diuers sorts, one better thē the other, some small, some great, some thicke, some thin, &c. but in generall they are all of one forme and colour, little more or lesse, but the trées are all one, and of the height of a mā: the leaues are of a fadome long, and about 3 spannes broad, which the Turkes vse in stéed of browne pa∣per, to put pepper in. In the trée there is no wood, but it may rather be called a réed then a trée. The bodie of the trée (I meane that which couereth the outwardpart when it be∣ginneth somewhat to grow) is in a manner verie like the inner part of a syue made of hayre, but in shew somewhat thicker, and is (as it were) the barke of it: but when you o∣pen it, it is ful of leaues, closed and rouled vp together, of the hight of half a mans length, and somewhat higher. These leaues do open and spread abroad on the top of the trée, and when those that are within the bodie doe in their time thrust themselues forth vpwardes out of the innermost part of the trée, then doe the outmost leaues begin to drie, and fall off, vntill the trée be come to his full growth, and the fruite to their perfect ripenesse. The bodie of the trée may be a span thicke at the most. The leaues haue in y^e middle of them a very thick & gray vein which rūneth clean through them, and deuideth them out of the middest of the leaues, which are in the innermost part of the trée at their springing vp, there cometh forth a flower, as big as an Estrige egge, of colour russet, which in time groweth to be long, with a long stalke, and it is no wood, but rather like a Coleworte stalk: This stalke groweth full of figges, close one by the other, which at the first are in fashion like gréene beanes, when they are yet in the huskes, but after growe to half a span in length, and 3 or 4 inches broad, as thicke as Cucumbers, which stalke beareth at the least, some two hundreth figges, little more or lesse, and grow as close together as grapes: the clusters are so great as two men can scarcely beare vpon a staffe, they are cut off when they are but half ripe, that is to say, when they are as yet half gréene, and half yealow, and hanged vp in their houses vpon beames, and so within 4 or 5 dayes they will be fullie ripe and al yea∣low. The trée or plant yéeldeth but one bunch at a time, which being ripe, they cut the whole trée down to the ground, leauing only the roote, out of the which presently groweth an other, and within a Moneth after beareth fruite, and so continueth all the yeare long, and neuer leaueth bearing: they are in all places in so great abundance, and so common throughout all India, that it is wonderfull, being the greatest meat and sustenance of the countrie: they are of a maruellous good taste: when they eate them, they pul off the shelles, for that they haue shelles somewhat like the coddes of beanes, but thynner and softer, within whitish, and soft in byting, as if it were meale and butter mixed together, and swéetish, so that in bréef, they are very good and pleasant of taste: they may serue both for bread & butter, and a man may verie wel liue thereon, without other meate, if néed were, as manie in India doe liue therewith, & haue but little other things to eate. The most and commonest sort are by the Portingals called Figos dorta, that is, garden figges, those are somewhat thicke, there are others which are smaller, and thyn without, and are called Se∣noriins, which are of the best sort: they smell well, and are very good of taste. There is an other sort called Cadoliins, which are like∣wise well esteemed, but the best of all are cal∣led Chincapoloyns, and are most in the countrie of Malabar: these are but a little yealow, but they continue commonlie on the outside gréene, and are small and long, with a speciall swéet smell, as if they were full of rose water. There are yet manie other sorts, some that are verie great, about a span long, and in thicknes correspondent: these grow much in Cananor, and in the coast of Mala∣bar, and are by the Portingales called figges of Cananor: and by reason of the great quan∣titie thereof are dried, their shelles being taken off, and so being drie are caryed ouer all India to be sold. These when they are ripe are most roasted, for they are but seldome eaten raw, as other figges are, they are some what harsh in swallowing, and inwardly red of colour, and being roasted they are shalled or pille like the others, and so cut in slices, which done, they cast some beaten Sinamon vpon them, stéeping them in wine, & thē they taste better then roasted Quinces, they are cut vp in the middle, as all the other kynde of figges vse to be, and then boyled or fryed in Suger, which is a very daintie meat, and very common in India: to conclude, it is one of the best and necessaryest fruites in all In∣dia, and one of the principallest sustenances of the common people, they are found in all places of the Indies & Oriental countries, as also in Mosambique, Ormus, on the coast of Abex, Malabar, Malacca, Bengala, &c. The Gusurates, Decanijns, Canarijns,

[illustration]

Nuces Indicae, magni in India usus et ques tuosae, cibum et potum homi nibus suaves et navibus materiam prebent idon••am quibus e aedem et onerantur et aluntur nautae

Indiaensche nooten ofte Palmboomen welcke in Indien veel opbren gen want geven soete spijs en dranck▪ stoff tot scheepen▪ sensen en touwen en daer die selffde scheepen met gelaeden en die schip luyden mede gevoet werden▪

Ficus Indica per totum annum ferens fruct•• cop••ose ••entes quotidianam mul to rum escam▪

Een plante draegende het qeheele Iaer vruch••n. d••••men India••nsche vygen no••▪ seer vo••den•• en ••en daegelickse spijse der Indianen.

[illustration]

Fructuum icon quos Arrecca sive Faufel vocant▪ et Bettele folia, quos pauco calcis subactos integrum diem masticant▪ suc¦cum deglutientes ad corporis purgationem alias{que} utilitates.

Eruyten diemen Arrecca ofte Faufel noemt en die blaeden Bet telle, welcke met wat calcks vermen••t die Indianen een gant schen dach kauwen het say doorswelgen om ••lichaem te purge ren en ander haerder crachten.

Piperis frute•• haederae non absimilis.

Orientaelsche Peeper wasschen de ••inuer cruyt niet ongelyck

and Bengalers call them Quelli, the Mala∣bares, Palan, and the Malayens of Ma∣lacca, Pysan. They are also found in Arabia and are called M••sa, as also in Ierusalem, Damasco, and Cayro, as I haue béene tru∣ly informed by credible persons, which dayly trauell and traffique into India. And they do belieue that this is the same fruite, which A∣dam did eate when hee sinned first, but I should rather thinke this Figge trée to be of the same, whereof we reade in the old Testa∣ment in the bookes of Moses, which the spies that were sent out by the children of Israel, brought out of the land of promise, hanging vpon a staffe, & born by two men, & are taken for grapes, which I many times thought of, when I saw them brought in that maner for a present to my Lords house, for it is alto∣gether in forme and fashion like a bunch of grapes, yet I meane not to be iudge therein, but leaue it vnto others of greater experience and trauell then my selfe.

Indian Figges are by the Arabians called Moris and not Musa, not Amusa, and the tree Daracht Moris,* 1.38 by the Bra∣silians Pacona, and the tree Paquouer, by Brocardus in his description of the holy land, Paradise Apples, by Ou••edus in the Historie of India, in his eight Booke and first Chapter Platanus, in Guinea Bananas, in Malauar Patan, in Malayen Pican, in Canara, Decan, Gusurate, and Bengala, Quelli, Auicenna, Serapio, and Rhasis haue likewise written certaine Chapters heereof. Auicenna in his se∣cond Booke and 491. Chapter, writing of the properties and qualities of this fruite, sayeth, that it yeeldeth but small sustenaunce, that it ingendereth Chol∣ler and Flegme, and that it spoyleth the stomake, wherefore he counselleth such as are of a hotte constitution, after they haue eaten these Figges, to take some Honie and Vinegar, sodden to∣gether with cold seeds. They are good against heate in the stomake, Lungs, and Kydnies, and prouoke Vrine. Rha∣sis, of the same in his thirde Booke of Physicke, and twentie Chapter, sayth also, that they are hurtfull for the maw, which I also found being in Syrie, when I vsed them, they make men to haue an euill appetite to their meate, & a desire to ease their bodies, and doe qualifie the rawnesse of the throate. Serapio in his Booke of Phisicke in the 84. Chap∣ter sayth, that this fruit is in the ende of the first degree warming, and moyst∣ning, and that they are good against the heate of the stomake and Lungs, but for him which eateth many of them, they breede a heauinesse in his Mawe, but by meanes of their hast••e ripening, they are good for the Kidnies, prouoke Vrine, and make men apt for leacherie. The Indian Phisitians doe vse this fruit in medicines for Feauers and other dis∣eases. The opinion, (as I thinke) why this fruite is called Paradise Apples, is partly for the pleasantnes of taste, smell and colour, for the taste is betweene sweete & sower, the smell somwhat like Roses, and the colour a faire yelow and green: & partly also because this fruit being cut in the middle, haue certaine veines like a crosse, whereon the Chri∣stians in Siria doe make many specula∣tions and discourses, which many stran∣gers that haue trauelled in those coun∣tries doe verifie. He which desireth to reade more heereof, let him reade the worthie and learned Commentaries of Carolus Clusius vpō Garsia ab horto, wher he shall receiue good contentment and satisfaction.

There grow in India many Iniamos and Batatas. These Iniamos, are as bigge as a yelow roote, but somewhat thicker and sul∣ler of knots, and as thicke on the one place, as in the other, they grow vnder the earth like earth Nuts, and of a Dun colour, and white within like earth Nuts, but not so swéete.

Iniamos were this yeare brought he∣th•• out of Guinea,* 1.39 as bigge as a mans legge, and all of a like thicknesse, the outward part is Dun coloured, within verie white, rosted or sodden they are verie pleasant of taste, and one of the principal meates of the Black-Moores.

The Batatas are somewhat red of colour, and of fashion almost like the Iniamos, but swéeter, of taste like an earth Nut. These two fruits are verie plentifull, specially Inia∣mos, which is as common and necessarie a meate as the Figges, they eate them for the most part rosted, and vse them commonly for the last seruice on the boorde, they ••eth them likewise in an other sort for ••orrage, and s••eth them with flesh like Colwortes or Turnops, the like doe they with Batatas.

The 56. Chapter. Of the Palme trees, whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocus doe grow.

THese Trées are commonlie called by most of the Indi∣ans, Persians, and Arabi∣ans, Maro, & the nuts Na∣re••. The Malabares call the Trees Tenga Maran, and the fruite being ripe, Tenga, but vnripe, and being as yet greene, 〈◊〉〈◊〉. In Goa ••an∣ha, the Portingalls call this fruit Coquo, by reason of the thrée holes that are therein, like to a Munkies head. Auicenna calleth these Ia••ial-Indi, that is, Indian nuts. The Ma∣layans of Malacca call the trees Trican, and the fruit Nihor. This is the most profita∣ble tree of all India, as in order I will declare vnto you the profit that ariseth thereby, they grow most in the Islands of Maldiua, and in Goa, and the countries round about them, as also through the whole coast of Malabar, whereby they traffique with them into all places, as to Cambaia, Ormus, &c. The tree wareth very high and straight, of the thicke∣nes of a small spanne little more or lesse, it hath no branches but in the vppermost part thereof, & in the top grow the leaues, which spread like vnto Date trées, and vnder the leaues close to the tree grow the Coquos to∣gether, commonly ten or twelue one close by another, but you shall seldome finde one of them growing alone by it self. The blossome of this fruite is very like the blossome of a Chestnut. The wood of the tree is very sappy like a spunge, and is not firme, they doe not grow but on the sea sides, or bankes of riuers close by the strand, and in sandie grounds, for there groweth none within the land. They haue no great rootes, so that a man would thinke it were impossible for them to haue a∣ny fast hold within the earth, and yet they stand so fast and grow so high, that it maketh men scare to see men clime vppon them, least they should fall downe. The Canarijns clime as nimbly and as fast vpon them, as if they were Apes, for they make small steppes in the trées like staires, whereon they step, and so clime vp▪ which the Portingales dare not vē∣ter, their planting is in this manner. They first plant the Coquos or Nuts whereof the trees doe spring, and when they are about the height of a man, in winter time they plant them againe, and dung them with ashes, and in summer time water them. They growe well about houses, because commonlie there they haue good earth, and beeing well looked vnto and husbanded, they yeeld fruit in fewe yeares, which is the Canarijns liuinges that dwell here and there among those trees, and haue no other occupation but onely to dresse those trees, which they farme of the Land∣lords, and by the fruite thereof doe get their liuinges. Those trees are more aboundant with them then Oliue trées in Spaine, or wil∣low trées in the Low countries. The profits they reape thereby are these. First the wood is very good for many things, although it be spungious and ••appy, by reason of the length of it, for in the Islandes of Maldiua they make whole ships thereof, without any iron nayles in them, for they sow them together with the cordes that are made of the said Co∣cus or Nut, the ropes and cables beeing like∣wise of the same tree, as also the sayles which they make of the leaues, which leaues are called Olas. They serue likewise to make the Canarijns houses, and for hattes which they vse to carrie ouer their heades, for the sunne or the raine, they make also mattes or Tents that lie ouer the Palamkins when it raineth, to couer the women when they are caried abroad, and such like thinges: they likewise make thereof very fine Hattes, that are much esteemed, and cost three or foure Pardawes the péece, which they weare in Summer for lightnes. They farme or hire those trées for two causes, one for the Co∣quos or fruit to eate it, the other to presse wine out of them, thereof to drinke. The nuts are as great as an estrige egge, some smaller, and some greater, and are outwardly couered with a Huske or Shell, which as long as it groweth on the trée, is gréene with out, like an Acorne with his huske or cup.

The Indian nuts are couered ouer with two sortes of huskes or shels,* 1.40 whereof the vttermost is hayrie, and of it they make Cairo, that is, all their cables and ropes, and stop and make their ships close with it in stead of Ocam or tow, for that it keepeth the ships closer in saltwater then our Ocam or Tow, because in salt water it closeth and shutteth it selfe closer toge∣ther. Of the other they make not onelie drinking cups, in India, but here with vs also, for that the common people beleeue there is a certaine vertue in them against stirring of the body, but it is not so.

This Huske beeing drie and pulled off, is haire like hempe, whereof all the cordes and Cables that are vsed throughout al India are made, as well vppon the land as in the ships▪ it is of colour verie like the ropes of Sparta in Spaine, they are very good but they must be kept in salt water, whereby they continue very long, but in fresh or raine water they doe presently rot, because they are not drest with pitch, and tarre as our ships are. The ship wherein I came out of India into Por∣tingall,

had no other ropes nor cables, nor a∣ny such kinde of stuffe, but such as were made of the Indian Cocus, called Cayro, which continued very good, sauing only y^t we were forced euery fourtéene dayes to wash our ca∣bles in the Sea, whereby they serued vs as well as cables of hemp. The fruit when it is almost ripe is called Lanha, and within is full of water, and then it is white of colour, thin and soft, and the longer the Cocus is on the tree, the more the water groweth and chan∣geth into white, which is the meat of the nut within, and tasteth much like a hasel nut, but somewhat sweeter. The Lanhos haue with∣in them a good draught of water, which is very cleare, sweet, and coole to drink. It is at the least halfe a Can full, & when men walke abroad and are thirstie they go vnto the Ca∣narijns, who presently with a great knife in their handes come vp the tree, and cut off as many Lanhos as a man desireth, selling them for a Basaruco or a two peece, which they make very ready and cleare to be drunke, the first shell that is ouer the inward fruit (which as the nut is come to his full ripenes, becom∣eth almost to bee wood, is then but thin and soft, and very pleasant to eate with salt, and do taste almost like Artichokes, a man may drinke as much of this water as hee will for it will not hurt him, but is a verie pleasant drinke, when the fruit is ripe, there is not so much water in it, and is white within, and somewhat thicker of substance, and then the water is not so good as it was before beeing Lanhos, for then it becommeth somewhat sower. These Cocus being yet in their husks, may be carried ouer the whole world, and not once hurt or brused, and it happeneth often∣times that by continuance of time, the water within the Cocus doth conuert, and congeale into a certaine kinde of yellow apple, which is verie sauorie and sweet. The huske beeing taken off, the shel serueth for many vses, as to make ladles with woodden handles, and also certaine little pots, which beeing fastned to a sticke, they doe therewith take and lade wa∣ter out of their great pots, they make thereof also small vessels to beare wine in when they walke into the fieldes, and a thousand other thinges. These shelles are likewise burnt, & serue for coales for Goldsmithes, which are very good and excellent. Of the white of these nuts in India they make porrage, and dresse meate withall, strayning and pressing out the milke, wherin with many other mixtures they seeth their rice, & to bee short, they neuer dresse any rice, which they cal Carrijl, & is the sauce to their meate thereunto, but they put some of their Cocus milk into it, els the Co∣cus is but little eaten, for there it is not estee∣med of, but serueth for meate for the slaues, and poore people. They likewise breake the Cocus in péeces, and taking off the shell they drie the fruit or white meat that is within it, and it is caried in great quantities out of Ma∣labar to Cambaia and Ormus & to the Nor∣thern coastes and quarters beyond Goa, as also to the countrie of Ballagate, & traffique much therewith. Of this white substance they make Oyle, which they stampe in ce∣sterns like Oliues, and it maketh verie good oyle, as well to eat as to burne, which is like∣wise very medicinable.

There are two sortes of Oyle made of these nuts,* 1.41 one out of the fresh or greene nuts, stamped and mixed with warme wa∣ter, which beeing pressed foorth, the oyle swimmeth aboue the water•• this oyle is v∣sed to purge the maw and the guts, for it purgeth very gently, & without hurt some mixe therewith the iuyce of Thamarin∣des, & maketh thereof a verie wholesome medecine, the other Oyle is prest out of the dried Cocus, which is called Copra, & is good also to purge the maw and against the shrinking of the sinews, as also for old aches and paines in the ioyntes and lims. This dried Cocus which is so caried abroad, is called Copra. When they desire to haue no Cocus or fruite thereof, they cut the blos∣somes of the Cocus away, and binde a round Potte with a narrow mouth, by them called Callao, fast vnto the tree, and stop the same close round about with pot earth, so that ney∣ther wine nor aire can eyther enter in, or come forth, & in that sort the pot in short space is full of water, which they call Sura, & is ve∣ry pleasant to drinke like sweet whay, & some∣what better.

This water being drunke,* 1.42 is very good against the heate of the liuer and the kid∣nies, and cleanseth the yard from corrup∣tion and filthie matter.

The same water standing but one houre in the sunne, is very good viniger, and in In∣dia they haue none other. This Sura beeing distilled, is called Fula, or Nipe, & is as excel∣lent aqua vitae, as any is made in Dor•• of their best rēnish wine, but this is of the fi∣nest kinde of distillation. The second distilla∣tion thereof is called Vraca, which is verie good wine, & is the wine of India, for they haue no other wine. It is very hot & strong, yet y^e Indians drinke it as if it were water, & the Portingales vse it in this sort. They put it into vessels▪ and to a pipe of Vraca they put 3. or 4. Hands of reasons that are brought for marchandise into India from Ormus, euerie Hand is 12. poundes, which beeing washed they put into the vessell leauing the bung opē & the pipe not being full, for if it were it wold burst, by reason of the heat, because therewith

it séetheth in the Pipe like water on the fire, and boyling so, it is stirred euery day for the space of fourteene or fifteene dayes, in which time the Vraca getteth as faire a redde colour, as if it were Portingall wine, and differeth not much in taste, but yet sweeter, and hotter of it selfe, howbeit it is altoge∣ther as fayre, and of as good a colour as their Portingall Wyne, so that they can hardly bee discerned one from the other: this Wine is called Wine of Passa, or Reasons. With this Wine there is great traffique v∣sed to Bengala, Malacca, China and other places, and euery Pipe thereof costeth within Goa 30. Pardawen the péece, little more or lesse. Of the aforesaide Sura they likewise make Sugar, which is called Iagra: they seeth the water, and set it in the Sun, where∣of it becommeth Sugar, but it is little estée∣med, because it is of a browne colour, and for that they haue so great quantitie and abundance of white Sugar throughout all India. The innermost parte of the trée or trunke is called Palmito, and is the pith or hart of the same trunke, which is much estée∣med, and sent for a present vnto men of great account. It is as thinne as Paper, and also white, and is as if it were plaited or prest to∣gether, as they vse to plait & presse womens huykes in the Low countries: it is also long and slender, and hath sometimes 50. or 60. foldes or plaites in it like a paper booke. This the Indians vse for paper, and bookes, which continueth in the same foldes, whereon they write when it is gréene, and so let it drie, and then it is impossible to get the letters out againe, for it is printed therein with a kind of Iron instrument: The Indians cal it Olla, whereof all their bookes, wry∣tinges, and Euidences are made, which they can seale, and shutte vp as we doe our letters. Of this Paper with the Indian writing vpon it, you may sée some at D. Pa∣ludanus house, which I gaue him for a pre∣sent. These trées are for the most part in the Islands of Maldiua, w••ere there are Cocus Nuttes, that are excellent good against poy∣son.

Garsius and Costa esteeme this for a fable. Costa writeth that he hath searched into it many times but found it contrarie, as I likewise haue done, and can finde no such great effect.

Those Islandes haue no other dealing or liuing, but with Cayro, whereof they make ropes and Cables, and with the Copra, or the white substance of the Cocus, whereof Oyle is made, so y^t they doe oftentimes come into India, whē the ship & all the furniture, victuaile and marchandise is onely of those Palme trées, whereby it is wel to be conside∣red, that it is one of the greatest & principalest traffiques and victua••ls in all India, This shall suffice for the description of the particu∣lar commodities of this trée, the liuely picture whereof is here to be séene, together with the Cocus or Nuttes, and the pottes hanging at the same, to draw y^e water out of them, as also the growing and sprowting of the Fig trées, as well with fruit as with blossoms, all liue∣ly set downe.

The 57. Chapter. Of the Duryoens, a fruit of Malacca.

DVryoen is a fruit y^t only groweth in Malacca, and is so much comē∣ded by those which haue proued y^e same, that there is no fruite in the world to bee compared with it: for they af∣firme, that in taste and goodnes it excelleth all kind of fruits, and yet when it is first opened, it smelleth like rotten onions, but in the taste the swéetnes and daintinesse thereof is tryed. It is as great as a Mellon, outwardly like the Iaacka, wherof I haue spoken, but some∣what sharper or pricking, and much like the huskes of Chesnuttes. It hath within it cer∣taine partitions like the Iaacka,* 1.43 wherein the fruit groweth, being of the greatnesse of a lit∣tle Hennes egge, and therein are the Nuttes as great as Peache stones. The fruite is for colour and taste like an excellent meat, much vsed in Spaine, called Mang••ar Blanco, which is made of Hennes flesh, distilled with Sugar: The trees are like the Iaacka trées, the blossoms white, and somewhat yellowish: the leaues about halfe a spanne broad, some∣what sharpe at the end, within light gréene, and without darke gréene.

In Malacca there is a fruit so plea∣sant both for taste and smell, that it ex∣celleth all other fruites both of India, & Malacca, although there are many both excellent and very good. This fruit is called in Malayo (which is the Prouince wherein it groweth) Duriaoen, and the blossomes Buaa, and the tree Batan: It is a very great tree, of solide and firme wood, with a gray barke, hauing many braunches, and excessiue great store of fruit: the blossome is white and some∣what yellow: the leaues halfe a hand∣full long, & two or three fingers broad,

[illustration]

Arundo Indica femoris pene habiti crassitudine▪

Indiaens riet wasschende inde dick te van cen mans dije ofte been

Indicus en truncus brachijs sepandit opacis Grata etiam ut justis umbra sit agminibus

Ʋt nova protrudens in apertas exerat auras Grandia germinibus sustinet ipsa suis▪

[illustration]

Arbor admiranda quae e ramis novos in terram truncos dimittens tam lata tandem occupat spatia▪ ut justum exercitum umbra possit contegere. Ficum Indicam vocant▪

Een wonderbaerlicken boom welcke wt haere rancken weder neer waerts wortelen beslaet ten laetsten soo veel plaets datter cen vol sleegen leeger mach onder berusten▪

Duriones fructus jucunda saporis suavitate prae alijs omni bus habiti eximij, nascuntur tantum in Mallacca

Die vruchten diemen Durioens noemt boven alle ander van smaeck en lieffelick heyt gepreesen▪ wassen alleen in Mallacca.

[illustration]

Ecce tibi ramum nigra quem nox suavibus ornat Exuit ornatum floribus alma dies

Ʋt decus hoc una vigeatque et defluat hora Continuas obeunt illa diesque vices

Traxit et hinc nomen tristi quod squalido trunco Auricomum rutilo cum nitet orbe jubar

Haud secus et nostro quae sensu splendida fumos Esse. fidem veri h••x rediuma facit

[illustration]

Arbor soli Indiae nota, cui per totum annum occidente sole flores, gignuntur multi, et odoratu suaves, oriente defluunt, unde tristis illi nomen.

Een boom welcke in Indien alleen bekent is, int ondergaen vande Son voort▪ brengende veel welrieckende bloemen, welcke alle int opgaen vande selve weder af vallen, en dat het gantsche Iaer door.

rounde and somewhat hollowe: out∣wardly darke greene, and inwardly light greene, and somewhat after a red colour. It beareth a fruit of the bignes of a Mellon, couered with a harde husk, with many smal and thicke sharpe pric∣kles: outwardly greene, & with strikes downe along the sides like the Mellon. They haue within them foure holes or partitions according to the length thereof, in each of the which holes are yet three or foure cases: in each case or shell a fruite as white as milke, and as great as a Hennes egge, but better of taste and sauour, like the white meat, which the Spaniardes make of Ryce, Capons flesh, and Rose water, called Mangiar Blanco, yet not so soft nor sly∣mie, for the other that are yellow, and not white within, are either spoyled, or rotten, by euill aire or moysture: they are accounted the best which haue but three Nuttes in each hole, next them those that haue foure, but those of fiue are not good, & such as haue any cracks or cliftes in them. There are likewise (very seldome) more then twenty nuts in one apple, and in euery Nutte is a stone like a Peach stone, not rounde, but somewhat long, not ouer sweet of taste, but making the throat harsh, like vnripe Medlers, and for that cause are not eaten.

This fruit is hot and moist, and such as will eat them, must first treade▪ vpon them softly with his foote, and breake the prickes that are about them: Such as neuer eate of it before, when they smell it at the first, thinke it senteth like a rotten Onyon, but hauing tasted it, they esteeme it aboue all other fruites, both for taste and sauour. This fruite is also in such account with the learned Doctors, that they think a man can ne∣uer be satisfied therwith, and therefore they giue this fruite an honourable name, and write certaine Epigrammes thereof, & yet there is great abundance of thē in Malacca: & the apples cost not aboue four Meruedies the peece, speci∣ally in the Monthes of Iune, Iuly and August, at other times the price is high∣er. Here you must note a wonderful contrarietie, that is betweene this fruit Duriaoen, and the hearbe Bettele, which in truth is so great, that if there were a whole shippe, shoppe or house full of Duriaoens, wherein there lay certayne leaues of Bettele, all the Duriaoens wold presently rotte and bee spoyled. And likewise by eating ouer many of those Duriaoens, they heat the Maw, & make it swell, and one leafe of Bettele, to the contrarie, being laide colde vppon the hart, will presently cease the inflamati∣on, rising or swelling of the Maw. And so if after you haue eaten Duriaoens, you chance to eat a leafe or two of Bet∣tele, you can receyue no hurt by the Duriaoens, although you haue eaten neuer so many. Hereupon, and be∣cause they are of so pleasant a taste, the common saying is, that men can ne∣uer be satisfied with them.

The 58. Chapter Of the tree Arbore de Rays, that is, root tree, and the Bambus or reede of India.

THere is a trée in India called Arbore de Rays, that is to say, a Trée of rootes: this trée is very wonderfull to beholde, for that whē it groweth first vp like all other trées and spreadeth the bran∣ches: thē y^e branches grow ful of roots, & grow downwards again towards the earth, where they take roote againe, and so are fast againe within the ground, and in length of time, the broader the trée is, and that the branches doe spreade themselues, the more roots doe hang vpon the branches and séeme a farre off to bée cordes of Hempe, so that in the ende the trée couereth a great peece of ground, and crosseth one roote within the other like a Mase. I haue séene trees that haue contayned at the least some thirtie or fortie paces in compasse, and all out of the rootes which came from aboue one of the braunches, and were fast growne and had taken roote againe within the earth, and in time waxed so thicke, that it could not be discerned, which was the chief or principal trunke or body of the trée: in some places you may creepe betweene the rootes, and the more the tree spreadeth, so much the more doe the rootes spring out of the same

branches and still grow downe til they come to earth, and there take roote againe within the ground, and still increase with rootes, that it is a wonder. This tree hath no fruit that is worth the eating, but a small kind of fruite like Oliues, & good for nothing but for birdes to eate.

* 1.44Carolus Clusius that hath written ve∣ry diligently of this tree, nameth it by authoritie out of Plinie, the Indian Fig tree, and saith, it groweth very high, first out of a straight thicke trunke, or body that afterwarde yeeldeth many small and thinne twigges, which being young and tender, are of a gold yellow colour, and growing downewardes to∣wardes the earth, doe waxe againe like young Rushes, and so make as it were new trees again, which in time become as thicke as the first, so that they cannot easily be discerned one from the other, sauing onely for the compasse thereof, which in the ende proceedeth to the thicknesse of three mens fadomes: out of the which roundnesse or circuit on euery side there groweth other rootes, and ••o to an innumerable number, so that this tree doth couer sometimes a little Italian mile, and doth not onely spread from the lowest branches down againe into the ground, but also from the highest, whereby that one tree see∣meth to be a thicke woode. The Indi∣ans that they may go through this tree, do cut away some of the branches, and make as it were galleries to walke vn∣der, and to keepe them from the heate of the Sunne, because the tree is so full of branches, that the Sun cannot shine through it, and by reason of the many crookinges and wayes that are vnder this tree, there are many soundes of a great Eccho hearde vnder the same, so that in many places it will repeate a mans words three or foure times toge∣ther. He that tolde Clusius of this tree, saide, hee had seene 800. or 1000. men (whereof hee himselfe was one) hide themselues vnder one of those trees, saying further, that there were some of those trees which might well couer 3000. men vnder it: the leaues which the new branches bring forth, are like the leaues of the Quince trees: the out∣side green, the inside whitish & rough, as if they were couered with Wooll: whose leaues are much desired by Ele∣phants, who therewith are nourished: the fruit is like the first ioint of a mans thumbe, and haue the fashion & forme of little small figges, reddish both with∣in and without, and ful of little greines like common figges: sweet of taste and good to be eaten, but not so pleasant as our common figs▪ they grow between the leaues & the new branches, as our Figges doe: it groweth in Goa, and in some places bordering on the same: also Clusius saith out of Curtius, Plinius and Strabo, that those trees were also knowne of the auncient writers. Hee that desireth to know more hereof, let him reade Clusius in his Chapter of In∣dian Figges.

There are in India other wonderfull and thicke trées, whereof shippes are made: there are trées by Cochiin, that are called Angeli∣na, whereof certaine scutes or Skiffes called Tones are made: there are of those Tones that will lade in them at the least 20. or 30. Pipes of water, and are cut out of one péece of wood, without any péece or seame, or any iointes: whereby men may well coniecture the thicknesse of the trée, and it is so strong and hard a woode, that Iron in tract of time would bee consumed thereby, by reason of the hardnesse of the woode. There are also ouer all India many Sugar Canes in all places, and in great numbers, but not much estéemed of: & all along the coast of Malabare there are many thicke Reeds, specially on the coast of Choramandel, which Reedes by the In∣dians are called Mambu, and by the Portin∣gales Bambu: these Mambus haue a certain matter within them, which is (as it were) the pith of it, such as Quilles haue within them, which men take out when they make them pennes to write: the Indians call it Sa∣car Mambu, which is as much to say, as Sugar of Mambu, and is a very medicina∣ble thing much esteemed, and much sought for by the Arabians, Persians, and Moores, that call it Tabaxiir.

Tabaxijr is a Persian word,* 1.45 & signifi∣eth no other thing but a certaine white or milke moisture, for any sap or moi∣sture cleauing together is called Sacar Mambu, because the reeds or branches, which bring forth the same are cal∣led Mambu: the trees whereon Tabaxijr groweth, are some as great

as a Popler, and some smaller, com∣monly hauing straight vpright bran∣ches, sauing that some of the fayrest of them are bowed for their galleries, Ar∣bours, and other walking places: they haue many ioyntes, each of a spanne length, hauing leaues somewhat lon∣ger then the leaues of the Oliue tree: betweene euery ioynt there is a certain sweete moysture, white and cleau∣ing together like Starch, sometimes much, sometimes little: euery tree or branch doth not bring forth such sweet moisture, but such onely as grow in Bisnagar, and in some prouinces of Ma∣labar.

And therefore commonly in Persia and Arabia, it is weighed against siluer, and is a marchandise much vsed & esteemed among y^e foresaide nations: this groweth within the ioynts of the reed, & is white, and sometimes blackish, and sometimes Ash colour.

It is not therefore reiected or cast a∣way,* 1.46 because it is blackish: for this blackishnesse proceedeth either by rea∣son of the superfluitie of the moysture, or that it was too long inclosed within the tree, & not by burning of the tree, as some are of opinion. Rhases writeth hereof in his third book, and 36. Chap. and Serapio in his booke of phisicke, in the 342. Chapter, and Auicenna in his 2. booke and 617. Chapter, who are of opinion, that Tabaxijr is made of burnt rootes, but his opinion is hereby proued to be false.

The Indians vse it against the payne in their priuie members, or such like secrete diseases, as also against hotte or burning feauers, the Colerica passio, and the redde Malison, and laskines, with such like diseases. Those réeds grow most in the coast of Choramandel in Bisnagar, and Malacca in many places, and in great abundance: they growe very high, and are diuided in each ioynt one knot from another, at the least a spanne and a halfe, and rather more and are as thicke as a mans leg aboue the knee: they do commonly grow vp∣right, and most of them as high as the highest house in the Low countries: they bow them many times in growing, that they may bring them into a forme or fashion to serue for their Pallamkins, wherein the Portingalles and Indian Lordes are caried, as I saide before: the leaues of those réedes or Bambus growe wide one from another, and haue almost the fashion of an Oliue leafe.

Of the tree or reede called Bambus,* 1.47 some of the Indians make scutes or lit∣tle Skiffes, wherein two men may sitte, which they doe not altogether make hollow within, but leaue two knots or partitions vncarued. In those scutes the Indians sit naked, at ech end one, crosse legged, & in each hand an oare, where∣with they rule the boate and driue her swiftly against the streame, specially in the riuer called Cranganor: and they are of this opinion, that those Scutes are neuer ouerturned by the Crocodiles (al∣though they come about them) as o∣thers are, but for these it was neuer heard of.

The 59. Chapter. Of the tree called Arbore Triste.

THe Tree called Arbore Triste, that is, the sorrow∣full tree, is so called, be∣cause it neuer beareth blossoms but in the night time, and so it doeth and continueth all the yeare long: it is a thing to be wondred at: for that so soone as the Sunne setteth, there is not one blossome seene vppon the tree, but presently within halfe an houre after, there are as ma∣ny blossomes vppon it, as the Tree can beare: they are very pleasant to behold, and smell very sweet, and so soone as the day com∣meth on, and the Sunne is rising, presently all the blossomes fall off, and couer all the ground, so that there remayneth not one to be seene vpon the tree: the leaues shut them∣selues close together, so that it seemeth as though it were dead, vntill euening commeth againe, and then it beginneth to blossome as it did before: the tree is as great as a Plum tree, and is commonly planted behinde mens houses, in their gardens for a pleasure, and for the sweet smell: it groweth very quickly vp, for that many young plantes do spring out of the roote, and as soone as those young plantes be aboue halfe a fadome high, they haue pre∣sently as many blossoms vppon them as the branches on the trees, and although they cut the tree down to the ground▪ yet within lesse then halfe a yeare there will branches spring out of the roote, and likewise if you breake a branch off from the tree & set it in the earth, it will presently take root and grow, & within few dayes after beareth blossoms: the blos∣somes

are in a manner like Orange tree blos∣somes, the flowre being white, and in the bot∣tome somewhat yellow and reddish, which in India they vse for Saffron, therewith to dresse their meats, and to die with all as wee doe with our Saffron, but it is neyther so good nor of so pleasant a taste, yet it serueth there for want of the other.

* 1.48Some say, that the water of this tree be∣ing distilled, is good for the eyes, steeping linnen clothes in it, and so laying them to the eyes.

This tree is found in no place but in Goa, and Malacca, & in some other places, where the Portingalles inhabiting, haue planted them, for that they first came out of Malac∣ca into India, but within the land there is none, they are called in the Malayan tongue Singady, in Decanun, Parisatico, in De∣can, Pul, of the Arabians Guart, of the Per∣sians and Turkes G••l. The cause of this name, as the Indians say, is, that a Gentle∣man ••alled Parisatico had a faire daughter, of whom the Sunne became amorous, and in the end obtained his pleasure of her, but not long after he fell in loue with another, & forsook her, wherupon she falling into dispaire killed herselfe, and according to the custome of the countrie her body was burnt, of whose ashes they say this tree sprang vp, and for the same cause was called Parisa••ico, and there∣fore they say by reason of the hatred it bea∣reth vnto the Sunne, it neuer bringeth foorth blossome or flowre, but hy night, and in the day time for griefe they presently fall off.

* 1.49The description of this Tree by Christopherus de Costa is set downe in this manner: that it is of the greatnes and similitude of a plumme tree, with many small branches, seperated by di∣uers knots and partitions, the leaues growing two and two together, and as bigge as plumme tree leaues, soft and rough on the out side, verie like to leaues of Sage, and inwardlie greene, and somewhat sharp, but not so vneuen on the sides as plumme leaues, neyther yet so full of veines. In the middle be∣tweene the two leaues there groweth a little stalke, whereon are fiue small heads, & out of them foure little rough leaues, out of the middest wherof there doe spring fiue small white blossomes, of the greatnesse and forme of Orange blossomes, but somewhat smaller, fairer, and sweeter. The stalke seemeth more red than yellow, wherewith the Indi∣ans colour their meate, as wee doe with Saffron. The greene fruite is of the greatnes of a Lupyne, and in fashion like a little hart, somwhat long and de∣uided in the middle, hauing two pla∣ces wherein the seed doth lie, which is also like a hart, and as bigge as the seeds of Saint Iohns bread, couered with a greene Skin, and somewhat bitter. Of all other Trees these are the pleasantest of smell, so that they bee not handled, for if they be, they doe presently loose their sweetnes and smell. The Indians are of opinion, that these flowers doe quicken and comfort the heart, but they are somewhat bitter, the Heathens likewise doe account the seede among their medicines that strengthen the hart. The flowers may be vsed in meat, the seed hath oftentimes bin caried in∣to Portingall, and there sowed, but ne∣uer would grow, what meanes soeuer they vsed, the flowers fall off when the sunne riseth as Clusius saith, eyther by reason of some contrariety, or because of the subtill nature of the sap, which the beames of the Sunne doe drie and consume: for those wheron the Sunne shineth not, stay somewhat longer on the tree. These flowers are very careful∣ly gathered, whereof a very sweet and pleasant water is distilled, which is cal∣led water de Mogli, some of this seede was brought me out of India by Iohn Hughen, which I sowed in the groūd, but it came not forth.

The 60. Chapter. Of the Bettele leaues, & the fruit Arecca.

THe leaues called Bett••e∣••e or Bettre, which is very common in India, and dayly eaten by the Indians, doe grow in all places of India, where the Portingals haue discouerd, not with in the countrie, but only on the sea coast, vn∣lesse it bee some small quantitie. It wil not growe in cold places, as China▪ nor in ouer hot places as Mosambique and Sofala, and

because it is so much vsed, I haue particular∣ly set it downe in this place, although it is al∣ready spoken of in many other places. You must vnderstand that this Bettele is a leafe somewhat greater and longer out than O∣range leaues, and is planted by sticks, where∣vpon it climeth like Iuie or pepper, and so like vnto pepper, that a farre off growing each by other, they can hardlie bee descerned. It hath no other fruite but the leaues only, it is much dressed and looked vnto, for that it is the day∣ly breade of India. The leaues being gathe∣red doe continue long without withering, al∣waies shewing fresh and greene, and are sold by the dozen, and there is not any woman or man in all India, but that euery day eateth a dozen or two of the same leaues or more: not that they vse them for foode, but after their meale tides, in the morning and all the day long, as likewise by night, and as they goe abroad in the stréetes, wheresoeuer they be you shal sée them with some of these leaues in their handes, which continually they are chawing. These leaues are not vsed to bee eaten alone, but because of their bitternesse they are eaten with a certaine kinde of fruit which the Malabares and Portingales call Arecca, the Gusurates and Decanijns, Su∣pari••, and the Arabians Fauffel. This fruite groweth on trees like the Palme trées that beare the Nut Cocus in India, but they are somewhat thinner, with the leaues some∣what longer, and smaller. The fruit is much like the fruit that groweth on Cipresse trees, or like a Nutmeg, though some of them are on the one side flat, & on the other side thick∣er, some being somewhat greater and very hard. They cut them in the middle with a knife, and so chaw them with Bettele, they are within ful of veines, white, and somwhat reddish. There is a kinde of Arecca called Cechaniin, which are lesse, blacker, and very hard, yet are likewise vsed with Bettele, and haue no taste, but onlie of the wood, and yet it moysteneth the mouth, and coloureth it both red and blacke, whereby it séemeth that the lips and the teeth are painted with blacke blood, which happeneth when the Arecca is not well dried. There is another sort which in the eating or chawing beeing swallowed downe, maketh men light in the heade, as if they had drunke wine all the day long, but that is soone past. They vse yet another mix∣ture which they eate withall, that is to say, a cake or role made of a certaine wood or tree called Kaate, and then they annoint the Bet∣tele leaues with chalke made of burnt oyster shelles, which can doe no hurt in their bodies, by reason of the small quantitie of it, all this being chawed togeather, and the Iuice swal∣lowed downe into their bodies, for all the rest they spit forth, they say it is very good for the maw, and against a stinking breath, a soue∣raigne medecine for the teeth, and fastning of gummes, and very good against the Schor∣bucke, and it is most true that in India verie few men are found with stinking breathes or tooth aches, or troubled with the Scorbuch or any such diseases, and although they be neuer so old, they alwaies haue their teeth whole and sound, but their mouthes and teeth are still as if they were painted with black blood, as I said before, and neuer leaue spitting red∣dish spittle like blood. The Portingale wo∣men haue the like custome of eating these Bettele leaues, so that if they were but one day without eating their Bettele, they per∣swade themselues they could not liue: Yea, they set it in the night times by their Beddes heades, and when they cannot sleepe, they doe nothing els but chaw Bettele and spit it out againe. In the day time wheresoeuer they doe sit, goe, or stand, they are continual∣ly chawing thereof, like Oxen or Kine chaw∣ing their cud: for the whole exercise of many Portingale women, is onely all the day long to wash themselues, and then fal to the chaw∣ing of their Bettele. There are some Portin∣gales that by the common custome of their wiues eating of Bettele, doe likewise vse it. When the Indian women go to visit one an other, the Bettele goeth with them, and the greatest pleasure or entertainement they can shew one to the other, is presently to present them with some Bettele, Arecca, and chalke in a woodden dish, which they kéepe onely for that purpose. This Bettele is to bee sold in e∣uery corner, and streete, and shoppe of the towne, as also in euery high way for trauel∣lers and passengers, and is ready prepared, that is to say, so many Bettele leaues, one Arecca & some chalke, and many times some Cate for such as desire to haue it, which they commonly keepe in their houses, or beare in their hands in a woodden painted dish, and so eate in this sort, first a peece of Arecca, and Cate, which they chaw, after that a leafe of Bettele, and with the naile of their thumbe, which they purposely weare sharpe and long, not round as wee doe, they pull the veines or stringes out of the leafe, and so smeare it with chalke, and rowling it together, they thrust it in their mouthes and chaw it. The first ••ap thereof they spit forth, and say that thereby they purge the head and the maw of all euill, and flegmaticke humors, and their spittle being as fowle as blacke blood, which colour proceedeth from the Arecca, the rest of the Iuice they swallow downe.

The Indians goe continually in the

stréetes and waies with Bettele and the o∣ther mixtures chawing in their handes, speci∣ally whē they go to speake with any man, or come before a great Lord, therby to retaine a good smell, and to keepe their breathes swéet, and if they should not haue it in that sort with them whensoeuer they meete or speake with any man of account, it were a great shame for them.

* 1.50The women likewise when they ac∣company secretly with their husbands, doe first eat a little Bettele, which (they think) maketh them apter to the game. All the Indians eate it after their meales, saying that otherwise their meate wold vpbraide them, and rise in their sto∣makes, and that such as haue vsed to eate it, and leaue it, doe presently get a stincking breath. They doe at certaine times forbeare the eating of Bettele, as when any of their neerest friends die, and also on certain fasting daies, as like∣wise some Arabians and the follow∣ers of Ali, Mahomets brother in lawe, doe vpon their fasting dayes. In Mala∣bar, this leafe is called Bettele, in Decam Gusurate, and Canam, it is called Pam, in Malaion, Siri, by Auicenna, Tambul, but better by others. Tambul, Auicenna say∣eth, that Bettele strengthneth the maw, and fastneth the flesh of the Gummes, for which purpose the Indians doe vse it, but where he affirmeth those leaues to be cold in the first degree, and dry∣ing in the second, it is not so, for either his Booke is false printed, for hee was deceiued therein, for those leaues are hotte and drie in the end of the second degree, as Garcius ab Horto himself hath found out, likewise the taste and smell therof doe affirme it to be so. This Bet∣tele is like a Citron leafe, but somewhat longer, sharpe at the ende, hauing cer∣taine veines that runne along the leafe. The rypest are holden to bee the best, and are of colour yellowish, although some women chuse the vnripe, because they are pleasanter in the chawing. The leaues doe wither by much handling. The Bettele in Malacca, beareth a fruit like the tayle of an Efte, which because it tasteth well, is eaten: it is planted like a Vine vpon stickes, as Hoppes with vs. Some for their greater benefit Plant it among Pepper, and among Arecca, and there of doe make a pleasant Galle∣rie. This Bettele must be carefully look∣ed vnto, and often watered. He that de∣sireth to knowe more hereof, let him reade the worthie commentaries of learned Clusius, vppon the Chapter of Garcius touching Bettele.

The Noblemen and Kings, wheresoeuer they goe, stand or sit, haue alwaies a seruant by them, with a Siluer ketle in their hand full of Bettele and their mixtures, and when they will eat, giue them a leafe ready prepa∣red. And when any Ambassadour commeth to speake with the King, although the King can vnderstand them well, yet it is their ma∣ner (to maintaine their estates) that the Am∣bassadour speaketh vnto them by an interpre∣ter, that standeth there in presence, which done, be answereth againe by the same inter∣preter. In the meane time, the King lyeth on a bed, or else sitteth on the ground, vppon a Carpet, and his seruant standeth by, readie with the Bettele, which he continually chaw¦eth, and spitteth out the Iuyce, and the re∣mainder thereof, into a Siluer Bason; stand∣ing by him, or else holden by some one of his slaues or his wiues, & this is a great honour to the Ambassadour, specially if he profereth him of the same Bettele that he himselfe doth eate. To conclude, it is their common vse to eate it, which because it is their dayly exer∣cise, and that they consume so much, I haue made y^e longer discourse, the better to vnder∣stand it, although somewhat hath béene said thereof in other places. The Kings & Lords of India vse pilles made of Arecca, Cate and Camphora, with beaten Lignum aloes, and a little Amber, which they eate altoge∣ther with Bettele and Chalke, in stéede of Arecca.

Some mixe Bettele with Licium,* 1.51 some and those of the richer & migh∣tier sort with Campher, others with Li∣gnum aloes, Muske and Amber Grijs, and beeing so prepared, is pleasant of taste and maketh a sweet breath. There are some that chaw Arecca either with Cardamomum, or with Cloues. With∣in the lande farre from the Sea, those leaues are solde verie deare. It is said, that the King of Decan Mizamoxa spen∣deth yearely thereof, to the valew of a∣boue thirtie thousand Milreyes. This is their banquetting stuffe, and is giuen

them by trauellers, and the Kings giue it to their Subiects. To the rich they giue thereof being mixed with their owne hands, and to others they send it by their seruants. When they send a∣ny man of Ambassage or otherwise; there are certaine Silke Purses full of prepared Bettele deliuered vnto him, and no man may depart before it be de∣liuered him, for it is a signe or token of his passe port.

By the pictures hereafter following you may sée the figures of the fruites of Malacca called Duryoens, & y^e trée Arbore de Rays, or roote trée, likewise the thicke Réedes, na∣med by the Portingales Bambu, and by the Indians Mambu, with the trée called Arbo∣re Triste, or the sorrowfull trée, as it is both by day and by night, and the trée whereon Arecca doth grow, as likewise the Bettele. And because Pepper is oftentimes planted at the foote of the Arecca trée, where it groweth and clymeth vp round about the bo∣dy thereof, I haue set it downe, in the same order as it groweth: The description where∣of shall in an other place bee shewed, among the Spices and drugges of India, as also the Hearbes, seruing for Physicke, and Apothe∣carie ware &c.

The 61. Chapter. Of the Hearbe Dutroa, and a Plant called Herba Sentida, or the feeling Hearbe.

THe Hearbe called Dutroa, is verie common in India, and groweth in euerie fielde: the leafe thereof is sharpe at the ende, like the pointe of a Speare, and is indented on the edges like the leafe of Beares claw, and about that bignesse, hauing in it many long thréedes or veines, it groweth without taste, or moysture, and somewhat bitter and smel∣ling like a Raddish. The flower or blossome of this Plant is verie like vnto the blossome of Rose-marie in colour: and out of this blos∣some groweth a bud, much like the bud of Popie, wherein are certaine small kernels like the kernels of Melons, which being stamped, and put into any meate, wine, wa∣ter or any other drinke or composition, and eaten or drunke therewith, maketh a man, in such case as if hee were foolish or out of his wittes▪ so that he doth nothing else but laugh, without any vnderstanding or sence once to perceiue any thing that is done in his pre∣sence. And some time it maketh him sléepe as if he were dead, in that sort he continueth for the space of twentie foure houres: but if his féete bee washed with colde water, then hee commeth to himselfe againe before the twen∣tie fower howers be expired. This Herbe the Indian and Portingall women vse much to giue vnto their husbandes, and often times when they are disposed to bee merrie with their secrete louers, they giue it him▪ and goe in his presence and performe their leacherie together, and taking their husband by the beard, they will call him Cornudo, with o∣ther such like iestes, the man not knowing a∣ny thing thereof, but sitteth with his eyes o∣pen, not doing or saying any thing, but laugh and grin, like a foole, or a man out of his wits: and when the time commeth that he reuiueth out of his transe, he knoweth nothing what was done, but thinketh that hee had slept. This Hearbe the slaues vse likewise to giue their masters and mistresses, therby to robbe them and to breake open their Chests, which is oftentimes done, this Dutroa must bee v∣sed in measure, because it is a kind of poyson, for if a man giue too much thereof hee may bring a man to his ende, vnlesse some strong and present remedie be taken, by some conter∣poyson or Purgation.

The remedy thereof consisteth in me∣dicines which cause vomiting,* 1.52 for he must cast al out of his body, meate or what soe∣uer is remaining in his Maw, & then take diuers purgations and strong Gl••ers, as also hard rubbing & binding both hands and feete, together with letting bloud in the great toe••.

This Hearbe groweth in all places in aboundance, and although it is forbidden to be gathered, or once vsed, neuerthelesse those that are the principal forbidders of it are such as dayly eate thereof, for their owne wiues sakes, that thereby they might fulfill their pleasures with other men, which is the com∣mon liuing of them all▪ some few excepted. Some men are so vsed to eate and drink Du∣troa, not knowing of it, that tasting onely of the Iuice of the leaues, they are presently in a transe, and so the wife is well assured, and without all feare to satisfie her lust. This and such like Hearbes there are in India, and are much vsed, for that all the care & studie that y^e women and wiues of India haue, is day and night to deuise meanes to satisfie then plea∣sures, and to increase lust, by all the deuises they can imagine, and to make their bodies the apter thereunto. Which to effect they know all the diuelish inuentions and practi∣ses 〈1 page missing〉〈1 page missing〉

which is like the blacke, sauing the first outmost huske is white and smooth, without any wrinckle, but hath the verie self same vertue and taste that black pepper hath. It cometh oftentimes mingled with the Malac∣ca pepper. The pepper that groweth in the countries about Malacca is many times al∣so brought into Portingal, but verie little, for that it is 2 yeares betweene euery ship that sayleth out of Portingale thither, which be∣ing there, taketh in some pepper, but most Cloues and Nutmegges with their flowers and other marchandises of China: But the most part of that pepper is vsed in the same countries, as in Pegu, Syon, & special∣ly in China, and other countries bordering on the same, which deal continually one with an other. Pepper by the Malabares is called Molanga, and in the countries by Malacca Lada: in Arabia, Fil••il: the Gusarates of Cambaia and Decamins of Ballagate cal it Meriche: and they of Bengala, Moro••s: and the long pepper which groweth onely in Bē∣g••la and Iaua, is called Pelc••m. Pepper groweth and is planted at the foote of an o∣ther trée, and most part at the foote of the trée called Arecca, or some such like trée, & grow∣eth vpon the tree, like Bettele or Iue. The leaues of pepper are like Orange leaues, but somewhat smaller, they are green and sharp at the ends, in the chawing it biteth the tong, and tasteth much like to Bettele, it growes in bunshes like grapes, but a great deale les∣ser and thynner, yet somewhat thicker then Gooseberries: they are alwaies green til they begin to drie and to ripen, which is in Decē∣ber and Ianuary, for at that time they are gathered. The long pepper groweth in Ben∣gala, and some in the Iland of Iaua, and is an other kinde of trée: the long pepper is of the length of a néedle, or the tagge of a point, but somewhat thicker, and all of a like thicknes: it is outwardly rugged, and of an ashie co∣lour, and within somewhat white, with small seedes, but in taste and vse it is like the other black and white pepper. The white pepper (as I sayd) is like the black, both in taste and forme, yet it is accounted for better & strōger, and is not in so great quantitie as the black. The Pepper called Canariins in the coun∣trie of Goa and Malabar, almost of the fa∣shion of Panike: it is of an ashe colour, and holow within, with some smal kernels, which in eating tasteth and heateth like other pep∣per, yet it is vsed onely by the poore people, and therefore is called Canariin pepper, that is to say, Countrie mens pepper, or poore peoples pepper: therefore it is neuer laden a∣way, for it is verie course and of little value, neither would it be able to rayse the fraight, and therfore is it left in the countrie. The o∣ther pepper is in India and all other Eastern countries, much vsed and spent by the In∣dians themselues, and that in greater quan∣titie then yearelie is carried or laden from thence for other places, for they eate not any kinde of meate, but they put therein handfuls of pepper, al vnbeaten, so that they waste the more. In the description of Malabar I haue set downe in what places pepper doth grow, and is cōmonlie laden, and the hauens where the Portingall shippes doe come and fetch it: therefore it néedeth not here to be rehearsed: pepper is likewise much vsed, whē it is green, to be put in pots with vineger and salt, and so is kept a long time, and in the same manner carryed into Portingal: but it is most vsed in that sort to be eaten in India, and is called pepper in Achar, in which manner they vse to dresse all other sorts of spices in India, and eate it commonlie to procure an appetite▪ as we doe Capars, Oliues, and Lemons, being pickled.

Pepper is vsed in the kitchen, and in Apothecaries shoppe••,* 1.53 although in both places not as a meate or food, but for phy∣sicke▪ it warmeth the mawe, and consum∣eth the cold slymenes thereof, to ease the payne in the mawe which proceedeth of rawnesse and wind. It is good to eate fyue pepper cornes euerie morning. He that hath a bad or thick sight, let him vse pep∣per cornes, with annis, ••ennel seed, and Cloues, for thereby the mystinesse of the eyes, which darken the sight, is cleered and driuē away. The Apothe••ries make a confection of 3. sorts o•• peppe••, in this sort, of wh••te, blacke and ••ong Pepper of each 25 drāmes, wilde tyme, ginger, ••¦nis seed, of each an ou••ce, with honnie is much as needeth to make a con••e••, which is good for such as haue a cold 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Nucken, the paine in the liuer, and the Dropsie.

The 63. Chapter. Of Cinamom.

CInamon in Latin is called Ci∣namo••: by the Arabians, Quirsa: by the Persians Da••∣china, by the men of Seylon, (where it most groweth) Cur∣do: of the people of Malacca, Caysman: and by the Malabares, Camea: the trees are as great as Oliue trees, and some lesser, with leaues of Colmi like Baye leaues, but of fa∣shion like Citron leaues, though somewhat smaller. They haue white blossomes, and a

certaine fruite of the greatnes of black Por∣tingall Oliues, whereof also Oyle is made, which is vsed for manie thinges. The tree hath two barkes, but the second bark is the Cinamon, it is cut off in foure square péeces, and so laid to dry at the first it is ashe colour, after as it beginneth to dry, it roulleth toge∣ther of it self, and looketh of the colour as it commeth hether, which procéedeth of the heate of the Sunne. The trée from whence the barke is taken they let it stand, & within 3 yeres after it hath an other barke, as it had before. These trees are in great abundance, for they grow of themselues without plant∣ing, in the open fields like bushes: the roote of this tree yeeldeth a water, which smelleth like Camphora, it is forbidden to be drawn forth, for spoyling the trees. The Cinamon that is not wel dried is of ashe colour, & that which is ouer much dryed, blackish, but the best dryed is reddish: there is much and excellent water distilled out of Cinamō while it is half gréen, which is much vsed in India, & manie times caryed into Portingal, and other places: it is very pleasant both to drinke and to smell, but very hote and strong: it is vsed against the Colicke and other diseases procéeding of cold, it is likewise good against a stincking breath, and euill sauor of the mouth. There is like∣wise a water made of the blossomes of this tree, but not so good, nor so well esteemed as that of Cinamon it self. The places where Cinamon groweth, is most and best in the Ilād of Seylon, wherin there is whole woods full of Cinamon trees: in the coast of Mala∣bar there groweth likewise great store and some woods of Cinamon, but not half so good and lesser trees, the barke being grayer and thicker, and of smal vertue. The Cinamon of the Iland of Seylon is the best and finest, and is at the least three times dearer in the price. The Cinamon of Malabar is called Canella de Mato or wilde Cinamon, and is forbidden to be carried into Portingale: yet there is great quantity shipped, but all vnder the name of Cinamon of Seylon, whereby it passeth, and the King hath his full custome as well for the good as for the bad. When the ••on of Seylon is worth in India 50 or 60 Pardawes the Quintale, the wilde Ci∣namon is worth but 10 or 12 Pardawes: but it is all registred in India, for Seylons Cinamon, and payeth custome in Lisbon, each Quintale 15 or 16 Milreyes, as well the good as the bad, and all other spices after the rate: and there may be nothing shipped in India, no not so much as the slaues, but it must all be registred in Cochin: and if there be any thing found, to be brought into Por∣ti••l▪ and not registred there▪ it is forfait to the King. There groweth Cinamon also in the Ilands of Iaua, and by Malacca, but ve∣ry little, and not so good as that of Seylon. The trees which they burne in India, for wood, some of them are like Cinamon in burning, and smell.

Cinamon healeth, it openeth & strēg∣theneth all the inward parts, it is some∣what attractiue, stretcheth the mawe, and digesteth the meate, it is also vsed a∣gainst all kinde of poyson, that may hurt the hart. Cinamon with Penny••oy all and Biuoet water drunk driueth away the Ʋol∣gher, openeth the matrice,* 1.54 and maketh women haue their flowers: it is likewise good against Fusten, and Catharres, that fall downe from the head into the low∣er parts, also against the Dropsie, and breaking or stopping of the kidneyes &c. The water and Oyle of Cinamon doe greatlie strengthen all the inward parts, as head, hart, mawe and lyuer. &c.

The 64. Chapter. Of Ginger.

GInger groweth in manie places of India, yet the best, & most caryed abroad, is that which groweth in the coast of Malabar: it groweth like thin and young Netherland reedes of two or thrée spannes high, the roote whereof is the Gin∣ger, being greene, it is much eaten in India, for sallets, as also sodden in Vineger, which they call Achar, as I said of pepper, and other fruites that are vsed in that māner through∣out al India: the time whē they are most ga∣thered and begun to be dried, is in December and Ianuarie: they drie it in this sort, that is, they couer it with pot-earth, which they doe to stop and fill vp the holes, and thereby to make it continue the fresher, for the pot-earth preserueth it from wormes, without the which it is presentlie consumed by them▪ it is little estéemed in India notwithstanding there is much shipped as well to the red sea as to Ormus, Arabia and Asia, but little for Portingal▪ because it will not saue y^e fraught and custome: onlie the gunner of the Indian shippes may lade and bring certaine Quin∣tals without paying any custome, which by the King of Portingale was of long tyme granted vnto them, and is yet obserued: and this they may fel to marchants and so by this meanes there is some brought, otherwise but very little, for that the most part of Ginger brought into Spain, cometh from Cabo ver∣de, the Ilands of S. Thomas, Brasili••, and

the Ilād of S. Domingo in y^e spanish Indies, which is much trafficked withall in Spaine: wherefore that of the Portingall Indies is little brought out of the coūtry, because of the lōg way & great charges & yet it is better thē other Ginger: as also all other spices, met∣tals, and stones, that are brought out of the Orientall Indies, that is out of the Portin∣gales Indies, are for goodnesse and vertue bet∣ter then any other, which the continuall traf∣fique hath sufficiently made knowne. There is likewise much Ginger conserued in Suger which commeth out of the countrie of Ben∣gala, but the best commeth from China, it is verie good to eate, and much vsed in India, & broght out of Portingal into these countries.

Ginger by the Arabians, Persians, and Turkes is called Gengibil, in Gusurate, De∣can,* 1.55 and Bengala, when it is freshe and greene, Adrac, and when it is dryed Sucte, in Malabar both dryed & green Imgi, in Malayo Aliaa. It groweth like water Lillies, or Sword-hearbe, but somewhat blacker, with a stalke aboute two or three handfuls high, and with a roote like a Lillie, not spreading forth as Antonius Musa writeth, and is not so sharpe, specially that which grow∣eth in Bacaim, because of the ouer great moysture. This roote is cut small and mixed with other rootes, and so eaten for Sallets with oyle, salt and Vineger, it is also sodden with flesh and fish. It goweth in all places of India, and is sowed or Planted, for that which com∣meth vp of it selfe, is not so good. The best and greatest store commeth out of Malabar, and by the Arabians and Per∣sians it is much desired, next it is the Ginger of Bengala. The third is that of Debut and Bacaim and of all the coast a∣long, in the wilde fields and inwardly within the land there is little found. There is also some found in the Ilands of S. Laurence and Comaro. The vertue and properties of Ginger is, that it ma∣keth a man, to goe easily to the stoole, and restoreth a mans strength that is de∣cayed. But it is found contrary in other Authors, that Ginger stoppeth, for that it causeth good digestion, and so laske∣ments, proceeding of raw moystnesse, is stopped. It heateth a colde maw, and is good against humors, that darken the eyes, and is vsed in many medicines.

The 65. Chapter Of Cloues.

CLoues are by the Turkes, Persians Arabians and most part of the Indians called Ca∣••a••••r, and in the Ilands of Maluco, where they are on∣ly found and do grow Cham∣ke. These Ilands are fine, lying vnder the Equinoctiall line, as in the descriptions ther∣of is declared. They haue nothing else but Cloues, which are caried frō thence, through out the world, the trees whereon they grow, are like Bay-trées, the blossomes at the first white, then greene, and at the last red and hard, which are the Cloues, and when the blossomes are gréene, they haue the pleasan∣test smell in all the world. The Cloues grow verie thicke together and in great numbers, they are gathered and then dried, their right colour, when they are drie, is a darke yelow, and to giue them a blacke colour, they are commonly smoked. The Cloues that stay on the trée vngathered are thicke, and stay on till the next yeare, which are those that are called the mother of the Cloues. And in the place where the trées stand, there groweth not any grasse or gréene Hearbe at all, but it is wholly drie, for that those trees draw all the moysture vnto them. That which the Portingals call Baston▪ or with vs the stocke of the Cloue, and is the stalke whereby they hang on the trees is gathered with the Clo∣ues and so they are mingled together: for that in Maluco they neuer garble their Cloues, but in India they are many times parted, though verie little: for they are most part sold and vsed with dust, and stalkes and all to∣gether, but such as are to bee sent to Portin∣gall are seuered and clensed The Cloues are so hotte of nature, that whensoeuer them are made cleane, and seperated from their Gar∣bish, if there chance to stand either Tubbe or Payle of water in the Chamber where they clense them, or any other vessell with wine or any kind of moysture, it will within two dayes at the furthest be wholly soken out and dryed vp, although it stand not néere them, by reason of the great heate of the Cloues, that draw all moysture vnto them, as by ex∣perience I haue often séene. The same nature is in the vnspunne Silke of China, so that whensoeuer the Silke lyeth any where in a house vpon the flowre, that is to say, vppon boordes, a foote or two aboue the ground, and that the flowre is sprinkled and couered with

water, although it toucheth not the Silke, in the Morning all that water will bee in the Silke, for that it draweth it all vnto it. And this tricke the Indians often times vse to make their Silke weigh heauie, when they sel it▪ for it can neither be séen nor found in the Silke. But returning to our matter, the Cloues grow about the length of a great shot from the Sea side, and are neither planted nor set, and nothing else is done vnto them, but only when they plucke and gather them, they make the place vnder the trées verie cleane. The trée will not grow verie close to the Sea side, nor farre from it, for these I∣lands are altogether compassed about with the Sea. When it is a fruitfull yeare, then the Cloues are in greater abundance then the leaues. When they gather them, they do not pluck them with their hands, but with ropes which they fasten about the branches, and by force they shake them off, and by that meanes the trées are so spoyled, that the next yeare af∣ter they yeelde but little fruite: but the second yeare then after ensuing, there grow vp trées of the Cloues that fell vpon the ground, when they gathered them two yeares before, like Chesnut trées, and they growe verie sound, because of the great rayne that falleth in those places: for those Ilandes lye vnder the Equinoctiall line, and yéelde fruite within eight yeares, and so continue aboue a hun∣dreth yeares. The time when they are ga∣thered and dried, is from September to Ia∣nuarie. When the Cloues are gréene, they make good conserues in Sugar, and are likewise salted in Vineger & so kept in pots, and made of Achar, in which manner they are carried into Malacca and India. They likewise distill water out of the gréen Cloues which is verie cordiall and vsed in many Me∣decines. The Indian women vse much to chawe Cloues, thereby to haue a swéete breath, which the Portingales wiues that dwell there, doe now begin to vse, the leaues of the Cloue-trees, are altogether like Bay∣leaues.

Cloues grow on trees like Bay-trees both in forme and quantitie,* 1.56 saue one∣ly that their leaues are somthing lesser, like Almonds or Willow leaues. They are full of branches, and haue aboun∣dance of blossomes, which doe turne these fruites, and are called Cloues be∣cause in forme and shape they doe re∣semble a Birdes clawes. They growe like the Mirtle-tree vpon the vttermost branches. Cloues are much vsed both in meate and in medicines. The people of Iaua desire the gray Cloues, that hang a whole yere and more vpon the trees, and are no Males, as Auia doth absurdly aduise, and as we of the com∣mon sort doe, who couet the thinnest. When they are greene, they vse to salt them, with salt and Vineger in Maluco, and some they put in Suger, which are verie pleasant to bee eaten. The water of greene Cloues distilled is very plea∣sant of smel, and strengthneth the hart, likewise they procure sweating in men that haue the Pox, with Cloues, Nut∣megges, Mace, long and black Pepper, some lay the poulder of Cloues vpon a mans head, that hath a paine in it, that proceedeth of colde. They strengthen the Liuer, the Maw, and the hart, they further digestion, they procure euacu∣ation of the Vrine, and stop lascatiue∣nes, and being put into the eyes, pre∣serueth the sight, and foure Drammes being drunke with Milke, doe procure lust.

The 66, Chapter. Of Mace, Folie, or flowers of Nutmegges, and of Nutmegges.

THe Nutmegge trée is like a Peare tree or a Peach trée, but that they are lesse, and it hath round leaues. These trées growe in the Iland of Banda, not farre from Ma∣luco, and also in the Ilandes of Iauas & Sun∣da, from whence they are carried to China, and Malacca, and also into India and other places. The fruite is altogether like great round Peaches, the inward part whereof is the Nutmegge. This hath about it a hard shell like wood, wherein the Nut lyeth loose: and this wooden shel or huske is couered ouer with Nutmeg flower, which is called Mace, and ouer it is the fruite, which without is like the fruite of a Peach. When it is ripe it is a verie costly meate, and of a most pleasaunt sauor. This fruite or Apples are many times conserued in Sugar being whole, and in that sort caried throughout India, and much estée∣med: for in truth it is the best conserue in all India, and is many times brought ouer into Portingall, and from thence hether. They are likewise salted and put in Vineger, which is much vsed in India. When the Nuttes be∣gin

to be ripe, then they swell, and the first shell or huske bursteth in péeces, and the Nut∣megge flowers doe continue redde, as any Scarlet, which is a verie faire sight to behold, especially if the trées bee full of fruite. Some∣times also the Mace breaketh, which is the cause that the Nutmegges▪ come all together without the Mace, and when the Nutmegge drieth, then the Mace falleth off, and the red changeth into Orenge colour, as you sée by the Mace that is brought hether. The Ilands where they grow, specially Banda, are very vnholesome countries, as also the Ilands of Maluco, many that traffique thether die be∣fore they depart from thence, or if they escape, they are in great perill of their liues, by sick∣nesse, notwith standing great gaine maketh men to trauell thether. The Nutmegge (by the inhabitants of Banda, where they are most growing) is called Palla, and the Mace or Nutmegge flower, Buna Palla. The De∣canijns and Indians call it Iapatry, and the Mace Iayfol.

The trees whereon Nutmegs and Mace do grow,* 1.57 are not vnlike to Peare trees, but shorter and rounder leaues, they are good for paine in the head, for the mother and the Sinewes.

The Nut is compassed about with three kinds of Barkes. The first & ou∣termost is like the greene shell of an A∣corne, and when they are ripe that shel openeth: then you find a thin shell or barke like a Nutte, which compasseth the fruite, and by vs is called Mace, which both in meate and Medicine is verie seruiceable and wholesome. The third shell is harder and more like vn∣to wood then the first, and is like the Acorne, but that it is blacker, which being opened, you find the Nutmegge therein.

When the fruit is ripe, and that the first shell breaketh open, then the Mace is of a most faire red colour, and when the fruit is drie, the Mace likewise doth change, and becommeth a Golden yellow.

There are two sorts of Nutmegges, one long, which are called Males, the other round, which are better & stron∣ger.

The Nutmeg comforteth the braine, sharpneth the memorie, warmeth and strengthneth the Maw, driueth winde out of the body, maketh a sweet breath, driueth downe Vrine, stoppeth the Laske, and to conclude, is good against all colde diseases in the heade, in the braine, the Mawe, the Liuer and the Matrice.

The Oyle thereof is better then the rest, for all the aforesaid named infirmi∣ties.

Mace is specially good for a colde and a weake maw, it procureth digesti∣on of the meate, drieth vp all euill hu∣mors and breaketh wind.

The 67. Chapter. Of Cardamomum

CArdamomum is a kinde of spice which they vse much in India to dresse with their meates, and commonly they haue it in their mouthes to chaw vpon. It is very good against a stinck∣ing breath and euill humors in the head, and serueth also for other things in medecines: it groweth like other graynes and is verie like to Panyke, but of a white colour drawing somewhat towards yealow. The huskes are as great as the huskes of Panyke graines, but somewhat smal: within there is about 10 or 12 graines of berryes, which is the Car∣damomum. There are two sorts of Carda∣momum, that is to say, great and small, and called by the Malabares, Etremilly: the Gu∣surates, Decaniins & Bengalers cal it Hil, and the Mores inhabiting among them, call it Hilachij. This is much vsed in India, and is a marchandise which is caryed into all places of India: most of it groweth in Cale∣cut and Cananor, places on the coast of Ma∣labar: it is likewise in other places of Mala∣bar, and in the Iland of Iaua, and from the countries aforesaid it is most caryed into o∣ther places, but little brought into Portingal, because of the great charges, and long way: yet many times the Saylers and other tra∣uellers bring it. They sieth no flesh in India, but commonly they put Cardomomum into the pot, it maketh the mea•• to haue as good a sauor and a taste as any of the other spices of India.

Auicenna sayth there are two kinds of it, the one he calleth Saccolaa quebir, that is, great Cardamomum, and the o∣ther Saccolaa Regner, that is, smal Carda∣momum: in Malabar it is called Etre∣melly, in Seylan Encal, in Bengala Gusarat∣te, and Decan sometimes Hil, & some∣times Elachi, but that is by the Moores, for the Heathens throughout all India call it Dors Cardamomum: to the aunci∣cient Grecians, as Galen, Dioscorides, and others, it was altogether vnknowne: & although Galen in his seuenth booke of Simples saith, that Cardamomum is not so hot, as Nasturcium or water Cresses, but pleasanter of sauour, and smell with some small bitternesse, yet those signes or properties doe not agree with the Cardamomum of India. Dioscorides in his first booke and fift Chapter com∣mending the Cardamomum brought out of Comagens, Armenia, and Bospho∣ras (although hee saith also that such doe growe in India and Arabia) saith, that wee must choose that which is full, and tough in breaking, sharpe & bitter of taste, and with the smell there∣of causeth a heauinesse in a mans head: yet is the Indian Cardamomum caryed into those places, from whence Diosco∣rides affirmeth that his Cardamomum doeth come, although it bee neyther tough in breaking, nor annoyeth the heade, neyther is bitter of taste, nor so sharpe as Cloues: the great Cardamo∣mum hath a shell that is long and three cornered, wherein are certaine pale red kernels with corners: the small Carda∣momum hath likewise a three cornered huske, yet shorter, and with smaller ker∣nels, parted in the middle with a thinne skinne; & this Cardamomum is of three sorts, as minus, medium, minimum, that is, small, smaller, and smallest of all. It hea∣teth the Mawe, digesteth the meat, and driueth away the giddines of the head: it is also eaten with Bettele, to purge the head & maw of slime and fil∣thinesse.

The 68. Chapter. Of Lacke or hard Waxe.

LAcke by the Malabares, Bengalers, and Decaniins, is called A••sii, by the Moors Lac: the men of Pegu (where the best is found, and most trafiqued withall) doe call it Treck, and deale much therewith by carrying it vnto the Island of Sumatra (in time past called Taprobana) and there they exchange it for Pepper, and from thence it is carried to the redde sea, to Persia and Ara∣bia, wherevpon the Arabians, Persians and Turkes call it Loc Sumutri, that is, Lac of Sumatra, because it is brought from thence into their countries. The manner how it is made is thus: in Pegu, and those places from whence it commeth, there are certaine very great Pismyres with winges, which fly vppe into the trées, that are there like Plum trées, and such other Trées, out of the which trées comes a certaine gumme, which the Pis∣mires sucke vp, and then they make the Lac rounde about the branches of the trées, as Bées make Hony and Waxe, and when it is ful, the owners of the trees come, and brea∣king off the braunches lay them to drie, and being drie, the branches shrinke out, and the Lac remayneth behinde like a Reede: some∣times the woode breaketh within them, but the lesse woode it hath within it, the better it is: the peeces and crummes that fall vpon the ground, they melt them together, but that is not so good, for it hath filth and earth within it: it happeneth oftentimes that they finde the Pismires winges within the raw Lac. When the Lac is raw, as it commeth from the Tree, it is a darke red colour, but being refined and cleansed, they make it of all co∣lours in India.

They beat the Lac to powder,* 1.58 and melt it, and so mixe all manner of colours vpon it as they list, redde, blacke, greene, yel∣low, or any other colour, & make peeces, thereof, such a•• are sold here to seale let∣ters withall.

Them they dresse their bedsteds withall, that is to say, in turning of the woode, they take a peece of Lac of what colour they will, and as they turne it when it commeth to his fashion, they spread the Lac vpon the whole peece of woode, which presently with the heat of the turning melteth the Waxe, so that it entreth into the crestes & cleaueth vnto it▪ a∣bout

the thicknesse of a mans naile: then they burnish it ouer with broad straw or dry Ru∣shes so cunningly, that all the woode is coue∣red withall, and it shineth like Glasse, most pleasant to behold, and continueth as long as the wood, being well looked vnto: in this sort they couer all kinde of housholde stuffe in In∣dia, as Bedsteddes, Chaires, stooles, &c. and all their turned woodworke, which is won∣derful common and much vsed throughout all India: the fayrest workemanshippe there∣of commeth from China, as it may be séene, by all things that come from thence, as desks▪ Targets, Tables, Cubbordes, Bores, and a thousand such like thinges, that are all co∣uered and wrought with Lac of all colours and fashions: so that it maketh men to won∣der at the beautie and brightnes of the colour, which is altogether Lac: they likewise vse Lac to fill their Golde and Siluer workes, that is to say, haft••s of kniues, and other thinges, which they make very fayre out∣wardly of Siluer, and inwardly full of Lac. The Indians likewise are so cunning, that they make Ringes of Gold, which to mans sight séeme very fayre and bright, as though they were all of massy Gold, inwardly they are hollow and stopt with Lac, and cannot bee perceyued, vnlesse a man bee aduertised thereof. There is Lac likewise in Ballaga••∣te and Malabar, but very little: the greatest quantitie which from thence is carryed throughout India, and all other places, com∣meth out of the kingdome of Pegu.

The 69. Chapter. Of Annil or Indigo.

ANnil or Indigo by the Gusurates is called Ga∣li, by others Nil: it is a costly colour, and much caryed and trafiqued into Portingall: it groweth in India in the kingdom of Cambaia: the hearbe is very like Rosemary, and is sowed like o∣ther Hearbes, and when time and season ser∣ueth, pulled and dryed, and then it is made wette and beaten, and so certayne dayes af¦ter dryed againe, and then prepared. At the first it is a fine greene, but after it is a fayre blew, as you sée it when it commeth hether, and the cleaner it is from earth and dust, the better it is to proue if it be good: they burne it with a candle, and if then it fall out like fine meale, it is good; but if it be grosse like sande, it is not good: also being throwne into the wa¦ter if it swimmeth it is good, but if it sinke it is not good: this Annil was more accounted of▪ and commonly more worth then Cloues both in India and in Portingall: the King not long since hath farmed it out, so that no man may buy it in India, nor bring it into Portingall but onely the Farmers, as they do with Pepper.

Annil or Nil, as the learned Doctor Camerarius witnesseth,* 1.59 which hath had some of the plantes within his garden, hath sky••coloured leaues, being like to the leaues of the Hearbe which in La∣tine is called Barba Iouis, in Dutch Donder baert, but somewhat bro••¦der.

The 70. Chapter. Of Amber, Muske, Algallia or Ciuet.

AMber by some men is thought to be the fome of a Whale fishe: others thinke it to bee the filth and dung of the Whale, and others a certain kind of Betumen, which flo¦weth out of a well that standeth on the sea side, and casteth y^e Amber vp, but it is to bee thought, that it is neyther of the first two, for if it were, men shoulde continually finde Amber in these Countries, spocially on the coast of Biscay, where so ma¦ny Whales are taken, yet is the••e no Am¦ber found in that place: it were rather to bee beléeued that it is a Betumen or pitch▪ procee∣ding out of some fountaine or Well▪ or some thing that floweth from the bottome of the Sea, & so driueth vpon the water because it is found in some places, and in some places not: where it is most found, and from whence it dayly commeth is from the coast of So••la, Mosambique, and on the coast of Me••de or Abe••: It is likewise sometimes found by the Islandes of Ma••diua, and the c••pe de Comorijn, but not much, and not so com∣monly as by So••la and Mosambique. There are others that thinke it to be a spun¦gie earth, of some vnknowne Island, drought or hiddē cliffes, and by force of the sea in time broken off by peeces, and cast vpon the shore▪

like driftes or such like thinges, for it is often times found floating and driuing in peeces of ten or twelue, and some of fifty or sixtie pannes broad. They say that in India there hath bin found whole Islandes of Amber, which being well marked by those that found and discouered them, whereby to come the∣ther againe and lade thereof, when they came to the same place they could not finde them. In Anno 1555.* 1.60 there was a péece found not far from the cape de Como••iin that weigh∣ed 30. quintales, and he that found it, thought it to be pitch, whereupon he sold it for a small price, but afterwardes being knowne, it was greatly esteemed: likewise oftentimes there commeth Amber that is mingled with shels, and all spotted with the dung of Sea foules, that sit theron. There is Amber of a gray co∣lour, with whitish vaines, that is the best: & it is called Amber Griis. There is a kinde of Amber which is perfect blacke, but not so much esteemed as the gray, to prooue if the Amber be good they thrust pinnes into it and that which yeeldeth most oyle is the best. It is much vsed among the Indian Noble men, and kinges in their daylie meates, they vse it likewise much to prouoke lust, and to increase nature, thereby to bee the more apt for the same, as also in many faire workes with muske, Ciuet, Bemoin, and other sweete thinges mixed together, whereof they make fine apples and peares wrought about with siluer & gold, which they beare in their hands to smell vppon, and in haftes of kniues, han∣dles of pomyards, and such like, which they make of siluer, and Amber within thē, which in diuers places shineth through them. These and such like workes are very common in India among the rich and mightie men of the countrie, as well Indians as Portingales.

* 1.61Ambarium in Latine, Ambar in Ara∣bia, is a kind of pitch, as the Author ve∣ry well affirmeth, cast vp out of some fountaine that standeth in the bottome of the sea, which being set in the Sunne doth presently become hard like other thinges that are also taken out of the sea, as Corall, &c. This Ambar by rea∣son of the sweet & pleasant smell, doth comfort the head and the heart, and by the drynes thereof, it draweth away & consumeth all watery humors out of the stomacke, and good against all fil∣thie and foulenesse in a mans body. It cureth such as haue the falling sicknes. It is good against the rising of the Mo∣ther, being receiued in and thrust vp in∣to the body: to conclude it is good for all old men, and for euery cold com∣plection.

The Almisca••, Mosseliat▪ or Muskcat cō∣meth from China: They are beastes like Fores, or little Dogs, which being killed, and beaten and brused, they let them lie and rot, blood and flesh together: which done they cut them in péeces both skinne, flesh and blood, all mixed togeather, and therof make diuers pur∣ses, which they sowe in a round forme, and are in that sort caried abroad & sold to diuers men. Those purses are cōmonly of an ounce waight the péece, and by the Portingales are called Papos, but the right Papos, and per∣fect Mosseliat is the ballockes or stones of that beast: the others although they passe a∣mong them for Mosseliat, are not so good as the stones: therefore the Chinars, who in all thinges are very subtill, and fine workemen, make the purses cleane round, like the stones of the beaste, therewith to deceiue the people, and so the sooner to procure them to buy it. This beast hath a very strange nature, and great vnderstanding, for when it is chased, and perceiueth it selfe not able anie longer to continue in breath, it taketh the stones betwéene the téeth and biteth them off, and so casteth them away, as if it would say, if you come for them there they are, & while the huntsman is busie to looke for them, shee oftentimes escapeth away and saueth her life. The Chinaes are very deceitfull in selling of Mosseliat or Muske, for they falsifie it verie much, sometimes with Oxen and Cowes li∣uers, dried and beaten to powder, and so mix∣ed with the Mosseliat, as it is dayly found by experience in searching of it. When the Mos∣seliat beginneth to decay and looseth the smel, they take it out of the purse and beate it verie small in a morter, and that done being moist∣ned with the vrine of a childe, and so put into an earthen pot that is leaded and cloase stop∣ped, it will presently be good againe, if there were any goodnes or strength left within it.

Some are of opinion, that muske grow∣eth at certaine times of the yeare about the nauell of a certaine beast, as if it were swolne. The pale yellow is the best, it strengtheneth the trembling cold hart, & all diseases of the same, beeing drunke or swallowed. It cleanseth the white spots of the eyes, it dryeth moist catharres, it com∣forteth the head, & healeth the old aches thereof, proceeding of sleame.

Algalia or Ciuet is much found in India, that is to say in Bengala, but because they cā∣not leaue their villanie & falsifying thereof, it is not so much estéemed, by reason they mixe¦ted,

but the best Ciuet commeth from Myna in the coast of Guynea, which is very faire and good. It is the sweat that proceedeth frō the Cats called Ciuet Cats, which are many times brought ouer aliue, both into Spaine, and also to these countries, but because it is so sufficiently knowne vnto vs, I will leaue to speake thereof, and proceede to other spices, hearbes, and drugges of India.

Ciue•• groweth in the outermost part of the coddes of a certaine beast, which therof hath her name,* 1.62 & is called a Mus∣cat, and as Hughin very well saith, is the sweat that groweth or ingendreth in the hinder part of the beast, and is hotte and moist, being laid vpon a womans nauill, it healeth the rising of the mother, and ma∣keth women apt to leacherie.

The 71. Chapter. Of Beniom.

BEnioin is a kinde of stuffe, like Frankemsence & Mir, but more estéemed, for it serueth for manie medi∣cines and other thinges.

Benioin by reason of the sweet smell, com∣forteth the heart,* 1.63 the head, and the braine, it clenseth the head from all superfluous humors, sharpneth the wit beeing smelled vnto, it is good to be vsed when diseases begin to goe away.

As when they make balles or péeces of Amber, and Muske, they must alwaies haue Benioin with it to make it perfect, it grow∣eth much in the kingdome of Syan in the I∣land of Sumatra, in the Islands of Iauas, & the countrie of Malacca, they are high trées full of branches, with leaues like lemmon trée leaues, with a thicke & high stemme or stock in the middle, from whence procéedeth the Gumme, which is the Benioin. When the tree is young, then it yéeldeth the best Beni∣oin, which is blackish of colour, and of a very sweet smell, and is called Benioin, de Boni∣nas, that is to say, Benioin of the Flowers, because of the perfect smell. The second Ben∣ioin is called Benioin Amendoado, that is Benioin of Almondes, because it is mix∣ed with peeces of white Benioin among the blacke▪ like to Almondes that are cut in peeces. This Benioin is not so good, because the white Benioin is of the old trees, and is not so strong nor of so good a smell as the blacke, but is mixed with the blacke, because it should be sold the better. These two sortes of Benioin are the best, and much vsed and caried into Arabia, Persia, the land of Balla∣gate, China, and other places, as also into Portingal. Most part of this Benioin grow∣eth in the country of Sion, and by Ma••a••, there is other Benioin which is worse, and groweth in the Ilandes of Sumatra, and Ia∣uas. The inhabitants of the countries where it groweth call it C••mingion, the Mores, and Arabians call it Louaniany (which is as much to say as frankensence of Iaua.) The Decaniins and Ballagaters call it Vdo, they cut the trée and branches full of slits, to make the Benioin the better to come foorth, it is much trafficqued withall throughout India, for it is one of the co••••liest drugges in all the Orient, because it excelleth all other in sweet∣nes.

The 72. Chapter▪ Of Frankensence and Mirre.

FRankinsence groweth in Arabia, and is called Lo∣uan, and by Auicenna Conder: it is the gumme that floweth out of the bo∣dies of the trées, like Be∣nioin: the best Frankin∣sence groweth vpon the trées that stande on hilles, and stony rockes, and stony places: for those which growe in the fieldes and in flat grounds yeeld not so good Frankinsence: they haue so great quantitie of it, that oftentimes they marke their shéepe withall, as if it were Pitch, Tarre, or Rosin: from thence it is carried into India, China▪ and other places in great abundance, and very good cheape.

Frankinsence is of two sorts, one white,* 1.64 that is round and like vnto drops, which is the best, and called the ma••le: the other blacke, which is not much worth but only in smell. In India and with vs they vse Frankinsence against the loosenes of the bellie, sickenesses of the head, Cata••rlies, surfeits, and pa••br••king, & is good for such as spit blood, it filleth vp ho••••ow swelling•• & healeth fre••h and bloody wounds.

Mirre by the Indians is called Bola, it groweth in the same that Benioin and fran∣kinsence doth, and commeth also out of Ara∣bia F••lix, but most out of the countrie of A∣bexin from the inward parts of the countrie, lying betweene Mosambique, and the red sea, which is called Prester Iohns land, and from thence brought into India. and other places.

Mirre is vsed in medicines,* 1.65 to d•• downe the Flowers and the fruite of wo∣men, also for old coug••es, for laskes, & for bloody Flixes.

The 73. Chapter. Of Manna and Rubarbe.

MAnna commeth out of Ara∣bia, and Persia, but most out of the Prouince of Vsbeke, lying behind Persia in Tarta∣ria: the Manna y^t is brought from thence in glasse Vsalies is in péeces as bigge as preserued Almonds, but of another fashion, and haue no other speciall forme, but like broken péeces: it is whitish, and of taste almost like Sugar, but somewhat fulsome, sweetish like Hony: the Persians cal it Xer∣cast, and Xerkest, that is to say, milke of trees, for it is the dew y^t falleth vpon the trées, and remayneth hanging vpon the leaues, like water that is frozen and hangeth in drops at gutters and pentises: It is also gathered and kept in glasse Vials, and so brought into In∣dia, and other Countries, for in India they vse it much in all sorts of purgations. There is another sorte of Manna called Tiriamia∣biin or Trumgibiin, which they gather frō other leaues and hearbes: that commeth in small peeces as big as Hempeséed, and some∣what bigger, which is red & of a reddish co∣lour. Some thinke this Manna groweth on the bodies of the trées as Gumme doth: it is much vsed in Ormus and Persia for purgati∣ons, but not in India so much as the first sort, there is yet another sorte, which commeth in great peeces, with the leaues among it: it is like the Manna of Calabria, this is brought out of Persia vnto Bassora, and so to Ormus, and from thence into India, and is the dearest of all the rest. There commeth also a Man∣na that is brought in leather bags, or flasks, which in Turkey and Persia they vse to ride withall, & is melted like Hony, but of a white colour, and in taste like the other sortes of Manna, being altogether vsed for purgati∣ons, and other medicines.

* 1.66Manna very gently purgeth the gall: it easeth and moystneth the harshnes of the throat, the breastes and the stomacke: it quencheth the thirst: but because it pur∣geth but weakely, it is strengthened with Tyme or Isop mingled with some strong purgations, & maketh them to effect their operations with more perfection and po∣wer, by meanes of the sweetnesse thereof, which is apter and more plyable vnto na∣ture

But because it is no special marchandise, I will speake no more thereof, but for that wee are nowe in hande with medicines to purge, I wil say some thing of the roote called Rhuba••be, although there is no certaintie how or in what sort it groweth yet it is most certaine, y^t it is not to be found in any coūtry but in China, and in the farthest parts therof, it is most brought by land through the Pro∣uince of Vsbeke, whereof I spake before: which Prouince lyeth in Tartaria, and bor∣dereth on the one side vpon China, and so reacheth behinde India vnto Persia. Out of this Prouince it cometh vnto Ormus, and from thence into India: yet it is likewise brought by water, but because it is not so good, and doth sooner rot and spoyle by water then by land, therefore most part of it is brought by land. That which is most estee∣med & best sold, and greatliest desired, cometh in this manner, that is, first from China, through Vsbeke, and so through Turkie, from whence it is caryed to Venice, & from thence into all these countries, so that the Rhubarbe of Venice is better, because it cometh ouer land, then that which is brought into Portingall, because it cometh by water, as also all thinges and herbes that belong to Physicke, because they are better preserued by land then by water, they are little brought by sea, but it is a marchandise that is most caryed by land vnto Venice, as also because the Portingales deale not much therein, and are little giuen to curiosities, contēting them∣selues to deale with such wares as are com∣monlie knowne to all men, without seeking further, for they trouble not themselues with other things.

The 74. Chapter. Of the wood called Sanders.

THere are 3. sorts of San∣ders, that is, white, yelow and red: the white and the yealow, which is the best, come most out of the Ilād of Tymor, which lyeth by Iaua. This Iland hath whole woods and wildernesses of Sanders, both of white and yealow, and frō thēce it is caryed throughout all India, and other coū∣tries, and trafficke much therewith: the red Sanders groweth most in the coast of Cho∣ramandel and Tanassariin, which is in the countrie of Pegu: the trees of Sanders are like Nut trees and haue a certaine fruite v∣pon them like Cheries, at the first green, and after black, but of no taste nor any thing worth, for it presently falleth off, onlie y^e wood of y^e trée is accounted of, which is the Sāders. It is called by the Inhabitants of the coun∣trie

where it groweth Chandanacon, the Decannus, Gusurates, Canariins, and o∣ther Indians cal it Sercandaa: the Arabians and Persians Sandal, wherevpon the Por∣tingalles likewise doe call it Sandalo. The yellow and white Sanders is much vsed and spent ouer all India, by all the inhabitantes, both Indians, Moors, Heathens, and Iewes, whatsoeuer: they beate it or stampe it in wa∣ter, till it be as soft as pappe, that done they besmere themselues therewith, and let it drie vpon their bodies, for it cooleth very much, & also because all the Indians doe much delight in sweet smelling sauours.

The white & yellow or bleakish San∣ders is likewise vsed by vs,* 1.67 with Rose∣water, against the hotte paines in the head, annointing it therewith: all those woods as well the red as the white and yellow, are good against hotte feauers, being beaten and drunken into the bo∣dy, they help the hot stomacke, as also laid vpon the stomacke with Rose wa∣ter, in burning feauers. This Sanders is not onely good for the purposes a∣foresaid, but also for strengthening the hart, and therefore with great vse it is put into Cordiall medicines, & such as are made against the beating of the hart.

The red Sanders is little spent in India, but they vse it onely against hot agues, an∣nointing their pulses therewith, as also the temples, & their foreheads, but it is much ••∣ryed into other countries, as being very me∣dicinable for many thinges, and the Indians make their Pagodes and Idoles thereof, be∣cause they should be the costlier.

The ••5. Chapter. Of Palo de Cebra or Snake-wood.

SNakewood is most in the I∣sland of Seylon: it is a lowe Trée: the roote thereof being the Snake-woode is of colour white, shewing somewhat yellowe, very harde and bitter in taste, it is much vsed in India: they stampe and bruse it like Sanders, in water or Wine, and so drinke it, it is very good & well proued against all burning feauers: one ounce thereof brui∣sed and mixed with water is good against all poison and sicknes, as the collick, worms, and all filthie humors and coldnes in the body▪ and specially against the stinging of Snakes, whereof it hath the name: it was first found by means of a little beast called Q••il, or Quirpele, which is of bignesse very like a Ferret (wherewith in those Countries they vse to driue Cunnies out of their holes, and so ketch them whereof in India they haue ma¦ny in their houses, which they play withall to passe the time away, as also to kill their Myce and Rattes, and to driue them away. This beast by nature is a great enemie to the Snake, so that wheresoeuer she findeth any, she fighteth with them: and because it is often bitten by the Snake, it knoweth how to heale it selfe with this Snake-woode, (whereof there is much in Seylon, where al∣so are many of those beastes, and great store of Snakes) so that if it be neuer so sore bitten, hauing eaten of this wood, it is presently hea∣led, as if it had neuer béene hurt. By this means the inhabitants haue found it out & be∣gun to make account of it, & since that time it is proued and found to be good for many ••isea¦ses as aforesaid: wherefore nowe it is much traffiqued withall, and carryed into all coun∣tries, as also into Portingall, & from thence hether.

Garcius ab horto writeth of three sorts of this wood,* 1.68 whereof you may there reade two of these sortes of Snake-wood I haue in my house to be shew∣en, one is that which Iohn Hughen wri∣teth to bee the root of a tree, white and bitter of taste, with a rough Ash colou∣•• barke: the other was sent me ••u•• 〈…〉〈…〉, from the learned Doctor Si∣mon 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Tonar, which is as thicke as a ma•• ar••e, with a barke besprinckled & spotted like a Snake, which inward∣lie is white, and bitter of taste

The 76 Chapter. Of the wood Caiamba or ••num Aloes.

THe ••ignū Aloes which in India is called Calam∣ba and Palo D••guilla, is most in Malacca, in the Islande of Sumatra Camboia, Sion, and the Countries bordering on the same: the trees are like Oliue trees, and somewhat greater▪ when it is cut off, it smelleth not so well, be∣cause it is gréene, for the dryer it is, the bet∣ter it smelleth: the best and that which smel∣leth most, is the innermost part of the wood: some of it is better then the rest, which the

Indians doe presently knowe howe to finde out: the best and finest is called Calamba, and y^e other Palo Daguilla. Now to know which is the best, you must vnderstand that the wood that is very heauie with black and brown veynes, and which yéeldeth much Oyle or moystnesse (which is founde by the fire) is the best, and the greater and thicker that it is, the better it is and hath the more vertue. Of this wood they make many cost∣ly thinges, and it hath a speciall and precious smell, so that it is greatly estéemed: specially the Calamba, which if it be good, is solde by weight against siluer and gold. The Palo Daguilla next after the Calamba is much accounted of. There is another kind of Pa∣lo Daguilla, which is called Aquilla Braua or wild Aquilla, and is also much esteemed: for the Indians vse it therewith to burne the bodies of their Bramenes, and other men of account, when they are dead: and because it is costly, therefore it is a great honour to those that are burnt therewith, as it is to those that with vs are buried in Tombes of marble stones: but it is not comparable to the other Palo Daguilla, nor the Calamba. The wilde Aguilla groweth most in the I∣sland of Seylon, and on the coast of Chora∣mandel, and the best Palo Daguilla, and Calamba groweth in Malacca. These cost∣ly woods are much vsed in India for Beades, and Crucifixes, which are holden in great reuerence, and in truth is very much to be e∣steemed, for without all doubt it hath an ex∣cellent smel, which surpasseth all other woods, and the like can not bee founde but onely in the soresaide places from whence it com∣meth.

Lignum Aloes, Agallochum, Xylo, alias Paradise-woode,* 1.69 by the Arabians called Agalugen and Haud, by the inhabi∣tantes of Gusurate and Decan, Vd in Ma∣lacca, Garro, and the best Calamba. Of this wood I haue many sortes, all very pleasant of smell, speckled with veines and full of moysture, and withall close and very heauie: this wood being ta∣ken inwardly, is good for a stinking breath: it is also very good against a watrish and moyst stomacke, which can receyue no meate, but casteth it forth: it is also good for one that hath a weake liuer, that is sick of the red Meli∣son, or of the Plurisie.

The 77. Chapter. Of the root China.

THe root China came in∣to India, and was there first knowne in Anno 1535.* 1.70 for before that time they knewe it not, for that as then they cu∣red the Pore, which in India is a common disease) with the woode called Guaiacum, that is brought out of the Spanish Indies, and was at that time in a manner weyghed against Gold: and as the land of China, is much subiect to the disease of the Pore, it seemeth that God hath giuen them this roote to cure and help the same, and since it was knowne and found out in India, they would neuer vse any other remedy, be∣cause there is great store of it, and the best in all the world, wherby men in those countries doe not once make any account of the Poxe, or feare the healing therof, for that it is more easilier healed then any other disease: also it is no shame with them, although they haue had it at y^e least 3, or 4. times: this root is now with them in so great abundance, and com∣mon vse, that it is very good cheape, for that it is not worth at the most aboue halfe a Par∣daw the pound, which in Portingall money is a Teston and a halfe. The sicke persons do vse it in this manner following, they take of the root▪ & cut it in smalll peeces or slyces, the wayght of an ounce, which they seeth in foure pottes or quartes of water, letting it séeth till it be halfe consumed, whereof they séeth fresh euery day: this water they must drink alone, & eat bisket with nothing els but smal rosted Chickens, without any Butter, suet, salt, or any other sauce, but onely drie with the Bis∣ket, and this must bee their dinner, at night some Reasons, and tosted breade with Hony and nothing els▪ euery day twice they must lie on their beddes wel couered to make them sweat, euery time an hower, or an hower and a halfe which they must continue for the space of thirtie dayes, alwaies kéeping themselues out of the ayre, and from the wind, and lap∣ping their heads and their eares very close, staying continually within the house, and a∣boue all thinges abstayning from the carnall company of women. These pointes afore∣said being obserued, without all doubt they shall find great profite: and if the roote doth worke within them, they shall know it by this meanes, for that the paine in their lims, and specially in their ioyntes, will grieue them more and more, which is a good signe

that it worketh in their bodies, and thorough∣ly searcheth the same, and this paine will still increase for the space of 15. or 20. dayes, yea and sometimes vntill 25. dayes, and there∣fore he that will vse it must not dispaire, for without faile it wil be so as I haue said, with∣in a day two, or thrée more or lesse. The 25. dayes at the furthest being passed, then their paine will begin to deminish, with so great a lightnes and ease, that within the other fiue dayes, whereby the 30. dayes will bee accom∣plished, the whole paine will be gone, so that the body and all the members will be as fresh and liuely as if they neuer had béene sicke ha∣uing vsed this rule aforesaid. And although the roote China being sodden in the water, cau∣seth a great appetite and a hungry stomacke, neuerthelesse they must in any sorte beware that they eate but little, and with measure, & that according to the rule prescribed: for if they break it but one day, nay but one houre, all their labour were lost, and so they must be forced to begin their diet again. It must like∣wise bee vnderstood that the older▪ and longer of continuance the pockes are, so much the sooner will the roote heale them, as also the ol∣der the persons to be healed are of yeares, be∣cause that then the humors are not so ripe as in young yeares. When the 3•• dayes are expired, they must beware of drinking other drinke, and to that end they must keepe the peeces and slices that were cut and sodden as before, euery ounce by it selfe, and therof take euery day a heape of the same roote so sodden, and seeth them againe in a pot with as much water as they shall need to drinke: but this seething need not to be done as the first seeth∣ing, with consumption of the water, but only let it seeth vp once and no more. This water must they drinke in this sorte for the space of 2••. or 30. dayes more, and beware of fish, or any goose or heauie meates, as Oxe, Cow, or Hogges flesh, and such like, as also they must keepe themselues from much aire or winde, whereby their bodies beeing healed may re∣turne to their perfect healthes againe, and af∣ter these twenty or thirty dayes are full expi¦red, then they must begin to vse all kinde of meates and drinkes, although when the first thirtie dayes are out, they may well goe a∣broad, so they bee carefull of themselues, and they shall not neede to sweate any more after the said first thirty dayes: also it must bee re¦membred, that such as meane to take this di∣et, for their healthes, it will bee good before they vse it, to take a good purgation, & when the first fifteene dayes are out, then take a second, and so at the end of the thirtie day an•• other, whereby it will worke with more effect, and with Gods help they shall be as lustie and sound as euer they were, as it hath beene prooued by many thousandes in India. This roote is not onely good for the Pockes and Piles, but also for crampes and palsies, and all cold diseases, as for lumites that are stiffe and benummed with cold, for the Gout: for the Emperour Charles the fift himselfe did vse the same, and found that it did him good: But it must bee vnderstood that it is not good to vse it at all times of the yeare, for in the dogge dayes, and also in Summer, by reason of the heat it is not good, neyther in winter because of the cold, but it is best to be vsed in Lent and Haruest time: for then it is most temperate weather, yet alwaies with the counsell of the learned Phisition, the bet∣ter to know the disposition, complection, in∣clination and age of the persons, together with the time of the yeare, the situation and climate of the countrie. The manner of hea∣ling aforesaid is as it is vsed in India: but in China which is a colder countrey, and almost vnder the same degrees that these Countries are vnder, they vse to seeth the water stron¦ger, for there they put 2, ounces or an ounce and a halfe of the wood into so much water, and let it seeth vntill the water be two partes consumed, which in India will not bee borne because of the great heate. It is likewise to be vnderstood, that the person and the disease of the person must be well considered: for that if the sicknes bee not very great, they must take lesse roote, and let lesse water consume in the seething, the younger persons also must haue stronger drinke then old ••olkes, because they haue more humors in their bodies: And yee must consider, that hee which will take or vse this roote, or the water thereof not beeing sicke, it will waste and consume his flesh and good blood, and doe himselfe great hurt, wher∣fore good counsell and aduise must alwaies be taken before it be vsed, and also i•• it bee taken too hotte, and too much, it burneth both the li∣uer and the lunges, and will fill the body full of pyles, scurffe, and ma••g••es, with other such like diseases, whereby a man shall haue worke enough to driue those new diseases out of his body, and fall out of one sicknes into a∣nother, & rather become worse then hee was at the first. This I thought good in briefe to shew you thereby to teach such as knowe it not, the true vse of his roote if it bee done in time, & when neede requireth: for that ma∣ny doe spende their wealthes, and which is more, are all their liues long out of hope for e••er to recouer their healthes againe, vpon a disease, which with so little cost, is so easilie to be cured. The summe of the foresaid water is likewise good against all scabbes and swel∣linges of the said M•• Neapo••, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, or y^e

French pockes, the best rootes are the black∣est, with few knots and white within: for the reddish are not so good, the wood or trée wher∣of it groweth is like a Haw-thorne, straight, and about three or foure spannes high, & the roote thereof is called the wood of China, or Pockewood, when they are gréene they eate them raw, and being sodden they taste almost like suger canes but not so sweet. The tree hath but few leaues, but they are almost like the leaues of a young Orange tree. These plants or trees in China are called Lampa∣ton, as the Chinos themselues doe say. This shall suffice for this root of China so called be∣cause it is found in no place but in China, what is more to be said of it, I leaue vnto the learned Phisitions, & others that deale with∣all, and haue better experience thereof.

* 1.71The roote of China is commonlie vsed among the Egyptians, not onelie for the pockes, but for many other dis∣eases, specially for a consumption, for the which they seeth the roote China in broth of a henne or cocke, whereby they become whole and faire of face.

This roote drieth much and cooleth sweate, it resisteth euill humors, and strengthneth the liuer, it healeth wate∣ry and filthie Vlcers, and scurffes & Le∣prie. Is is good for a man that hath the pockes, and for those that are dried vp, and medicinable against a hard and a great milt.

The 78. Chapter. Of Amsion alias Opium.

AMsion, so called by the Portingales, is by the A∣rabians, Mores, and In∣dians called Affion, in la∣tine Opio or opium: It commeth out of Cairo in Egypt, and out of Aden, vpon the coast of Arabia, which is the point of the land, entring into the red Sea, some∣times belonging to the Portingales, but most part out of Cambaia, & from Decan, that of Ca••o is whitish, and is called Mece∣••, that of Aden and the places bordering vp∣on the mouth of the red sea, is blackish & hard. That which commeth from Cambaia and Decan is softer and reddish. Amfion is made of sleepe balles or Poppie, and is the gumme which commeth forth of the same, to y^e which end it is cut vp and opened. The Indians vse much to eat Amsion, specially the Mala∣bares, and thether it is brought by those of Cambaia and other places, in great aboun∣dance. Hee that vseth to eate it, must eate it daylie, otherwise he dieth and consumeth him∣selfe, when they begin to eate it, and are vsed vnto it, they heate at the least twenty or thir∣ty graines in waight euerie day, sometimes more: but if for foure or fiue dayes hee chan∣ceth to leaue it, he dieth without faile: likewise he that hath neuer eaten it, and will venture at the first to eate as much as those that day∣ly vse it, it will surely kill him: for I certaine∣ly beleeue it is a kinde of poyson. Such as vse it goe alwaies as if they were halfe a sleepe, they eate much of it because they would not feele any great labour or vnquietnes when they are at worke, but they vse it most for le∣cherie: for it maketh a man to hold his féede long before he sheddeth it, which the Indian women much desire, that they may shed their nature likewise with the man: although such as eate much thereof, are in time altogether vnable to company with a woman, & whollie dried vp, for it drieth and wholly cooleth mans nature that vseth it, as the Indians them∣selues doe witnes: wherefore it is not much vsed by the Nobilitie, but onely for the cause aforesaid.

Opium is the iuice of blacke Poppie,* 1.72 and is of two sortes, one sweet beeing pressed out of the leaues and heads to∣gether, which the Greekes call Meco∣nium: the other floweth or commeth out of the heads being cut, which is the right Opium. That which is heauy, close, fast and bitter in taste, that which with the smell of it prouoketh sleepe, & that which easily melteth in the water and is soft, white, and without grossenes or kernels, is the best Opium, and is by the Turkes called Maslac. They eate there∣of daylie the quantitie of a pease, not thereby to prouoke sleepe, but to giue them courage, specially when they goe to war, thinking that thereby they are made more couragious, and that when they sleepe they dreame that they see many pleasant places, and are in com∣pany of diuers goodly womē: althogh it is commonly seene, that such is dayly vse Opium, are very still and sleepie, and very slow both in wordes and workes, so that men know not how to deale with them.

The 79. Chapter. Of Bangue

BAngue is also a common meate in India, seruing to the same effect that Amsion doth. It is a séed like Hemp∣séede, but somwhat smaller, and not so white. Also the thing whereon it groweth is like Hempe, but it hath no substance wherof to make any thing. The Indians eate this séede or the leaues thereof being stamped, saying, that it maketh a good appetite, but vseth most to pro∣uoke lust, as it is commonly vsed and sold in the shops, it is mingled with some poulder of the leaues and the séede together: They like∣wise put gréene Arecca vnto it, therewith to make a man drunke, or in a manner out of his wits: Sometimes also they mixe it with Nutmegs and Mace, which doth also make a man drunke: Others (that is to saye, the rich and welthy persons) mix it with Cloues, Camphora, Ambar, Muske, and Opium, which (as the Moores likewise affirme) ma∣keth a man pleasant, and forgetting himselfe, performing all kind of labour and toyle with∣out once thinking of any paine: but onely laughing, playing, and sleeping quietly. The common women or whores vse it when they meane to haue a mans companie, thereby to be liuely and merrie, and to set all care aside. It was first inuented by Captaines and soul∣diers, when they had layne long in the field, continually waking and with great trauell, which they desiring to remedie, and againe to comfort themselues, thereby to settle their braines doe vse Bangue, in such manner as is aforesaid. It causeth such as eate it, to réele and looke as if they were drunke, and halfe foolish, doing nothing but laugh and bee mer∣rie, as long as it worketh in their bodies. It is verie much vsed by the Indians, and like∣wise by some Portingales, but most by the slaues thereby to forget their labour: to con∣clude it is a certaine small comfort to a me∣lancholy person.

* 1.73Bangue is likewise much vsed in Tur∣kie and Aegypt, and is made in three sorts, hauing also three seuerall names The first by the Aegyptians is called Assis, which is the poulder of Hemp, or of Hemp leaues, which water made in paste or dough, wherof they eate fiue peeces, each as bigge as a Chesnut and some more, such as eate it, for an how∣er after, are as if they were drunke, with∣out sence, and as it were besides them∣selues, thinking they see many strange sights, wherein they are much pleased. This is vsed by the common people, because it is of a small price, and it is no wonder, that such vertue proceedeth from the Hempe, for that according to Galens opinion, Hempe excessiuely fil∣leth the head. The second they name Bosa, which is stronger then Assis: It is made of the meale of Lolium, by vs cal∣led Dronkaydes weede or Hearbe, and of Hempseede with water as aforesaid▪ others presse out the iuice, and eat that. The thirde is called Bernaui, which is the right Bangue, which they haue rea∣die dressed out of India (as Hughen wri∣teth) wherof they take about an ounce, & at the first are merie, talking much & singing plesant songs, laughing without measure, and vsing many foolish toyes▪ which continueth with them almost an hower. After that they are in a man∣ner furious, giuen to chiding and figh∣ting, which continueth likewise a little space, that done they are possessed with heauinesse, and a certaine kind of feare, that many times they crie out. In the end whē they haue played al these parts they fall in a sleepe, and being awaked, they are as they were at the first. This is much vsed by foolish Iesters or Iuglers at feasts and banquets, to delight them. The Aegyptians vse also an other sorte called Bers, that is to say, health for an hower. It is made of white Pepper, white Bilzen seede, of each fiue oun∣ces, and of Opium two ounces and a halfe, Spica Nardi, Euphorbium, Ber∣tram, of each one Mitchell, Saffran, fifteene Scruples, all beaten in a Marble morter, and mixed with Honnie wher∣of they make a confection.

The 80. Chapter. Of Camphora.

THere are two sortes of Camphora, one of Bor∣neo (which is the best,) the other of China or Chincheu, which is no∣thing so good: it grow∣eth on trées as great as Nutte trées, and is the gumme which is within the middle of the tree, and by sweating and dropping com∣meth out from the same. This Camphora of Borneo, is likewise in the Iland of Sumatra, and Sunda, as also in some other places there abouts. It is of bignesse like a seede called in Portingall M••lho, and with vs Barley, of colour whitish. It is of foure sorts, whereun∣to the Indians vse certaine Siues with holes purposely made in them: the first hauing smal holes, and that which passeth through them, is the worst, the next following it is some∣what greater, and so forth after that rate, as it is said before of Pearles, and so it is prised accordingly. It commeth sometimes all spot∣ted, with some filth or foulenesse, which the Bamaners of Cambaia know well how to wash away with water, Sope, and the iuice of Lemons: which done, they set it to drie in some shadow place, wherby it is whiter then it was at the first, and keepeth the former waight. It is likewise falsified with other Gum or poulder of other rootes, as the Indi∣ans can well handle all their wares. This is the right and true Camphora of Borneo, yet I belieue there commeth verie little of it into these countries: but the Camphora of Chy∣na, which commeth from Chincheu, is in great aboundance, and is brought in cakes or balles, and is much carried into al places, and verie good cheape. For one pound of Borneo is worth a hundred pound of Chincheu, al∣though the Champhora of Chincheu is mix¦ed with Champhora of Borneo, and they know how to giue it a colour, in such sorte that it is both taken and vsed for good, and because it is so much vsed in medicines, I haue particularly set it downe, in this place, as al∣so because it is one of the principallest wares in India.

The 81. Chapter. Of Tamarinio.

TAmarinio groweth in the most parts of all India, speciallie in the land of Gus••ate and the North parts beyond Goa: the Ma∣labares call it Pulu: the Gusurates and the other Indians cal it An∣bilii: the Arabians, Tamarindii, because Tamaras in Arabia, are the same that with vs we cal Dates, and because they know not what to liken Tamarinio vnto, better then vnto Dates, therefore they call it Tamarin∣di, y^t is▪ Tamaras or Dates of India, where∣vpon the Portingales cal it also Tamarinio, and the Dates which are in great abundance brought out of Persia & Arabia into India: they name them after the Arabians, Tama∣ras. The trees of Tamarinio are almost like vnto Chesnuts, or other nut trees, the branches being full of leaues, with a close & strong wood: the fruite of the Tamarinio is a∣bout a finger long, bowing or crooked, hauing greene shelles, or pilles without, and béeing drie are grayish, hauing within certaine ker∣nels of the greatnes of a Beane, which are couered about with that which they call Ta∣marinio: it sticketh to mens hands (for it is like lime) & therewith they prepare all their compositions throughout India, for it hath a sowrish and sharp taste, and is the best sauce in all India, like vergis with vs, and they ne∣uer sieth Rice but they put Tamarinio into it, wherewith their composition called Cariil is made, as in many places it is alreadie de∣clared: yet those that see it drest will haue no great desire to eate it, for they crush it through their fingers, whereby it sheweth like rotten Medlers: yet it giueth the Rice & the meate a fine sharp taste. Tamarinio is likewise proued to be a very good purgation, for the poore that are of smal habilitie, and are not able to be at charges of Rhabarbo, Mann••, and such like costlie Apothecaries ware, doe onlie vse Tamarinio pressed out into a little water, which water being drunk fasting in a morning, is the best purgation in the world, which is to be done when the Ta∣marinio is ripe or when it is greene: it is vsed likewise in dressing meate, to put in among their flesh in steed of Vineger, for it is much sowrer then Vineger, much like gréen goose∣berries or grapes: the Physitians vse it in purgations & medecines cōpoūded with other

herbes and spices, and it worketh well: it is likewise salted to send for Portingal, Arabia, Persia, & other places, yet the Indians kéepe it in their houses, in the huskes, as it com∣meth from the tree, and it hāgeth on the trées like sheathes of kniues, but that they are somewhat bowed, as I said before: there is likewise sugar cōserues made therof, which is verie good. The nature of this tree is to be wondered at, for that the Tamarini••, that is to say, the long crooked huske wherein it is, in the night time shrinketh it self vp vnder the leaues, to couer it from the cold of the night, and in the day time it vncouereth it self again all naked and outright, as I haue often séene and beheld it: when it is caryed abroad or sold, it is out of the shelles or huskes, and bée∣ing put together they make balles thereof, as bigge as a mans fist, but it is clammie and sticketh together. It is not very pleasant to looke on, nor yet to handle, but verie good cheap throughout all India, by reason of the great quanttitie thereof.

Tamarinde, is by the Aegyptians cal∣led Derelside. The tree wheron it grow∣eth,* 1.74 is as great as a Plumme tree, with thicke branches, and leaues like a Mir∣tle: The flowers white like Orange flowers, from the middle whereof do proceede fower white thinne threeds, which growe out of the huske, where∣in the seede and the pith is, which wee call Tamarindi. The leaues of the tree doe alwaies turne towards the Sunne, and when it goeth downe, they shut together and couer the huske in the night time. At Alcayro in their gardens I saw some of these trees, and one by Saint Macarius Cloyster in the wilder∣nesse, where no other Hearbs nor trees doe grow. The Turkes and Egyptians vse this Tamarinde, much in hotte dis∣eases and Feauers: they put it into faire water, and so drinke it. I healed my selfe therewith of a pestilent Feuer, being in Siria. It is a common Medecine among them, which as they trauel through the drie woods and wildernesse, they doe vse, and also against the Plague and o∣ther hot diseases, proceeding of Cho∣lericke burning humors, and against the heate of the Liuer and Kidneyes, it is verie good. I can shewe the whole huske or shell of the Tamarinde with the leaues as they grow, and the Canna Fistula, which I my selfe gathered in Egypt. The leaues of Tamarinde trees, are vsed against Wormes in childrens bellies, and the young huskes, as also the Cassia Fistula, are in Egypt vsed to be conserued in Honnie o•• Saint Iohns bread, or Suger, whereof I brought great Pots full ouer.

The Canna Fistula which is likewise much vsed for Purgations, and other such like Medicines is much found in India, as also in Cambaia, Sion, Malacca, and the places bordering on the same: but because there is the like in the Spanish Indies, and many o∣ther places, and sufficiently knowne, I will speake no more of it: but follow on with mat∣ters of lesse knowledge.

Of these trees I haue seene in Egypt at the least thousands together▪* 1.75 special∣ly about Damiata, a famous towne in Egypt, lying on the ryuer Nilus, euen in like sort as the towne of Campen ly∣eth vppon Issel about a mile from the Sea, The Egyptians call it Cassia Cha∣iarx-Ambar. The trees whereon Cassia groweth, are altogether like our Wall∣nut trees, both for body, branches, and leaues, only the flowers are Golde-yel∣low, and of a sweete sauor, out of these groweth the great huskes wherein the Cassia lyeth. The huskes being small and without any woode are conserued likewise. The Egyptians vse the huske of Cassia with white Suger, & the iuice of Calissi-wood, against grauell, and all diseases of the bladder and the Kidnies, also against coughing, and stopping of the brest, with Agaricum, also outward∣ly against hotte inflamations laying the Cassia vpon them. Hee that desireth to know more hereof, let him reade Mathi∣olus and other Physitions, that haue written most diligently vpon the same.

The 82. Chapter. Of Mirabolanes.

THe Myrobalanes are found in many places of India, that is, in Cambaia, in the land of Ba••¦gate, in Go••, in Malabar, and in Bengalen: whereof there are fiue sortes▪

The first by Physitions called Citrinos, and by the Indians Ara••e, those are round, and are vsed to purge choller. The second which are called Emblicos, and in India Amuale, are vsed in India to tanne Leather withall, as Tanners vse Sumach, and when they are ripe and also gréene, they eate them for an appetite. The third sort in India called Re∣sonualle, and by the Physitions Indius, are eight cornered. The fourth by the Physiti∣ons called Bellericos, and by the Indians Gu••ij, are also round. The fift & last are in In∣dia called Aretean, & by the Physitions Que∣bulus, those are somwhat long, roundish with points. The trées are almost like Plumme trees, but they haue seuerall sorts of leaues, each tree by himselfe. They are commonly one with the other in greatnesse and fashion like Plummes, but that some of them are squarer and rounder, as I said before. Thrée sorts are onely vsed and estéemed of by the Physitions in India, that is Quebulus, which grow in Cambaia, Bisnagar and Bengala, which are likewise preserued & eaten in that sort, as also carried into diuers places, as well to Portingall as else where, likewise the Ce∣trinos and Indius, which also are preserued: and they grow in Malabar, Batecala and Bengala, they are much vsed, estéemed and carried into other countries. The Mirabo∣lans when they are ripe are almost in taste like vnripe Plummes, but because this mat∣ter concerneth Physitions & Apoticaries, I will speake no more thereof, hauing onely set it downe for a common thing in India.

* 1.76All these fiue sorts of Mirabolanes are brought vs hether out of India ready dried, and some conserued in pickle, others in Suger. The first wee call Citri∣nas or Flauas, which are yellow Mira∣bolans, and the yellower the better, shewing some thing greene, close, and fast, and gummie with a thicke shell. They purge the stomake from choller, and are good against Tertians, and o∣ther hotte burning Feauers, and verie necessarie for a hotte nature. The se∣cond wee call Indus: these the blacker they are, the better they purge choller, specially black choller, they are good a∣gainst shaking of the limmes, they cause a faire colour and driue away sadnesse. The third is called Cepule or Chebulae, the greater they are the better, blackish and somewhat reddish, heauie, and sinking in the water, they purge fleame they sharpen mens wits, and cleare the sight. They are here preserued in Suger and Honnie, they doe strengthen and purge the stomak, they heale the drop∣sie, and are good against olde Agues, they likewise giue a man an appetite, and helpe digestion. The fourth wee call Emblicas, and the fift Bellericas, they haue in a manner one kinde of operati∣on like the other called Cebulus. They cleanse the body from fleagme, special∣ly the braines, the Kidnies, and the sto∣make, they strengthen the hart, giue an appetite, and ease belching. The Em∣blice, are also conserued & eaten to the same ende. All these fruites purge, but in an other kinde of manner then doth Cassia or Manna, or such like drugges, but they do it by astriction or binding, thrusting that out which is in the mem∣bers. They that desire to knowe more hereof, let him reade Mathiolus, and Garcius ab Horto, and others.

The 83. Chapter. Of other Spices and Hearbes in India

SPiconardus groweth in the countries of Sitor & Mando••, (which are places that border vppon the lands of Decan, De∣ly, and Bengalen) it is, sowed and groweth on plants, about 2, or 3. sp••ns high, (like corne) with great veines, wherein the Spiconardus groweth. They doe commonly come close out of the earth by the roote, and by that sort are brought into Cambaia, and other places to sell, and from thence sent into all places.* 1.77

The Indian Spica comforteth the mawe, being taken inwardly and al∣so outwardly applyed, and consumeth cold humors.

Aloe, by the Arabians called Sebar, by the Decaners Area, by the Canarijns Cate Comer, and by the Portingales Azeure, is made of the Iuyce of an Hearbe, when it is dried, the Herbe is called by the Portingales Herba Baboza, that is Quil hearbe. There is much of it in Cambaia, Bengala, and o∣ther places, but in the Iland called Sacotora

(which lyeth on the mouth of the redde Sea, or the strength of Mecca) there is great quantitie, and the best. It is a marchandise that is carried into Turkie, Persia, Arabia, and also into Europe, whereby the Iland is much esteemed, and the Aloes called after the name of the Iland, Aloes Socotrino, or Aloes of Sacotora.

* 1.78Aloes purgeth the stomacke from choler, and tough fleagme, specially a watrie and weake stomake: it taketh a∣way all stopping, and consumeth rawe moystures, preseruing it from foule∣nesse: besides this, it strengthneth the stomake, it is made stronger & of more force by adding to it Cinamon, Mace, or Nutmegges. Aloes is good specially against Kooren and rawnesse, and for such persons as haue their stomakes ful of raw moysture, it is also vsed outward∣ly against sores that breake forth of the body, and for the eyes.

The fruite called Anacardi, is in manye places of India, as in Cananor, Calecut, and the countrie of Decan, and in diuers o∣ther places. The Arabians call it Balador, the Indians Bibo, and the Portingall Faua de Malacca, that is Beanes of Malacca, because it is like a beane, but somwhat grea∣ter then the Beanes of these countries, they are vsed in India with milke, against a short breath, for the Wormes and for many other things. When they are greene, they make Achar thereof, that is to say, they salt them and lay them in Vineger, as they do with the most kind of fruites and Spices, as in diuers places I haue shewed.

* 1.79This fruite hath her name from the hart, because in colour and likenesse, it resembleth the heart, specially beeing drie. When the fruites are greene and hanging on the tree (as I haue seene thē in Sicilia vpon mount Aethna) they are like great Beanes: and are salted like Oliues, being verie good to eate, with∣in them they haue a certaine iuyce, as thicke as Honnie, and as red as bloud, which is good against stains. The same operation that is in prepared Mirabo∣lanes, is also in them, they heate & drie, they strengthen the memorie, the braines and sinewes, sharpen the wits, and are good against cold affections of the head.

The Calamo Aromatico called in Gusu∣rate Vaz, in Decan Vache, in Malabar Vasabu, in Malacca Daringoo, in P••rsia Heger, in Cuncan (which is the countrie of Goa and there abouts Northwards) Vay∣can, and in Arabia Cassab and Aldirira, is sowed in many places of India, as in Goa, the Countrie of Gusurate and Ballagate, where it is sowed and so groweth, it hath no smell at all, vntill it be gathered. The women vse it much in India, for the mother, also for paine in the Sinewes, it is also much vsed for horses, for when it is cold weather, they giue it horses in the morning to eate, being beaten and mixed with Garlike, Cominséede, salte, Suger, and Butter. This receipt they call Arata, which is alwayes vsed in India for horses, wherewith (as they saye) they doe them great good. The Calamo Aromatico is the stalke or Reede of the Hearbe, but the inward and spungious part is of yelowish co∣lour, the roote of the trée is good for nothing, but onely the stalke or Réede therof, with that which is in the middest of it.

What the right Calamus Aromaticus is,* 1.80 my verie good friend Doctor Caro∣lus Clusius writeth in his learned Anno∣tations vpon Garcius ab Horto in his 127 leafe, whereof certaine peeces were gi∣uen me, which I brought out of Egypt, where it is found in great aboundance, and much vsed. They call it Cassab Elde∣rira, it is a thinne Reede, being freshe and vnwithered, of a light Gold yelow colour, with many knots and splinters in the breaking, within spungie like Cobwebbes, white & tough in chaw∣ing, and astringent, with a little sharpe bitternesse, as I can shew it, and much therof may be had out of Egypt, where they put it in their Treakle, and vse it many other waies, to driue downe the Vrine, and for the stone.

Costus which the Arabians call Cost or Cast, the Gusurates of Cambaia Vlpor, and they of Malac••a Pucho, whether it is much brought, and also into China and other places. It commeth from Sitor and M••n∣dor aboue named, where Spiconardi is found, and from thence it is brought into Cambaia and India, and so into all other places. They are trees almost like Elder-trées with white blossomes, and very strong of smell. The wood and the roote is the Co∣stus, it is a great marchandise in Persia, A∣rabia, and Turkie where as it is very much vsed.

I haue many kindes of Costus, the Indian,* 1.81 described by Garcius, with all her tokens. The Arabian and Syrian with her right markes, and also an o∣ther sorte, much like Ginger. The In∣dian Costus is the best of them all, it healeth, driueth downe the Vrine and the stone, it cleanseth the Mother, be∣ing receiued into the bodie, or thrust vp into it, and maketh women apt to conceiue. It is good against the byting of Snakes, payne in the brest, and the Wormes &c.

Cabebus so called by the Arabians, and also Quabes, by all the other Indians Cu∣b••c••m, or Cubabelum, because the Chi¦••ars before the Portingales comming into India, vsed to bring it out of the Ilandes of Iaua from Sunda, where they grow, and in no other place. For as then the Chinars had Nauigation into all places of India, trafficking throughout all the Orientall Countries, with all kinde of wares, as well on the firmeland as in the Ilandes. The Ia∣uers which are the inhabitants of the place, where it growes call it Cum••••. It groweth like Pepper against a trée, as Iuie doth, the leaues are verie like Pepper leaues, and it groweth in huskes like Pepper but euerie graine hath a stalke of it selfe, whereby it hangeth. The Ia••ers hold it in so great esti∣mation, that they sell it not, before it is sod∣den, because the strangers that buy it, should not plant it. It is much vsed specially among the Moo••es, who put it into their Wine, ther∣with to make them apter to accomplish their lustes, whereunto they are much giuen: and the Iauers vse it against the coldnesse of the stomacke and other diseases.

* 1.82Cubebus is a fruit like Pepper, about the same bignesse, the best are such as are close, full, heauie and sharpe, al∣though they be lesse then Pepper, but s••mewhat bitter and smell well, being i•• a manner sweete. They warme and comfort the stomacke, which is weake by rea••n of superfluous or windie matter, they cleanse the breast from tough fleagme, they strengthen the Milt, breake winde, and helpe colde diseases of the mother, beeing chaw∣ed, with Masticke, they cleanse the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from ••leagm, & strengthē them.

The leaues called Folium Indum which the Indians call Tamalapatr•• are like O∣range leaues, but somewhat sharper, and of a dark gréen colour. They haue 3 veynes that reach vnto the end of the leafe, one in the middle, and two on the sides, that is, on each side one. They haue a sweet smell, almost like Cloues. The trée where∣on they grow, is of a reasonable bignesse: they grow alwaies on the side of Lakes, waters, or ditches, and are in manie places of India, but most in Cambaia: the Indi∣ans vse manie of these leaues, and cause them to be caryed and sold by whole balles: they say they are good to prouoke vrine, & against a stincking breath: also they lay them be∣twéene their apparell, cloathes and Linnen, for it keepeth them from wormes, and say it serueth in all things as Spiconardi doth.

The Latinists haue deriued the name thereof from the Indian word, Tama∣lapatra, and call it Malabatrium:* 1.83 the Arabians, Cadegi Indi, that is to say, the Indian leafe: it is likewise much brought hither, speciallie to Venice, and is vsed to prouoke vrine, to strengthē the stomack & to helpe a stinking breath.

Galanga by the Arabians called Gal∣uegian, is of two sortes, one that is small and smelleth well, which is brought out of China into India, and from thence to Por∣tingal and other places: and this sort is in China called Lauaudon: the other béeing greater is found in the Iland Iaua, and by them called Lanquas, and this smelleth not so well, as that of China: they grow on small plants, a spanne or 2 spannes high from the earth, of themselues without ••ing: that of Iaua is the greatest plāt, about 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••pannes high: it hath leaues like the point of a speare, with a white flower, which bringeth forth seed: although they sowe it not, yet in In∣dia they haue planted some in their Gar∣dens for pleasure, and vse it for Sallets and other medicines, specially the midwyues, (which in India are called Da••a: it grow∣eth not of the séed, but of the roote which is planted in the earth, like Ginger: they are great & long, and haue knottes like reeds: it is a thing vsed in India for many medicines, & caryed into al places.

Galanga is a roote with many ••nots,* 1.84 being red both inwardly & outwardly the knottes running about it, smelling well, and sharpe of taste, for sauor and fashion like the Cyperus roote, where∣fore by some men it is esteemed for Cy∣perus of Babylon. It heateth and dryeth in the third degree: therefore it com∣forteth the stomake, and driueth away

the payne thereof proceeding of cold and windynesse. It healeth a stincking breath: it helpeth the beating of the hart, being drunk with the iuyce of the leafe of Weghe: it healeth the Colicke proceeding from wind: it is good also against the windines of the Mother, it increaseih lust, heateth the kidneyes, and euerie morning eating a little ther∣of, it healeth the head-ache which hath long indured.

Of these and such like herbes there are manie in India, and in the Orientall parts, the names and properties whereof are to mee vnknowne▪ because they are not so com∣mon, nor knowne among the meaner sort of people, but onlie by Physitians, Apothe∣caries, and Herbalistes: therefore I haue onlie spoken of such as are commonlie knowne, and daylie vsed. And this shall suf∣fice for Spices, Drugges, and medicinable herbes.

The 84. Chapter. Of all sorts of Pearles, both great and small, and of precious stones, as Dia∣mantes, Rubies, Topaces, Saffires, and other such like stones, called Oriental stones, and of the Bezers stone, which is good against poyson, and such like diseases, and in what manner and place they are found.

PEarles by the Por∣tingales are called Pe∣rolas, that is, such as are great, and the small Alioffar, in Latin, Margaritas: in Arabi∣a, Lulu: in Persia and India, Motu: and in Malabar, Mutiu. The principall and the best that are found in all the Orientall coun∣tries, and the right Orientall pearles are some betwéene Ormus and Bastora, in the straights, or Sinus Persicus, in the places called Bareyn, Catissi, Iulfar, Camaron, & other places in the said Sinus Persicus, from whence they are brought into Ormus. The King of Portingale also hath his Factor in Bareyn, that stayeth there onlie for the fish∣ing of pearles. There is great trafficke vsed with them, as well in Ormus as in Goa. There are also other fishings for pearle, as betwéene the Iland of Seylon, and the Cape de Comriin, where great numbers are yearelie found, for that the King of Portin∣gale hath a captaine there with certaine sol∣diers that looketh vnto it: they haue yearlie at the lest aboue 3 or 4 thousād duckers y^t liue onlie by fishing for pearles, and so maintaine themselues, whereof euerie yeare many are drowned or deuoured by y^e fishes called Tu∣barones or Hayen, whereof I haue alreadie made mētion: these pearls are not so good, nor so much esteemed as the pearles of Ormus and are of a lower price, which they know likewise how to discerne at the first sight. There are also pearles found by the Iland of Borneo, and the Iland of Aynon, on the coast of Cauchinchina, but those of Ormus surpasse them all. They are fished for by duk∣ers that diue into the water, at the least 10 12 and 20 fadome déepe. They grow in Oy∣sters, but the great pearls are found in the Oysters that swimme aloft, and the smallest called Alioffar, are commonly in the bot∣tome of the sea. The duckers are naked, ha∣uing a basket bound at their backes, which being at the bottome (to make the more hast) they rake full of Oysters and durt together, and then ryse vp againe, and throwe them into boates, that lie readie for the purpose, with men in them, which presentlie take the Oysters, and lay them on land to drie, where with the heate of the Sunne they open of themselues, and so they find the pearles of Alioffar in the fish: and when they haue made an end of fishing for that day, all the Fishers, with the Captaine, Soldiers, laborers and Watchmen for the King, goe toge∣ther, and taking all the pearles that are caught that day, they diuide them into cer∣taine heapes, that is, one part for the King, an other part for the Captaine and Soldiers, the third part for the Iesuites, because they haue their Cloyster in that place, and brought the Countrie first vn∣to the Christian Faith, and the last part for the Fishers, which is done with great Iustice and equalitie. This fishing is done in Summer tyme, and there passeth not any yeare but that diuers Fishers are drowned by the Cape de Comoriin (which is called the Kings fishing) and manie de∣uoured by Fishes: so that when the fishing is done, there is a great and pitifull noyse and cry of women and Children heard vp∣on the land, for the losse of their husbands and friends: yet the next yeare they must to the same worke againe, for that they haue no other meanes to liue, as ••lso for that they are partlie comp••lled thereunto

by the Portingales, but most part are content to doe it, because of the gaine they get there∣by after all the danger is past. They finde sometimes many, and sometimes but a few Pearles in one oyster, sometimes two hun∣dred graines and more. The oysters that haue the best Pearles in them are thinne and white, which the Indians call Cheripo, wherof they make spoones and cups to drink in. The Pearles are sold by siues which are made of mettell driuen into thin plate for that purpose, whereof the holes are round. There are many sorts of these siues, the first hath small holes, and the Pearles that passe through them are at one price: the next siue hath greater holes, and the Pearles that fall through it are at higher price, and so foorth at the least seauen or eight siues. The small stuffe that serue for no Pearles, they call A∣lioffar, and are sold by the ounce, and vsed by Potticaries and Phisitions, and to that end many of them are caried into Portingall, & Venice, and are very good cheape. To giue the Pearles a faire colour, in India they vse rice beaten a little with salt, wherewith they rub them, and then they become as faire and cleare as christall, and so continue. There is yet an other sort of oysters by the Indians called Cha••lia▪ & by the Portingales Ma∣dre Perol••, or in other of Pearle, & are of the shell fishes that wee call inkehornes, which they know how to prepare and make cleane. They bring many of them into Portingale to s••rue for to drinke in, and to keepe for an ornament, & for pleasure specially those that come out of China and Bengalen, some guilt and painted with colours very faire, some wrought with branches and other figures, as we dayly see them brought thether. In India they make diuers thinges of them, as deskes, tables, cubbards, tables to play on, bo••es, staues for women to beare in their hands, and a thousand such fine deuises, which are all inlaid and couered with this Chanco or Mother of Pearle, very faire to beholde, & very workmanlike made, and are in India so commō, that there is almost no place in those countries but they haue of them. It is like∣wise much caried abroad, both into Portin∣gale▪ and els where, but they are most vsed in India, for there the women, speciallie those of Bengala vse to weare manillias, or bracelets of them about their armes, that is to say, those of most account, and they must not take a maidens maidenhead from her that is of a∣ny estate or degree, but she must haue some of these mother of Pearle bracelets about her armes, which at this day is yet much vsed, and obs••••ued, whereby it is verie much worn••▪

Torteanxes there are likewise in great numbers throughout all India: of their shelles they make many curious deuises, as Combes, Cuppes, and Boles to drinke in, with tablemen and diuers such like thinges, knowing howe to giue it a faire and shining colour most pleasant to behold, and is more e∣stéemed of in India, thē the mother of pearle, by reason of the beautifull colour they set vp∣pon it.

The 85. Chapter. Of Diamonds.

DIamonds by the Arabians and Mores called Almas, and by the Indians where they grow Iraa, and by the Malagans where they are likewise foūd, Itam. They grow in the Countrie of De∣cam behinde Ballagate, by the Towne of Bisnagar, wherein are two or three hilles from whence they are digged, whereof the King of B••snagar doth reape great profitte: for hee causeth thē to be straightly watched, and hath farmed them out with this conditi∣on, that all Diamonds that are aboue twenty fiue Mangeleyns in waight are for the king himselfe: (euery Mangelyn is foure graines in waight) and if anie man bee found that hi∣deth anie such, hee looseth both life and goods.

There is yet another hill in the Countrie of Decam, which is called Vellia, that is the old Rocke: from thence come the best Diamonds, and are sold for the greatest price, which the Diamand grinders, Iewellers, and Indians can very well discerne from the rest.

These Diamonds are much brought to sell in a Faire that is holden in a Towne called L••spor, lying in the same countrie of Decam betweene Goa, and Cambaia, whether the Banianes and Gusurates of Cambaia doe goe and buy them vp, bringing them to Goa, and other places. They are very skilfull in these matters, so that no Ieweller can goe beyond them, but oftentimes they deceiue the best Iewellers in all Christendome. In this Roca Vellia, there are Diamondes founde that are called Nayfes ready cut, which are naturall, and are more estéemed then the rest, specially by the Indians themselues.

In the straight called Tania pura, a coun∣trie on the one side of Malacca there is like∣wise an old rocke, which also is called Roca-Vellia,

where many Diamondes are found, that are excellent: they are small, but verie good, and heauie, which is good for the seller, but not for the buyer. Diamonds are dig∣ged like gold out of Mynes, and where they digge one yeare the length of a man into the ground, within three or foure yeares after, there are Diamondes founde againe in the same place which grow there. Sometimes they find Diamonds of one hundred and two hundred Mangelyns, and more but verie few.

There is another stone called a Topace for colour which is almost like the Diamond, but darker & of lesse estimation. There are many of them founde, that are of great valew for that kinde of stone, and are likewise digged out of the earth like Diamonds in many pla∣ces of India. There are also white Saffires and Rubies, which can hardly bee knowne from Diamonds vnles it be by very good and expert Iewellers, and Diamond grinders. There is likewise founde in India a kinde of thing much like to Rock-christall, but indéede it is none: for there is no Christall to be found in India, nor in any of the oriental countries. It is called berylo, and is little different from Christall. It is much found in Cambaia, Pe∣gu, and Seylon, and they make many things thereof, as beades, seales, and diuers other thinges, which they sell vnto the Christians, and vse among themselues.

The 86. Chapter. Of Rubies, Espinelles, Granades, Emeralds and other pre∣cious stones.

RVbies are of manie sorts, but the best are those that are called carbunckles, which are Rubies that waigh aboue 25. quilates, wher∣of there are verie few and seldome to be found. The best Ru∣bies that are of the best colour, and water are in India called Tockes, which are like Car∣bunckles, there are others called Ballax, which are of a lower price then the first, and they are red. There are others called Espi∣nellas, that are of colour like fire, and are lesse esteemed then the other two sortes, be∣cause they haue not the right water of Ru∣bies. There are Rubies also of manie other sorts, wherof some are white like Diamonds as I said before: other of a Carnation colour or much like white Cherries when they are ripe. There are Rubies found halfe white, halfe red, some halfe Rubies, halfe Safires, and a thousand such other sortes. The cause thereof is because that in the rockes and hils where they grow, their first colour is white, and by the force of the Sunne, are in time brought to their perfection and ripenesse, and béeing perfect they are of colour red, like the Carbunckle and Tockes aforesaid, but wan∣ting somewhat of their perfection, and being digged out before, that time they are of diuers colours as I said before, and how much pa∣ler they are, and lesse red then the Tockes, so much are they lesse in valew: for as they are in beautie and perfection, so are they estéemed euery one in their kinde. Those that are halfe Rubies, and halfe Safires, which the Indians call Nilcandi, that is to say, halfe Safier, and halfe Rubie, proceed of this, that the Rubies and Safiers grow alwaies in one rocke, whereby they are oftentimes founde, halfe one, halfe other. The Rubies by the Arabians and Persians are called Iacut, by the Indians Manica. The Safiers are of two sortes▪ one of a darke blew, the other of a right blew, the Iacinth, Granades, and Ro∣basses are likewise certaine kinds of Rubies, but little esteemed, the Indians call them the yellow and carnation Rubies, and so foorth, according to their colour. These Iacinthes, Granadoes, and Robasses, are in so great numbers in Cananor, Calecut, and Camba∣ia, that they are to sell in euerie Market, and corner of the streets, by whole corgias, each corgia hauing twentie péeces at the least in it, they sell the corgia for one stiuer or two at the most as many as you will desire, but you must vnderstand, they are of the smallest sort. The Safier is not of so great estimati∣on as the Rubie, and yet is one of the most precious stones that are next the Diamond, and the Rubie: the Rubies, Safiers, and o∣ther stones aforesaid, doe grow and are found in rockes and hilles like Diamonds: they come out of Calecut, Cananor, and from manie places in the land of Bisnaga, but most out of the Island of Seylon, which are the best: but those of the Countrie of Pegu are esteemed the finest, whereof there is great store.

The Emerauldes which the Indians call Pache, and the Arabians Samarrut, there are none throughout al India, yet it is repor∣ted y^t some haue bin found there, but verie few & not oftē: but they are much brought thether from

〈◊〉〈◊〉 in Aegypt, and are likewise called Ori∣entall: they are much esteemed in India, be∣cause there are but few of them. There are many also brought out of y^e Spanish Indies, and carryed into the lande of Pegu, where they are much worne, and estéemed of, wher∣by many Venetians (that haue trauelled the∣ther with Emeraldes and bartered them for Rubies) are become very rich, because among them men had rather haue Emeraldes then Rubies: All the said stones are likewise vsed in medicines, and Apoticarie drugges, Tur∣queses are found in great numbers in the Countrey of Persia, and brought into India from beyond Ormus, by hundreth pounds at once, earth and altogether, which in India are little estéemed, for that the Indians and Portingals do not weare many of them, and make small account of them. The Iaspar is much found in the land of Cambaia, but not much regarded: they make dishes and cups thereof: it is of colour gréene like the Eme∣ralde. Chrisolites and Amatistes are many in the Island of Seylon, Cambaia, and Balla∣gatte, and the stone called Alakecca, which is also called Bloodstone, because it quickly stancheth blood, and other stones called Milke stones, which are good for women that giue milke or sucke. These and such like stones are in great numbers found in Cambaia and Ballagatte, and are brought to Goa to bee solde, whereof they make Beades, Seales, Ringes, and a thousand such like curiosities: they are much estéemed, for that a seale of such a stone is worth two or three Pardaws the peece: there is also in Cambaia much Alambre, or wherof they make many rings, beades, and such like things, which are much vsed: there are likewise stones, by the Por∣tingalles called Olhos de Gato, that is to say, Cattes eyes, because they are like them (which is the Agat) and are of colour and fa∣shion like Cattes eyes: they come out of Cambaia, but the best out of Seylon and Pegu: they are little brought into Portin∣••l, for there they are not estéemed, and like∣wise because they are worth more in India then in Portingall, for the Indians estéeme much of them, specially the Chinos, and the∣ther they are caryed, better estéemed, and sold there then any other stones: the Indians say that this stone hath a certaine propertie and vertue to preserue and kéepe a man in the ri∣ches which he hath, and that they shall not lessen, but stil increase: the Loadstone, which the Portingalles call Ped••a de Ceuar is found in great quantity, and in many places of India: the Indians say, that if a man vse dayly to eate a little of that stone, it preser∣ueth him, and maketh him looke yong, and that he shall neuer looke olde: wherefore the Kinges and great Lordes of India vse it in pottes and vesselles, therein to eate and séeth their meate, thereby as they beleeue to pre∣serue their youthes.

The 87. Chapter. Of the Bezar stones, and other stones good against poyson

THe Bezar stone com∣meth out of Persia, frō the land or Prouince called Caras••one, and also out of other pla∣ces in India: they grow within the maw of a shéepe or Goat, a∣bout a little straw, that lyeth in the middle of the maw, for by experience the straw is often found within them: the stone is very slicke & smooth without, of a darke gréene colour. These Goats or shéepe are by the Persians called Pazan, wherevpon they call the stone Pazar, and the Portingalles by corruption of spéech call it Bazar or Besar, and the Indi∣ans Pedro do Bazar, which is as much to say, as market stone: for Bezar in the Indian speech signifieth a market or place where all victuailes are kept and solde, and for the same cause they call the smallest money Bazaru∣cos, as if they woulde say market money. This Bezars stone is very costly, and is much vsed in India against all poy∣son, and other diseases, and is more e∣steemed then Vnicornes horne in Europe, for it is much tryed and sold very deare: The greater and heauier they are, the better and of more vertue they are: the common sorte are of thrée foure or fiue octaues weight, some more, some lesse: they are much brought in∣to Portingal, and greatly estéemed: the place where they are most found, is (as I said be∣fore) in Persia and also in the Island called Insula das Vacas, or the Island of Cowes: It lyeth before the mouth of the riuer, ente∣ring into Cambaia, hard by the coast where the Portingall nauie often putteth in to re∣fresh themselues, and being there, kill diuers of the sheepe or Goates, wherein they finde many of these Bezars stones: likewise in the lande of Pan by Malacca, there are many found: in the same countrey of Pan they find a certaine stone within the gall of a Hogge, which they esteeme more against poyson and other diseases then y^e Bezars stone: the Por∣tingalles call it Pedra do Porco, that is, Hogges stone: it is much vsed in Malacca,

it is of cleare redde colour, and bitter in taste, and sauoureth like French sope: when they will vse it and giue it any man to drinke, they throw it into a cuppe of water, and so let it stande a little, which done, they take it out againe, and the water will be bitter, and cleanse all the venime that a man hath in his body, as by experience hath oftentimes béen found. The Bezars stone is as hard as any stone, but not very heauie: It is thought that these stones doe growe in the mawes of shéepe, and galles of Hogges by vertue of the grasse or hearbes whereon they pasture and féed, as we haue declared of the Rhinoceros, because they doe onely bréede in those places aboue named, and in no place els, where these kinds of beastes are. In the towne of Vlta∣bado in the Countrey behind Goa in Balla∣gatte, there is a stone found by the Arabians called Hagerarmini, and by the Portingals Pedra Armenia, and because there are ma∣ny of them found in Armenia, they are com∣monly called so: it is blew & somewhat light gréene: the Moores vse it much in purgations and for other diseases: besides these stones a∣foresaid, there are also many sortes of stones, as well precious stones, as against poyson and other diseases, and of many properties & vertues: but because they are but little knowne, or trafiqued withall, I haue onely made mention of those that are dayly bought and sold, and commonly knowne.

The 88. Chapter. A briefe instruction how to know and find out the right Diamantes, Rubies, E∣meralds, Pearls, & other precious stones, and how to value them by waight, at their right prices and values, & first of the Dia∣mant.

FIrst you must vnderstand that the Diamant is the king of al precious stones, because it is solde by weight, and hath a very certain thickenes, where∣by it is ordinarily wroght, for when it is greater, it is nothing worth, and being lesse it will soone be perceyued: by the which thicknesse although it standeth in a ring, they can both sée and gesse how much it weighth, within a little more or lesse, and being out of the ring it is weyghed, thereby to value it truely: there are olde and ancient records found in India, wherein are written the prices of the stones, that is, one Quilat for so much, two Quilates for so much, and thrée Quilates for so much after the rate &c. and so of all prices and weights accordingly: and because they are dayly bought and solde, it is therefore néedefull for a man to haue a memoriall about him, that is, of the prices of the perfect and fayre stones, without fault or spot, for that being vncleane, or hauing a∣ny fault or spot, they are hardly to be valued. There are some Princes and great Lordes that desire to know the cause why such preci∣cious stones are holden at so great prices, wherevnto no other answere is made, but be∣cause men buy and sell them so deare, for all thinges are estéemed no otherwise of, then because they are bought and sold at such pry∣ces, and so is their manner to sell, for if a Di∣amant of one Quilat alone, bee worth fiftie Duckets, being perfect, their reason is, that after the same rate a great stone or Diamant may be worth 30. or 40. thousand Duckets, being in greatnesse and perfection correspon∣dent: and the stones as well great as little, that vntill this time haue béene bought and solde, haue not béene so light, that they were sold aboue or vnder their value and estimati∣on. Now to value the great Diamant as it ought to be, it is necessarie to know and de∣termine what a Diamant of a Quilat is worth, and a Rubie to match therewith: the like of an Emerald, neyther more nor lesse, & hauing well considered what or how much hinderance the falts and foulenesse of the saide Diamant will be vnto the sale thereof, dedu∣cting the same out of the price of the said Di∣amant, Rubie or Emerald being Orientall, of what greatnesse soeuer they bee, you may value them, and I will first beginne with the Diamant, for that other stones are valued after the rate thereof, and wil declare the per∣fection which it ought to haue. The diamant y^t is perfect in all respects, must be of that pro∣portion, that the two squares on the sides must make the breadth of the vpper parte of the stone, and that the vnder part of the stone be no broader, then that thrée of the breadths thereof will make the breadth of the vpper part, and déepe according to the same propor∣tion: and the squares on the side must stande close with the edge of the ring or thing wher∣in it is set, being of the whole depth, and somewhat longer then square, and yet no more, then that it may be gessed, which is the length and breadth thereof, also it must bee without any falts both in corners and sides, and euery one of the foure corners sharpe and cleane cut, and of a good water, Christaline & shining cleare, so that it may not once be per∣ceiued that it draweth neere any colour, and not of a darke water, but cleare and cleane:

the Diamant with all these perfections is worth 50. duckets being of one Quilat: but because these perfections are not often found, and that few men vnderstand them, therefore I will say that a Diamant of goodnesse and perfection according to the common estima∣tion, being of the waight of one Quilat in worth 40. duckets, and after this rate wee will make our account, and whether it bee a small or great Diamant of what wayght goodnes or foulenesse soeuer it may bee: you must first consider & know what it waigheth, & if they cannot tell you, thē you must gesse by the sight thereof, and alwayes estéeme it at lesse wayght then you think it weigheth, that you may value it within the price, and ha∣uing estéemed the waight, kéepe that in your memorie, and say thus, if it were a Diamant of a Quilat waight of this water, and so per∣fect, or had the corners lesse then these, or any foulenesse in respect of this, and all the quali∣ties, or faultes which a Diamant ought to haue, consider what such a Diamant may be worth, being of qualitie like that you will e∣stéeme, & weighing no more but one Quilat: which hauing wel thought and considered vp∣on, estéeme it rather lesse then more, & hold y^e price in your memory as aforesaid, and thinke vppon the waight that it should weigh, be it much or little, & double the same waight ad∣ding as much more vnto it, as if it bee two, take other two, and multiply them together, and say 2. times 2. is foure: if it weygh 3. multiply it with thrée, and they make 9. and so according to the number you find, and so you shall multiply all Diamonds, in waight, of what wayght soeuer they be, and multiply them as I said before with as much againe as they bee esteemed, and the production of your multiplication you shall multiply by the summe of money you value the Diamant to bee worth, weyghing one Quilate, and the production of the last multiplication is the va∣lue of the Diamant: & if in the waight there be any halfes, as if it wayghed 2••. Quilate, then you shall redeeme them into halfe Qui∣lates, which is 5. halfe Quilates, and then say 5. times 5. is 25. and that shall you mul∣tiply with the price of the halfe Quilate, as you esteeme it, and the production thereof is the worth of such a Diamant, and if it chance y^t the Diamant were so smal, that the waight of a graine should be therein esteemed: then you must reduce all the waight into graines, and multiply as aforesaid, and that which proceedeth thereof is the waight of such a Di∣amant as you seeke to value or estéeme. As for example, there is a Diamant that waigh∣eth 2. Quilates, which is of such a qualitie, that being of one Quilate it would be worth ••0. Duckets, and being of halfe a Quilate, 10. Duckets, and being of a graine, 2. Duc∣kets and a halfe. Now to know what this Diamant of 2. Quilates is worth, you shall say that 2. times 2. is 4. This 4. you shal multiply with 40. Duckets, which is the value thereof, being of one Quilate, it ma∣keth 160. Duckets, which is the price of that Diamant of two Quilates: now that you haue a Diamant of two Quilates and a halfe, which is fiue halfes, you shall say fiue times fiue is 25. this 25. multiplyed by 10. it maketh 250. duckets, because the halfe Quilate cost 10. duckets, which is after the rate of 40. duckets the Quilate, then the Di∣amant of 2. Quilates and a halfe amounteth to 250. duckets. Now if a Diamant weigh∣ed 7. graines, you shall say 7. times 7. is 49. which 49. you must multiply by the va∣lue of a graine, which is two duckets and a halfe: so a Diamant of 7. graines is 127. duckets. In this manner you may alwaies know what a Diamant is worth, hauing ra∣ted the price of one Quilate: the waight of the Diamant you will esteeme being thus knowne, as by example is shewed, and so you may the easilier make your account. There are some Diamants that are faultie and vn∣perfect, and are not worth 40. duckets, but of a lesse price according to the faultes, and may be worth 36.35.34 & 30. duckets, or a∣ny lower price, as the faultes are estéemed, & in that case it is very troublesome to knowe what half a Quilat or grain should be worth: wherin you must do thus: whē you haue estee¦med what a Quilat of such a Diamant may be worth & that in y^e weight thereof there fal∣leth out a halfe Quilat or grain, then you must first knowe what value it woulde bee worth being of one Quilate, and then make your account y^t the fourth part of such a price is the value of halfe a Quilate, so that when a Quilate is worth 40. duckets, a halfe Qui∣late is ten duckets, and one grayne two duc∣kets and a halfe: for foure graines is a Qui∣late, if the Quilate be 36. duckets, the halfe Quilate is 9. duckets, and one graine two duckets and one Teston, and so after that rate may you know y^e price of all Diamants, of what qualitie soeuer they bee. The like reckening is made with thinne Diamantes, Rubies, and Emeraldes, that is made with those which are of greater price, as I shall hereafter shew you. You must vnderstand that a Rubie bee of such a quantitie, that it may accompany a Diamant of one Quilate it is worth 70. duckets, or that there be any which in weight doe accompany a Diamant of halfe a Quilate or grayne, then you must make your account by halfe Quilates, or graynes, and you must alwayes knowe the

price of one Quilate, and must vnderstande that the fourth parte of 70. duckettes is the value of one halfe Quilate, and the fourth part of a halfe Quilate is the price of a grain, and so you shall make your reckening of E∣meraldes, each one according to his waight and price. There are some Diamantes that are thinne, and yet shew very cleare, which are more worth then they weygh, and lesse then their clearnes sheweth: for a Diamant hauing a very thinne table and hollow, yet on y^e vpper side hauing y^e perfection in square, as I said, should be in a thick diamant, which is of so good perefection both in sides & hookes: such a Diamant sheweth to be of two Qui∣lates and weygheth but one: wherefore whē your Diamant is of what greatnes soeuer it may be, being perfect in the vpper parte, and thinne vnderneath, you must alwaies make your account, that being thinne vnder∣neath, it is of lesse wayght then it shew∣eth for, and if it be not altogether thinne vnderneath, then it weygheth more, yet the waight profiteth it nothing at all: and hauing the vpper table smaller, and the sides greater, it will also weigh more, but the wayght a∣uayleth it not: but you must alwaies esteeme it to weygh but the halfe of that it sheweth for: and not being wholly thin vnderneath, it will weygh more, but to no end: and ha∣uing the table smal, and the sides and corners great, it weigheth more, but the weight auay∣leth not, but you must estéeme it to weigh but halfe so much as it sheweth for: for that before it bee made ready it will lose much of the waight. Now if there bee a Diamant that hath a great table outwardes, & the cor∣ners small, it shall not weigh halfe so much as it sheweth for, yet is it not any thing y^e worse for that, vnlesse the corners were too small: nowe if there bee a Diamant thinne vnder∣neath, and square aboue, with the perfections that shoulde belong vnto it, it is worth being of one Quilate 70. duckets, and hauing any faultes or spots, euery man may wel consider what hinderance they are vnto it, and after this manner a man may easily set the pryce & value of them, and make his account after the rate of thicke Diamantes, his account being made of halfe the weight they seeme or shewe to haue: as if they shew to bee two Quilates, make your reckening of one Qui∣late: and if it shew three Quilates, make your account of sixe grams, which is the half: and if there be any halfe Quilates, then see the price what a Quilate is worth, and so what a halfe amounteth vnto, and so make your account as aforesaide by thicke Dya∣mantes, and in graynes the like, for there is no other difference then in the pryce, for that a perfect and cleare thinne Diamant of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Quilate is worth ••••. ••••ckets and 〈…〉〈…〉 or lesse waight accordingly 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

The 89. Chapter. Of Rubies.

WHen you haue a Rubie to value or esteeme that is squared table wise, as it should bee, and that such a Rubie is to ac∣company a Dyamant of the same waight of Quilates and so man•• Quilates in colour, if it hath foure and twen∣tie Quilates in colour and perfection, like Golde of foure and twentie Quilates, then it is certaine, it is both fine and good. The Rubie is not solde by the waight▪ because it hath no certaine thicknesse, for that many of them are made thinne for pleasure to the sight, and the better to lay the grounde or leaues vnder them, and it may very well bee thinne, but not very much, for then it should bee a lot and hinderance vnto it: if a Rubie be whole and perfect both in colour, cleannesse, thicknesse, squarenesse, and forme, it is worth an hundred duckets: but there are very fewe that are perfect in all pointes, specially being great, for they haue alwayes some faultes or spottes that are couered and hidden: but right perfect there are none, or very few, and not many men haue any great knowledge therein: therefore I will say, thereby to make our account, that a Rubie which in common shew is accounted perfect and good, is worth seuentie duckets: so that when a Ieweller or stone cutter doeth aske another for a Rubie, which hee hath not▪ 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sayth onely, there is a Rubie of greatness•• ••o accompany a Diamant of so many Qui∣lates, and hath so many Quilates in colour, the other thereby vnderstandeth of what co∣lour and greatnesse it is. Now hauing a Rubie or Rubies with tables or vnground, and are to value them, or knowe what they be worth, you shall consider with your selfe and say thus: if there were a Rubie that were no greater then this, onely seruing to accompany a Dyamant of one Quilate, and were of such colours, clearenesse, and qualities, as this in quantitie and greatnes, & had the faultes in all respects that this hath, what would it bee worth▪ and hauing well considered the qualities, goodnes or badnesse with the faults, how much they imbase the price thereof, and hauing thereafter esteemed

your price, beeing to accompany a Diamond of one Quilate, kéep that price in your memo∣rie, and looke on the Rubie how bigge it is, and what waight the Diamond hath, wit•• the depth which it should be compared vnto▪ and also if it bee still raw and vnground, con∣sider how much it must be taken away in the grinding, and how bigge it will be when it is squared and fashioned: which hauing done, and knowing the waight of the Diamond it shall accompany, you shal then take as much more waight, & multiplie it with the waight you haue alreadie found, that it should bee ac∣companying a Diamond of one Quilate, and the product••on thereof, is the valew of such a Rubie: to conclude, when you haue deter∣mined what the waight of a Diamond is, that it may accompanie, you shall make your account as if it were a Diamond, and that which proceedeth of the waight, you shall multiplie with the price which you finde it to be worth, to kéep companie with a Diamond of one Quilate: the Rubies that are vngroūd and can be no tables it is to be vnderstood that they are better in that sorte then otherwise: Of these you must consider the price after the manner of the Diamond which hee may ac∣companie, & the height or depth of the stone, after that the colour, goodnes and faults as it falleth out, and make the account or recko∣ning thereof as of Rubies with tables, and ground, and also of the Diamonds. There are also Diamonds that are not cut square in ta∣bles, but haue a good fashion for to set in anie Iewell, as being pointed with thrée corners, harts▪ and such like sorts, thereby to hide their faultes, and are made in that sort to holde the greatnes and waight thereof, and yet one of these being perfect in that manner, are not so much worth as those with tables: for that many times they haue too much thicknes vn∣derneath, which maketh the waight not to a∣ny profit, but rather hurt: which if it were whole and thin vnderneath▪ hauing outward∣ly all other perfectiōs, it were as much worth as a Diamond, that hath a table being thicke with his whole depth, which is 46. duckets being of one Quilate: so that when you haue any of these you shall deale with them, as with the other, that is to consider, what they may be worth, being of one Quilate, and make your reckoning, as with the others aforesaid.

The 90. Chapter. Of the oriental & old Emeralds, for that those that are found in the Islandes of the Spanish Indies, are not yet tried nor resolued vpon whether they be fine or not.

THe old Iewellers say, that if a man can finde an Emerald perfect in al points, as in colour, clearenes, fashion, and thicknes, that such an Emerald is worth 3. Diamonds, which ac∣cording to our account shold be 120. duckets, and I beléeue verily that it is most true, but as yet there was neuer any found, eyther lit∣tle or great that had all those perfections, there are some found that are perfect in colour and fashion, but of clearenes and cleanenes not one, for they haue alwaies some fattines within them like gréene hearbs and such like, wherefore to make our reckoning, wee will say, that an Emerauld of cōmon sort, estima∣tion, and perfection, is worth 80. duckets, be∣ing of the bignes, as that hee may compare with a Diamond of one Quilate: for althogh it haue certaine gréene hearbes within it, if they bee not too many it is neuerthelesse estée∣med perfect, hauing all the other perfections that it should haue: therefore when you haue an Emerald to value whether it be vngroūd or a table, first you must consider the great∣nes▪ and what waight a Diamond should bee that must compare with it, then looke vp∣pon the faults or goodnes that it hath, and considering well what such an Emrauld shold be worth▪ being no greater than a Diamond of one Quilate, you must make your account as with Rubies: which is, take the waight of the Diamond, whereunto you compare it, and multiplie that with as much more, and the production thereof, multiplie by the price that you haue estéemed the one Quilate to be worth, and the production is the valew of such an Emerauld, and in the same sort shall you doe with all the Emeraulds you haue to valew, whether they be great or small, good or bad, alwaies considering the faults or good∣nesse it may haue, and after that esteeme it, and set the price, and if there be half a Quilate or graines in the waight of the Diamōd you compare it vnto▪ then you must make your account by halues and graines, as I saide be∣fore of Diamonds and Rubies. When you will valew any stones, you must looke well vpon them, and consider if it be a Diamond, of what water and fashion it is, if it hath all

the depth and more, if it be foule or haue anie other fault in the corners or in the squares, & what hurt or disaduantage it bringeth to the stone, that you deceiue not your selfe in valu∣ing the price it may be worth, beeing of one Quilate, thereby to make your reckoning as before: If it be a Rubie, marke well of what bignes it is, and what Diamond in waight it may be cōpared vnto, & rate it alwaies at lesse greatnes, rather then at more, that you deceiue not your selfe, and consider well what colour it hath: If there be any Cas••edonia, or vncleanesse, if it be thinne or haue any other fault therein, or any want in the squarenes, & what hinderance those faultes may bee vnto the stone, in the price, perfection, and great∣n••s of the Diamond wherunto you compare it, and looke you faile not herein, for if you do, you will cleane ouer shoote your selfe: like∣wise in setting the price what it may bee worth being so great, as to compare with a Diamond of one Quilate, thereby to make your reckoning of the waight, that it maie weigh more or lesse. What I haue saide of Rubies, you must likewise vnderstand of Emeraulds that are Orientale, all after one sort and manner of reckoning. There are o∣ther red stones called Espinelles, and of diuers other sortes, whereof some are so perfect in their kinds, that they are like to Rubies, and this is to bee vnderstood of the good and the best. There are others called Espinelles da Rouca Noua, or new Rocket: some of them haue the colour of Rubies, others draw neere the colour of Iacinthes, and it is not knowne whether they be right Espinelles or not: for the good Iewellers esteeme them for no Espi∣nelles, but for Rubasses, and Iacinthes, and so good that they are like to Espinelles: wher∣fore the stone grinders & Iewellers say, that they are Espinelles, because they would bee better paid for the fashion, and therefore they doe polish them with Espinell dust or poli∣shing. These Espinelles in their polish are Espinelles, but in colour Rubasses, and Ia∣cinthes, and there are manye Rubies, which to pollish well, and grinde well, you had neede polish with the polish of Espinelles. If there be an Espinell of the old rocke, which in kind and qualitie is good, be∣ing perfect in all parts with a very good table, and were to bee compared with a Diamond of one Quilate, it would bee worth 40. duc∣kets, but hauing any imperfections, euery mā may well consider what hurt and abate they may doe in the price, and after the same rate make his account as hee doth in Rubies, the Ballayeses are likewise sold by waight, but not in that sort as Diamonds and Rubies, but they are estéemed according to the waight, that is the best ••layes that may be found being of one Quilate, may be worth ten duckets, and hauing any faults▪ eyther in colour or other perfections, is of lesse valew, but beeing perfect as I said alreadie, it is worth ten duckets, and two Quilates twen∣tie duckets, of three Quilates thirtie duckets, and so after the rate as it is, small or great▪ being of the waight it should bee, and beeing imperfect, euery man ofskill may well consi∣der what it is worth, being of one Quilate▪ & estéeme it thereafter.

The 91. Chapter. Of Orientale Pearles.

THe Orientale Pearles are bet∣ter then those of the Spanish Indies, and haue great diffe∣rence in the price: for they are worth more and haue a better glasse, being clearer, and fairer. Those of the Spanish Indies commonly beeing darker & deader of colour: yet there are some found in the Portingall Indies that are nothing infe∣riour to the Orientale Pearles, but they are very few: Now to valew them as they shuld be, I wil only set the good Pearles at a price. A Pearle that in all partes is perfect, both of water, glasse and beautie without knobs, of forme very roūd or proportioned like a pearle without dents, being of one Quilate is worth a ducket, and after this rate I will make my reckoning, as I doe with Diamonds Rubies and Emeraulds, and if there be any faults in the water, clearenes and fashion, or that it hath any knobs or other defaults, it may well be considered what hurt it may bee vnto the sale thereof, and according to the goodnes, or badnes valew the price therof: which hauing valewed, we must sée what it weigheth, and then make the reckoning thereof, as with Diamonds, Rubies & Emeraulds, & if there be a whole string or a chaine full of Pearles, you must looke well vpon thē for where there are many, they are not all alike: the greatest beeing the best, & the other after the rate, for the goodnes of the great wil beare the badnes of the smal: but if it be contrary, then the bar∣gen is not very good. This shall suffice for in∣struction to such as desire to deale therewith, to haue alwaies in their memorie, and what herein is wanting for the better vnderstand∣ing and knowledge hereof, it may be supplied by true Iewellers and stone cutters that are skilfull in this point, and with these instructi∣ons can easily help, so that a mā shall not need wholly to put his trust in those, that for their owne profit will giue them but bad counsell therein.

The 92. Chapter. Of ••rta••ne ••emorable thinges passed in India during my residence there

IN the month of Decem∣ber, Anno, 158••. there ariued in the towne and Island of Ormus foure Englishmē, which came from Aleppo in the coū∣trie of Suria, hauing say∣led out of England, and passed through the straightes of Gibraltar, to Tripoli a towne and Hauen, lying on the sea coast of Suria, where all the shippes discharge their wares, and marchandises, and frome thence are caryed by land vnto Alleppo, which is nyne dayes iourney. In Aleppo there are resident diuers marchants and Factors of all Nations, as Italians, Frenchemen, Englishmē, Armenians, Turkes & Mores, euerie man hauing his Religion apart, pay∣ing tribute vnto the great Turke. In that towne there is great trafficke, for that from thence, euerie yeare twyse, there trauelleth two Ca••ylen, that is, companies of people and Camelles, which trauell vnto India, Persia, Arabia, and all the countries border∣ing on the same and deale in all sorts of mar∣chandise, both to and from those Countries, as I in an other place haue alreadie de∣clared. Three of the said Englishmen afore∣saide were sent by the Companie of En∣glishmen, that are resident in Aleppo, to see if in Ormus they might keepe any Factors, and so trafficke in that place, like as also the Italians doe, that is to say, the Veneti∣ans, which in Ormus, Goa and Malacca haue their Factors, and trafficke there, as well for stones and pearles, as for other wares and spices of those countries, which from thence are caryed ouer land into Ve∣••e. One of these Englishmen had beene 〈◊〉〈◊〉 before in the said towne of Ormus, and there had taken good information of the trade, and vpon his aduise and aduer∣tisement, the other were as then come the∣ther with him, bringing great store of mar∣chandises with them, as Clothes, Saffron, all kindes of drinking glasses, and Haberda∣shers wares, as looking glasses, kniues, and such like stuffe, and to conclude, brought with them all kinde of small wares that may be deuised. And although those wares amounted vnto great summes of money, notwithstād∣ing it was but onlie a shadow or colour, thereby to giue no occasion to be mistru∣sted, or seen into: for that their principall intent was to buy great quantities of pre∣cious Stones, as Diamantes, Pearles, Rubies, &c. to the which ende they brought with them a great summe of money and Gold, and that verie secretly, not to be deceyued or robbed thereof, or to runne into anie danger for the same. They being thus aryued in Ormus, hyred a Shop, and be∣gan to sell their wares: which the Itali∣ans perceyuing, whose Factors continue there (as I sayd before) and fearing that those Englishmen, finding good vent for their commodities in that place wold be resident therein, and so daylie increase, which would be no small losse and hinde∣rance vnto them, did presently inuent all the subtile meanes they could, to hinder them: and to that end they went vnto the Cap∣taine of Ormus, as then called Don Gon∣salo de Meneses, telling him that there were certaine Englishmen come into Or∣mus▪ that were sent only to spy the Country, and said further, that they were Heretickes: and therefore they sayd it was conuenient they shuld not be suffered so to depart, with∣out béeing examined, and punished as eni∣mies, to the example of others. The Cap∣taine being a friend vnto the Englishmen, by reason that one of them which had bene there before, had giuen him certaine presents, would not be perswaded to trou∣ble them, but shipped them with all their wares in a Shippe that was to sayle for Goa, and sent them to the Viceroy, that he might examine and trye them, as hee thought good: where when they were a∣ryued, they were cast into prison, and first examined whether they were good Christi∣ans or no▪ and because they could speake but bad Portugale, onlie two of them spake good Dutche, as hauing bene certaine yeares in the lowe Countries, and there traffiqued. There was a Dutch Iesuite borne in the towne of B••gges in Flaunders, that had bin resident in the Indies for the space of thirty yeares, sent vnto them, to vndermine and ex∣amine them: wherein they behaued them∣selues so wel, that they were holden & esteemd for good and Catholick Romish Christians: yet still suspected, because they were stran∣gers, specially Englishmen. The Iesuites stil told them that they shuld be sent prisoners in∣to Portingal, wishing them to leaue off their trade of marchandise & to become Iesuites, promising them thereby to defend them from all trouble: the cause why they said so, and perswaded them in that earnest māner was, for that the Dutch Iesuite had secretlie bene

aduertised of great summes of money which they had about them, and sought to get the same into their fingers, for that the first vowe and promise they make at their en∣trance into their order, is, to procure the welfare of their said order, by what means soeuer it be, but although the Englishmen de∣nyed them, and refused the order, saying, that they were vnfit for such places, neuerthelesse they procéed so farre that one of them, being a painter, (that came with the other thrée for company, to sée the countries, and to séeke his fortune, and was not sent thether by the En∣glish marchants) partly for feare, and partlie for want of meanes to relieue himselfe, pro∣mised them to become a Iesuite: and although they knew and well perceiued he was not a∣ny of those that had the treasure, yet because he was a Painter, whereof they are but few in India, and that they had great néed of him to paint their church, which otherwise would cost them great charges, to bring one from Portingal, they were very glad thereof, hop∣ing in time to get the rest of them w^t all their money into their fellowship: so y^t to conclude, they made this Painter a Iesuite, where he continued certain daies, giuing him good store of worke to doe, and entertayning him with all the fauour and friendship they could deuise, and all to win the rest, to be a pray for them: but the other thrée continued stil in prison, being in great feare, because they vn∣derstood no man that came to them, nor anie man almost knew what they said: till in the end it was told them that certaine Dutch men dwelt in the Archbishops house, & coun∣sell giuen them to send vnto them, whereat they much reioiced, and sent to me and an o∣ther Dutch man, desiring vs once to come and speake with them, which we presentlie did, and they with teares in their eyes made complaint vnto vs of their hard vsage, shew∣ing vs frō point to point (as it is said before) why they were come into the countrie, with all desiring vs for Gods cause, if we might by any means, to helpe them, that they might be set at liberty vpon Sureties, being readie to indure what Iustice should ordaine for them, saying, that if it were found contrarie, and that they were other then trauelling mar∣chants, and sought to find out further be∣nefite by their wares, they would be content to be punished. With that wee departed from them promising them to do our best: and in the ende we obtained so much of the Archbishoppe, that he went vnto the Vice-roy to delyuer our peti∣tion, and perswaded him so well, that hee was content to set them at libertie, and that their goods shuld be deliuered vnto them again, vpon condition they should put in sure∣ties for 2000. Pardawes, not to depart the countrie before other order should bee taken with them. Therupon they presently found a Citizen of the towne, y^t was their suretie for 2000. Pardawes, where they paide him in hand 1300. Pardawes, and because they say they had no more ready monie, he gaue them credite, séeing what store of marchandise they had, whereby at all times if néede were, hee might bee satisfied: and by that meanes they were deliuered out of prison, and hyred them selues a house, and began to set open shoppe: So that they vttered much ware, and were presently well knowne among all the Mar∣chants, because they alwaies respected Gen∣tlemen, specially such as brought their wares shewing great curtesie and honor vnto them, whereby they wonne much credite, and were beloued of all men, so that euerie man fauou∣red them▪ and was willing to doe them plea∣sure. To vs they shewed great friendship, for whose sake, the Archbishop fauoured them much, and shewed them verie good counte∣nance, which they knew wel how to increase, by offering him many presents, although hee would not receiue them, neither would euer take gift or present at any mans hands. Like¦wise they behaued themselues verie Catho∣likely and verie deuoute, euerie day hearing Masse with Beades in their hands, so that they fel into so great fauour, that no man ca∣ried an euill eye, no nor an euill thought to∣wards them. Which liked not the Iesuites, because it hindered them from that they ho∣ped for, so that they ceased not still by this Dutch Iesuite to put them in feare, that they should bee sent into Portingall to the King, counselling them to yéeld them selues Iesuits into their Cloyster, which if they did, he said they would defend them from all in troubles, saying further, that he counselled them there∣in as friend, and one that knew for certaine that it was so determined by the Viceroyes priuie Counsell: which to effect he saide they stayed but for shipping that should sayle for Portingall, with diuers other perswasions, to put them in some feare, & so to effect their purpose. The English men to the contrarie, durst not say any thing to them▪ but answer∣ed, that as yet they would stay a while, and consider thereof, thereby putting the Iesuites in good comfort, as one among them,* 1.85 being the principal of them (called Io••n Nuberye) complained vnto me often times, saying hee knew not what to say or thinke therein, or which way he might be rid of those troubles: but in the ende they determined with them∣selues, to depart from thence, and secretly by

meanes of contrarie friends, they imployed their money in precious stones, which the better to effect, one of them was a Ieweller, and for the same purpose came with them. Which being concluded among them, they durst not make knowne to any man, neither did they credite vs so much, as to shewe vs their minds therein, although they tolde vs all whatsoeuer they knew. But on a Whit∣sunday they went abroad to sport themselues about thrée miles from Goa, in the mouth of the ryuer in a countrie called Bardes, hauing with them good store of meate and drinke. And because they should not be suspected, they left their house and shop, with some wares therein vnsolde, in custodie of a Dutch Boy, by vs prouided for them, that looked vnto it. This Boye was in the house not knowing their intent, and being in Bardes, they had with them a Patamar, which is one of the Indian postes, which in winter times cary∣eth letters from one place to the other, whom they had hyred to guide them: & because that betwéene Bardes and the Firm land there is but a little ryuer, in manner halfe drie, they passed ouer it on foote, and so trauelled by land, being neuer heard of againe: but it is thought they arriued in Aleppo, as some say, but they knew not certainely. Their greatest hope was, that Iohn Newbery could speake the Arabian tongue, which is vsed in al those countries, or at the least vnderstoode, for it is very common in all places there abouts, as French with vs. Newes being come to Goa, there was a great stirre and murmur∣ing among the people, and we much wonde∣red at it: for many were of opinion, that wée had giuen them counsel so to doe, and present∣ly their suertie seased vpon the goods remain∣ing, which might amount vnto aboue 200. Pardawes, and with that and the money he had receiued of the English men, he went vn∣to the Viceroye, and deliuered it vnto him, which the Viceroy hauing receiued, forgaue him the rest. This flight of the English men grieued the Iesuites most, because they had lost such a pray, which they made sure account of, whereupon the Dutch Iesuite came to vs to aske vs if we knew thereof, saying, that if he had suspected so much, he would haue dealt otherwise, for that he said, hee once had in his hands of theirs a bagge wherein was fortie thousand Veneseanders (each Veneseander being two Pardawes) which was when they were in prison. And that they had alwayes put him in comfort, to accomplish his desire, vpon the which promise hee gaue them their money againe, which otherwise they shoulde not so lightly haue come by, or peraduenture neuer, as hee openly said: and in the ende he called them hereticks, and spies, with a thou∣sand other rayling spéeches, which he vttered against them. The Englishman that was become a Iesuite, hearing that his compani∣ons were gone, and perceiuing that the Iesu∣ites shewed him not so great fauour, neither vsed him so well, as they did at the first, re∣pented himselfe, and séeing he had not as then made any solemne promise, & being counsel∣led to leaue the house, & told that he could not want a liuing in the towne, as also that the Iesuites could not kéepe him there without he were willing to stay, so they could not ac∣cuse him of any thing: he told them flatly, that he had no desire to stay within the Cloyster. and although they vsed all the meanes they could to kéepe him there, yet hee would not stay, but hyred a house without the Cloyster, and opened shop, where he had good store of worke, and in the end married a Mesticos daughter of the towne, so that hee made his account, to stay there while he liued. By this Englishman I was instructed of al the waies, trades, and viages of the countrie, betwéene Aleppo and Ormus, and of all the ordinan∣ces and common customes, which they vsu∣ally hold during their Viage ouer land, as al∣so of the places and townes wher they passed. And since those Englishmens departures frō Goa, there neuer arriued any strangers ei∣ther English or others by land in the sayde countries, but onely Italyans which daylye traffique ouer land, and vse continuall trade going and comming that way.

About the same time there came into Goa from the Iland of Iapan, certaine Iesuites and with them, thrée Princes, being the chil∣dren of certaine Kings of that country, whol∣ly apparelled like Iesuites, not one of them aboue the age of sixtéene yeares, being min∣ded (by perswasions of the Iesuites, to trauel into Portingall, and from thence to Rome, to sée the Pope, therby to procure great pro∣fit, priueledges and liberties for the Iesuites, which was onely their intent: they continu∣ed in Goa, till the yeare 1584.* 1.86 and then set sayle for Portingall, and from thence trauel∣led into Spaine, whereby the King and all the Spanish Nobilitie, they were with great honour receiued, and presented with many gifts, which the Iesuits kept for themselues. Out of Spaine they roade to sée the Pope, where they obtained great priueledges and liberties, as in the description of the Iland of Iapen, I haue in part declared. That done, they trauelled throughout Italy, as to Ve∣nice, Mantua, Florence, and all other pla∣ces and dominions of Italy, wher they were

presented with many rich presents, and much honoured, by meanes of the great report the Iesuites made of them. To conclude they re∣turned againe vnto Madril, where with great honor they took their leaue of the King, with letters of commendation in their be∣halfes vnto the Viceroye, and all the Cap∣taines and Gouernours of India, and so they went to Lisbone, and there tooke shipping in Ano. 1586.* 1.87 and came in the ship called Saint Philip (which in her returne to Por∣tingall was taken by Captaine Drake: and after a long and troublesome Viage, arriued at Mosambique, where the ship receiued in her lading, out of an other shippe called the Saint Laurence, that had put in there, ha∣uing lost her Mastes, being laden in India, and bound for Portingall, where the shippe was spoyled: and because the time was farre spent, to get into India, the said Saint Phil∣lip, tooke in the lading of Saint Laurence, and was taken in her way returning home, by the Englishmen, as I saide before, and was the first ship that had beene taken com∣ming out of the East Indies: which the Por∣tingales tooke for an euill signe, because the ship bare the Kings owne name. But retur∣ning to our matter, the Princes and Iesuites of Iapan, the next yeare after arriued at Goa with great reioycing and gladnesse, for that it was verily thought, they had all béene dead: when they came thether, they were all thrée apparelled in cloth of Golde and Sil∣uer, after the Italian manner, which was the apparell that the Italian Princes and Noblemen had giuen them: they came the∣ther very liuely, and the Iesuits verie proud∣ly, for that by them, their Viage had beene performed. In Goa they stayed till the Mon∣son, or time of the windes came in to sayle for China, at which time they went from thence and so to China, & thence vnto Iapon, where (with great triumph and wondering of all the people) they were receiued and welcom∣ed home, to the furtherance and credite of the Iesuites, as the Booke declareth, which they haue written and set foorth in the Spanish tongue concerning their Viage, as well by water & by land, as also of the intertainment that they had in euerie place.

In the yeare 1584. in the month of Iune, there arriued in Goa many Ambassadours, as of Persia,* 1.88 Cambaia, and from the Samo∣ri••, which is called the Emperour, of the Malabares, and also from the King of Co∣chin: and among other thinges there was a peace concluded by the Samorijn & the Ma∣labares, with the Portingall, vpon conditi∣on that the Portingales should haue a Fort, vpon a certaine Hauen lying in the coast of Malabare, called Panane, ten miles ••rom Cal••cut, which was presently be 〈◊〉〈◊〉 built, and there with great costs and changes they raysed and erected a Fort, but because the ground is all Sandie, they could make no sure foundation, for it sunk continually, wher¦by they found it best to leaue it, after they had spent in making and keeping thereof at the least foure tunnes of Gold, and reaped no profit thereof, onely thinking thereby if the Samorijn should breake his word and come foorth (as oftentimes hee had done) that by meanes of that Hauen, they would keep him in where he should haue no place to come a∣broad, to doe them any more mischiefe. But seeing that the Samorijn had many other ha∣uens and places, from whence they might put foorth to worke them mischiefe, and as much as euer they did, although the Samo∣rijn protesteth not to know of it, as also that he could not let it, saying that they were Sea rouers, and were neither subiect vnto him, nor any man else. They left their Fort, and put no great trust in the Malabares, as be∣ing one of the most rebellious and trayterous nations in all the Indies, and make many a traueling Marchant poore, by reason the Sea coast is made by them so dangerous and peri∣lous to sayle by: for the which cause the Por∣tingales armie by Sea is yearely sent foorth out of Goa, onely to cleare the coast of them, yet are there many Malabares in diuers pla∣ces, which by rouing and stealing doe much mischiefe in the Countrie, both by water and by land, which kéepe themselues on the Sea side, where they haue their creekes to come forth, and to carie their prises in to hide them in the countrie. They dwell in straw houses vpon stone hilles, and rocks not inhabited, so that (to conclude) they can not be ouercome neither doe they care for Samorijns, nor any man else. There is a Hauen belonging to these ryuers, distant from Goa about twelue miles, and is called Sanguis••o, where many of those Rouers dwell, and doe so much mis∣chiefe that no man can passe by, but they re∣ceiue some wrong by them, so that there came dayly complaints vnto the Viceroye, who as then was named Don Francisco Mascharenhas, Earle of Villa Do••ta, who to remedie the same sent vnto the Samorijn, to will him to punish them: who returned the messenger againe with answere, that he had no power ouer them, neither yet could com∣maund them, as being subiect to no man, and gaue the Viceroy free libertie to punish them at his pleasure, promising that he should haue his aide therein. Which the Viceroy vnder∣standing, prepared an armie of fifteen Foists, ouer whom he made chiefe Captaine a Gen∣tleman,

his nephew called Don Iulianes Mascharenhas, giuing him expresse com∣mandement first to goe vnto the Hauen of Sanguisen, & vtterly to raze the same downe to the ground, which to effect, this fléete be∣ing at Sea, and comming to the said Hauen, the Admirall of the fléete asked counsel what was best to be done, because Sanguisen is an Iland lying within the coast, the ryuer run∣ing about it, with many Cliffes & shallowes in the entrance, so that at a low water men can hardly enter in. At the last they appoin∣ted that the Admirall with halfe the fléete should put in on the one side, and the Vice Admirall called Ioan Barriga, with the other halfe should enter on the other side, which be∣ing concluded among them, the Admiral en∣tred first, commaunding the rest to follow, and rowed euen to the Firme land, thinking they had come after: but the other Captaines that were all young Gentlemen and vnexpe∣rienced, began to quarell among themselues, who should be first or last, whereby the fléete was seperated, & some lay in one place, some in an other, vpon the droughts and shalowes, and could not stirre, so that they coulde not come to helpe the Admirall▪ neither yet stirre backward nor forwards. And when the Vice Admirall should haue put in, on the other side the Captaines that were with him would not obay him, saying he was no Gentleman, and that they were his betters, vppon these and such like p••ints, most of the Portingals enterprises doe stand, and are taken in hand, whereby most commonly they receiue the o∣uerthrow: and by the same meanes this fléete was likewise spoyled, and could not helpe themselues: which those of Sanguese•• per∣ceiuing, hauing forsaken their houses and be∣ing on the toppes of the hilles, and séeing that the Foistes lay without, one seperated from the other vpon the Cliffes and shallowes not being able to put off, and that the Admirall lay alone vppon the Strand, and coulde not stirre, they tooke courage, and in great num∣ber set vppon the Admirals Foiste, and put them all to the sword, except such as saued themselues by swimming. And although the Admirall might well haue saued himselfe, for that a slaue profered to beare him on his back, yet he would not, saying, that he had rather die honourably fighting against his enemie, then to saue his life with dishonour, so that he defended himselfe most valiantly. But when they came so many vpon him, that hee coulde no longer resist them▪ they slew him, & being de••d cut off his head, in presence of all y^e other Foistes: which done they stucke the head vp∣on a Pike, crying in mocking vnto the other Portingales, come and fetch your Captaine againe, to their no litle shame and dishonour, that in the meane time looked one vpon an o∣ther like Owles. In the ende they departed from thence with the fléete, euerie man seuer∣ally by themselues, like shéep without a shep∣heard, and so returned againe into Goa, with that great victorie. The Captaines were pre∣sently committed to prison, but each man excusing himselfe, were all discharged againe, great sorrowe being made for the Admirall, specially by the Viceroy, because hee was his brothers sonne, and much lamented by euery man, as being a man verie well beloued, for his courteous and gentle behauiour: the other Captaines to the contrarie being much bla∣med, as they well deserued. Presently there∣vpon they made ready an other armie with other Captaines, whereof Don Ieronimo Mascharenhas was Admirall, being cousin to the foresaid Admirall deceased, to reuenge his death. This fléete set foote on land, and withall their power entred among the hou∣ses, but the Sangueseans perceiuing them to come, that purposely watched for them, fled into the mountaines, leauing their strawe houses emptie: whether they could not be fol∣lowed, by reason of the wildnesse of the place, whereupon the Portingales burnt their hou∣ses, and cut down their trées, rasing al things to the ground, with the which distruction they departed thence, no man resisting them.

At the same time the rulers of Cochijn by commandement of the Viceroy, began to set vp a custome house in the towne, which till that time had neuer beene there: for the which cause the inhabitants rose vp, & would haue slaine them, that went about it. Whereupon they left it off, till such time as the new Vice∣roy came out of Portingall, called Don Du∣arede Meneses, and with the old Viceroy as∣sembled a counsell in Cochijn, where the go∣uernment was deliuered vnto him: and there he vsed such meanes, that by faire words and intreatie they erected their custome house, and got the townes mens good will, but more by compulsion then other wise. Which custome is a great profit to the King, by meanes of the traffique therein vsed, because there the Portingall ships doe make themselues ready, with their full lading to sayle from thence to Portingall.

The same yeare in the month of Septem∣ber, there arriued in Goa, a Portingal ship, called y^e Dom Iesus de Cara••a▪ that broght newes of foure ships more, that were on the way, with a new Viceroy called Don Du∣arte de Meneses: which caused great ioye throughout the Cittie, and al the Bels being rung as the manner is, when the first ship of euerie fleete arriueth in Goa out of Portin∣gall.

In that ship came certaine Canoniers being Netherlanders, that brought me let∣ters out of Holland, which was no small comfort vnto me. Not long after in the same month there arriued an other ship called Boa Vragen, wherein were many Gentlemen, and Knights of the Crosse▪ that came to serue the King in India: among which was one of my Lord Archbishops brethren, called Ro∣que da Fonseca, the other Lords were Don Iorgie Tubal de Meneses, chiefe standerd bearer to the King of Portingal, new chosen Captaine of Soffala, and Mosambique, in regard of certain seruice that he had in times past done for the king in India▪ Iohn Gomes da Silua newe Captaine of Ormus: Don Francesco Mascharenhas brother of Don Iulianes Mascharenhas, that was slaine in Sanguise••, as I said before, hee was to haue had the Captaines place of Ormus, but by meanes of his death, it was giuen vnto his brother Don Francesco, for the tearme of three yeares, after he that is in it had serued his full time.

In Nouember after, the other thrée ships arriued in Cochijn, and had sayled on the out side of Saint Laurence Iland, not put∣ting into Mosambique. The ship names were Santa Maria Arreliquias, and the Ad∣miral, As Chagas, or the fiue wounds. In her came the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses that had béene Captaine of Tanger in Afri∣ca, or Barbarie: and in this ship there were 9••0. Souldiers and Gentlemen, that came to safeconduct the Viceroy▪ besides the saylers that were aboue a 100. and had beene aboue seuen Monthes vpon the way, without tak∣ing land before they arriued at Cochin, wher they receiued the Viceroy with great solem∣nitie: and being landed he sent presently vnto the olde Viceroye to certifie him of his arri∣uall, and that hee should commit the gouern∣ment of the countrie vnto the Archbishoppe, to gouerne it in his absence, specially because the Archbishop & hee were verie good friends, and old acquaintance, hauing béene prisoners together in Barbarie when Don Sebastian King of Portingall was slaine: which the old Viceroy presently did, and went by Sea vnto Cochijn, that he might returne into Portin∣gall with the same ships, as the Viceroyes vse to do, for that after their time of Gouern∣ment is out, they may not stay any longer in India.

The 10. of Nouember Anno 1584. the ship called Carania went from Goa to Co∣chijn, there to take in Pepper, and other wares: and then doe all the Factors goe into Cochijn, to lade their wares, and when the ships are laden and readie to depart, they re∣turne againe to Goa, wher they stil remaine. In that shippe the olde Viceroye with many Gentlemen sayled to Cochijn.* 1.89 The fift of Februarie Anno 1585. the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses, arriued in Goa, where with great triumph and feasting hee was re∣ceiued.

In the month of Aprill the same yeare my fellow (and seruant to the Archbishop) called Barnard Burcherts, borne in Hamborough trauelled from Goa vnto Ormus. and from thence to Bassora, and from thence by lande through Babilon, Ierusalem, Damasco, and Aleppo: from whence he sent me two leters, by an Armenian, wherein hee certified me of all his Vsage which he performed with small charges, and lesse danger, in good fellowship, and verie merrie in the companie of the Caf∣fyles. From Aleppo he went to Tripoli in Suria, and there hee found certaine ships for England, wherein he sayled to London, and frō thence to Hamborough, which by letters from him written out of Hamborough I vn∣derstoode.

In the month of August, there came let¦ters frō Venice by land, that brought newes of the death and murther of the Prince of O∣range, a man of honourable memorie, as also of the death of Mons. the Duke of Alenson, or Amon, with the mariage of the Duke of Sauoy to the King of Spaines daughter.

The 20. of October, there arriued in Goa the ship called the S. Francis, that came out of Portingal, & with it came also some Dutch Canoniers, that brought mee letters out of my countrie, with newes of my father Hugh Ioosten of Harlems death. The first of No∣uember after▪ arriued at Cochiin, the Saint Alberto that came from Portingal. And the first of December that yeare there arriued in Cananor vpon the coast of Malabar the ship called the Saint Laurence, and from thence came to Goa, most of her men being sicke, & aboue 90. of them dead, hauing indured great miserie, and not once put into land. At that time ther wanted two of the fléete, that came from Lisborne in companie with her, & they were the S. Saluator, and the Admirall S. Iago, whereof they could heare no newes.

At the same time there came certaine Ita∣lians by land into Goa, and brought newes of the death of Pope Gregorie the 13. and of the election of the new Pope called Sixtus. At that time also the ships that came from Por∣tingall sayled to Cochijn to take in their la∣ding: which done in the month of Ianuarie Anno 1586 they sayled for Portingall.

In the month of May Anno 1586. let∣ters were brought into Goa, from the Cap∣taine of Soffala and Mosambique vnto the

Viceroy and the Archbishop, to certifie them of the casting away of the Admiral Saint Ia∣go, that set out of Portingall the yeare be∣fore being Anno 1585. whereof I spake be∣fore, she was cast away in this manner. The ship being come with a good speedy winde and wether, from the Cape de Bona Speranza, neere to Mosambique, they had passed (as they thought) all dangers▪ so that they needed not to feare any thing: yet it is good for the Master & others to be careful and keepe good watch, and not to stand too much vpon their owne cunning & conceites, as these did, which was the principal cause of their casting away and so they sayled betweene the Iland Saint Laurence and the Firme land, that runneth by the coast to Mosambique, which lyeth on the left hand, & the Iland of S. Laurence on the right hand, betweene the which Iland and the fast land▪ there are certain shallowes called the India, fiftie Spanish miles distant from the Iland of S. Laurence, and seuentie miles from the Firme land, right against the countrie of Soffala, vnder 22. degrees, on the South side of the Equinoctiall, and from thence to Mosambique is 90. miles. Those shallowes are most of cleare Corrale, verie sharpe both of blacke, white, and gréene co∣lour, which is verie dangerous: therefore it is good reason they should shunne them, and surely the Pilots ought to haue great care, specially such as are in the Indian ships, for that the whole ship and safetie thereof lyeth in their hands, and is onely ruled by them, and that by expresse commaundement from the King, so that no man may contrary them. They being thus betwéene the lands, and by all y^e Saylors iudgements hard by the drow¦thes of India, the Pilot tooke the height of the Sunne, and made his account that they were past the shallowes▪ commaunding the Master to make all the sayle hee could, and freely to sayle to Mosambique, without any let or stay. And although there were diuers Saylors in the shippe, that likewise had their Cardes, some to learne, other for their plea∣sures, as diuers Officers, the Master and the chiefe Boatwayne, that said it was better to keepe alooffe, specially by night, and that it would be good to hold good watch, for y^t they found they had not as then past the shal∣lowes: yet the Pilot saide the contrary, and would needes shew that he only had skill, and power to commaunde: (as commonly the Portingales by pride do cast themselues away, because they wil follow no mans coun∣sell and be vnder no mans subiection specially when they haue authoritie) as it happened to this Pilot that would heare no man speake, nor tak•• my counsell but his owne, & there∣fore commaunded that they should doe as he appointed them, whereupon they hoysted all their Sayles, & sayled in that sort till it was midnight, both with good wind & faire wether but the Moone not shining, they fell full vpon the Shallowes, being of cleare white Co∣rall, and so sharpe, that with the force of wynd and water that draue the shippe vpon them, it cut the shippe in two peeces, as if it had beene sawed in sunder: so that the keele and two Oarlops lay still vpon the ground, and the vpper part being driuen somewhat further, at the last stuck fast, the maste bee∣ing also broken, wherewith you might haue heard so great a crie, that all the aire did sound therewith, for that in the shippe, (being Admiral) there was at the least fyue hundreth persons, among the wich were 30. women, with manie Iesuites and Fryers, so that as then there was nothing else to bee done, but euery man to shrifte, bidding each other farewel, and asking al men forgiuenes, with weeping and crying, as it may well be thought. The Admirall called Fernando de Mendosa, the Maister, the Pylot, and ten or twelue more, presentlie entred into the small boate, keeping it with naked Rapiers, that no more should enter, saying they would goe see, if there were anie drie place in the shallowes, whereon they might worke, to make a Boate of the peeces of the broken shippe, therein to sayle vnto the shore, and so to saue their liues, wherewith they put them that were behind in some small comfort, but not much. But when they had rowed about, and finding no drie place, they durst not re∣turne again vnto the Shippe, least the boate would haue beene ouerladen, and so drowned, and in the Shippe they looked for no helpe, wherefore in fyne they concluded to row to land, hauing about 12 boxes of Marmalade, with a pipe of wine, and some Bisket, which in hast they had thrown into the boat, which they dealt among them, as néed required, and so commending themselues to God, they rowed forwardes towards the coast, and af∣ter they had béene 17 daies vpon the sea, they fell with great hunger, thirst and labor on the land, where they saued themselues. The rest that stayed in the ship, séeing the boate came not againe, it may wel be thought what case they were in. At the last one side of the vpper part of the ship, betwéene both the vpper Oar∣lops, where the great boat lay, burst out, and the Boate being halfe burst, began to come forth: but because there was small hope to be had, and fewe of them had little will to proue masteryes, no man layd hand there∣on, but euerie man sate looking one vpon an other. At the last an Italian, called Cy∣prian

Grimoaldo, rose vp, and taking cou∣rage vnto him, sayd, why are we thus a∣bashed? Let vs seeke to helpe our selues, and see if there be any remedie to saue our liues: wherewith presentlie he leapt into the boat, with an instrument in his hand, and be∣gan to make it cleane, whereat some others began to take courage, and to helpe him, as well as they could, with such things as first came to their handes: so that in the end there leaped at the least foure score and ten persons into it, and many hung by the handes vppon the boat swimming after it: amōg the which were some women: but because they would not sinke the boate, they were forced to cut off the fingers, handes, and armes of such as held thereon, and let them fall into the sea, and manie they threw ouer bord, being such as had not wherewith to defend themselues. Which done they set forwards, committing themselues to God, with the greatest cry and pitifullest noyse that euer was heard, as though heauen and earth had gone together, when they tooke their leaue of such as stayed in the Shippe. In which manner hauing rowed certaine dayes, and hauing but small store of victuals, for that they were so manie in the boate, that it was readie to sinke, it be∣ing likewise verie leake, and not able to hold out: in the ende they agreed among them∣selues to chuse a Captaine, to whome they would obey, and doe as he commanded: and among the rest they chose a gentle man, a Mestico of India, and swore to obey him: hee presentlie commanded to throwe some of them ouer bord, such as at that tyme had least meanes or strength to helpe them∣selues: among the which there was a Car∣penter, that had not long before, holpen to dresse the Boate, whoe seeing that the Lot fell vpon him, desired them to giue him a peece of Marmalade and a Cuppe of wine, which when they had done, he willingly suf∣fered himselfe to bee throwne ouer bord into the Sea, and so was drowned. There was an other of those, that in Portingale are called New Christians: he béeing allotted to be cast ouer bord into the Sea, had a younger Brother in the same Boate, that sodainelie rose vp and desired the Captaine that hee would pardon and make free his Brother, and let him supplie his place, say∣ing, My Brother is older and of better knowledge in the world then I, and there∣fore more fit to liue in the world, and to helpe my sisters and friendes in their need: so that I had rather die for him, then to liue without him. At which request they let the elder Brother loose, and threwe the younger at his owne request into the sea, that swōme at the least sixe howers after the boate. And although they held vp their hands with naked rapiers willing him that hee shuld not once come to touch the Boate, yet laying hold thereon, and hauing his hand half cut in two, he would not let go: so that in the end they were constrained to take him in a∣gaine: both the which brethren I knew, and haue bene in company with them: in this mi∣serie and paine they were ••0 daies at sea. & in the end got to land where they found the Ad∣miral and those that were in the other boate. Such as stayed in the ship, some tooke bords, deals, and other péeces of wood, & bound them together (which y^e Portingals cal bangadas) euery man what they could catch▪ all hop∣ing to saue their liues, but of all those there came but two men safe to shore. They that before had taken land out of the boates, hau∣ing escaped that danger, fell into an other, for they had no sooner set foote on shore, but they were by the Mores called Caffares, Inhabi∣tants of that coūtry spoiled of al their cloaths, so y^t they left not so much vpon their bodies, as would hide their priuie members: where∣by they indured great hunger and miserie w^t manie other mischieffes, which would be ouer tedious to rehearse. In the end they came vnto a place, where they found a factor of the Captaines of Soffala & Mosambique, & he holp them as he might, and made means to send them vnto Mosambique, and from thence they went into India, where I knew manie of them, and haue often spoken with them. Of those that were come safe to shore, some of thē died before they got to Mosam∣bique, so that in all, they were about 60 per∣sons that saued themselues: all the rest were drowned & smothered in the ship, & there was neuer other newes of y^e ship then as you haue heard. Hereby you may consider the pride of this Pilot, who because he would be coūselled by no man, cast away that ship with so many men: wherefore a Pilot ought not to haue so great authority. that in time of need he should reiect and not heare the counsell of such as are most skilfull. The Pilote, when he came into Portingale, was committed to prison, but by giftes and presents he was let loose, and an other shippe, beeing the best of the Fleet, that went for India, in Anno 1588. committed vnto him, not without great curses and euill wordes of the Mothers, Si∣sters, wiues and Chidren of those that pe∣rished in the ship, which all cryed vengeance on him: and comming with thy ship where∣in he then was placed, called the S. Thomas, he had almost laid her on y^• same place▪ where the other was cast away: hut day comming

on, they romde themselues off, and so escaped: yet in their voiage homeward to Portingal, the same shippe was cast away by the Cape de bona Speranza, with the Pilot and all her men, whereby much speech arose, saying it was a iust iudgement of God against him for making so many widdowes and fatherles children, whereof I will speake in another place. This I thought good to set downe at large, because men might see that many a shippe is cast away by the headinesse of the gouernours, and vnskilfulnesse of the pilotes: wherfore it were good to examine the persons before a shippe be committed vnto them, spe∣cially a shippe of such a charge, and wherein consisteth the welfare or vndoing of so many men, together with their liues, and impoue∣rishing of so many a poore wife and child: this losse happened in the month of August, An. 1••••5.* 1.90

* 1.91In May An. 1586. two ships laden with ••are set saile out of the hauen of Chaul, in Ind••a, that belonged vnto certaine Por∣tingalles inhabitantes of Chaul, the ow∣ners being in them: those shippes should haue sayled to the straites of Mecca, or the ••dde sea, where the said marchantes vsed to traficque: but they were taken on the Sea by two Turkish Galleyes, that had beene made in the innermost partes of the straites of M••a, by Cairo, on the corner of the redde sea, in a towne called Sues: the sayde Galleyes began to doe great mischiefe, & put all the Indian marchants in great feare.

The same month there was a great army, prepared in Goa, both of Fustes and gallies, such as in many yeares had not béene séene, and was appointed to saile to the red sea, to driue the Turkish Galleyes away, or els to fight with them if they could: they were al∣so commanded by the Viceroy to winter their shippes in Ormus, and then to enter into the straights of Persia, lying behind Ormus, and to offer their seruice to Xatamas K. of Per∣••, against the Turke their common enemy, thereby to trouble him on all sides, if they had brought their purpose to effect: but it fel out otherwise, as hereafter you shall heare: for Chiefe of this army, there was appointed a Gentleman, named Rioy Gonsalues da Can••, who once had béene Captaine of Ormus, being a very fatte and grosse man, which was one of the chiefe occasions of their euill fortune, and with him went the princi∣pallest soldiers and gentlemen of all India, thinking to winne great honor thereby: this army being ready, & minding to sayle to the redde sea, they found many calmes vpon the way so that they indured much miserie, and begunne to die like dogges, as well for want of drinke as other necessaries: for they had not made their account to stay so long vpon the way, which is alwaies their excuse if any thing falleth out contrary to their mindes: this was their good beginning, and as it is thought a preparatiue to further mischiefe: for comming to the redde sea, at the mouth thereof they met the Turkish Gallies, where they had a long fight, but in y^e end the Portin∣gals had the ouerthrow, & escaped as well as they might, with great dishonour, and no lit∣tle losse: and the Turkes being victorious, sayled to the coast of Abex or Melinde, where they tooke certaine townes, as Pate and Braua, that as then were in league with the Portingalles, there to strengthen them∣selues, and thereby to reape a greater benefit, by indamaging the Portingall, and lying vn∣der their noses. The Portingall armie ha∣uing spedde in this manner, went vnto Or∣mus, there to winter themselues, and in the meane time to repaire their armie, and to heale their sicke soldiers, whereof they had many: and so when time serued to fulfill the Viceroyes commandement in helping Xata∣mas, thinking by that meanes to recouer their losses: being ariued in Ormus, and ha∣uing repaired their Fustes, & the time com∣ming on, the General by reason of his fatnes and corpulent bodie stayed in Ormus, ap∣pointing Lieuetenant in his place, one cal∣led Pedro Homen Pereira, (who although he was but a meane gentleman, yet was hee a very good soldier, and of great experience) commanding them to obey him in all things, as if he were there in person himselfe: giuing them in charge, as they sailed along the coast, to land vpon the coast of Arabia, there to pu∣nish certain pirates, that held in a place called Nicola, and spoiled such as passed to and fro vpon the seas, and did great hurt to the ships and marchants of Bassora, that traffiqued in Ormus, whereby the trafique to the saide towne of Ormus was much hindered, to the great losse and vndoing of many a marchant. With this commission they set forwarde with their Lieuetenant, and being come to Nicola, where they ran their fustes on shore, so that they lay halfe dry vpon the sand: euery man in generall leaped on land, without any order of battaile, as in all their actions they vse to doe: which the Lieuetenant perceiuing, would haue vsed his authoritie, and haue pla∣ced them in order, as in warlike affaires is requisite to be done: but they to the contrarie would not obay him, saying hee was but a Bore, & that they were better Gentlemen & soldiers then he: and with these and such like presumptuous spéeches, they went on their course, scattering here & there in all disorders

like shéepe without a shepheard, thinking all the world not sufficient to containe them, and euery Portingall to bee a Hercules and so strong, that they could beare the whole world vpon their sholders, which the Arabians (be∣ing within the land and most on horsebacke) perceyuing and séeing their great disorder, & knowing most of their Fustes to lie drie vp∣on the strand, and that without great payne, and much labour they coulde not hastily set them on floate, presently compassed them a∣bout, and being ringed in manner of a halfe Moone, they fell vpon them, and in that sorte draue them away, killing them as they list, till they came vnto their Fustes: and because they could not presently get their Fustes into the water, through fear and shame they were complled to fight, where likewise many of them were slaine, and not aboue fiftie of them escaped that had set foote on land: and so being gotten into their Fustes, they rowed a∣way. In this ouerthrow there were slayne aboue 800. Portingalles, of the oldest & best soldiers in all India, and among them was a Trumpetter, being a Netherlander, who be∣ing in the thickest of the fight, not farre from the Portingalles ensigne, and séeing the En∣signe-bearer throw downe his Ensigne, the easier to escape and saue his life, and that one of the Arabians had taken it vp, casting his Trumpet at his backe, he ranne in great fu∣rie, and with his rapier killed the Arabian that held it, and brought it againe among the Portingals, saying it was a great shame for them to suffer it so to bee carryed away, and in that manner he held it at the least a whole hower, and spoyled many of the Arabians that sought to take it from him, in such man∣ner, that he stood compassed about with deade men: and although hee might haue saued himselfe, if hee woulde haue left the Ensigne, yet he would not doe it, till in the ende there came so many vpon him, that they killed him, where he yeéelded vp the Ghost, with the en∣signe in his armes, and so ended his dayes with honour: which the Portingalles them∣selues did confesse, and often acknowledged it, commending his valour, which I thought good to set downe in this place for a perpetu∣all memorie of his valiant mind. The Lieue∣tenant perceyuing their disorder, and how it would fall out, wisely saued himselfe, and got into the Fustes, where hee behelde the ouer∣throw, and in the ende with the emptie ves∣sels he turned againe to Ormus, without do∣ing any thing else, to the great griefe and shame of all the Indian soldiers, being the greatest ouerthrow that euer the Portingals had in those countries, or wherein they lost so many Portingalles together: among the which was the Archbishoppes brother••▪ and many other young and lustie G••tle∣men, of the principallest in all Por••n∣gall.

At the same time the Queene of O••mus came to Goa, being of Mahomet religion, as all her auncesters had beene before her, and as then were contributarie to the Por∣tingall. She caused her selfe to be christened, and was with great solemnitie brought into the Towne, where the Viceroy was her Godfather, and named her Donna Phillip∣pa, after the King of Spaines name, being a faire white woman, very tall and comely, and with her likewise a brother of hers, be∣ing verie young▪ was also christened, and then with one Mathias Dalburquer••k that had beene Captain of Ormus, she sailed to Por∣tingall, to present her selfe to the king. She had married with a Portingall Gentleman called Anton▪ Dazeuedo Con••nho, to whome the king in regarde of his mariage gaue the Captaine shippe of Ormus, which is worth aboue two hundred thousande duc∣kets, as I said before. This Gentleman af∣ter hee had beene maried to the Queene a∣bout halfe a yeare, liuing very friendly and louingly with her, hee caused a shippe to bee made, therewith to saile to Ormus, there to take order for the rentes and reuenewes be∣longing to the Queene his wife: but his de∣parture was so grieuous vnto her, that she desired him to take her with him, saying, that without him she could not liue▪ but because he thought it not as then conuenient, hee de∣sired her to be content, promising to returne againe with all the speede he might. Where∣vppon hee went to Barde••, which is the vt∣termost parte of the Riuer entering into Goa, about thrée myles off: and while hee continued there, staying for winde and wea∣ther. The Quéene (as it is saide) tooke so great gréefe for his departure, that she dyed, the same day that her husbande set saile and put to sea, to the great admiration of all the Countrey, and no lesse sorrowe, because shee was the first Quéene in those countries that had béene christened, forsaking her kingdome and high estate, rather to die a Christian, and married with a meane Gentleman, then to liue like a Quéene vnder the lawe of Ma∣homet, and so was buried with great honor according to her estate.

In the month of August 1586 there ariued a man of Mosambique in Goa y^t came from Portingal in y^e ship y^t shold saile to Malacca,* 1.92 that brought newes vnto the Viceroy, how the ship called the Boa Viagen, that in the

yeare before sailed from India towards Por∣tingall, was cast away by the cape de Bona Speranza, where it burst in peeces beeing o∣uerladen: for they do cōmonly ouerlade most of their ships,•• & affirmed that the ship had at the least •• hādfull high of water within it be∣fore it departed frō Cochiin, & althogh before their ships set sayle, they put the Master and other Officers to their othes, therby to make them confesse if the ship be strong and suffici∣ent to performe the voyage, or to let them know the faults, (which vpō their said oathes is certefied, by a protestation made, wherun∣to the Officers set their handes:) yet though the ship haue neuer so many faultes, they will neuer confesse them, because they will not loose their places, and profit of the Voyage: yea, although they doe assuredly knowe the ship is not able to continue the Voyage: for that couetousnes ouerthrowing wisedome & pollicie, maketh them reiect all feare: but when they fall into the danger, then they can speake faire, and promise many thinges. In that sort most of the ships depart frō Cochiin so that if any of them come safelie into Por∣tingall, it is only by the will of God: for o∣therwise it were impossible to escape, because they ouer lade them, and are so badly proui∣ded otherwise, with little order among their men: so that not one ship commeth ouer, but can shew of their great dangers by ouerla∣ding, want of necessaries and reparations of the ship, together with vnskilfull Saylers, yet for all these dayly & continuall dangers, there is no amendment, but they daily grow worse and worse.

In this ship called the Boa Viagen were many Gentlemen, of the best and principal∣lest that had serued a long time in India, tra∣uelling as then vnto Portingall with their certificates, to get some reward for their seruice, as the manner is: and because it was one of the best and greatest ships of that fléet, the Ambassador of Xatamas King of Persia went therein to procure a League with the King of Spaine, & to ioyne with him against the Turke their common enemie: but he be∣ing drowned, the Persian would send no more Ambassadors, and yet hee is still in League and good friendshippe with the Portingalles. The worst ship that sayleth from Cochin to Portingall, is worth at the least a million of gold, & this was one of the best ships, wherby may be considered, what great losse commeth by the casting away of one of their ships, be∣sides the men: for there passeth neuer a yere, but one or two of them are cast away eyther in going or comming.

In the month of September the same yere 1586. there ariued foure ships out of Por∣tingall in Goa, called the Saint Thomas, S. Saluador, the Arrelickias, and Bon-Iesus de Carania, but of their Admirall S. Phillip they had no newes, since their departure from Lisbone.

On the last of Nouember, the same ships departed from Goa: some along the coast of Malabar to take in their lading of Pepper, and from thence to Cochiin, where common¦ly one or two of them are laden with pepper, but other wares are only laden from Cochi∣in. At the same time there was a ship called the Ascention that lay in Goa, & had made certaine voiages to China and Iapan: which ship was brought by the Factors for pepper, because the ship Carama by reason of her old∣nes, was broken in Cochiin, and set vpon y^e stockes to be new made, but not finished by reason of certaine controuersie that fell a∣mong the Factors.

In this shippe called Nossa Senhora da Sancao, my Lord the Archbishop sayled vnto Portingall, by reason of certaine quarels newly begun betweene the Viceroy and o∣ther Councellors, and the Archbishop. And although by the Viceroy, all the Councell, and Gentlemen, and communaltie of Goa, he was intreated not to leaue them, yet hee would not be disswaded from his purpose, but went to ride vnto the King, of whom he was well beloued, which the Viceroy and others liked not very well of, fearing hee should giue some information to the king, which would be smally to their profit, and in that minde he vndertooke his Voyage, discharging all his seruants, sauing some that he kept about him for his seruice, leauing no man in his house, but only his Steward, and my selfe to receiue his rents and keepe his house, and because as then the golden Iubileo or pardon of Roome was newly brought into the Indies, (called La Santa Crusada) being granted to the end, that with the mony that should bee gathered by vertue therof, the Captiues and Prisoners in Africa or Barbary, that had beene taken Prisoners in the battaile, wherein Don Se∣bastian king of Portingall was slaine, shuld be redéemed, which was sent vnto the Arch∣bishop, being apointed the Romane Aposto∣licke Commissarie, &c. for the same: made me the general Clarke throughout al India, to kéepe account of the said receits, & gaue me one of the keyes of the chest, wherin the monie lay, with a good stipend, and other pro∣fits belonging to the same, during the time of his absence: thereby the rather to binde m•• that I should remaine in his house, and keep the same till his returne againe, as I had pro∣mised

vnto him: And so he set sayle from Co∣ch••n in the month of Ianuary, Anno 1587.* 1.93 his Pilot being the same man that cast the Saint Iago away vpon the flats of India, as it is said before.

The ships at that time being ready to set sayle, one some foure or fiue dayes after the o∣ther, as they were laden, because they obserue a certaine order therein, the better to register al their wares and merchandises, it so fel out, y^t all the other ships being dispatched, the Ar∣relikias only was the last that laded: which hauing taken in her whole lading, the Offi∣cers and some of the Factors being bribed, suffered some of the ballast to be taken out, & in place thereof laded Cinamon, because at that time Cinamon was risen in Portingall, and at a very high price, and therefore the of∣ficers and Factors by giftes aforesaid suffe∣red it to be laden in that maner, as hauing no other place to lade it in. You must vnderstād that when the time commeth to set ••aile, the ships lying at anker about a mile within the sea, where they receiued their lading, (the rea∣son why they lie so farre, is because it is sum∣mer time, and there the sea is as calme and still, as if it were within the land.) A trumpet is sounded throughout all the towne of Co∣chiin to call them all on bord, wherewith all that will saile, doe presently come downe ac∣companied with their friendes, which in smal boates called Tones and Pallenges bring them abord, with great store of bread and such like victuals: so that you shall manie times sée the shippes hang round about with boats, at the least three or foure hundred, with such a noise and reioycing, as it is wonderfull to heare, and somtimes the ships are so laden, that the Cables touch the water, and besides that the hatches couered with diuers chestes, seauen or eight one aboue another, hauing no other place to set them in, for y^e vnder the hat∣ches they are so stuffed, that there is not an emptie roome: so that when they set saile▪ they know not where to begin, nor how to rule the ship, neyther can they well for a month af∣ter tell how to place all things in order, and so was it with this ship, which being thus prepared, the Viador da Fazenda, or the Kinges officers came abord, asking them if the shippe were readie to set sayle and depart, they say it was ready, and he hauing made a protestation or certificate thereof, the officers set to their hands, as some say, but others de∣nie it, & presently he commanded thē to wind vp their cables, and hoyse anker, as the man∣ner is, and so let their sailes fall, with a great crie of Boa Voyage, or God send them good fortune, and a merry Voyage: all the boates being still abord, which commonly doe hang at her at the least a mile, or halfe a mile within the sea, because it is calme.

This ship called the Arrelikia beginning in this manner to sayle, among other roma•• that stood vpon the hatches, there were cer∣taine hennes cages, from whence certaine hennes flew out, whereupon euery man clai∣med them for his owne: and vpon a Sunday, (as in such cases it is commonly seene) they ranne all on a heape vpon the one side: wher∣by the ship being light of Balast, and laden with many chestes aboue the hatches (as I said before) it swaied so much on the one side, that by little and little it suncke cleane vnder the water: so that not aboue a handfull of the maste could be seene aboue the water. The people leaped into the ••oats, that as yet were hanging about the ship, which was good For∣tune for them, otherwise there had not one es∣caped aliue: but by that meanes they were all saued, the slaues onely excepted that were bound with iron chaines and could not stirre and so they were drowned. God knoweth what riches was lost in her for nothing was saued but some few chestes that stood aboue the hatches, which the Duckers got vp, and yet the goods in them was in a manner spoy∣led, and the rest vtterly lost: by this it may be considered what manner the Portingales vse in lading of their ships, and that it is to bee thought, that as many ships as are cast a∣way, whereof there hath bin heard no newes or tydinges, are onely lost by meanes of euill order and gouernment. This being so vn∣luckily fallen out, the Marchants vsed all the speed and meanes they could▪ by witnesses to make protestation against the Officers and the Factors of the pepper, that they might be punished for taking out the Ballast, but they kept themselues out of the way, and by pro∣longing of time it was forgotte•• ••nd nothing done therein: so that the Marchants that had receiued all the losse▪ were glad to put it vp.

In the same moneth came newes out of Malacca, that it was in great danger & that many died there for hunger, as also that the ship that went from Portingall thether, was forced to stay there, because they had no vic∣tuals to dispatch it away: and likewise that the straight of Sumaria was kept by the ene∣my, so that there could no shippes passe that way to China or Iapan. This was done by the Kinges of Sumaria, that is to say, the kinges of Achem and ••or lying by M••lac∣ca vpon the Firme land, which rebelled a∣gainst the Portingales in Malacca vppon a certaine iniurie done vnto them by the Cap∣taine there. These newes put Goa in a great alteration, for that their principall traffique is to China, Malacca, and Iapan, and the

Il••ndes bordering on the same, which by me••nes of those warres was wholly hinde∣•• whereupon great numbers of ••ustes, gal∣lies, and ships were prepared in Goa, to re∣lieue Malacca, and all the townes men tas∣ked euery one at a certaine summe of mony, besides the money that was brought from o∣ther places, and men taken vp to serue in the ships: for by means of their late ouerthrowes and losse of ships, India was at that time ve∣ry weake of men.

In the month of May, Anno 1587. there came a ship or galley of Mosambique vnto Goa, bringing newes that the ship S. Phil∣lip had bin there, and taken in the lading of pepper that was in the ship called S. Lauren∣••, that had ariued there, in her Voyage to∣wards Portingall, and was all open aboue the hatches and without mastes, most of her goods being throwne into the sea: whereby miraculouslie they saued their liues▪ and by fortune put into Mosambique. In this ship called S. Phil••ip, were the young Princes, the kings children of Iapan, as is before de∣clared. From Mosambique came the same Galley that brought the newes to Goa, the same Galley likewise brought newes of the Army that was sent out of Goa in Decem∣ber, 1586. being the yeare before, vnto the coast of Melinde or Abex, to reuenge the iniurie which they had receiued in the Fléete: whereof Ruy G••nsalues da Camara was Captaine, as I saide before, as also to punish the townes that at the same time had vnited themselues with the Turke, and broken league with the Portingales. Of this armie was Generall, a gentleman called Martin 〈◊〉〈◊〉 de Mello: wherewith comming vpon the coast of Abex, or Melinde, which lyeth betweene Mosambique and the red sea, they went on land, & because the Turks whome they sought for, were gone home through the read sea, they determined to pu∣nish and plague the townes that had fauored the Turkes, and broken their aliance with them, and to the same end entred into the countrie as farre as the townes of Pate and B••, that little thought of them, and easily ouerr••n them, because most part of the peo∣ple fled to saue themselues, & left the townes: whereby the Portingales did what pleased them, burning the townes, and razing them to the ground, with others that lay about them and among those that fled to saue thē∣selues, they tooke the King of Pate, whose head in great furie they caused to bee striken off and brought it vnto Goa, where for cer∣taine daies it stood vpon a maste in the middle of the towne for an e••ample to all others, as also in signe of victorie: wherewith the Por∣tingales began to be somewhat incouraged. and so they went from thence to Ormus, and from Ormus they were to goe help the King of Persia, as the Viceroy had commanded them: but being at Ormus, many of their men fell sick and died, among the which their Generall Martin Alfonso da Metto was one, whereupon they returned againe vnto Goa, without doing any other thing.

The same armie sayling to the coast of Abex, and falling on the Island of Zamzi∣bar, which lieth vnder sixe degrees on the south side, about 70. miles frō Pate, towards Mosambique, about 18. miles from the Firme land, there they found the Saint Sal∣uador that came from Cochiin, sayling to∣wards Portingall being all open, hauing throwne all her goods ouerboard, sauing on∣ly some pepper which they could not come at, and were in great danger, holding themselues by force of pumping aboue the water, & vp∣pon the point to leaue, being all wearie and readie to sink, which they certainly had done, if by great good fortune they had not met with the armie, which they little thought to finde in those parts. The Armie tooke the shippe with them to Ormus, where the rest of the pepper and goods remaining in her, were vn∣laden, and the ship broken in péeces, and of the bordes they made a lesser shippe, wherein the men that were in the great ship with the rest of the goods that were saued in her, sailed to Portingall, & after a long and wearisome voiage, ariued there in safetie.

The 17. of September, 1587.* 1.94 a Galliot of Mosambique arriued at Goa, bringing newes of the ariual of foure ships in Mosam∣biqu•• that came out of Portingall: Their names were S. Antony, S. Francisco, our Lady of Nazareth▪ and S. Alberto: but of the S. Mary, that came in company w^c them from Portingall, they had no newes, but afterwards they heard that shee put backe a∣gaine to Portingal, by reasō of some defaults in her, and also of the foule weather. Eight dayes after the said 4. ships ariued in Goa, where with great ioy they were receiued.

At the same time the Fort called Colum∣bo, which the Portingales hold in the Island of Seylon, was besieged by the king of Sey∣lon, called Ram, and in great danger to bee lost: which to deliuer, there was an armie of fustes and gallies sent from Goa: whereof was Generall Barnaldin de Carualho.

And at the same time departed another ar∣mie of many ships, fustes, and gallies, with great numbers of souldiers, munition, victu∣als, and other warlike prouisions, therewith to deliuer Malacca, which as then was be∣sieged and in great misery, as I saide before:

thereof was generall Don Paulo de Lyma Pereira, a valiant Gentleman, and an olde souldier, who not long before had bin Cap∣taine of Chaul, and being very fortunate in all his enterprises, was therefore chosen to bée Generall of that fléet. The last of Nouem∣ber, the foure ships afore said departed from Goa to lade at Cochiin, and from thence to saile for Portingale.

In December after, while the Fort of Columbo in the Island of Seylon, was still besieged, the towne of Goa made out ano∣ther great fléete of ships and gallies, for the which they tooke vp many men within the Citie, and compelled them to goe in the ships because they wanted men, with a great con∣tribution of mony raysed vpō the Marchants and othrr inhabitants to furnish the same: of the which armie was appointed general, one Manuel de Sousa Courinho, a braue gentle man and souldier, who in times past had bin Captaine of the said Fort of Columbo, and had withstood another besieging: whereup∣pon the king put him in great credit, and ad∣uanced him much, and after the Viceroyes death, he was Viceroy of India, as in time & place we shall declare. He with his armie a∣riued in the Isle of Seylon, where hee ioyned with the other armie that went before, and placed themselues in order to giue battaile to Ra••, who perceiuing the great number of his enemies, brake vp his siege and forsooke the Fort, to the great reioycing of the Por∣tingales, and hauing strengthned the Forte with men and victuals, they returned againe to Goa, where in the month of March, Anno 1••88.* 1.95 they were receiued with great ioy.

In the month of Aprill the same yeare, the armie of Don Paulo de Lyma, that went to Malacca, ariued in Goa with victorie, ha∣uing fired Malacca, and opened the passage againe to China and other places, the maner whereof was this: In their way as they pas∣sed the straight of Malacca, they met with a ship belonging to the king of Achein in Sa∣matra, who was a deadly enemie to the Por∣tingales, and the principal cause of the besieg∣ing of Malacca. In the same ship was the Daughter of the said king of Achein, which he sent to be maried to the king of ••oor, ther¦by to make a new aliance with him against the Portingales, and for a present sent him a goodly péece of Ordinance, whereof the like was not to be found in all India, and there∣fore it was afterwards sent into Portingale as a present to the king of Spaine in a ship of Malacca, which after was cast away in the Island of ••e••cera, one of the Flemmish I∣landes. where the same peece with much la∣bor was weighed vp, and laid within the for∣tresse of the same Isle, because it is so heauie that it can hardly be caried into Portingale. But to the matter, they tooke the ship with the kings daughter, and made it al good prize, and by it they were aduertised what had pas∣sed betweene the kings of Achein, and Ioor: so that presently they sent certaine souldiers on land, and marching in order of bat∣taile, they set vppon the towne of Ioor, that was sconsed and compassed about with woodden stakes, most of the houses being of straw: which whē the people of the towne perceiued, and saw the great number of men and also their resolution, they were in great feare, and as many as could, fledde and saued themselues in the countrie: to conclude the Portingales entred the towne▪ and set it on fire, vtterly spoyling and destroying it, razing it euē with the ground, & slaying al they foūd, and taking some prisoners, which they led a∣way Captiues, and found within the towne at the least 2500, brasse péeces great & small, which were al brought into India. You must vnderstand that some of them were no grea∣ter than Muskets▪ some greater, and some ve∣ry great, being very cunningly wrought with figures and flowers, which the Italians and Portingales that haue denyed their faith, and become Mahometistes, haue taught them: whereof there are many in India, and are those indéede that doe most hurt, when they haue done any murther or other villanie fea∣ring to be punished for the same, to saue their liues they runne ouer by the firme land a∣mong the Heathens and Mores, and there they haue great stipendes and wages of the Indian kinges and Captaines of the land. Seauen or eight yeares before my comming into India, there were in Goa certain Trū∣peters and Cannonyers being Dutchmen, & Netherlanders, and because they were reiec∣ted and scorned by the Portingales in India, (as they scorn all other nations in the world) as also for that they could get no pay, & when they asked it, they were presently abused and cast into the gallies, and there compelled to serue. In the end they tooke counsell toge∣ther, and seeing they could not get out of the countrie, they secretly got into the firme land of Balagate and went vnto Hidalcan, where they were gladly receiued, and very well en∣tertained with great payes liuing like Lords: & there being in dispaire denide their faithes, although it is thought by some that they re∣maine still in their owne religion, but it is most sure that they are maried in those coun∣tries with Heathen women, and were liuing when I came from thence: by this meanes are the Portingales the causes of their owne mischiefes, onely through their pride, & hardi∣nes, and make rods to scourge thēselues with∣all, w^c I haue onely shewed in respect of those

cast péeces, & other martiall weapons, which the Indians haue learned of the Portingals, and Christians, whereof in times past they had no vnderstanding: and although they had placed all those péeces in very good order, yet it should seeme they knew not howe to shoote them off, or to vse them as they should, as it appeared hereby, for that they presently for∣sooke them, and left them for the Portingals. With this victory the Portingals were ve∣ry proude, and with great glorie entred into Malacca, wherein they were receyued with great triumph, as it may well bee thought, being by them deliuered from great miserie, wherein they had long continued. Which y^e king of Achein hearing, and that his daugh∣ter was taken prisoner, he sent his ambassa∣dour to Don Panto de Lyma with great presentes, desiring to make peace with him, which was presently granted, and all the waies to Malacca were opened, and al kinds of marchandises and victuailes brought the∣ther, which before had béene kept from them, whereat was much reioycing. This done, & order being taken for all things in Malacca, they returned againe to Goa, where they a∣riued in safetie (as I said before) in the month of April, and there were receyued with great triumph, the people singing Te Deum lau∣damus, many of the soldiers bringing good prises with them.

In the month of May following, vppon the 1••. of the same month the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses died in Goa, hauing beene sicke but foure daies of a burning fea∣uer, which is the common sicknes of India, and is very daungerous but it is thought it was for greefe, because hee had receyued let∣ters from the Captaine of Ormus, wherein hee was aduertised, that they had receyued news ouer land from Venice, that the Arch∣bishop was safely ariued at Lisbone, and wel receiued by the king: and because they were not friends at his departure (as I said before) they said he was so much grieued therat, that fearing to fall into the displeasure of the king, by information from the Bishoppe, hee dyed of griefe: but that was contrarie, as hereaf∣ter by the shippes we vnderstood, for that the Bishop dyed in the shippe eight dayes before it ariued in Portingal, and so they kept com∣panie together: for they liued not long one af∣ter the other, whereby their quarrell was en∣ded with their liues.

The Viceroyes funerals were with great solemnity obserued in this manner. The place appointed for the Viceroyes buriall, is a Cloister called Reys Magos, or the three kings of Cullen, being of the order of Saint Francis, which standeth in y^e land of Bardes, at the mouth of the Riuer of Goa, and the∣ther his bodie was conueyed, being set in the galley Royall, all hanged ouer with blacke pennons, and couered with blacke cloth, be∣ing accompanied with all the nobilitie and gentlemen of the countrey. And approching neere the cloister of Reys Magos, being thrée miles from Goa downe the Riuer towards the sea, the Friers came out to receyue him, and brought his bodie into the church, where they placed it vpon a herse, and so with great solemnity sung Masse: which done there were certaine letters brought forth, called Vias, which are alwaies sealed, and kept by the Iesuites by the kinges appointment, and are neuer opened but in y^e absence, or at the death of the Viceroy. These Vias are yearely sent by the King, and are marked with figures, 1.2.3.4.5. and so forth, and when there wanteth a Viceroy, then the first number or Via is opened, wherein is written that in the absence or after the death of the Viceroy such a man shalbe Viceroy, and if the man that is named in the first Via, bee not there, then they open the second Via, & looke whose name is therein: being in place, he is presently receyued and obeyed as Gouernour, and if he be likewise absent, they open the rest or∣derly as they are numbred, vntill the Gouer∣nour bee found, which being knowne, they neede open no more. The rest of the Vias that are remayning are presently shut vp, & kept in the cloyster by the Iesuites, but be∣fore the Vias are opened there is no man that knoweth who it shal be, or whose name is written therein. These Vias are with great solemnitie opened by the Iesuites, and read in open audience before all the nobles, Captaines, Gouernors, and others that are present: and if the man that is named in the Vias bee in any place of India, or the East countries, as Soffala, Mosambique, Or∣mus, Malacca, or any other place of those countries, as sometimes it happeneth, he is presently sent for, and must leaue all other of∣fices to receyue that place vntill the king endeth another out of Portingal: but if the mā named in y^e Vias be in Portingal, China or Iapan▪ or at the cape de bona Speranza, then they open other Vias as I said before. The Masse being finished, the Iesuites came with the kings packets of Vias, which are sealed with the Kings owne signet, and are alwaies opened before the other Viceroyes body is laide in the earth, and there they ope∣ned the first Via, and with great deuotion staying to know who it should be, at the last was named for Viceroy one Mathias Dal∣bu••kerke, that had beene Captaine of Or∣mu••, and the yeare before was gone in com∣panie

of the Archbishoppe to Portingall, be∣cause he had broken one of his legges, think∣ing to heale it: but if he had knowne so much, he would haue stayed in India. He being ab∣sent the seconde Via was opened with the like solemnitie, and therein they found named for Viceroy, Manuel de Sousa Coutinho, (of whom I made mention before, and who was the man that raysed the siege in the I∣sland of Seylon) to the great admiration of euery man, because he was but a meane gen∣tleman▪ yet very well esteemed, as he had wel deserued by his long seruice: & although there were many rich gentlemen in place, whome they rather thought should haue been prefer∣red therto, yet they must content themselues and shew no dislike: and thereupon they pre∣sently saluted him, kissing his hand, and ho∣noured him as Viceroy, presently they left the deade bodie of the olde Viceroy, and de∣parted in the Galley with the new Viceroy, taking away all the mourning clothes, and standerds, and couering it with others of di∣uers colours and silkes: and so entred into Goa, sounding both Shalmes and Trum∣pettes, wherein he was receyued with great triumph, and ledde into the great Church, where they sung Te Deum laudamus &c. and there gaue him his oath to hold and ob∣serue all priuiledges and customes according to the order in that case prouided, and from thence ledde him to the Viceroyes pallace, which was presently by the dead Viceroyes seruantes all vnfurnished, and by the newe Viceroye furnished againe, both with hou∣sholde stuffe and seruantes, as the manner is in all such chaunges and alterations. The bodie of the deade Viceroy being left in the Church, was buried by his seruantes with∣out any more memorie of him, sauing onely touching his owne particular affaires.

In the Monthes of Iune, Iulie and Au∣gust, of the same yeare, Anno 1588.* 1.96 there happened the greatest winter that had of long time béene seene in those Countries, although it rayneth euerie winter, neuer hol∣ding vppe all winter long: but not in such great quantitie and aboundance, as it did in those thrée Monthes, for that it rayned con∣tinually and in so great aboundance, from the tenth of Iune till the first day of Septem∣ber, y^t it could not be iudged that it euer held vppe from rayning one halfe hower toge∣ther, neyther night nor day, whereby ma∣ny houses by reason of the great moysture fell downe to the grounde, as also because the stone wherewith they are built, is ve∣rie soft, and their morter the more half earth.

In the same month of August there hap∣pened a foule and wonderfull murther with∣in the towne of Goa, and because it was done vpon a Netherlander, I thought good to set it downe at large, that hereby men may the better perceyue the boldnesse and filthie lecherous mindes of the Indian wo∣men, which are commonly all of one na∣ture and disposition. The thing was thus, a young man borne in Antwarpe called Frauncis King, by his trade a stone cutter, was desirous (as many young men are) to sée strange countries, & for the same cause tra∣uelled vnto Venice, where he had an vncle dwelling, who being desirous to preferre his cosin, sent him in the company of other Marchantes to Aleppo in Suria, where the Venetians haue great trafficke, as I saide before, there to learne the trade of marchan∣dise, and specially to deale in stones, to the which ende he deliuered him a great summe of money. This young youth being in A∣leppo, fell into company in such sort, that in steede of increasing his stocke, as his vncle meant he should doe, he made it lesse by the one halfe, so that when the other Marchants had dispatched their businesse, and were rea∣die to depart for Venice, Frauncis King perceyuing that hee had dealt in such sorte, that halfe his stocke was consumed, and spent in good fellowshippe, knew not what to doe, as searing his vncles displeasure, not daring to returne againe to Venice, vnlesse hee caried as much with him as hee brought from thence: in the end hee tooke counsell of some Venetians, with whome hee was ac∣quainted, that willed him to goe with the Caffila or Caruana, that as then was rea∣dy to go vnto Bassora, and from thence to Ormus in India, assuring him, seeing hee had knowledge in stones, that hee might doe great good and winne much profite in those Countries, and thereby easily recouer the losse that by his folly hee had receyued: which would turne to his great benefite, and likewise no hurt vnto his vncle. Which counsell hee followed, determining not to returne backe againe before hee had reco∣uered his losse, and to the same ende and purpose hee ioyned himselfe with certain Ve∣netians, who at the same instant trauelled thether, and so went with the Caffila till they came vnto Bassora, the best Towne in all those Countries, lying vppon the vt∣ter parte of Sinus Persicus, that goeth to∣wardes Ormus, and from thence by wa∣ter till they arriued in Ormus, where eue∣rie man set vppe his shoppe, and began to sell his wares: but Francis King being young and without gouernment, séeing himselfe so far distant from his vncle, made his account, that the money he had in hie hands was then

his owne, and began againe without anie foresight, to leade his accustomed life, taking no other care, but onlie to be merie and make good cheare so long, till in the end the whole stock was almost clean spent and consumed, and beginning to remember himself, and to call to mind his follies past, hee knewe not what course to take: for that to goe home a∣gain, he thought it not the best way, as wāt∣ing the meanes, and again he durst not shew himself in the sight of his Vncle. At the last he determined to trauell vnto Goa, where he vnderstood he might well get his liuing, by setting vp his trade, til it pleased god, to work otherwise for him, and so he came to Goa, and being there, presently set vp shoppe to vse his occupation. But because he found there good company, that is to say, Netherlanders and other Dutchmen, that serued there ordi∣narily for Trumpetters and Gunners to the Viceroy, who did daylie resort vnto him: he could not so well ply his worke, but that he fell into his wonted course: which he percei∣uing, in the end determined to make his con∣tinuall residence in Goa, and for the same purpose set downe his rest, to seeke some meanes there to abide as long as he liued, seeing all other hope was cleane lost for euer, returning againe vnto his Vncle, or into his owne countrie. At the same time, among o∣ther strangers, there was one Iohn de Xe∣na, a French man, borne in Deepe, that in former times was come into India, for drum vnto one of the Viceroyes, and hauing beene long in the countrie, was maryed to a wo∣man of Ballagate, a Christian, but by birth a More. This French man kept a shoppe in Goa, where he made Drummes and other Ioyners worke, and withall was the Kings Oare maker for the Galleyes, whereby he liued in reasonable good sort. He had by his foresaid wyfe two sonnes and a daughter: and as strangers, of what nation soeuer they be, vse to take acquaintance one of the other, be∣ing out of their owne countries (speciallie in India, where there are very few) and do hold together as brethren, which to them is a great comfort: so this Frauncis King vsed much to this French mans house, by whome he was verie much made of, and very wel∣come, as thinking thereby to bring him to match with his daughter, because of his oc∣cupation, which is of great account in India: because of the great number of Diamants & other stones that are sold in those countries: and to conclude, as the manner of India is, that when they haue gotten a man in once, they will neuer leaue him: he ceassed not with many promises and other wonderful matters to draw Frauncis so farre, that he gaue his consent thereunto, which afterwardes cost him his lyfe, as in the historie following you shall heare the true discourse. To make short, they were maried according to their manner, the Bryde being but 11 yeares old, very fair and comelie of bodie and limme, but in villa∣nie, the worst that walked vppon the earth: yet did her husband account himselfe a most happie man▪ that had found such a wyfe, as he often times said vnto me: although he was so ielous of her, that he trusted not any man, were they neuer so néere friends vnto him: but he in whome he put his greatest trust, & least suspected, was the onelie worker of his woe. When he was betroathed to his wife, the father promised him a certain péece of mo∣ney, and vntill it were payde, he and his wyfe should continue at meat and meale in his fa∣ther in lawes house, and should haue a shop adioyning to the same, and whatsoeuer he earned should be for himself. When all this was done, and the matter had remained thus a long while, by reason that the father in law could not performe the promised summe, be∣cause their houshold increased, it came to passe that the old man fel into a sicknesse and died, and then Frauncis King must of force pay his part towards the house kéeping, which he liked not of: & thereupon fel out with his mo∣ther in law: and on a certaine time made his complaint to me, asking my counsel therein, I answered him and said, I would be loath to make debate betwéene Parents & Chil∣dren, but if it were my case, séeing I could not obteyne my dowrie, I would stay no longer there, but rather hyre a house by my self, and kéep better house alone with my wife, then continue among so manie, wher I could not be master. In the end he resolued so to doe, & with much adoe tooke his wife & Child w^t his slaues, and parted houshold, hyred himselfe a house, set vp his shoppe, and vsed his trade so handsomely, that hauing good store of worke, he became reasonable wealthie. But his mo∣ther in law, that could not conceale her Mo∣rish nature, after y^e death of her husbād: whe∣ther it were for spight she bare to her sonne in law, or for a pleasure she tooke therein, counselled her daughter to fall in loue with a young Portingal Soldier, whom the daugh∣ter did not much mislike: which soldier was verie great in the house, and ordinarilie came thether to meat and drinke, and Frauncis trusted him as well as if he had bene his bro∣ther, in so much that he would doe nothing without his counsell. This Soldier called An honio Fragoso continued this beastlie course with Frauncis his wyfe, with the helpe of her mother, all the while that they dwelt with the mother▪ and it is sayd, that he

vsed her company before shee was maried, although shee was but young, which is no wonder in India: for it is their common cu∣stome in those countries to doe it, when they are but eight yeres old, and haue the slight to hide it so well, that when they are maried, their husbands take thē for very good maides. This order of life they continued in that sorte for the space of foure yeares, and also after that they had taken a house, and dwelled a∣lone by themselues (for Antonio Fragoso kept his old haunt) and although Francis v∣sed continually to shut his chamber dore, yet was this Portingall oftentimes hidden, ther∣in he not knowing thereof, where hee tooke his pleasure of his wife.

At the last, one Diricke Gerritson of Enchuson in Holland, béeing Godfather vnto Francis Kinges wife, comming newly from China, desired the said Francis and his wife to come and dine with him at his house without the towne, where as then he dwelt, and among the rest bad mee, minding to bee merrie and made vs good cheare: but because the honest Damsell Francis Kinges wife, made her excuse, that she might not with her credit come where Batchelers were, for that they had no such vse in India, he desired mée to hold him excused till another time. They being there at this feast, with the mother in law, and her sonne, & their houshold of slaues that waited vpon them, as the maner of In∣dia is. After dinner was ended, and they well in drinke, they went to walke in the fieldes, where not far from thence there stood a house of pleasure, that had neyther dore nor win∣dow, but almost fallen downe for want of re∣parations, hauing on the backe side therof a faire garden full of Indian trées and fruites: the house and garden Francis Kinges father in law had bought in his life time for a small peece of mony, for as I say, it was not much worth: thether they went, and caused their pots and their pans with meat and drinke to be brought with them, being minded all that day to make merrie therein, as indéede they did. In the meane time it was my fortune with a friend of mine to walke in the fieldes, and to passe by the house, wherein they were, not thinking any company had bin there, & going by, Francis King being all drunken, came forth and saw me, wherewith he ranne and caught me by the cloke, & perforce would haue me in, & made me leaue my companion, & so brought me into the garden, where their wiues and his mother in law, with their slaues sate playing vpon certaine Indian In∣struments, being verie merrie: but I was no sooner espied by them, but the young wo∣man presently went away to hide herselfe for her credits sake, according to their manner, as their manner is when any stranger com∣meth into the house. Not long after supper was made ready of such as they had brought with them, although the day was not so far spent, and the table c••oth was laid vppon a matte lying on the gr••und: for that (as I said before) there was ney••her table, bench, win∣dow nor dore within the house. The meate being brought in, euery man sate downe, on∣ly Francis Kinges wife excused her selfe, that I had shamed her, and desired that she might not come in, saying for that time shee would eate there with the slaues, and although her husband would gladly haue had her come in among vs, thereby to shew that he was not iealous of her, yet shee would not, so that sée∣ing her excuse he let her rest, saying it were best to let her stay there, because thee is a∣shamed. While we sate at supper where the slaues serued vs, going and comming to and fro, and bringing such thinges as we wanted, out of the place where this honest woman was, her husband thinking shee had taken pains to make it ready, it was nothing so, for that while we were merry together, not thinking any hurt▪ in came Antonio Frago∣so with a naked Rapier vnder his cloake, it being yet day light, and in presence of all the slaues, both theirs and mine, without anie feare of vs lead her away by the hand into one of the chambers of the house hauing ney∣ther doore, flore nor window, and there put∣ting off the cloth that she had about her mid∣dle,) which he laid vppon the ground to kéepe her from fowling of her body) not being once ashamed before the slaues, neyther fearing a∣ny danger, he tooke his pleasure of her: but if any mischance had happened, that any of the slaues had marked it and bewraied it, the said Anthonie had tenne or twelue souldiers his companions and friendes not farre from thence, which with a whistle or any other to∣ken would haue come to help him, and so would haue slaine vs all, and taken the wo∣man with him, which is their dayly proffit in India, but we had better fortune: for that hée dispatched his affaires so well with her, that wée knew it not, and had leysure to depart as he came, without any trouble, and she well pleased therewith: and when the slaues asked her how thee durst bee so bold to doe such a thing, considering what danger of life shee then was in, shee answered them that shee cared not for her life, so shée might haue her pleasure, and saying that her husband was but a drunkard, and not worthie of her, and that she had vsed the company of that fine lu∣stie youth for the space of foure yeres toge∣ther, and for his sake she said, shee would not

refuse to die: yet had she not then beene mar∣ried to Francis King full foure yeares, ney∣ther was shee at that time aboue fifteene or sixteene yeares of age. Not long after shee had done, shee came into the garden, and as it should seeme, had cleane forgotten her former shame, where she began both to sing and dance, shewing herselfe very merry: wherewith all the companie was very well pleased, specially her husband that commen∣ded her for it. When euening was come, e∣uery man tooke his leaue, and departed to his lodging, and when wee were gone wee chan∣ced by our slaues to vnderstand the truth of the fact before rehearsed, and what danger we had escaped: whereat we wondred much, and Francis King himselfe began to be some∣what suspicious of the matter, being secretlie aduertised of his wiues behauiour, but hee knew not with whome she had to doe, nor once mistrusted this Anthonie Fragoso, thinking him to be the best friend hee had in all the world: yea, and that more is, hee durst not breake his minde to any but onely vnto him, of whome in great secret he asked coun∣sell, saying, that he vnderstood, and had well found that his wife behaued her selfe disho∣nestlie, asking him what he were best to doe, and told him further, that he meant to dissem∣ble the matter for a time, to see if hee could take them together, thereby to kill thē both, which the other counselled him to doe, promi∣sing him his help and furtherance, and to bee secret therein, and so they departed. Antho∣nio Fr••••o••o wēt presently vnto his wife, and shewed her what had past betweene her hus∣band and him, where they concluded vppon that which after they brought to passe, think∣ing it the best course to preuent him. Now so it hapned, that in an euening in the month of August, 15••••. Francis King had proui∣ded a rosted Pig for supper in his own house: whereunto he inuited this Anthonio Fra∣g••so, and his mother in law, who as it séem∣eth, was of counsell with them in this conspi∣racie and the principall cause of the Tragedy, although very stoutly and boldly shee denied it afterwards. They being at supper and very merrie at the same time it was my chance to suppe in a certaine place with a Dutch pain∣ter, whether Fr••••ci•• King sent vs a quarter of the Pigge, praying vs to eate it for his sake, and to be merrie he that brought it be∣ing one of our owne house. They had caused him to drinke of a certaine wine that was mingled with the Hearbe De••••oa, thereby to bereaue poore Franci•• of his wittes, and so to effect their accursed deuice: for as it ap∣peared, hee that brought the Pigge came halfe drunke, and out of his wittes, whereby we perceaued that all was not well.

To conclude, the Hearbe beganne to worke, so that of force hee must needs sleep, and the companie beeing departed, shee shutte his trappe doore, as ordinarily he vsed to doe, and laid the key vnder his pillow, and went to Bedde with his louing wife: where pre∣sently hee fell on sleepe like a dead man, part∣ly by meanes of the De••••oa, and partly be∣cause hee had drunke well. About eleauen of the Clocke in the night, Anthonie Fra∣goso all armed, and another good friend of his not knowing (as hee confessed what Anthonio meant to doe, and came to the doore of Franci•• Kinges house, and knocked softly, and willed the slaues that slept below, to open the dore: but they answered him their master was a bedde, and that the trappe doore was shut on the in side. Francis his wife that slept not, whē she heard it, ran to the window and willed him to bring a ladder and clime vp, which he presently did, and she holp him in, where shee tooke him about the necke kissing him, and bad him welcome, leading him in by the hand, where her hus∣band slept, little thinking on the villanie pre∣tended by his wife, and such as he held to bee his best friends, and to be briefe shee said vn∣to him: There lieth the drunkard and the Hereticke, that thought to bring vs to our endes, thereby to seperate vs from our loue and pleasures now reuenge your selfe on him if you loue me, and presently hee thrust him into the body with his Rapier, cleane through the breast, so that it came out behind at his backe and being not content therwith, gaue him another thrust, that went in at the one side, and out at the other side, and so at the least 4. or 5▪ thrusts more after he was dead: whereby the poore innocent man ended his dayes: which done, they took all the stones & Diamonds that hee had of diuers men to worke, as also to sell: which amounted at the least to the value of 4••. thousand Pardawes, and tooke Francis his own Rapier that hung by him & put it into his hand, as if they would make men beleeue that hee would haue killed them, & that in their owne defence they had slaine him, but it was well knowne to the cō∣trarie: for that the slaues being below▪ heard all that had past. They tooke with them also the childe being of two yeares old, and went out of the house, but they had not gone farre, but they left the childe lying at a doore in the street, where in the morning it was found, & althogh the slaues made a great noise at their mistrisses flight, & went to fetch y^e officers▪ yet they could not find thē, for that night the mur¦therers went & knocked at y^e Iesuits cloister, desiring them to take them in, & gaue thē the

most part of the stones, saying they had slain the man in their owne defence, but the Iesu∣ites would not receiue them, although they tooke the stones, of purpose to giue them a∣gaine to the owners. In the morning it was knowne through all the towne not without great admiration, and although they sought diligently in all places where they thought or suspected them to lodge, yet they could not find them: but not long after they were séene in the towne of Chaul, which is about thirty miles Northwarde from Goa, where they walked fréely in the stréetes, without any trouble: for there all was couered, and few there are that look after such matters, though they bee as cleare as the Sunne. The dead bodie lay in that sort till the next morning, & we Dutch men were forced to sée him buried, for the mother in lawe woulde not giue one peny towards it, making as though she had not any thing to doe with him, but holpe the murtherer both with money and victuailes, therewith to trauell vnto Portingal, and so he sayled in the fléete with vs: for I saw him in the Island of S. Helena, as bold and lus••y, as if no such matter had béene committed by him, and so ariued in Portingall, not any man speaking against him: hauing also pro∣mised both the mother, and wife of Frauncis King, that hee woulde come againe with the Kinges pardon, and marrie her: which I doubt not of, if hee once went about it. And thus Francis King ended his trauell: which I thought good to set downe at large, that thereby you may perceyue the boldnes and inclination of the Indian women: for there passeth not one yeare ouer their heades, but that in India there are at the least twen∣tie or thirtie men poysoned, and murthered by their wiues, onely to accomplish their fil∣thie desires. Likewise there are yearely ma∣ny women killed by their husbands being ta∣ken in adulterie, but they care not a haire for it, saying with great boldnes, that there is no pleasanter death then to die in that manner: for thereby (they say) they do shew that they die for pure loue. And to shew that this ho∣nest woman was not of this badde inclinati∣on alone, you shall vnderstande that a bro∣ther of hers, being but fourtéene or fiftéene yeares of age was openly burnt in Goa for sodome or buggery, which was done when Francis King and his father in lawe were liuing: yet could not Frauncis thereby bee warned to take héede of his wife and that kindred: for as it séemeth it was Gods will he should end his dayes in that manner.

The 16. of September 1588. there ari∣ued in Goa a shippe of Portingall, called the S. Thomas, bringing newes of 4. shippes more, that were in Mosambique, all come from Portingall, which not long after came likewise to Goa: their names were, Saint Christopher being Admirall, S. Marie, S. Anthony, and our Lady of Conseprao. By those shippes we receyued newes of the death of my Lord the Archbishoppe, called Don Frey Vincente da Fonseca, who died in his voyage to Portingall, vpon the 4. day of August, An. 1587.* 1.97 betwéene the Flem∣mish Islandes, and Portingall, eight daies before the ship came to land. It was thought that he dyed of some poyson, that he brought out of India, or els of some impostume that sodainely brake within him, for that an houre before his death he séemed to be as well as e∣uer he was in all his life, and sodainly he was taken so sick y^t he had not the leasure to make his will, but dyed presently, and voyded at the least a quart of poyson out of his body. To be short, he was cloathed in his Bishops apparell, with his Myter on his heade, and rings vpon his fingers, and put into a coffin, and so throwne into the sea. These newes made many sorrowfull hartes in India, of such as were his welwillers and frindes: and to the contrarie such as hated him, were glad and reioyced, because he had béene earnest to reprehend and correct them for their faultes: but none lost more by it then wee that were his seruantes, which looked for great prefer∣ment by him, as without doubt hee ment to haue obtained it of the King, as being one of the principallest occasions of his going into Portingal, but death altred all. And although at that time my meaning and intent was, to stay the comming of my Lord Archbishop, & to continue longer there, yea possible while I liued: yet vpon those newes I was wholly altered in my purpose, and a horrible feare came vpon me, when I called to mind what I had passed touching the things I was desi∣rous to bring to passe. And although I had means enough there to get my liuing in good sort, being as it were one of those countrimē, and so in all places well estéemed and accoun∣ted of, yet those perswasions were not of force inough once to disswade mee frō the pretence and desire I had to sée my natiue countrey: so that it séemed my God had opened mine eies, and by my Lords death made me more cleare of sight, & to call my natiue soile vnto remē∣brance, which before was so darkened, that I had almost forgotten it, and stood in hazarde neuer to see it more, if my Lord had liued and returned home again. But to auoide all oc∣casions and inconueniences that might hap∣pen, & dayly offred themselues vnto me, I re∣solutely determined to depart, wherevnto I sought al the meanes & necessary occasions I

could find, to bring it to passe: & that which perswaded me most thereunto, was the losse of my brother William Tin, that had béene with me in India, who sailing from Se••ubal in Portingal towards Hamborough, taking their course on the back side of England, was cast away, and neuer could be heard of, ney∣ther ship nor men. Being in this resolution, it chaunced that a shippe by authoritie of the Viceroy, and at the request of the Farmers of Pepper was appointed to saile for Portin∣gall, because there was so great quantitie of Pepper to be laden that the Portingall ships at that time being there could not take it in: and although the ships are purposely sent to lade Pepper, with licence from the King that there may no more but fiue ships lade euerie yeare, wherevnto the Factors do bind them∣selues, yet if there bee any goods in India, as Pepper & other wares, which the other ships can not take in, then the Farmers of Pepper and the kinges officers may buy one or two ships, and make them ready for the purpose to take it in, so that there be ships found that bee sufficient: which if the Factors refuse, then the Viceroy and the kings officers may ••raight as many ships as they thinke good, and as they find fit to take it in, and lade thē with the Farmers pepper, or any other goods that are there to be laden, so it bee after the fiue shippes are laden by the farmers: and all this for the profit of the King, without let or hinderance of the said farmers. In this sorte as I said before, there was a shippe called the Santa Crus, that was built in Cochijn by the King of the Malabares, and called after the name of the towne of Cochiin, that was likewise by y^e Portingals called Santa Crus, which the King of Malabares made in honor of the Portingalles, because he hath brother∣ly allyance with them, and is by the King of Portingall called our brother in armes. The same ship he had sold vnto a Portingal, that therwith had made a voiage into China and Iapan, being of 1600. tunnes: and be∣cause it was strong and good, & so fit to make a voiage into Portingall, and because (as I said before) there was more pepper then the Portingall ships could take in, the farmers of pepper were desirous to buy it, & besought the Viceroy to let them haue it, according to the contentes of their composition, and the Kings ordinance. Wherevpon the Viceroy caused the farmers of the ships to be called to∣gether, & signified vnto thē what the request of the farmers of pepper was, that is to say, that the shippe should be bought according to the Kings ordinance, for as much as necessity did so require it, & they had refused to vse it, & said that it was not fit for them, & so desired y^e in respect of the Kings interest in the pepper, the shippe might be bought accordingly. Al∣waies prouided, y^t the kings ordinance (who granted thē their Priuiledge) might be kept & obserued, viz. that their ships might first haue their lading, and bee first dispatched. And al∣though they that had bought it of the owners for ten thousand duckets readie money▪ were in doubt that they should not finde wares e∣nough to lade it withall, yet in the end it was in a manner laden as well as the other ships were. Nowe it was agréed by the owners that sold it, that the Maister Gunner and chiefe Boteswaine shoulde kéepe their places stil within the shippe as they had when it sai∣led to China and Iapen. The Gunners name was Diricke Gari••son of Enchusen, who after he had beene 20. yeares in India, was minded as then to saile in that shippe to Portingall, with whome because of olde ac∣quaintance, and for his company, I minded to sée if I could get any place within the shippe. And because the farmers of pepper had their factors in India, that were Dutchmē, which lay there in the behalfe of the Foukers and Velsares of Ausburg, who at that time had a part of the pepper laden in that ship, and vse to send in each ship a Factor, to whome the King alloweth a Cabine and victuails for the voyage: This place of Factor in the said shippe called Santa Crus, I did obtaine of the Farmers, because they were of my acquain∣tance. Whereupon I prepared my selfe to depart, and got a Pasporte of the Viceroy, without which no man may passe out of In∣dia, as also a Certificat out of the Kinges chamber of accountes, and out of the Matri∣cola generall, wherein all such as come into India are registred, with a note of my paye, which by the Kings commandement is ap∣poynted to bee paide vppon certificate from thence, and withall the time of my residence in India, and what place I was imployed in there, that when I came into Portingall, I might haue recompence if I would aske it, or minded to returne againe into India. But although I had no such intent, yet I must of force obserue this order, to make them thinke I would returne againe, and the ea∣sier to obtaine my Pasport, which was easi∣ly graunted mée by the Gouernour, as also the other Certificates: and hauing obtay∣ned them I tooke my leaue of all my friends and acquaintance, not without great griefe, as hee that was to depart out of his se∣cond naturall dwelling place, by reason of the great and long continuance that I had made in those countries, so that I was in a manner halfe disswaded from my pretended voyage. But in the end the remembrance and affecti∣on

of m•• true natural countrie, got the vp∣per h••nd, and ouer ruled me, making me wholy to forget my conceipt vnto the contra∣rie: and so committing my selfe & my affaires vnto God who onely can direct and helpe vs, and giue good successe to all endeuours, I en∣tred into my new pretended course.

* 1.98In the Month of Nouember 1588. the ships sayled againe from Goa, to the coast of M••l••ba•• & Cochijn, to take in their lading: And the 2••. of the same month, the Santa-Cru•• set sayle to begin our Viage. The 28. day we arriued in Honor a Fort belonging to the Portingals, and the first they haue vp∣on the coast of Malabar, which lyeth South∣ward from Goa eighteene miles, in which place we were assigned to take in our lading of Pepper. They vsed not before to lade any Pepper in that place, so that we were the first that euer laded there: but from thence for∣wards, they minded yearely to lade one ship there, because the Queene of Batticola (that lay not farre from thence) and Hono••, being within her Iurisdiction or kingdom, had boūd her selfe, yearely to deliuer seauen or eight thousand Quintales of Pepper, so that the Farmers paied her halfe y^e mony for the same sixe Months before thee deliuered it, and then shee would deliuer it at times. For the which cause the Farmers haue their Factor in Ho∣nor to receiue it of her by waight, and lay it vp till the time of lading commeth. The like haue they in all the other Fortes vppon the coast of Malabar, as at Mangalar, Ba••se∣lor, Cananor, Cochijn, Coulan &c. Nowe to know the right manner of farming of the Pepper, you must vnderstand, that the Far∣mers take the same to Farme for fiue yeres, and bind themselues euery yeare to send their stocke of readie money, for thirtie thousand Quintales of Pepper, so that the King will send ships to lade it in. The King on the other side bindeth himselfe to performe, and to send euerie yeare fiue ships, the Farmers bearing the aduenture of the Sea both of their mony sending thether and of the Pepper brought from thence, & must lade it in India, into the ships at their owne costs and charges: which being brought into Portingall, they deliuer al the Pepper to the King at the price of twelue Ducats the Quintall: & if any bee cast away or taken vpon the Sea, it is at the Farmers charge, for the King dealeth not but onely with that which is deliuered him in Portin∣gall, being drie and faire laide vp in the Kings store house in Lisbone: for the which he pay∣eth not any money vnto the Farmers, vntill the said Pepper be sold, with the mony wher∣of he payeth them: so that the King without any hazard or disbursing any thing o•• his owne, hath alwaies his money for his Pep∣per, without the losse of any one pennie. And in that respect the Farmers haue great and strong priueledges▪ first that no man of what estate or condition so euer he bee, either Por∣tingall, or of any place in Indi••, may deale or trade in Peper but the••, vpon paine of death, which is verie sharply looked vnto. Likewise they may not for any occasion or necessitie, whatsoeuer, diminish or lessen the ordinarie stocke of money for the Pepper, neither hin∣der or let them in any sorte concerning the lading thereof, which is also verie strictly ob∣serued. For although the Pepper were for the Kings owne person, yet must the Farmers Pepper be first laden, to whome the Vice∣roy and other Officers and Captaines of In∣dia, must giue al assistance helpe and fauour, with watching the same and al other things, whatsoeuer shall by the said Farmers bee re∣quired▪ for the safetie and benefite of the saide Pepper. For the lading and prouiding wher∣of, the said Farmers are to send their Factors seruants and assistants, of what nation so e∣uer they bee, (except Englishmen, French∣men and Spaniards) vnto euery place, to see it laden and dispatched away, for other stran∣gers may not goe into India without the spe∣ciall licence of the King, or his counsell of In∣dia. The Pepper commonly costeth in India 28. Pagodes the Bhar, euerie Bhar is three Quintales and a halfe Portingall waight so that euery Quintall standeth them in twelue Pardawes, Xera••••ius and foure ••angoes. Euerie Quintall is 1••8. pounds, and euerie Pardawe thrée Testones or thirtie Stiuers heauie money, and euery ••a••ga. ••i••••e Reijs, or sixe Stiuers, which is twelue Dollers of sixtie pence Flemish the peece, after the rate of Portingall money, and twentie foure Sti∣uers of the like money, besides all charges & aduenture of the Seas. But the great quan∣titie maketh them gaine the more, specially, if it come safe home. The ships & their fraygh∣ting, with condition to builde them, and the prouision of all necessaries for them, are also farmed by themselues, and all at the aduen∣ture of the Farmers: and if the ship come safe home, they giue the King a certaine summe of money for euery ship, and euery yeare fur∣nish fiue shippes, likewise at their owne charges: but such Souldiers as are appointed to goe in them, are bound to sayle for y^e King, and haue but onely meate and drinke at the Farmers charge, the Officers and Saylers being placed therein by the Kings Admiral¦tie, which the Farmers may not once denie or refuse: so that the King aduentureth no∣thing,

neither in Pepper nor in ships, but on∣ly if the ships be cast away, he looseth the mo∣ney that hee should haue had for the farme of euery ship, if it had returned safe, & the gaine of the Pepper that should haue beene deliuer∣ed him, at a certaine price. Whereupon the Admiraltie of Portingall are now waren ve∣rie carelesse to see them well conueied, as they vsed to be during the times of the Kings of Portingal, when all the Pepper came for the Kings own accounts. And although the king hath promised continually to send his Nauie by Sea▪ as far as the Flemish Ilands, there to stay for the comming of the Indian ships, and from thence to conueye them vnto Lis∣bone, yet since they were Farmed out there are few fleetes sent forth, so that they are but little thought vpon, but howsoeuer it is in the payment of the fée Farme, for Pepper the King will not loose a pennie of his due, nor once abate them any thing.

The sixth of December wee had taken in our lading of Pepper which was 67••0. Quintales of the best that is in all Malabar, and verie ful. The same day we set sayle from thence, keeping close vnder the coast, because that ordinarily in that countrie, euerie day from twelue of the clocke of the night, till twelue at noone there bloweth an Easterly winde, which commeth out of the land: and then commeth a West wind out of the Sea, to the land ward, and with those two windes we performe our Viage: but the East winde is alwaies mightier and stronger then the West, and therefore the shippes keepe them∣selues close vnder the shore, for when they put further into the Sea, they can hardly get the coast againe, because the West wind is not of so great force: as it chanced vnto vs, for that hauing put somewhat from the coast, we had much to doe before wee could get the coast againe, by the which meanes often times they loose their Viages into Portingal, as by experience it hath béene found. All the coast of Malabar is verie pleasant to behold: for that they sayle so close vnto it that a man may tell euerie hill, valley and trée that is therein, being verie greene and faire land.

The eleauenth of December wee came to Cananor, another fortresse of the Portin∣gales, as we haue told you in the description of this coast. There we lay a day and a halfe, to take in certaine Mastes, with other proui∣sion y^t we were to vse, which is there in great abundance: & so wee set sayle againe, keeping along the coast and passed by Calecut, Pa∣••ane, and certaine other places vntill the twentie foure of December, when wee arri∣ued at Cochijn, where we lay till the twen∣tie of Ianuarie after in Anno 158••. In the meane time our shippe was prouided of all things necessarie, and then we stayed till our turne came to set sayle, because the other shippes according to the contract were to set sayle before vs, one after the other, which custome I will here partly set down in briefe. You shall vnderstand, that as soone as the shippe hath taken in her lading of Pepper, which is done with great care and diligent watch, as well in the Kings behalfe, as of the Farmers, and is laden in the two nether Oorlopes that is vpon the Balast, and in the Oorlop next ouer it▪ laying Deale boords vp∣on the Balast, and making certaine places and deuisions for the purpose, with a hole o∣uer each place, to shutte in the Pepper, lea∣uing roome by the maine Mast to passe by it, so that there is at the least thirtie seuerall pla∣ces, which they call Payoos, and all vnder the two lower Oorlopes as I said before. Which beeing all filled with Pepper, they shut the holes of those places verie close, with Ocam and Pitch, and so are marked with numbers how many there are, and vpon ech place his waight of Peper. These two Oor∣loppes being thus laden, there is left a place aboute the maine Mast to bestow water, wine, woode and other necessaries for the shippe, which are dayly vsed. In the thirde Oorlop and on both sides therof, there are di∣uers places seuerally made that belong vnto the Officers of the shippe, as the Captaine, Master, Pilot, Factor, Purser &c. and of all the rest of the Saylors that are allowed pla∣ces: which they sell or let out vnto the Mar∣chants, to lade goods therein, whereof they make good profite. Vpon the same Oorlop from the Mast vnto the sterne, are the places wher they put their Poulder, Bisket▪ Sayles clothes and other prouisions for the ship. The other Oorlopes aboue these are laden by the Marchants, with all sorts of wares, which are in Chestes, Fattes, Balles, and Packes, and are placed in this sort, that is to say. As soone as the Pepper is laden, there is present∣ly sent into the shippe two waiters, and one that stoweth the goodes (as a Porter) on the Kings behalfe: and he hath ten or twelue Porters vnder him, that must onely lade and stow the goodes in the shippe, the Master nor any other not once hauing any thing to doe with it, sauing onely the chiefe Botes∣waine▪ who is to looke vnto it, and yet com∣maundeth nothing. No goods may bee laden whatsoeuer, or how small so euer they bee, but they must bee Registred in the Kinges bookes, and they must bring a Billet from the Veador da Fa••enda, that is to saye, the

Surueighor of the businesse, being chief Offi∣cer for the King, wherein must be certified e∣uerie kind of ware by peece meale, which they lade together with y^e name of the ship, where∣in it is to be laden, for without that Certi••i∣••at▪ the stowers and Porters will not take it in: and although you haue your Billet, yet must you bribe the waiters, before you can get it abord the shippe, and some thing must be giuen likewise to the porters besides their duties, if you desire to stow your goods well, otherwise they will let it stand: and he that giueth most hath the best place in the shippe: yea and they stow the ship so miserablie full, that there is not a hole or an emptie place to be found, but it is full stuffed: and for all their profit, it is often times seene, that the chief Porter, that doth onlie command and looke ouer the rest, getteth for his part in bribes for stowage of a ship, sometimes seuen or 800 Dukats, and the waiters asmuch, and all this onlie by gifts. Those offices are giuen by fauor of the Viceroy and the Ve••dor de Falenda▪ which is the cause that the ships are often times laden so ful that they are in man∣ner ready to sinke: so that a man would think it were impossible for them either to row or stirre: because y^e sailers & officers of the ships haue nothing to doe therewith, vntill the last hour that it setteth sayl & thē it is deliuered in∣to their handes, and the waiters and porters goe their waies, leauing the ship ful in euery place, euen to the vppermost Oarlop, where there standeth commonlie 7 or 8 chestes, one aboue the other, both in the sterne and fore∣shippe, vpon the cables, in the forecastell, in the stirrige, and in euery place, which are all ful of great pots, fattes, chests, hennes cages, and such like, so that it seemeth rather a La∣byrinth or a Maze, then a ship: and so they commit themselues to the grace of God and set sayle: and often times it falleth out, that of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 saylers which are aboue the ship (as it did in our ship) not aboue 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of them could tell how to stéere or handle the R••ther: & besides that, most of them were neuer at sea before, but by fauor get their places, as all the rest doe, so that when occasion serueth, being at sea, they stand looking one vpon an other, do∣ing nothing but cry Misericordia, and our Lady helpe vs.

In Cochiin there are a great number of boa••es called Tones, that are cut out of one peece of wood, and yet some of them are so great, that a man may lade 20 pipes of wa∣ter in them. These they carrie abord y^e ships, that lie at the least a mile within the sea, and there they make price with them for a small summe of money, and then they goe and fill the pipes themselues, with pots which they haue for the purpose, and it is a great com¦moditie vnto them. This water is brought out of y^e riuer of Cochin called Manga••e, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is verie good. Touching the towne and coun∣try of Cochin, I haue already declared in the description of the Coast of Malabar▪ so that this shall suffice to shew you what the countrie of India is: and now I will shew vnto you the manner that is vsed in the ships when they sayle home againe: which in part I haue alreadie touched, as also our depar∣ture and voyage from India to Li••bon.

The 93. Chapter. Of my voyage and departure from India to Portingale

THe first of Ian. 1580,* 1.99 the Santa Ma••ia set sayle, and because it was one of the oldest shippes, it was first dis∣patched away, by reasō that the sooner they de∣part from Cochin▪ they come in better time to the Cape de Bona Speranza, and the later they come thether, the more storms & foule wether they haue, be¦cause as thē the Sunne goeth further into the North, and leaueth the South parts. There∣fore commonly they let the best and strōgest shippes goe last, because they are best able to hold out: and in the Iland of S. Helena they stay one for the other vntill the 25. day of May, & no longer, which is the time appoin∣ted by the king, and so goe in company toge∣ther vnto Portingale, for from India vnto the Iland of S. Helena they need not keepe company, because all that way they feare no Rouers, and from thence they haue all their Cannon shot pulled in, the better to passe the foule wether at the cape de bona Speranza. The 6 of Ianuary, the ship called our Ladie de Consepcao set sayle, the 10 of the same, the Admirall called S. Christopher: the 12 the S. Anthony: the 15 the S. Thomas, which was the greatest and the best shippe in all the Fleet, and richest of lading: and the ••0 of the same Moneth, wee set sayle, in our ship called the Santa Crus, being the last, where in was about 20•• men of all sorts, as ••ay∣lers, soldiers and slaues: for from India there goe but few soldiers without the Viceroyes passeport, by vertue whereof they goe to pre∣sent their seruices, and to fetch their payes and duties for the same. And this they doe af¦ter they haue serued in India some yeares, & also when they haue abilitie to passe ouer:

for when they are poore, and haue no helpe, they must stay in I••dia, euen for necessities sake, because they haue no means to procure their passage, so that manie of them are con∣strayned to tarrie there, and to marrie with ••ores and Indian women, the better to maintain themselues although it be with mi∣serie enough. For the charges of a mans voi¦age out of I••dia into Portin••al, is at the l••ast •••• or ••••0 Pardawes, and that onlie for meate and drinke, which a poore soldier c••n hardly compasse, vnlesse he can procure some gentleman, Captaine, or some wealthy man in office▪ to be ••auorable vnto him, in helping him to performe his iourney. For in the voyages homewards the king giueth no∣thing to the soldiers and passingers, but free pass••ge for him self and a chest of ••. spannes high and broad and •• in length: and that after they haue bene •• yeares in India, & for that Chest they pay neither fraught nor custome: they likewise haue a Chest in the roomage, free of fraight, for which they pay custome: and this they may sell in India to any Mar∣chant, as they commonlie doe, and is worth vnto them at the least, 40 or 5•• Pardawes. These places they call liberties, and hee that buyeth them, registreth them in the name of him that he buyeth them of, to the end that in Portingale they may enioy the same libertie and priuiledge: all the saylers and Of∣ficers also of the shippes that sayl in them frō Portin••al▪ haue likewise besides their places in the ships, the forage of such a chest allowed them, full of custome and fraight. All these thinges are very sharply looked vnto: for al∣though the ships and goods are farmed, yet when they ariue at Lisbon▪ all the chests are brought into the Indian house, and there vi∣sited, to see if any goods be in them, that is forbidden to be brought out of India, as pep∣per▪ Anill, or Indigo, and other such wares as are farmed of the king: & if any be found, it is presently forfaited, and all the wares that are in such chests are likewise valued, so that if they amount vnto more then the value of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Milreyes, they must pay custome for the ouerplus, which in the tyme of the kings of Portingale was not vsed: for then they were accustomed to carrie their chestes home, and to shew them only to the waiters: and although the poore saylers and Officers doe much compl••yne for the losse & breaking of their liberties, yet can they not be heard: and thus there come but few Soldiers out of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, for the causes aforesayd: for I cer∣t••nlie beleeue that of 15•••• Soldiers and more y^t yearelie are sent thether out of Por¦tingal, there returneth not a hundreth again, some ••ying there in the countrie, others bee∣ing cast away, and slayne by diuers occa∣sions, and the rest by pouertie not able to returne againe: and so against their willes are forced to stay in the Countrie. If a∣nie of them doe chance to come, it is with some Viceroy, Captaine, or other Gentle∣man, or person, that hath borne office or au∣thoritie: and when such men come ouer, they alwaies take some Soldiers with them, to whome they giue meate and drinke, and yet are such as are of their acquaintāce, and that long before had bene at their commande∣ments: which they doe for the most part vpon a certaine pryde and vaine glorie: and in this sort there may yearelie come 20 or 3•• Soldiers ouer in each Shippe, which haue their Slaues and Blacke Mores with them: so that they come cleane and sweet home, both for Linnen and other thinges, because Linnen in India is verie good cheap: and the Shippes when they re∣turne home, are cleaner then when they set out of Portingale, because they haue fewer men in them, and such as come out of India, bring all their necessaries with them, be∣sides that the shippe is verie sweete, by rea∣son of the spice that is laden in it.

The partition of the ship is in this man∣ner: the Pilot hath his Cabbin aboue in the hinder part of the shippe, on the right side, where he hath two or thrée roomes, and ne∣uer commeth vnder hatches, nor downe into the foreship but standeth only and commaun∣deth the Master of the ship to hoise or let fall the sailes, and to looke vnto his course, how they shall steere to take the height of the sunne & euery day to write and marke what passeth and how they saile, with what to∣kens, winde and weather they haue euerie day: the Master hath his Cabin in the same place, behind the Pilotes Cabins, on the left hand, with as manie places and roomes as the Pylot hath, where he standeth and commandeth, with a siluer whistle▪ & looketh onlie to the Mayne Maste and her Sayles, and so backwards: yet he hath the care of all the Shippe, and whatsoeuer belongeth to it, and commandeth all thinges, as to make & mend the sayls, which he cutteth out, & the saylers sow them: he looketh also if there be any fault in the shippe, and causeth it to be mended, & as need requireth, to draw their Cannon in, and againe to put it out. If hee wanteth any thing, as cloth for sailes, nailes, ropes, or any such like thinges as are need∣ful, she must aske them of the Factor and pur∣ser of the shippe, which presently are deliue∣red vnto him, with a note of his hand in the booke to be accountable for it. The chiefe Boteson hath his Cabbin in the forecastle,

and hath commandement and gouernement ouer the Fouke mast, and the fore sayles: hée hath also a siluer whistle like the master, and taketh care for all thinges belonging to the Fouke maste, and for the fast binding of the ankers. The Guardian or quartermaster hath his Cabbin close by the great mast out∣ward on the left hand, for on the right hand standeth the scullerie and kitchin, where they dresse their meat, he weareth a siluer whistle and hath charge to sée the swabers pumpe to make the ship cleane, to looke to the ropes & cause them to bee mended, and to the boate which he commonly ruleth: the Gunner hath his Cabbin inward from the mast, hard by the Ruther vnder the first Oorlope, and must alwaies sit by the maine mast looking vppon the master both night and day, that as the Master whistleth to will the Gunners to draw in their péeces, or to thrust them out, he may bée readie so to doe: he likewise taketh ca••e for the peeces and the thinges belonging to them: when they haue cause to vse them, the vnder Pilot doth nothing but helpe the chiefe Pilot & watch his quarter: they haue likewise two or three of the best saylers, that doe nothing els but command in the Pilots roome whē he sléepeth. The saylers haue most of their Cabins in the forecastle, and there a∣bouts, & the Gunners behinde by the master Gunner, vnder the vpper decke, & doe nothing els but with their instruments put the great peeces forth, or draw them in as they are cō∣manded, the swabers must doe all whatsoe∣uer they are bidden to doe by the officers, but neuer touch the Ruther: for the saylers doe only stéere and rule the ship when néed requi∣reth, but not the pumpe, neyther doe they hoyse vp the maine sayle, for the souldiers and slaues vse to doe that, the swabers pumpe, & the Carpenter doth such worke as is to bee done, the Cooper in like sort and the Calker, so that if the shippe were sincking, not any of them will doe more than belongeth to his charge, and what further is to bee done, they will stand still & looke vppon it: the Captaine hath the Gallerie and the Cabbin behind, he commandeth onely ouer the souldiers, & such as watch by night, the Pilot, Master, and the Boteson, are serued in very good sorte with their siluer lampes, beakers, cups, & bowles, euery man by himselfe, and are waited on by their slaues and seruants, and haue enough of euery thing, but the other saylers, & swabers haue not such store, but indure more hardnes, for euery man must prouide for himselfe, as we told you before. Now you must vnder∣stand that in their ships there is no aueridge: for that when there happeneth any losse, or that any goods are throwne ouer board, hée standeth to the losse that oweth the goods, without any more accounts, and that com∣monly falleth out vpon the poore swabers, for they vsually haue their chestes standing vp∣pon the hatches▪ because they haue nothing to giue vnto the Porters that they might haue a good place for them, as the others of greater abilitie vse to doe, and when any storme or hurt chanceth, than they throw the thinges ouerboard that first comes to hand, without respect of persons ••nye aueridge to bee made.

In this sort setting saile, we held our course south south East for the space of 150. miles, till we came to the Equinoctiall line, & from thence till we were vnder seauen degrées in the same course, and from thence south West and by West, vnto the cape de Bona Spe∣ranza, which way was neuer vsed before that time, for they vsed to saile from Cochiin south west, and south west and by South, be∣twéene the Islands of Maldiua, and a thou∣sand other Islands and sands, vnto the Iland of Saint Laurence, and so to the cape: but after that the Pilot had lost the Saint Iames vpon the shallowes of India, and escaped a∣liue (and was now Pilot in the Saint Tho∣mas, béeing the best shippe in all our Fléete) hee had the fore Voyage, and kept a∣loofe two or thrée hundred miles out into the Sea, cleane from all Islandes, sandes, or cliffes: saying that the casting away of so ma∣ny ships (whereof no newes or tidinges could euer be heard) was, that they were cast away vpon the sands, euen as it chanced vnto him, and to auoide the dangers thereof, as also to winne the fauour of the King and the officers of the Admiraltie, he was the first that tooke vpon him to discouer that way, with the ship wherein my Lord the Archbishop sayled, and is almost the same way that the shippes that come from Malacca▪ do hold when they saile to Portingall, where they sée neither Ilands nor Sandes, nor any other thing but onelie the plaine sea, & so hee came into Portingale, certifying the Admiraltie of that new way, and although hee was cast in prison for the same cause, yet by fauor he was presently re∣leased, and the Admiraltie perceauing it to be so great a danger for the ships to saile amōgst the Islands and Sands, (which they thought to bée the chiefe cause of the losse of so manie ships) haue expresly commanded that the Pi∣lots should vse that new discouered way, ac∣cording to the saide Pilots information, ther∣by to auoide all danger: but that is not the cause of their casting away, although many times they are the means of much mischiefe: but the chiefe reason is the vnreasonable la∣ding, and charging of the ships, the vnskilfull

seamen, and the slacke visiting or searching of the ships, to see if they bee fit to sayle, and haue all thinges that they want.

By these and such like meanes the ships are dayly lost, as in other places by examples and true witnesses I haue already declared, and as the same Pilot that first founde this new way, did well approue and verifie to bée true, in the Saint Thomas, that the Sands or Islands did him no hurt, but onely the o∣uerlading of her, wherewith the ship was by the Cape burst in péeces, as hereafter I will shew. Notwithstanding this way is not therefore to be disliked, although it bee some∣what further about, but it is a very good way and wholly out of all danger of Sandes and Islandes, whereby they doe auoid the Island of Maldiua, with other droughtes and sands about the same.

The 30. day of Ianuarie in the night, we passed the Equinoctiall line, and the next day after we discried a shippe, which we thought to bée the Saint Thomas, and the same day one of our Boyes fell ouerboard, whome to saue wee made all the haste wee could to get out our small boate, but because it stood full of thinges, we could not so soone get it forth, but that in the meane time the boy was cast at the least two miles behind vs, and so was drowned.

The third of Februarie the ship (we saw) came close by vs, and then wée knew it to be the Saint Thomas, wherewith wee made towards it to speake with them: but when they began to know our shippe by the ropes, that were all white, made of Indian Cairo, and knowing that we were left behind them at Cochiin, and thinking when they descried vs, wee had béene one of the shippes that first set saile, as also that their ship was accounted one of the best for sayle in all the fleete: for very pride and high stomacke they would not stay to speake with vs, but made from vs againe: which our officers perceiuing, did likewise winde from them, euery one doing his best to get before the other.

By this and such like signes of pride, the Portingales do often cast themselues away, and as it may bee coniectured▪ it was one of the chiefe causes of the losse of the saint Tho∣mas: for that they vsed all the meanes they could to sayle well, and that they might passe the Cape before vs, wherof they vse to brag, when they meete at the Island of Saint He∣lena, as if it were done by their wisedome: for so it fell out with the Saint Thomas, that comming to the cape de Bona Speran∣za, it had a contrarie winde, whereby they strucke all their sailes, and so lay driuing a∣gainst the waues of the sea, which doe there fall against a shippe, as if it stroke against a Hill: so that if the Shippes were of hard stones, yet in the end they would breake in péeces, much more such Shippes as are made of wood, and this is commonly their man∣ner, thereby the sooner to passe the Cape: which our shippe could not beare, so that we put backe againe with the winde, yet as lit∣tle as we might, thereby to auoide the force of the sea as much as we could: but because the Pilot of the saint Thomas trusted ouer∣much in her strength, & did purposely meane to be before vs all, thereby as hee thought to win the praise, the ship did (as it well appea∣red) lie still and driue without any sailes, which they call Payrar, and so by the great force and strength of the seas, together with the ouerlading, was striken in péeces, & swal∣lowed in the sea, both men and all that was within her, as wee might well perceiue com∣ming vnto the Cape, by the swimming of whole chests, fats, balles, péeces of masts, & dead men tied vnto bords, and such like feare∣full tokens: the other ships also that ariued in the Iland of Saint Helena, told vs likewise that they had séene the like, most pittifull sights, which was no small losse of so great treasure, and so many men: so that we which beheld it, thought our selues not frée from the like danger. It was one of the richest ships, that in many yeares had sayled out of In∣dia, & only by reason of the good report it had to be so good of sayle, being but new, for as thē it was but her second voyage: so that euerie man desired to goe, and to lode their wares in her. In the same ship went Don Paulo de L••ma Periera, that raised the siege before Malacca, & had serued the king 30. yeares in India, & had obtained many braue victories, thinking as thē to be in the top of his honor, and to be much aduanced by the king. He al∣so carried with him a great treasure in Iew∣els and other riches, as also his wife, children and one of his brethren, with many other gentlemen and souldiers that bare him com∣pany, thinking to haue good fortune in their Voiage: there were likewise 10, or 12. gen∣tlewomen, some of thē hauing their husbands in the ship, others whose husbandes were in Portingall, so that to conclude, it was full of people, and most of the Gentilitie of India, & in all our ships there were many that séeing vs in daunger would say they might haue gone safely in the Saint, Thomas thinking it vnpossible that it should bee cast awaie. Therefore it is manifestly séene, that all the works and nauigations of men are but méer vanities, and that wee must onely put our trust in God, for that if God be not with vs in our actions, all our labour is in vaine,

But returning to our matter, each shippe did their best to be first, vntill the seuentéenth of Februarie that we got before the S. Tho∣mas, being in the South vnder seuen de, grées, and from that time forwards we saw her no more, but onely the tokens of y^e casting of her away about the Cape de bona Spe∣ranza, which after being at the Island of S. Helena, was tolde vs more at large. The same day we had a great storme of wind and raine, so that the Ruther of our great maste by force of the Sea was broken And from the line we had a North and northwest wind with continuall raynes, stormes and fowle weather, neuer ceasing vntill wee came vn∣der 20. degrees, which was vpon the 25. of Februarie, and then wee had a Southeast wind, with fayrer weather (called by the Portingalles the generall wind) which they commonly finde and looke for vnder 12. de∣grees: but we had it not before we were vn∣der ••0. degrees: the cause whereof wee thought to be, for that we had put so farre in∣to the sea, out of the common way. This wind commonly holdeth vnto 27. or 28. de∣grées little more or lesse, and then they must looke for all kindes of windes and weathers, vntill they come to the Cape de bona Spe∣ranza, without any certainty of winds.

The 5. of March being vnder 25 degrées, we had an East winde, with a most great storme, and exceeding raine, so that our Ru∣ther-staffe brake, and two more that we had in the shippe, one after the other being put vnto it broke likewise, with the pinne and y^e ioynt wherein the ende of the Ruther hung: and we were forced to lie and driue without steering, hauing stricken all our sayles, and the shippe so toised by the waues on all sides, that wee had not one drie place in all the ship. In this sort wee lay driuing for the space of two dayes and two nights together, with a continuall storme and fowle weather with rayne. The same night we saw vppon the maine yarde, and in many other places a certaine signe, which the Portingalles call Corpo Santo, or the holy body of brother Peter Gonsalue••, but the Spaniards call it S. Elmo, and the Greekes (as ancient wri∣ters rehearse, and Ouid among the rest) v∣sed to call it Helle and Phryxus. Whenso∣euer that signe sheweth vpon the Maste or maine yarde, or in any other place, it is com∣monly thought, that it is a signe of better weather: when they first perceiue it, the mai∣ster or the chiefe boteswaine whistleth, and commaundeth euery man to salute it with a Salue corpo Santo, and a mis••ricordia, with a very great cry and exclamation. This constellation (as Astronomers do write) is ingendred of great moysture and vapors, and sheweth like a candle that burneth dimly and skippeth from one place to another, neuer ly¦ing still. We saw fiue of them together, all like the light of a candle, which made mee wonder▪ and I should haue hardly beleeued it, but that I saw it, and looked verie earnestly vpon it: and although it was fowle weather, whereby I had no great leasure to think vp∣on such curious thinges, notwithstanding I came purposely from vnder the hatches to note it. Those fiue lights the Portingals cal Coroa de nossa Se••liora, that is, deere La∣dies Crowne, and haue great hope therein when they see it. And therewithall our men being all in great feare and heauines, and al∣most out of hope, began againe to reuiue and to be glad, as if thereby they had beene fully assured of better comfort.

The seuenth of March wee had better weather, and then we tooke counsell how to mend our Ruther: some were of opinion we shoulde saile to Mosambique, and rule the Ruther with a rope: others were of contra∣ry opinion, and said we might mend it abord, and so performe our voyage: so that at the last we pulled certaine péeces out of the ships side, (for we had not brought one with vs, as néede required) but being pulled forth, they were all too little, and woulde not serue. In the ende wee sound it conuenient to take one of the bosses in our shippe, and thereof to make an Anuile, and of two O••e hydes a payre of bellowes, wherewith wee went to worke: and of a péece of an olde hooke or dragge, wee tooke two or three ends, where∣of but one woulde serue, and that halfe bro∣ken, and the splinters wee bounde with an Iron hoope: and so being fitter to the Ru∣ther, wee set forwards in the name of God. This asked vs two dayes worke before wee could dispatch it▪ & thē we hoysed sayle again with great ioy, & gaue diuers almes to our Lady and the Saintes, w••th many promi∣ses of better life, as being in misery m••n com∣monly do. The day after we tooke the height of the Sunne, and found our selues to be vn∣der 28. degrees and two thirdes, being in the height of the land called ••erra D••natal, al∣though wee were at the least ••••••. miles to seaward from the lande, and there wee had good weather with a Southeast winde. In this countrey called ••erra Do••••••a•• which reacheth to 3••. degrees•• and at the Cape de bona Sp••••anza, and is the hardest passage that is in all the voyage, and oftentimes they feare the land of Natal more th••n ••he ••ape: for there commonly is stormy and fowle weather▪ and many shippes haue ••eene spoy∣led and cast away, as the Portingalles re∣cordes

can verie well shew. In the same countrey also wee founde the signes of the ca∣sting away of the S. Thomas, so that to to conclude, commonly the shippes doe there pay tribute by casting some lading ouer bord, or else leaue body and all behind: and there∣fore it is called Terra Donatal, that is to say, the lande of Christmasse: and for this cause they neuer passe it without great feare but with good watch, and great foresight: all their ropes being stiffe, and well looked vnto▪ the peeces drawne in, and all chestes, pottes, fattes and other roomage that are not stow∣ed vnder hatches, being throwne ouer borde into the sea, and euery thing setled and made ready in his place: for that in this coast they haue one houre fayre weather, and another houre stormie weather, in such manner as if heauen and earth should waste and be consu∣med. In that place likewise with a cleare and fayre weather there commeth a certayne cloude, which in shew séemeth no bigger then a mans fist, and therefore by the Portingals it is called O••ho de Boy, or Oxe eye) and although as then it is cleare, and calme wea∣ther, and that the sailes for want of wind do beate against the mastes, yet as soone as they perceyue that cloude, they must presently strike all their sayles: for that commonly it is vpon the ships before they perceyue it, and with such a storme and noyse, that without al doubt it would strike a shippe into the wa∣ter, if there be not great care had to looke vn∣to it: as it chaunced to the second fléete, af∣ter the Portingalles had discouered the In∣die••, there being ten or twelue shippes in company, which in such a calme and fayre weather let all their sailes hang, and regard∣ed them not, and this custome they obserued in this our nauigation, for sodainely the cloud came with a most horrible storme, and fell vppon them before they coulde preuent it, whereby seuen or eight of them were sunke into the seas, and neuer heard of againe, and the rest with great hurt and much daunger escaped. But from that time forwards they looked better to themselues, and haue learned to know it, so that at this present they watch for it, and yet it giueth them worke enough to doe. This storme falling ouer their heads in this sorte, continueth through the whole Countrey of Terra Donatal, vntil you passe the Cape de bona Speranza.

The 12. of March being vnder 31. de∣grees, wée were right in the winde, and had a calme, whereupon we stroke all our sayles, and so lay driuing 4. dayes together (which the Portingalles call Payraes) hauing a ve∣rie high sea, which tossed our shippes in such sort, that the Saylers estéemed it to be worse then a storme: for that there the waues of the Sea mette in such sorte on all sides, and clasped the shippe in such manner betwixt them, that they made all her ribbes to cracke, and in a manner to open, so that it is very dangerous for the shippes. We were in very great care for our Fouke-maste, and there∣fore we bound our Mastes and all the shippes about with Cables, as harde as possible wee might. This continued till the 17. of March, and then we had a little wind, so that we hoi∣sed saile againe: but it continued no longer then to the next day, and then we fell againe into the wind, and had a storme: wherewith our maine yard brake, and then againe wee stroke al our sails, and so lay driuing or Pay∣raering, as the Portingalles call it. In the meane time we mended our maine yard, and so wee continued driuing without our sailes till the 20. of March, with great risings of the waues of the sea, which much tormented vs, as in that place they commonly doe: all the which time we were vnder 31. degrées, and could not passe forward. In that time we saw many birdes, which the Portingals call Antenalen, and are as bigge as Duckes.

The 2••. of March wee had a little winde, but very sharpe, yet we hoysed our sailes, and sayled by the wind. The next night after, we had a calme, which continued to the 22. day, and then we fell againe into the winde, with so great a storme, that wee were com∣pelled to strike all our sayles, which wee coulde hardly pull in, and could not stay the shippe in any sort, it draue so fast: where∣by wee were in great daunger, so that wee were compelled to binde the bonnet about the Fore-castle, which was our sayle, (for other sayle we might not beare) and so sayled backwarde, whether the winde would driue vs, thereby to haue some ease, and yet we had enough to doe, for wee were com∣pelled to throwe our great Boate ouer bord, with all the chests, pots, and vesselles, that stoode vpon the Hatches, with other wares, such as came first to hand. This storme continued for the space of two dayes & three nights without ceasing.

The 25. of March (being the day be∣fore Palme sunday) we had a better wind and weather, after we had giuen great almes to our blessed Ladie of the Annuntiation, whose Feast was vppon that day, and a∣gain hoysed vp our sayles, keeping our course towards the Cape. At the same time we had a disease in our ship, that tooke vs in y^e mouth, lippes, throate, and tongue, which tooke off the skin and made them swell, whereby they could not eate, but with great paine, and not one in the ship but had it.

The eight of Aprill in the Morning, after we had sayled fifteene daies before the winde, towards the Cape, we perceiued some signes of the land, which is greene water: but wee found no ground, yet was it not aboue fortie miles from the land, according to the Pilots iudgement. We saw there also diuers of the Birds called Mangas de Velludo, that is to say, Veluet sleues, for they haue vpon the ends of their wings, blacke points like Vel∣uet, all the rest beeing white and somewhat gray, which they hold for a certaine signe of land that lyeth within the Cape de Bona Speranza called Baya de la Goa, or the Bay of the Lake, and lyeth vnder thirtie thrée de∣grées & a halfe, from the coast that reacheth towards Mosambique.

The ninth of Aprill at night, we were a∣gaine right in the winde, being vnder thirtie fiue degrees and a halfe, with a great storme, and foule wether, that continued till the 14. of the same Month, so that we were compel∣led, (not being able to endure the force of the Sea, with the continuall storme and foule wether) to sayle back againe before the wind, with the halfe of our Fouke sayle vp, for that wee found our selues not strong enough to driue without sayles, as the shippes common∣ly vse to doe, which oftentimes is the cause of their casting away, as it may well be iud∣ged, by reason of the great force and strength of the waues that runne there: so that it see∣meth almost impossible for a ship to beare out so great a force, though it were of Iron. And although we sayled before the winde, yet wée had danger inough: for that the Sea came be∣hinde and ouer our shippe, and filled all the Hatches, whereby wee were compelled to binde our Mastes, Cables, and all the shippe round about with Ropes, that with y^e great force of the Sea it might not stirre, and flye in péeces. And forced wee were to Pumpe night and day, hauing at each ende of the Fouke-yarde, a rope that reached to the Pi∣lot, and at each rope there stoode fifteene or sixteene men, the Pilot sitting in his seate, and the vnder Pilot behinde vpon the sterne of the shippe, to marke the course of the Sea, and so to aduertise the other Pilot. At the ru∣ther there stoode ten or twelue men, and the other Saylers vpon the Hatches to rule the sayles, & as the waues came and couered the shippe, the vnder Pilot called, and then the chiefe Pilot spake to them at the Ruther to hold stiffe, and commaunded the ropes that were at the Fouke yarde to bee pulled stiffe: the Saylers likewise and the chiefe Bote∣swaine standing on the Hatches, to keepe the ship right in the waues, for if the waues had once gotten vs about, that they had entred on the sides of the shippe, it had certainly beene said of vs, Requiescant in pace. And it was there almost as cold as it is here with vs in winter, when it freeseth not: whereby wee were all sore toyled, and in a manner out of hart, so that wee esteemed our selues cleane cast away: for we were forced by turnes to go to the ruther & from thence to the pumpe, (not one excepted) so that we had no time to sleepe, rest, eate, nor cloath our selues: and to help vs the better the staffe of our Ruther brake in péeces, and had almost slaine two or three of our men. But God had pittie on vs, so that there happened no other hurt but that some of them were a litle amazed. This con∣tinued to the fourteenth of April, without any change, whereupon all the Officers of the shippe assembled together with others of the companie, taking counsell what was best to be done, and perceiuing the shippe not to bee strong enough to passe the Cape, they con∣cluded by protestation (whereunto they sub∣scribed their hands) to sayle with the ship to Mosambique, and there to winter and to repaire the shippe, and prouide all necessaries for it, which greatly greeued the common sort because they did find as great danger in turn∣ing backe againe to Mosambique, as to passe the Cape, for that they were to sayle a∣gaine by the land Donatal, which they fea∣red, as much as the Cape: and also though they did arriue at Mosambique, yet they ac∣counted it as much as a lost Viage. For that they must stay there till the next yeare, and there spend all they haue, for that all things that come thether are brought out of India: so that euerie thing is there as ••eare as gold, which would bee hard for the poore Saylers and Swabbers, as hauing but little meanes to relieue themselues, and therby they should be constrained to sel that litle they had broght with them, for halfe the value: and besides that they were as then about ••00. miles frō Mosambique. Wherefore there grew great noyse and murmuring in the ship, among the Saylers, that cursed the Captaine and the Officers, because the ship was badly proui∣ded, for it had not one rope more then hung about the ship nor any thing wherof to make them, if those that we had, should haue chan∣ced to breake. The Captaine laide the faulte on the Master, because hee asked them not when hee was at land: and the Ma••ter saide that he had spoken for them, and that the Cai∣ro, or Hemp (whereof in India the ropes are made) was deliuered vnto the Captaine, and that he had sold y^e best part thereof, to put the money in his purse: & that was the cause why we wanted: with this disorder they bring their matters to passe, not once remembring what

may after fall out: but when they are in dan∣ger, thē ther is nothing els, but crying Mise∣ricordia, and calling to our lady for helpe: the Captaine could not tell what to answere sée∣ing vs in that trouble, but said, that he mar∣uelled at nothing so much, as why our Lord God suffered them (beeing so good Christi∣ans and Catholiques, as they were) to passe the Cape, with so great torments and dan∣gerous weather, hauing so great and strong shippes, and that the Englishmen, béeing (as he said) Heretickes, and blasphemers of God, with so smal & weake vessels, & passed y^e Cape so easilie: for they had receaued newes in India, that an English Shippe had passed the Cape with verie great ease. And so wee made backe againe towards Mosambique, being in great dispaire, for that no man cared for laying his hand to worke, and hardlie would any man obay the Officers of the Shippe. In this manner sayling, wee per∣ceiued diuers vesselles, and bordes with dead men bound vpon them, driuing in the Sea: which comforted vs a little, thinking that some other of the shippes were in the same taking, and had throwne some of their goods ouer bord, and so made towardes Mosambi∣que before vs: whereby we thought to haue company, and that we alone were not vn∣fortunate, for that is commonlie said, that companions in miserie are a comfort one to an other, and so it was to vs: but I would to God it had bene so as we imagined, but it was farre worse then turning backe againe, for those were the signes of the casting away of the S. Thomas, as being in the Iland of S. Helena, as we were afterwards aduertised.

The 15. of April we had an other great calme, which continued till the 17 day, and taking the hight of the Sunne, we found our selues to be vnder 37 degrees, to the great ad∣miration of al the company, for that being (as I said) vnder 35 degrees, and hauing sayled for the space of 5 dayes with so great a wind and stormy weather towards Mosambique, we should rather by al mens reason, haue les∣sened our degrees, & by estimation wee made account to haue bene vnder 30 or 32 degrees at the highest: but the cause why our shippe went backward in that sort against wind and weather towards the Cape, thinking wee made towards Mosambique, was by the water, which in those countries carieth with a verie strong streame towards the cape, as the Pylot tould vs he had proued at other times: yet he thought not that the water had runne with so great a streame, as now by ex∣perience he found it did: so as it séemed that God miraculouslie against all mans reason and iudgement, and all the force of wind and stormes would haue vs passe the Cape, whē we were least in hope thereof: whereby we may plainelie perceiue that all mens actions without the hand of God, are of no moment. The same day againe we saw gréene wa∣ter, and the birdes called Mangas de Vellu∣do, or veluet sléeues, which are certain signes of the cape de bona Speranza, which put vs once againe in hope to passe it: and about eue∣ning a swallow flew into our shippe, wherat they much reioiced, saying that it was a sign and foreshowing, that our Lady had sent the Swallow on bord to comfort vs, and that we should passe the Cape: wherewith they agreed once againe to proue if we could passe it, séeing we had such signes and tokens to put vs in good comfort, that God would help vs. This being concluded, we sung the Leta∣ny, with Ora pro nobis, and gaue many al∣mes, with promises of pilgrimages and visi∣tations, and such like things, which was our dayly worke. With that the saylers & others began to take courage, and to be lustie, euery man willinglie doing his office, offering ra∣ther to lose life and welfare in aduenturing to passe the Cape, then with full assurance of their safetie to returne vnto Mosambique: we had as then great waues, and very bigge water in the sea, which left vs not till wee came to the other side of the Cape.

The 18 of Aprill we fell againe into the wind, with as great stormes and foule wea∣ther as euer we had before, so that we thought verily we should haue bene cast away: for that at euerie minute the sea couered our ship with water, & to lighten her, we cast diuers chestes, and much Cinamon, with other thinges, that came first to hand, ouer bord, wherewith euerie man made account to die, and began to confesse themselues, and to aske each other forgiuenes, thinking with∣out more hope, that our last day was come. This storme continued in this sort, at the least, for the space of 24 houres: in the mean time great almes were giuen in our shippe to many Virgin Maries, and other Saints, with great deuotion & promise of other won∣derfull things when they came to land: at the last God comforted vs, and sent vs better weather for that the 19 of A••••ill the wether began to cleéere vp, and therewith we were in better comfort▪

The 20. of Aprill we tooke the hight of the Sunne, and found it to be ••6 degrées: and againe we saw greene water, and some birds which they call Alcatraces, and many Sea∣wolues, which they hold for certain signes of the cape de Bona Sperāza, & as we thought were hard by the land▪ but yet saw none: the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller,

and were in great hope to passe the Cape, so that the men began to be in better comfort, by reason of the signes we haue seene. All that day we saw greene water, till the 22 of Apr. vpon which day twice, and in the night fol∣lowing, we cast out the Lead, and found no ground, which is a good signe that wee had passed the Cape called das Agulhas, or the cape of needles, which lieth vnder 35 degrees, and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bo∣na Speranza, which lieth vnder 34 degrées & a half. And because that about this cape Das Agulhas, there is ground found, at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land, we knew wee were past it: as also by the colour of the wa∣ter, and the birds, which are alwaies found in those countries: and the better to assure vs thereof, the great & high sea left vs, that had so long tormented vs, and then we found a smoother water, much differing from the for∣mer: so that as thē we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradice, with so great ioy, that we thought we were within the sight of some hauen, and withall had a good winde, though somewhat cold.

The 23 of Aprill we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, with a great and generall gladnes, it being as then 3 months and three dayes after we set sayle from Cochiin, not once seeing any land or sand at all, but onelie these assured tokens of the said Cape, which happened very seldome: for that the pilots doe alwaies vse what meanes they can to see the cape, and to know the land, thereby to know certainlie that they are past it: for then their degrees must lessen, and there they may as soone make towards Mosambique, as to the Iland of S. Helena: for although they can well perceiue it by y^e water, yet is it necessary for them to see the land, the better to set their course vnto S. Helena, wherein they must alwaies kéepe on the left hand: otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it, if they leaue that course: for if they once passe it, they can not come to it again, because there blow∣eth continually but one kind of wind, which is South east: and thus hauing passed the Cape, we got before the wind.

The 24 of Aprill the Pilot willed vs to giue the Bona viagen vnto the Cape de Bo∣na Speranza, according to the custome, with great ioy and gladnes of all that were in the shippe: for that as thē they assure themselues that they sayl to Portingal, and not to turne againe into India (for so long as they are not past the Cape they are alwaies in doubt) and as then we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape. The signes and tokens whereby they know themselues certainly to haue passed the Cape, are great heapes and péeces of thicke réedes, that alwaies thereabouts driue vppon the water, at least 15 or •••• miles from the land: as also certaine birds by the Portingals called Fey••oins, somewhat greater then sea m••w••s, being white & full of blacke spots ouer al their bodies, & very easie to be known from al other birds. These are certain signes whereby the Pilotes doe certainly perswade themselues that they are past the Cape, and hauing passed it, they set their course for S. Helena Northwest, & Northwest & by west. The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind, and so continued till the next day, and thē we had a calm, being vnder 3•• degrees on Por∣tingal side. The ••9 of Apr. w•• g••t before the wind, which is the generall wind y^t alwaies bloweth in those countries al the whole yere, vntill y^• come to the Equinoctial line, and is a Southeast wind: so y^t they may wel let their sayles stand, & lay them down to sl••ep, for in y^e greatest wind y^t bloweth there, they need not strike their maine yard aboue half the mast.

The 12 of May, in the morning betimes▪ we discouered the Ilād of S. Helena, where∣at there was so great ioy in the ship, as if we had bene in heauen: & as then we were about 2 miles from y^e land, the Iland lying from vs West, south west: whereunto we sayled so close, that with a caliuer shot we might reach vnto the shore: being hard by it, we sayled a∣bout a corner of the land, that from vs lay Northwest, which hauing compassed wee sayled close by the land. West, North west: the land on that side beeing so high and still, that it séemed to be a wall that reached vnto the skyes. And in that sort we sayled about a mile and a half, and compassed about y^e other corner that lay westward from vs, which corner béeing compassed, we presentlie per∣ceiued the shippes that lay in the road, which were those ships that set sayle before vs out of India, lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner, close vnder the land, so that the land as then lieth South east from them: and by reason of the high land the shippes lie there as safe, as if they were in a hauen: for they may well heare the wind whistle on the top of their maine yards, but lower it can not come: and they lie so close vnder the land, that they may almost cast a stone vpon the shore. There is good ground there, at 25 and 30 fadomes deep, but if they chance to put further out, or to passe beyond it, they must goe forward, for they can get no more vnto y^e land: and for this cause we kept so close to the shore, that the height of the lād took the wind frō vs, & the ship wold not steer without wind, so that it draue vpon the land, wherby our horesprit touched y^e shore, & ther∣with we thought that shippe & goods had all

beene cast away: but by reason of the great depth, being 1••. fadomes water, and with the help of the Boats, and men off the other ships that came vnto vs, we put off from the land, without any hurt, and by those Boates wee were brought to a place wher the other ships lay at Anker, which is right against a valley, that lyeth betwéene two high hilles, where∣in there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena. There we found fiue shippes, which were, the ship that came from Malacca, and the S. Mary that had béene there about 15. daies, which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza, the S. Anthonie, and the S. Christopher being Admiral, that had arriued there ••0. daies before, and the Con∣ception, which came thether but the day be∣fore vs, so that ther wanted none of the Fléet but the S. Thomas, and by the signes and tokens, that we and the other ships had séene at Sea, we presumed it to be lost, as after we vnderstoode (for it was neuer seene after) for the other shippes had seene Mastes, Deales, Fattes, Chestes, & many dead men that had bound themselues vpon boards, with a thou∣sand other such like signs. Our Admiral like∣wise had béene in great danger of casting a∣way: for although it was a new ship, & this the first Viage it had made, yet it was so ea∣ten with Wormes, that it had at the least 20 handfuls déepe of water within it, and at the Cape was forced to throw halfe the goods o∣uer bord, into the Sea, and were constrained continually to Pumpe with two Pumpes, both night and day, and neuer holde still: and being before the Iland of S. Helena, had ther also sunke to the ground, if the other ships had no•• holpen her. The rest of the shippes coulde likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had indured. About thrée Monthes before our arriuall at S. Helena, there had béene a ship which the yere before set out of Ormus, with the goods & men that remained in the S. Sal∣uador, that had béene saued by the Portingal armie, vpon the coast of Abex, and brought vnto Ormus, as in an other place I haue de∣clared. That ship had wintered in Mosam∣bique, and had passed verie soone by the Cape, & so sayled without any companie vnto Por∣tingall, hauing left some of her sicke men in the Iland, (as the maner is) which the next ships that came thether must take into them. These gaue vs intelligence, that about foure monthes before our arriuall, there had béene an English ship at the Iland of Saint Hele∣na, which had sayled through the Straights of Magel••anaes, and through the south seas, & from thence to the Ilands of Phillippinas, and had passed through the Straights of Sun∣da, that lyeth beyond Malacca, betwéene the Ilands of Sumatra and Iaua: in the which way she had taken a shippe of China (such as they call Iunckos) laden with Siluer and Golde, and all kind of Silkes, and that shee sent a letter with a small present to the Bish∣op of Malacca, telling him, that shee sent him that of friendship, meaning to come her selfe and visite him. Out of that ship of Chi∣na, they tooke a Portingall Pilot, & so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, and came to the Iland of Saint Helena, where they tooke in fresh water and other necessaries, and beate downe the Alter and the Crosse that stoode in the Church, and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword, which the Portingales at our ar∣riual found there, yet could they not conceiue or thinke what that might meane. Some thought it was left there for a signe to some other ships of his companie, but euerie man may thinke what he will thereof. In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper, one Gerrit van Afhuysen, borne in Ant∣warpe, and dwelling in Lisbone, who had sayled in the same ship from Lisbone about two yeares before, for that they staied in Ma∣lacca at the least fourtéene Monthes, by rea∣son of the warres and troubles that were in that countrie, vntill Malacca was relieued, as I saide before: whereby they had passed great miserie, and béene at great charges. And because it is a very vnwholesome coun∣trie▪ together with y^e constraint of lying there so long, of 200. men, that at the first sayled from Lisbone in the ship, there were but 18. or 20. left aliue, and all the rest dyed, so that they were enforced to take in other vnskilfull men in Malacca, to bring the shippe home. This Gerrard van Afhuysen, being of mine acquaintance and my good friend, before my departure out of Portingall for India, mar∣uelled and ioyed much to find me there, little thinking that we should méete in so strange a place, and there we discoursed of our trauels past. And of him among diuers other things, I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca, as of the countries and Ilands lying about it, both for their manner of dea∣ling in trade of Marchandise, as in other me∣morable things. By the pictures following, you may sée the true description of the Iland of Saint Helena, and of the thrée sides ther∣of, as we passed by it, and as we sayled about it to the road, as also of the Iland of Ascen∣tion. The description of which two Ilands you may here perceiue and learne, as I my selfe could marke the same.

The 94. Chapter. A briefe description of the Iland Saint Helena.

[illustration]

SANCTA HELENA

THe Iland of Saint Helena is so named, because the Por∣tingales discouered it vppon Saint Helens day, which is the twentie one of May. It is in compasse sixe miles, little more or lesse, and lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and a quarter, on the South side of the Equi∣noctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza, and from the coast cal∣led Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles, & from Brasilia 510. miles. These are the two née∣rest lands adioyning to it. It is a verie high and hillie countrie, so that it commonly rea∣cheth vnto the cloudes: the countrie of it selfe is verie ashie and drie: also all the trees that are therein, whereof there are great store, & grow of themselues in the woodes, are little worth but only to burne: for it hath no special substance, but sheweth as if it were halfe con∣sumed, so that it should seeme that some mines of Brimstone, hath in times past béene in that Iland, as commonly all the Ilands are all much subiect to the same: for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brim∣stone. When the Portingales first discouer∣ed it, there was not any beasts, nor fruite, at all within the Iland, but onely great store of fresh water, which is excellent good, and falleth downe from the mountaines, and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley, where the Church standeth, and from thence by small chanels into the Sea, where the Portingales fill their vessels full of fresh wa∣ter, and wash their clothes: so that it is a great benefit for them, and a pleasant sight to be∣hold, how cleare & in how many streames the water runneth downe into the valley, which may bee thought a myracle, considering the drinesse of the country, together with the sto∣nie Rockes and hilles therein. The Portin∣gales haue by little and little brought many beastes into it, and in the valleyes planted al sorts of fruites: which haue growne there in so great abundance, that it is almost incredi∣ble. For it is so full of Goates, Buckes, wild Hogges, Hennes, Partridges, and Doues, by thousands, so that any man that will, may hunt and take them: & ther is alwaies plentie and sufficient, although there came as many shippes more into the Iland as there doe: and they may kill them with stones and staues by reason of the gret numbers of them. Now for fruites, as Portingall Figges, Pomgra∣nets, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, and such like fruites, there are so many, that growe without planting or setting, that all the val∣leyes are full of them, which is a great plea∣sure to beholde, so that it séemeth to bee an earthly Paradise. It hath fruite all the yeare long, because it raineth there by showers at the least fiue or six times euerie day, and then againe the Sunne shineth so, that whatsoe∣uer is planted, there it groweth verie well: but because the Portingales are not ouer cu∣rious of new things, there groweth not of al sorts of fruites of Portingall and India in that Iland: for assuredly without any doubt

they would growe well in that land, because of the good temperature of the ayre, besides this, they haue so great abundance of Fish, round about the Iland, that it séemeth a won∣der wrought of God: for with crooked nayles, they may take as much Fish as they will, so that all the shippes doe prouide themselues of Fish, of all sorts in that place, which is han∣ged vp and dried, and is of as good a taste and sauor, as any Fish that euer I eate: and this euery man that hath beene there, affirmeth to be true. And the better to serue their turnes, vpon the Rockes they find salt, which serueth them for their necessarie prouisions, so that to conclude, it is an earthly Paradise for y^e Por∣tingall shippes, and seemeth to haue been mi∣raculously discouered for the refreshing and seruice of the same, considering the smalnesse and highnesse of the land, lying in the middle of the Ocean seas, and so far from the firme land or any other Ilands, that it séemeth to be a Boye, placed in the midle of the Spanish Seas: for if this Iland were not, it were im∣possible for the shippes to make any good or prosperous Viage: for it hath often fallen out, that some shippes which haue missed thereof, haue endured the greatest miserie in y^e world, and were forced to put into the coast of Gui∣nea, there to stay the falling of the raine, and so to get fresh water, and afterwardes came halfe dead and spoyled into Portingall. It is the fashion, that all the sicke persons, that are in the shippes, and can not wel sayle in them, are left there in the Iland, with some prouisi∣on of Rice, Bisket, Oyle, and some Spices, for Fish and flesh they may haue enough, for when the ships are gone, then all the beastes (which by reason of the great num∣ber of people fly into the mountaines) come downe againe into the valleyes, where they may take them with their handes and kill them as they list, those sicke men stay there till the next yeare, till other ships come the∣ther, which take them with them, they are commonly soone healed in that Iland, as be∣ing a verie sound and pleasant countrie: and it is verie seldome seene that any of them dy∣eth there, because they haue alwaies a tem∣perate ayre, and coole winde, and alwayes fruite throughout the who•••• yeare. The king will not suffer any man to dwell in it, because they should not destroye & spoyle the countrie, and holde it as their owne, but will haue it common for euerie man to take what he hath neede of. In time past there dwelt an Hermet in the Ile, who continued there for certaine yeares, vnder pretence of doing penance, and to vphold the Church, hee killed many of the Goates and Buckes, so that euerie yeare hee sold at the least fiue or sixe hundred skinnes, and made great profit therof: which the King hearing, caused him presently to bee brought from thence into Portingall. Likewise vpon a certaine time two Ca••••ares or blacke peo∣ple of Mosambique, and one Iauer, with two women slaues stoale out of the shippes, and hid themselues in the Rockes of this I∣land, which are verie high and wilde, where∣by men can hardly passe them. They liued there together, and begot children, so that in the ende they were at the least twentie per∣sons, who when the ships were gone, ran throughout the Iland and did much hurt, ma∣king their houses & dweling places betweene some of the hilles, where not any of the Por∣tingales had beene, nor yet could easily come at them: and therein they hid themselues vn∣till the shippes were gone, but in the end they were perceiued, and the Portingales vsed all the meanes they could to take them▪ but they knew so well how to hide and defend them∣selues, that in many yeares they could not be taken: in the end, fearing that they might in time be hurtfull vnto them, and hinder them much, by expresse commaundement of the King, after long and great labour, they tooke them all and brought them prisoners into Portingall: so that at this present no man dwelleth therein, but onely the sicke men, as I told you before. When the ships come the∣ther, euerie man maketh his lodging vnder a trée setting a Tent about it: for that the trees are there so thicke, that it presently séemeth a little towne or an armie lying in the fielde. Euerie man prouideth for himselfe, both flesh fish, fruite and woode, for there is enough for them all: and euerie one washeth Linnen. There they hold a generall fasting and pra∣yer, with Masse euerie daye, which is done with great deuotion, with procession, and thankesgiuing and other Himnes, thanking God that hee hath preserued them from the danger of the Cape de Bona Speranza, and brought them to that Iland in safetie. There they vse oftentimes to Carus their names, and markes in trees & plants for a perpetuall memorie: whereof many hundredth are there to be found, which letters with the growing of the trées, doe also grow bigger and bigger, we found names that had been there since the yeare of the Lord 1510. & 1515. and euerie yeare orderly following, which names stoode vpon Figge trées, euery letter being of the bignesse of a spanne, by reason of the age and growing of the trées. This shal suffice for the description of the Iland of Saint Helena.

The 21. of May, being Saint Helenas day, and Whitsunday, after we had taken in all our fresh water, and other necessaries, we set sayle altogether in companie, and directed

[illustration]

Th•• 〈…〉〈…〉

[illustration]

P••••nt••d 〈◊〉〈◊〉 London by ••ohn Wolfe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by William Rogers

[illustration]

THE TRVE Description of the ISLAND of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 lyei••g 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by •• degrees on y^e S••uth syde of y^e Equinoctiall lyne.

[illustration]

Printed at London by Iohn Wolfe G••••uen by William Rogers

our course towardes Portingall, leauing a∣bout fiftéene sicke men in the Ilande, & some slaues that ranne out of the ships. The 26. of May in the Euening, wee spake with the Saint Mary, and the next day with the Gal∣lion of Malacca: the same Morning and in the after noone with the Admirall, who wil∣led vs to follow him vnto the Iland of the As∣cention. The same day one of our slaues fell ouer bord, & although we vsed all the meanes we could to saue him, yet we could not doe it, by reason wee sayled before the winde. The same day at night wee saw the Iland of As∣cention, and lauered all that night, because we would not passe the Iland. In the Mor∣ning the 28. of May, we sayled about the I∣land, to sée if there were any ground to Anker on, because the Admirall was so leake, that shee could no longer holde out: and the men desired the Officers of the shippe, that they would lay the goods on land, in the Iland of Ascention, and there leaue it with good watch and necessaries for them that keepe it, and so sayle with the emptie ship to Portin∣gall: and there procure some other shippe to fetch the goods, thinking it was sufficient to haue it well watched and kept there, for that there commeth not a ship in twentie yeares into that Iland, because there is nothing in it to be had. We went close vnto it, by a ve∣rie white and faire Sand, where the Admi∣rall and all the shippes cast out the Lead, and found from eightie to fiftie, and 4••. Fadomes water: and although they might haue gone closer to the land, yet the Officers excused themselues, saying, that they coulde not goe neerer, and that it was too deepe and verie dangerous for them to Anker there. Which they said to pacifie the men, desiring that they might borow two Pumpes nore of the other shippes, and so without doubt they woulde bring the shippe safe vnto Portingall, and al∣though it would bee great paine and labour for them to doe it, yet they must of force con∣tent themselues: for that the Admirall and all the Gentlemen that were in the shippe▪ pum∣ped both day and night, as their turnes came about, as well as the meanest in the shippe, onely to encourage the people. They borow∣ed one Pumpe of the Saint Mary, and sent to desire vs to lend them another, and al∣though our ship was none of the best among the Fleet▪ we were of opinion not to lend him any, as not knowing what neede wee should haue our selues, hauing so long a way to sayle yet in the end seeing the great necessitie they were in, we lent them one, the rather because they sayd, that the Admirals meaning was, if it were calme wether, to discharge some of their wares into other shippes, thereby to lighten themselues, but it fell not out as they thought, so that with great miserie and labor they ouercame their iournie.

The 95. Chapter. Of the Iland called the Ascention.

THis Iland was discouered vpon Ascention daye, and in shew séemeth as great as the Iland of Saint Helle∣na, but not so high. It is ful of hilles and dales, lying vn∣der eight degrées and a halfe, on the South∣side of the Equinoctiall line▪ and lyeth North∣west distant from Saint Helena, 19•• Spa∣nish miles, and from the Equi••octiall line 140. miles. There is not any fresh water in the Iland, nor one greene leafe or branch. It hath many hilles of a reddish colour, which shew like a certaine Earth in Spaine called Almagro, and is full of stonie hilles, and dry∣ed land, it is like Saint Helena. There hath beene some shippes there, that missed Saint Helena, and sought for fresh water in that Iland, but could find none. It hath certaine faire and white Sandes about it, and great store of Fish, wherein it surpasseth S. Hele∣na, but in it there are no beastes at all, onely by reason of the great quantitie of Fishes. Ther are so many Birds in it y^t it is strange, and they are of the bignesse of young Geese, & came by thousands flying about our ships, crying and making great noyse, and ranne vp and downe in the shippe, some leaping and sitting on our shoulders and armes, not once fearing vs, so that wee tooke many of them, and wrung of their neckes, but they are not good to eate, because they taste morish. I thinke the cause they are so tame is, because they see but few men, and some desire to goe to them. About that Iland and the Iland of Saint Helena, vnto the Equinoctiall line, there are flying Fishes, as great as Herings which flie by great flockes together, two or thrée Fadome aboue the water, and flie in that manner at the least a quarter of a mile, vntill their wings or finnes be drie, and then they can flie no longer, but fall into the wa∣ter, and there wet themselues, and then flie againe aboue the water. The cause why they flie in that sort is, because they are chased by the great fishes, that eate them, and to escape from them, they flie aboue the wa∣ter, and some times into the shippes: for ma∣ny of them fell into our ship, which flew too high, for whē their wings are drie they must needes fall.

From that Island of Ascention the shippes held their course Northwest and by West, til they be a degree past the Equinoctiall line on the North side, where there lyeth a cliffe called Penedo de Sam Pedro, which many times they sée, and to it from the Islande of Ascention are 300. miles. The 5. of Iune we passed againe the Equinoctiall line, and then again began we to see the North starre, which we had lost vnder ten degrées, on this side Cochijn, and now began to lose the sight of the South starre, and there we had the sun in the South at twelue of the clocke at noone, in which on the other side of the line at the same time is in the North. The 8. of Iune being 4. degrées in the North, we lost our ge∣nerall South east winde, that had serued vs from the Cape de bona Speranza thether, & then began the raines and calmes: for as then we began to come neare the coast of Gui∣nea, which continueth to 9. degrees. These calmes and raines helde vs till 11. degrées, being the 20, of Iune, whereby the ships se∣perated themselues, by reason of the calmes which made them not able to stéerre: and in the 11. degrees they met againe, and there we had a North east wind, which is called the generall winde, because it floweth conti∣nually in those Countries, and holdeth to 30. and ••2. degrées, beginning many times at 6. and 7. degrees: but wee had it not till wee were vnder 1••. degrées. This wind is some∣what scant, for wee must of force saile in the wind, because our chiefe course is Northwest and by North.

The 23. of Iune we passed the point of Capo Verde, which is vnder 15. degrées, and the 26. of the same month we passed the Islands of Capo Verde, which are ten in number. They beginne vnder 15. degrées, and end in 19. degrées, and are distant from the firme land of Capo Verde, from 70. to 1••0. miles inwards to the sea. Then wee entred into the sea, called Sergasso, which is all couered with hearbes, so that it séemeth to be like a gréene fielde, & so thicke that a man can not see the water, neyther can the ships passe through them, but with great labour, vnlesse they haue a strong wind. The hearbe is like Samper, but yellow of colour, & hath berries like Goose berries, but nothing in them. The Portingalles call it Sargasso, because it is like the herbes that groweth in their welles in Portingall, called Sargasso: wherevpon that sea is called Sargasso. It is not knowne from whence it commeth: for there is no land nor Island that is knowne to bee neare that sea, but the coast of Africa, which is at the least more then 400. miles from thence. It is thought it commeth from from the ground, and yet there is no ground in that place to bee founde: and in sayling to India, the shippes come not into that sea (for then they kéepe closer to the shore, so that it is not once séene) and it is not found in any place but there, beginning at 20. degrées, & continuing to 34. degrées, so thicke, and so full as if they were whole Islandes, most strange to beholde. In that countrey it is as cold in winter, as it is here with vs when it fréezeth not, which the Portingalles estéeme a great cold, and cloath themselues against it as we doe in a mightie great frost. The last of Iune wee were vnder 23. degrees, being right vnder the Sunne: for y^t the Sun was then in the same height, and we also vnder y^e Tropike of Cancer, which is the furthest part that the Sunne goeth Northwarde, and then it turneth againe vnto the Equinoctial line, and from thence into the South. Wee passed y^e line of Tropicus Capricorni twice, once on the South side, by the ende of the I∣sland of S. Laurence, and then againe vnder 23. degrées, after we had passed the Cape de bona Speranza. The 2. of Iuly wee were vnder the height of the Islands of Canarie, which lie vnder 28. and 29. degrées, and are distant from the coast of Barbarie and Afri∣ca from 30. to 80. miles, which Islandes lay on our right hande: and because in those I∣slandes there are many things that are wor∣thie the noting, therefore I thought it conue∣nient to make a briefe description of them.

The 96. Chapter. A briefe description of the Islands of Canaria.

THe Islandes of Canaria are seuen, which in times past were called the For∣tunadas, and at this day by the Spaniards are cal∣led the Canaries, by rea∣son of the great numbers of dogges which they founde in them, when they were first discouered. The names of the Islands are, great Canarie, Teneriffe, La Palma, La Gomera, El'Hierro, Lansarotte, and Fuer∣te Ventura. In the Island of Teneriffe there is a hil called Pico de Terraira, which is thought to bee the highest hill that euer was found, for it may easily bee séene at the least threescore miles into the sea, before they come at it. It cannot be climed but in the monthes of Iuly and August: for all the other

monthes it lyeth full of snowe, although be∣low in the Island, and in other Islands there∣abouts, they sée no snow. It is thrée dayes iourney to clime vp into it, and on the toppe therof it is flat, and when it is clear and faire weather, a man may from thence sée all the Islandes round about it, although some of them are at the least 50. miles distant, and as much in compasse. The two monthes in which they vse to clime vp vpon the hill, they bring downe certaine peeces of brimstone, from whence it is much caried into Spaine: and at my being in the Island of Tercera, a shipper one of my acquaintance that came from Teneriffe, gaue me a péece thereof, for a remembrance of him. In one of those I∣slandes called Hierro, or of Iron, there is a wonderfull and strange thing to be séene, and I verely thinke it is one of y^e strangest things in the world. This Island is on of the grea∣test of all the seuen: but it is an vnfruitful and barren land, and so drie, that in all the Island there is not one droppe of fresh water to bee found, but onely in some places vppon the sea side, which is farre from hand, so that it profi∣teth the inhabitants but very little. But God of his mercie hath prouided for the want of water both for men and beastes, in this ma∣ner: for there is a great trée, which no man knoweth, (for the like is not found in any o∣ther place) the leaues whereof are small and long, and alwaies gréene without chaunging colour: this trée is couered and compassed about with a small cloud, which alwaies con∣tinueth in one forme, and neuer altereth nor diminisheth: and this cloud casteth dew vpon the leaues of the trée, which hang down, and drop continually (without ceasing) a most cleare, thinne and fine water, which falleth into certaine Cesternes, that by the inhabi∣tants of the Island are made round about & vnder the trée, therein to kéepe and preserue the water.

The Island of Ascention, so called, be∣cause it was discouered vppon the day of Christs ascention into heauen, is not inha∣bited because of the vnfruitfulnes therof, & because it wanteth fresh water: which is also the cause that it is not visited by the ships, for that they hope for no refresh¦ing in the same. The hilles of this Iland are redde like Bolus. About this Iland are many birds, because of the great num∣bers of fishes that are about it, specially small flying fishes, which in Portingall are called Pisce Bolodor. Reade more hereof in the booke, in Folio 175.

And this water is in so great abundance, that it serueth all the Island for their necessa∣rie vses, not onely for the people, but also for their cattle throughout all the Isle, and no man can remember when that wonder first began.

On the right side of this Island about an hundred miles distant: there is yet an other wonder to be noted, which is, that oftentimes there is an Islande séene thereaboutes, called San Borondon, where diuers men haue been on lande, being onely such as fell vppon it on the sodaine, and not looking for it▪ who af∣firme it to bee a very fayre, pleasant, and gréene Countrey full of trées, and all kinds of victuaile, and that it is inhabited by peo∣ple that are Christians: but no man knowes of what nation they are, neyther what lan∣guage they speake. The Spaniards of the Islandes of Canaria haue many times say∣led towardes it to view it, but they could ne∣uer find it: whereupon there goeth diuers opinions of it: for some think it to be inchan∣ted, and that it may not bee seene but vppon certaine dayes: some thinke it to bee very small, and alwaies couered with cloudes, and that therefore it can not bee séene nor founde out: and also the great stormes and strength of the water driueth the shippes from it: but to conclude, it is holden for a truth, that the I∣lande lyeth thereaboutes, as all those that come from thence doe certainly affirme. The Ilandes of Canaria are very fruitfull, and plentifull of all thinges, both victuailes and other necessaries. They haue of all kinds of corne, specially excellent good Wine, which from thence is caried into all places. There is likewise great store of Sugar, which is much esteemed, and also caryed into all coun∣tries of Christendome, which causeth great trafficke vnto those Ilands, as well by Spa∣niardes and Portingalles, as other nations, and is the common staple for the shippes that sayle out of Spayne into the West Indies, and refreshe themselues there, and also take in such Wyne as they commonly vse to carry with them to the West Indies. They haue also great abundance of Cattle and Cammelles, and are now inhabited by Spanyardes, hauing yet therein many of the naturall borne inhabitantes, which they doe call Guanchas, who by reason of their long conuersation with the Spa∣niardes, doe wholly vse their customes, and manner of apparell. The chiefe of these I∣slands is great Canaria, where there is a Bishop, and the inquisition with the tribunal Royall, and it hath the gouernment ouer all the other Islandes, that are called the Cana∣ries.

The 6. of Iulie wee were vnder 32. de∣grees, where wee lost the generall North-East wind, and had a calme, and saw much of

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

the hearbe called Sargasso, which couered all the sea. The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the same month, we got a∣gaine before the wind, being vnder 34. de∣grees, and then we saw no more of the hearbe Sargasso, but a faire cleare sea.

The eighteenth of Iulie wee were vnder 39. degrees, vnder which height lieth the I∣land called de Coruo, and the Island of Ter∣cera, and also the riuer of Lisbone, all these dayes we had many calmes. The next day wee had a West winde being a right fore∣wind, and saw many flying fishes, almost as great as Haddockes, that flew thrée or foure fadomes high aboue the water.

The 22. of Iuly, the winde continuing, a∣bout noone we saw the Ilands called Flores, and de Coruo, which lie one close to the o∣ther: from thence to the Island of Tercera Eastward are 70. miles. At that time wee began to haue many sick men, that is to say, some sicke in their eyes, and some in their breaste and bellies, by reason of the long voi∣age and because their victuals began to loose the taste, & sauour, and many wanted meat, whereby diuers of them through want were compelled to seeth rice with salt water, so that some of them died, which many times were found vnder the fore deck that had laine ••ead two or three dayes no man knowing it, which was a pittifull sight to behold, conside∣ring the miserie they indured aboard those ships. There died in our ship from India vnto that place, of slaues and others, to the number of 24. persons.

The same day about Euening, being hy the Islandes of Flores and Coruo, wee per∣ceiued thrée shippes that made towards vs, which came from vnder the land, which put vs in great feare: for they came close by our Admiral, & shot diuers times at him, & at ano∣ther ship of our companie, whereby wee per∣ceiued them to be English men, for they bare an English flagge vpon their maine tops, but none of them shewed to be aboue 60. tunnes in greatnes. About Euening they followed after vs▪ and all night bore lanternes with Candles bu••ning in them at their sternes, al∣though the Moone shined. The same night passing hard by the Island of Fayarl, the next day being betwéene the Island of S. George that lay on our right hand, and the small I∣sland called C••o••o on our left hand, we es∣spied the thrée English ships still following vs that tooke counsell together, whereof one sayled backwards, thinking that some other ship had come after vs without company, & for a small time was out of sight, but it was not long before it came againe to the other two, wherewith they tooke counsell, & came all thrée together against our shippe, because we lay in the lée of all our ships, and had the Island of S. George on the one side in steede of a sconce▪ thinking to deale so with vs, that in the end we should be constrained to runne vppon the shore, whereof wee wanted not much, and in that manner with their flagges openly displayed, came lustily towardes vs, sounding their Trumpets, and sayled at the least three times about vs, beating vs with Musket and Caliuer, and some great péeces, and did vs hurt in the body of our shippe, but spoyled all our sayles and ropes, and to con∣clude, we were so plagued by them, that no man durst put forth his head, and when wee shot off a peece, we had at the least an houres worke to lade it againe, whereby wee had so great a noise and crie in the ship, as if we had all bin cast away, whereat the English men themselues beganne to mocke vs, and with a thousand iesting words called vnto vs. In the meane time the other shippes hoised all their sailes, & did the best they could to saile to the Island of Tercera, not looking once behinde them to help vs, doubting they should come too late thether, not caring for vs, but think∣ing themselues to haue done sufficiently: so they saued their own stakes, whereby it may easily be séene what company they kéepe one with the other, & what order is among them. In the end the English men perceiuing small aduantage against vs, (little knowing in what case and feare we were, as also because we were not far frō Tercera) left vs, which made vs not a litle to reioyce, as thinking our selues to be risen from death to life, although we were not well assured, neither yet voide of feare till we lay in the road before Terce∣ra▪ & vnder the safetie of the Portingales fort, & that we might get thether in good time we made all the sailes we could: on the other side we were in great doubt, because wee knew not what they did in the Island, nor whe∣ther they were our friendes or enemies, and wee doubted so much the more, because wee found no men of war nor any Caruels of ad∣uise frō Portingal, as we made our accounts to doe, that might conuay vs from thence, or giue vs aduise, as in that countrie ordinarilie they vse to do, & because the English men had bin so victorious in those parts, it made vs sus∣pect that it went not well with Spaine: they of the Iland of Tercera, were in no lesse feare then we, for that séeing our deer, they thought vs to be Englishmen & that we came to ouer run the Iland, because the 3. English mē had boūd vp their flags & came in company with vs: for the which cause the Iland sent out 2. Caruels that lay there with aduise from the King, for the Indian ships that should come thither. Those Caruels came to view vs, and perceiuing what wee were, made after vs, wherevppon the English

ships left vs, & made towardes them, because the Caruels thought them to be friends, and shunned them not, as supposing them to be of our company, but we shot foure or fiue times and made signes vnto them that they should make towards the Island, which they pre∣sently did. The English men perceiuing that did put forwards into the sea, and so the Car∣uels borded vs telling vs that the men of the Island were all in armes, as hauing receiued aduise from Portingall, that Sir Francis Drake was in a readines, and would come vnto those Islands. They likewise brought vs newes of the ouerthrow of the Spanish Fléet before England, and that the English men had béene before the gates of Lisbone: wherupon the king gaue vs commandement that we should put into the Island of Terce∣ra, and there lie vnder the safetie of the Castle vntill we receiued further aduise what wee should doe, or whether we should saile: for that they thought it too dangerous for vs to goe to Li••bone. Those newes put our fleet in great feare, and made vs looke vppon each other not knowing what to say, as being dā∣gerous for them to put into the road, because it lieth open to the sea: so that the Indian ships, although they had expresse comman∣dement from the king, yet they durst not an∣ker there, but only vsed to come thether, and to lauere to and fro, sending their boates on land to fetch such necessaries as they wanted, without ankering: but being by necessity cō∣pelled thereunto, as also by the kinges com∣mandement, and for that wee vnderstood the Earle of Cumberland not to bee farre from those Islands with certaine ships of war, we made necessitie a vertue, and entring the rode, ankered close vnder the Castle, staying for aduise, and order from the king to per∣forme our voyage, it being then the 24. of July, & S. Iames day. We were in al 6 ships, that is 5. from East Indies, & one from Ma∣lacca, & lay in the rode before the Towne of Angra, from whence we presently sent three or foure Caruels into Portingal, with aduise vnto the king of our ariuall. There we lay in great daunger, and much feare, for that when the month of August, commeth it is very dan∣gerous lying before that Iland, for as then it beginneth to storme. The shippes are there safe from all windes, sauing onely from the South and Southeast windes: for when they blow, they lie in a thousand dangers, special∣ly the east Indiā ships, which are very heaui∣ly laden, and so full, that they are almost rea∣die to sinke, so that they can hardly be stéered.

The fourth of August in the night we had a South winde out of the sea, wherewith it began so to storme, that all the ships were in great danger to be cast away, and to run vp∣on the shore: so that they were in great feare and shot off their péeces, to call for help. The officers and most of the sailers were on land, none but pugs and slaues being in the ships: for it is a common custome with the Portin∣gales, that wheresoeuer they anker, present∣ly they goe all on land, and let the shippe lie with a boy or two in it. All the bels in the Towne were hereupon rung, and there was such a noyse and crie in euerie place, that one could not heare the other speak: for those that were on land by reason of the foule weather, could not get aboard, and they in the Shippe could not come to land. Our Shippe the Santa Crus was in great danger, thinking verily that it shuld haue run vpon the sands, but God holy them. The ship that came from Malacca brake her Cables, and had not men enough aboard the shippe, nor any that could tell how to cast forth another anker: so that in the end they cut their mastes, & droue vpon the Cliffes, where it stayed, and brake in péeces, and presently sunke vnder the wa∣ter to the vpper Dorlope, and with that the winde came North West, wherewith the storme ceased, and the water became calme. If that had not béene, al the ships had follow∣ed the same course: for that some of them were at the point to cut their Masts, and Ca∣bles to saue their liues, but God would not haue it so. In that ship of Malacca were lost many rich and costly Marchandises: for these ships are ordinarily as rich as anie ships that come from India, as being full of all the rich wares of China, M••luco, Laua, and all those countries, so that it was great pittie to sée what costly thinges, as Silkes, Damaskes, clothes of gold and siluer, & such like wares) fleeted vpon the sea, and were torne in péeces. There was much goods saued that lay in the vpper part of the ship, and also by duckers, as pepper, Nutmegs, and Cloues, but most of it was lost, and that which was saued, was in a manner spoyled, and little worth: which presently by the kinges officers in the Island was seased vpon, and to the Farmers vses, shut vp in the Alsandega, or Custome house, for the Kinges custome, not once regarding the poore men, nor their long and dangerous Voiage that had continued the space of three yeares, with so great miserie and trouble by them indured in Malacca, (as in another place I haue alreadie shewed:) so that they could not obtaine so much fauour of the king nor of his officers, that of the goods that were saued and brought to land, they might haue some part, although they o••fered to put in su∣erties for so much as the custome might a∣mount vnto, or els to leaue as much goods in

the officers hands as would satisfie them, and although they made daily, and pittifull com∣plaintes, that they had not where with to liue, and that they desired vppon their owne aduentures to fraight certaine shippes or Caruels at their owne charge, and to put in good suerties to deliuer the goods in the Custome house of Lisbone, yet could they not obtaine their requests: but were answe∣red that the king for the assurance of his cu∣stome, and of all the goods, would send an Ar∣mado by sea to fetch the goods: which fetch∣ing continued for the space of two yeares and a halfe, and yet nothing was done, for there came no Armado.

In the meane time the poore saylers con∣sumed all that they had, and desperately cur∣sed both themselues, the king, and all his offi∣cers: yet in the end by great and importunate sute of the Farmers of the pepper, euery mā had licence to lade his goods in what ship hee would, after it had laine there for the space of two yeares and a halfe, putting in suerties to deliuer the goods in the custome house of Lis∣bone, where they must pay the halfe & more of the same goods for custome to the King, without any respect of their hard fortune and great miserie, during their long and dange∣rous Voyage, and he that will be dispatched in the Custome house there, must sée the offi∣cers, otherwise it is most commonly three or foure monthes before the goods are deliuered vnto the owners, and the best thinges, or any fine deuise that the Marchants for their own vses bring out of India, if the officers like thē they must haue them, yet they will promise to pay for them, but they set no day when: so that the poore Marchants are forced to giue them rest, and wel contented that the officers are so pleased, and vse no more delaies.

The eight of August, the officers of the ships tooke counsell together, with the Go∣uernour of the Island what they were best to doe, thinking it not good to follow the kinges aduise, considering their long staying, and fea∣ring some other hard fortune if they should stay, and because a great Gallion being a mā of warre, and very strong, lay as then before the Island, wherein was the Gouernour of Brasil••a, who by foule weather had put in there: they concluded that this Gallion being well appointed should sayle with them to Lis∣bone, and although they did it without the aduise and commandement of the king, yet bad they rather so to aduenture their liues vpon the seas, then againe to stay the danger of the Hauen, for that the winter did daylie more and more increase, so that they were not to looke for any better weather, and in that sort appointing themselues as well as they could, and taking in all necessarie proui∣sions, the same day they all set saile with no small feare to fall into some misfortune by the way: but because many that were of the ship of Malacca, stayed at Tercera to saue such goods as by any meanes might be saued, and by that meanes to help themselues, (among the which was the Factor of the pepper, bée∣ing one of my acquaintance, at whose re∣quest, as also because the Pepper of that ship, and of all the other ships belonged all to one Farmer, by whom I was appointed Factor, and séeing the necessitie he bad, and that he a∣lone could hardly dispatch so great a matter,) I tooke order for mine owne affaires, and ha∣uing dispatched it by other shippes, I stayed there to help him, till wee had further aduise, and order from the Farmers of the Pepper and other spices and wares, of the which goods we saued a great quantitie by meanes of Duckers and other Instruments that we vsed, hauing aduise from the Farmers & the King that it shuld not be long before they sent for vs, willing vs to stay there, and to looke vnto the goods. This staying and fetching vs away continued (as I said before) for the space of two yeares and a halfe, whereby you may consider the good order, and pollicie of the Admiraltie of Portingall, and with what diligence and care they séeke for the common profit of the land, and the poore Marchantes of the Countrie, whome they ought to fauor and help, as much as possiblie they may, but they do cleane contrarie, as those which deale in Portingall doe well finde.

The 13. of August the ships came back a∣gaine vnto the Island of Tercera, because they had a contrarie wind as also for want of fresh water, but they ankered not. The day before the Earle of Cumberland with ••. or 7. ships of warre, sayled by the Iland of Ter∣cera, & to their great good fortune passed out of sight, so that they dispatched themselues in all haste, & for the more securitie, tooke with them 4. hundred Spaniards, of those that lay in Garrison in the Island, & with thē they sayled towards Lisbon, hauing a good wind: so that within a 11. dayes after they arriued in the riuer of L••sbone with great gladnes, & triumph: for if they had stayed but one day longer before they had entred the riuer, they had all béene taken by Captaine Drake, who with 40. ships came before Cascalis, at the same time that the Indian ships cast anker in the riuer of Lisbone, being garded thither by diuers Gallies. Now by the discourse of this long and perilous voiage▪ you may suffi∣ciently perceiue, how that onely by the grace and speciall fauour of God, the Indian ships doe performe their voiages, yet with great miserie, paine, labour, losse, and hinderance: wherby men may likewise consider the man∣ner

of their Nauigatiō, ordinances, customes and gouernments of their ships, so that in cō∣parison of many other Voyages, this present Voyage may be estéemed a happy & prospe∣rous voyage: for oftentimes it chanceth, that but one or two ships (of the fiue that yearely saile to India come safe home, as of late it hath bin séene, some being taken, and some lost, altogether by their owne follies, & bad order, as herin at large you may perceiue, &c.

The 97. Chapter. Of the description of the Islands of Aco∣res of the Flemmish Islands.

THe Isles of Acores, or the Flem∣mish Islands are ••. that is, Ter∣ce••a, Saint Michael, S. Mary, S. George, Gratiosa, Pico, & Fay∣••el. There are yet two Islands called Flo∣res and Cora••, which are not contained vn∣der the name of Acores, but yet at this day are vnder the gouernment of the same I∣slands, so that they are in all accounted ••. I∣slands. They are called Acores, that is to say, Sparhaukes or Haukes, because that in their first discouerte, they found many Spar∣haukes in them, whereof they hold the name, although at this day there is not any there to be found. They are also called the Flem∣mish Islands, that is, of the Neatherlanders, because the first that inhabited the same, were Neatherlanders, whereof till this time there is a great number and ofspring remaining, that in manner and behauiour are altogether like Neatherlanders, and there is yet in the same Island a running water, that issueth out of a hill, & so runneth into the sea, where as yet those issues or ofspringes of Neather∣lāders inhabite, & is called Ariber••dos ••ra∣mengos, that is the Flemmish riuer. The principall Iland of them al, is that of Terce∣ra, called Iusu•• de Iesus C••stus of Terce∣ra. It is betwéene 1••. or ••6. miles in com∣passe, and is altogether a great Cliffe of land, whereby in it there is little roome: for it is as it were walled round about with Cliffes: but where any strand or land is, there stand∣eth a sort. It hath no Hauens nor entrance of waters, for the securitie and safetie of the ships, but only before the chiefe towne called Angra, where it hath an open Hauen, which in forme is like a halfe Moone, by the Portin∣gales called Angra, whereof the towne hath her name. It hath on the one side in manner of an elbow sticking forth, two high hilles, called Bresyl, which stretch into the sea, so y^t a far off they séeme to bee deuided from the Iland. Those hils are very high so that being vpon them, a man may see at the least 10, 12 and sometimes 15. miles into the sea, being cleare weather. Vpon these hils there stand two small stone pillers, where there is a Cē∣tinell placed, that continually watcheth to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 what ships are at sea and so to aduertise those of the Island: for that as many ships as hee séeth cōming out of the west, that is from the Spanish Indies, or Bras••, C••bo v•• Guinea, and the Portingal▪ Indies, and all other waies lying south or west, for euerie ship he setteth a flagge vppon the piller in the west, and when the ships which he deserieth, are more then 5. then hee setteth vp a great auncient, betokening a whole fleet of ships▪ the like he doth vpon the other piller, which standeth in the East, for such Shippes as come from Portingall, or other places out of the East or North partes, these pil∣lers may bee easily séene in all places of the towne, by reason of the highnes of the hils, so that there is not one ship or sayle that is at sea, or maketh towards the Island, but it is presently knowne throughout all the towne, and ouer all the whole Iland: for the watch is not holden onely vppon those two hils iut∣ting into the sea, but also vpon all corners, hilles and cliffes throughout the Iland, and as soone as they perceiue any ships, the Go∣uerner and Rulers are presently aduertised therof, that they may take such order therein as need requireth. Vpon the furthest corner into the sea standeth a sort, right against an∣other fort that answereth it: so that those two forts doe shut and defend the mouth or open hauen of the towne, where the ships lie in the road, and so no ship can either goe in or came forth, without the licence or permission of those two forts. This towne of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is not only the chiefe towne of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, but al∣so of al other townes within y^e Ilands there∣abouts. Therein is resident▪ the Bishop, the Gouernour for the King, and the chiefe place of iudgement, or tribunall seate of all the I∣slands of Acores.

Three miles from this towne lieth ano∣ther towne towards the North, called V•• de Prava for P•• is as much to say, as strand because it lieth hard by a great strand, and for that cause there is little traffique the∣ther, as not hauing any conuenient place for ships to come at it: yet some times there cō∣meth some one, that by reason of contrarie wind cannot get before the towne of Angr••, and so by constraint discharge their goods in that Towne, which from thence are carried by land to Angra, and yet some part thereof is spent and vsed there. It is walled and well housed, but not many people 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and such as are in it, doe get their liuings most by hus∣bandrie: for there are 〈…〉〈…〉 corne lands. The Island is likewise very fruitful and plea∣sant, it hath much corne and wine, but the Wine is not verie good to carrie into other Countries there abouts, because it is

small, and will not long continue, so that it is vsed in the Countrey by the common peo∣ple: but such as are of wealth, for the most part drinke wines of Madera and Canaria. It aboundeth in flesh fish, & all other necessa∣ries and meats for mans body, where with in time of neede they might helpe themselues. Oyle there is none, but it commeth out of Portugall. Also Salt, pottes, pannes, and all kinde of earthen vesselles, Chalke, and such like are brought thether out of other pla∣ces, for there they are not to bee founde: for fruites they haue (besides Peaches of diuers kindes▪ and in so great abundance that it is strange Cherries, Plummes, Walnuttes, Hasle nuttes, Chesnuttes but those not ve∣ry good: of Apples, Peares, Oranges and Lemons with all such like fruites there are sufficient. Of all sorts of Hearbs and plants, as Cole worts, Radishes and such like they haue at their certayne tunes of the yeare. They haue likewise in that Island a certaine fruite that groweth vnder the earth, like Ra∣dishes or other roots, but the leaues or plants are trees like Vines, but different in leaues, and groweth long wise vpon the grounde: it beareth a fruite called Ba••a••as, that is very good and is so great that it weigheth a pound, some more, some lesse, but little esteemed: and yet it is a great sustenance and foode for the common sort of people. It is of good ac∣count in Port••gall▪ for thether they vse to bring it for a present, and those of the Ilande by reason of the great abundance doe little e∣steeme it. There is also another kinde of stuffe that is sowed like corne and is a fruite: it groweth vppon the roote of the grasse or leaues and is round and as bigge as a great Pease, but not so rounde: in eating it tasteth like Cardnuttes, but harder to bite: it is like wise a good meate and much esteemed in other places, but by reason of the great quan∣titie thereof, it is most vsed to fatten their Hogges▪ and is called ••un••. There is also in the Iland a certaine plant, which is found in all places therof in the open fields: it grow∣eth as high as a man▪ and beareth no fruite, onely the roote thereof is a substance, of the th••••knesse of a mans two fi••tes, and in shew as if it were natural golden hair, and in hand∣ling like soft silke, which is vsed there to stuffe and fill their beddes in steede of wooll and fea∣thers▪ and I do certainly beleeue, if any man of vnderstanding woulde take it in hand, it would well be wouen. The principallest traf∣••••••ue of this Iland is their woad, such as wee vse for ••••ing where of much is made in that Iland, and is fetched from thence by English∣men, Scottes, and French men, in barter for cloathes and other wares, who continu∣ally traffique into that Iland: and although by reason of the warres, the Englishmen are forbidden to traffique thether, yet vnder the names of Scots and French men, they haue continuall trade there. The Iland hath not any wilde beastes or fowles, but very fewe, sauing onely Canarie birdes, which are there by thousands, wher many birders take them▪ and thereof make a dayly liuing, by carying them into diuers places. It hath also wonder∣full many Quailes, which they call Cod••••∣nisen: of tame fowles, as Hennes, & Gyn∣ny hens are there likewise great store. Hun∣ting is there little vsed, but only for Cunnies, which are very great: Hares, Harts, Par∣tridges, Venison, and such like are not there to be found, because of the little respect or care the inhabitantes haue to breede any such thinges. Fish is very plentifull, and of diuers kindes, and very good: in Summer there is great store taken, for in Winter they can hardly brooke the seas. The chiefe monthes of winter weather for raine and stormes are, Ianuarie, Februarie, March and Aprill, and also the month of September is commonly very stormie: all the other monthes it is com∣monly good weather. The Countrey is ve∣rie hillie, and in some places wooddy, full of bushes and trees: it is hard to trauel, because their waies for the most parte are stony, so that for a mile, or a mile and a halfe together, men can sée no ground, but only stones, which for sharpenesse and fashion shew like pointed Diamantes, whereby one can hardly tread vpon it least it should cut through both shooes and feet: and yet it is all planted with Vines, so full and thick that in summer time you can hardly see through it, for that the rootes there∣of doe grow betweene the stones: so that a man would think it impossible that any thing should grow therein: and which is more, in some places it seemeth impossible for a man to tread vpon it, being so wilde and desert as it sheweth and nothing but harde stones and rockes. In good ground their Vines will not grow but onely in the wild & stony places: & for that cause they are much esteemed. The good groundes and plaine fieldes, which in some places are verie many specially by villa da Prava are sowed with corne and woad, & they haue so much corne that they neede not bring any from other places: although that besides their inhabitants & natural borne Is∣landers. They haue continually with them 14. companies of Spaniards, which are all fed and nourished by the corne that groweth in the countrey vnlesse there chance to come a hard & vnfruitfull yeare, as oftentimes it doth, for then they are forced to helpe them∣selues with forraine corne▪ and that specially

because of the soldiers that lie in the Iland: & yet it is strange, that the corne and all other things in the Iland continue not aboue one yeare, and that which is kept aboue a yeare is nought and nothing worth. And therefore to keepe their corne longer then a yeare, they are forced to bury it in the earth, for the space of foure or fiue monthes together, to the which end euery townseman hath his pit at one ende of the towne in the common high way, which is appointed for the purpose, and euery man setteth his marke vpon his pitte stone: the Corne is but lightly buried in the earth: the holes within are rounde, and the toppes thereof so wide that a man may créep in, wherunto there is a stone purposely made to couer it, which shutteth it vppe very close. Some of the pittes are so great, as that they may holde two or thrée lastes of corne, some greater, & some smaller as euery mā hath his prouision: and as soone as the corne is reaped and fanned (which is in Iuly,) euery man putteth his corne into those pittes, laying straw vnder and round about it, & then they fill it ful or but half ful according as their quā∣titie is, and so stoppe it vppe with the stone, which they couer with earth, & so let it stande vntill Christmas, when euery man that will fetch home his corne: some let it ly longer, and fetch it by little and little, as they vse it: but the corne is as good when they take it out, as it was at th•• first houre that they put it in: and although that Cartes, horses, and men do commonly passe ouer it, and al∣so that the raine rayneth vppon it, yet there entreth not any droppe of rayne or moysture into it: and if the corne were not buried in that manner, it woulde not continue good a∣boue foure monthes together, but would bee spoyled: and when it hath béene thus for a long time buried in the earth, it will continue the whole yeare through, and then they keep it in chestes, or make a thing of mattes, like a coope to preserue it in, not once stirring or mouing it, and so it continueth very good.

The greatest commoditie they haue in the land, and that serueth their turnes best, is their oxen: & I belieue they are the greatest & fayrest y^t are to be found in al Christendom, w•• vnmeasurable great and long horns. Eue∣rie Oxe hath his seuerall name like men, and although there bee a thousande of them in a hearde, and that one of them be called by his name, hee presently commeth forth vnto his mayster that calleth him. The land is ve∣rie high, and as it séemeth hollow: for that as they passe ouer a hill of stone, the grounde soundeth vnder them as if it were a Seller, so that it séemeth in diuers places to haue holes vnder the earth, whereby it is much subiect to earthquakes, as also all the other Ilandes are: for there it is a common thing, and all those Ilandes for the most part haue had mynes of brimstone, for that in many places of Tercera, and Saint Michael, the smoke and sauour of Brimstone doeth still issue forth of the ground, and the Coun∣trey rounde about is all sindged and burnt. Also there are places wherein there are foun∣taines and welles, the water whereof is so hotte that it will boyle an egge, as well as if it hung ouer a fire. In the Iland of Ter∣cera, about three miles from Angra, there is a fountayne in a place called Gualua, which hath a propertie, that all the woode which falleth into it, by length of time con∣uerteth into stone, as I my selfe by experi∣ence haue tryed. In the same fountayne by the roote of a tree, whereof the one halfe run∣neth vnder that water, and is turned into as harde stone as if it were steele: and the o∣ther parte of the roote (which the water toucheth not) is still woode and roote, as it should bee. The Iland hath great store and excellent kindes of woode, specially Ce∣dar trees, which grow there in so great num∣bers, that they make scutes, Cartes, and other grosse workes thereof, and is the commonest woode that they vse to burne in those Countries, whereby it is the wood that with them is least esteemed, by reason of the great quantitie thereof. There is another kinde of wood called Sangu••nl••o, and is very fayre of a redde colour, and another sorte that they call white woode, being of it selfe as whyte as Chalke: other that is p••r••••ite yellow, and all naturall without any dying▪ and therefore there are diuers good worke∣men in Tercera, that are skilfull in Ioy∣ners ocupation, & make many fine peeces of worke, as Deskes, Cubbordes, Chestes, and other such like thinges, whereof many are caried into Portingall, and much estee∣med there, as well for the beautie of the woode, as for the workemanshippe, and spe∣cially the Spanish Fleete, which ordinarily refresh themselues in that Iland, do carry much of it from thence, for it is the best and finest that is made in all Spayne and Portin∣gall, although it be not comparable to the Seskes, and fine workemanshippe of Nu∣renbergh, and those countries: but for wood it excelleth all other countries, for that they haue in the Spanish Fleete, besides their owne kindes of woodes, at the least a thou∣sande sortes of Woode of all colours that man can imagine or deuise, and so fayre that more fayrer can not be paynted. There

is a certaine kinde of Woode in the Islande Pico, situate and lying twelue miles from Tercera, called Te••xo, a most excellent and princely wood, and therfore it is forbidden to be cut, but only for the Kings owne vse, or for his Officers. The wood is as hard as I∣ron, and hath a colour within, as if it were wrought, like red Chamlet, with the same water, and the older it is and the more vsed, the fairer it is of colour▪ so that it is worthie to be estéemed as in trueth it is.

All those Ilands are inhabited by Por∣tingals, but since the troubles in Portingall, there haue bene diuers Spanish soldiers sent thether, and a Spanish Gouernor, that kéep all the Forts and Castles in their possessions, although the Portingales are put to no char∣ges, nor yet hardly vsed by them, but are ra∣ther kept short, so that not one soldier dareth goe out of the towne, without licence: and therefore men may quyetlie trauell through∣out the Iland, both day and night, without any trouble. Likewise they will not suffer a∣ny stranger to trauel to sée the Country and this order was not brought vp by the Spa∣niards, but by the Portingals themselues, be∣fore their troubles, for they would neuer per∣mit it▪ and which is more, all strangers that came thether were vsually appointed a cer∣tain street, wherin they should sel their wares and might not goe out of that stréet. Now it is not so straightlie looked vnto, but they may goe in all places of the towne, & within the Iland but not about it, to view the coast: which notwithstanding was graunted vnto vs, by the Gouernor himself, who lent vs his horses, to ryde about, and gaue vs leaue to sée all the fortes, which at this time is not per∣mitted to the naturall borne Ilanders, ney∣ther are they so much credited. We road twice about the Iland, which he granted vs leaue to doe, by meanes of certaine parti∣cular friendship we had with him: ney∣ther could the Portingales hinder vs there∣in, because wee were in the Kinges seruice, as Factors for the Kinges Pepper, and for that, they held and accounted vs as natu∣rall borne Portingalles: for the Gouernor would willinglie haue had mee, to haue drawne a plot of the whole Iland, that hee might haue sent it to the King: wherein I ex∣cused my self: yet I made him the town with the Hauen, coming in, and Fortes of An∣gra, which he sent vnto the King, the like whereof you may in this Booke behold: for the which the Gouernor was greatlie affected vnto mee, and shewed mee much friendshippe. Wee had in our Lodging a French Marchant and a Scot, that willing∣lie would haue gone with vs, to sée the I∣land, but could not be suffered: for the Por∣tingalles thinke that they would take the proportion thereof, and so seeke to defeate them of their right.

But returning to our matter, the Il∣andes are verie good, and holesome ayre, and the diseases that are most common in those Countries, though not verie plenti∣ful, but only here & there one are one sicknes called O Ax, that is a kind of bad ayre y^t tak∣eth them, & maketh them altogether lame, or half lame of their limmes, or of some one limme: and an other sicknes, that is called O Sange, that is, a certaine blood, that ha∣stelie cometh vppon a man, as a swelling in the eyes, or other places of the face, or of the bodie, & is as red as blood, for (as they say) it is nothing els but méere blood: these are two diseases like the plague, and are com∣monest sicknesses in those Countries, which grow by reason of the great windines of the Ilandes, that are subiect to all stormes and foule weathers, and are vnreasonable moyst, which is one of the principall cau∣ses of these diseases: for the windes are there so strong and dangerous, that they consume both the Iron and the Steele of their houses, and bring them into powder: for I haue seene Iron grates in the Kings Custome house, as thicke as a mans arme, and the windowes of hard free stone, which were so consumed by the wind, that the I∣ron in some places was become as thynne as a straw, and the stone in like sort: and therefore in those Countries they vse to make their Rooffes and painthouses of stones, which they digge in the water, out of sandes vppon the Sea coast of those Il∣landes, whereon the wind hath not so great a power to consume it: and yet that Cus∣tome house had not bene made aboue 6 or 7 yeares before, at the most.

In this Iland besides the two townes, there are diuers great villages, as S. Seba∣stians, S. Barboran, Altares, Gualua, Villa noua, with manie other parishes and ham∣lets: so that for the most part it is built and inhabited, sauing onely the places that are wild and full of woods, which can hardlie bee trauelled, much lesse inhabited. Their most traffique is (as I said before) the wood that groweth in those countries, I meane for such as deale in marchandise, and the workemen that make it: but the rest waight for the fleets that come and goe to and from the Spanish and Portingall Indies from Brasilia, Cabo, Verde and Guinea: all which countries doe commonly come vnto Tercera to refresh

themselues, as lying very fitly for that pur∣pose: so that all the inhabitants doe thereby richlie maintaine themselues, and sell at their wares, as well handie works as victuals vn∣to those shippes: and all the Ilandes round a∣bout doe as then come vnto Tercera with their wares, to sell it there. For the which cause the English men and other strangers keepe continually about those Ilandes, bée∣ing assured that all shippes for want of re∣freshing must of force put into those Ilan∣des, although at this time manie shippes doe auoid those Ilandes, to the great discom∣moditie of the Ilands and the shippes.

From Tercera Southeast, about 27. or 28. miles, lyeth the Iland of S. Micha∣el, which is about 20 myles long, and is likewise full of Townes and Villages inhabited by Portingalles, for ayre and all other thinges like vnto Tercera. The chief Towne is called Punta del Gada, where there is great traffique of English, Scots, and French men, onlie (as in Terce∣ra) because of the woad, which is more abundant in that Ilande, then in all the rest of them: for that euerie yeare there is made aboue two hundreth thousand Quintalles of Woad. It hath likewise great abundance of Corne, so that they helpe to victuall all the Ilandes that are round a∣bout them. It hath neither Hauens nor Ri∣uers, but onlie the broad sea, and haue lesse safegard and defence then those which are of Tercera: but there they ly not vnder the commandement of any Fort: so that many set sayle with all the windes, and put to sea, which in the road of Tercera they may not doe: and therefore the strangers shippes had rather sayle to S. Michaels, for there they can not be constrayned to doe anie thing, but what they will themselues to doe. There is also a company of Spaniards in a Castle that standeth by the Towne of Punta del Gada, which is made by the Spaniards for the defence and maintenance of the same towne.

From the Iland of S. Michaels South∣wardes twelue myles, lyeth the Island Santa Maria, which is about ten or twelue myles compasse, and hath no traffique but onlie of pot earth, which the other I∣lands fetch from thence. It hath no Woad, but is full of all victualles like Tercera, and inhabited by the Portingales. There are no Spaniardes in it: because it is a stonie Countrie, like Tercera, and hard to bord: whereby the inhabitantes themselues are sufficient and able enough to defend it. While I remained in Tercera, the Earle of Comberland came thether, to take in fresh water▪ and some other victuals: but the in∣habitants would not suffer him to haue it, but wounded both himself and diuers of his men, whereby they were forced to depart without hauing any thing there.

From Tercera North northwest a∣bout seuen or eight myles, lyeth the little I∣land called Gratiosa, & is but 5. or 6. mile in compasse, a very pleasaunt, and fyne Island, full of all fruites and all other victualles, so that it not onley feedeth it self, but also Ter∣cera and the other Islandes about it, and hath no other kinde of merchandise: it is well built and inhabited by Portingales, and hath no soldiers in it, because it is not able to heare the charge. The Earle of Comber∣land while I lay in Tercera▪ came vnto that Iland, where himself in person, with seuen or eight in his company went on land, asking certaine beastes, Hennes, and other Victuals, with wyne and fresh water, which they willinglie gaue him, and therewith hee departed from thence, without doing them anie hurt: for the which the inhabitantes thanked him, and commended him for his curtesie, and keeping of his promise.

From Tercera West North West, eight or nyne miles, lyeth the Iland of S. George. It is about twelue myles long, but not aboue 2. or 3. myles at the furthest in breadth: it is wooddie and full of hilles: it hath no speciall traffique, but onelie some Woad, and yet verie little of it. The inha∣bitants liue most by Cattell and tilling of the land, and bring much victuals to sell in Tercera: it hath likewise many Cedar trees, and other kindes of wood, that from thence are brought vnto Tercera, and sold vnto the Ioyners, which for that occasion dwell onlie in Tercera.

From S. George West Southwest ••. miles, lyeth the Iland called Fayael, which is 17. or 18. miles in compasse: it is one of the best Ilands next vnto Tercera, and S. Michaels: it aboundeth in all sorts of victu∣ailes, both flesh and fish, so that from this I∣land the most part of victuailes and necessa∣ries commeth by whole Caruels vnto Ter∣cera: it hath likewise much Woad, so that many English shippes doe traffique thether. The principall road and place is the towne called Vitta dotta: there the ships likewise doe lie in the open sea vnder the land, as they do before al y^e other Ilāds: by this town there lieth a fortresse, but of smal importance: & be∣cause the inhabitants of themselues do offer to defend the Iland against all enemies, the soldiers were discharged from thence, which

which before that time lay in the fort, com∣playning that they were not able to main∣taine nor lodge them. The same time that the Earle of Cumberland was in the Iland of Gratiosa, he came likewise to Fayael, where at the first time that he came, they beganne to resist him, but by reason of some controuersie among them, they let him land where he rased the Castle to the ground, and sunke all their Ordinance in the Sea, taking with him certaine Caruels and ships that lay in the road, with prouision of all things that he wanted: and therewith departed againe to Sea. Whereupon the King caused the principall actors therein to bee punished, and sent a companie of Souldiers thether againe, which went out of Tercera, with all kind of warlike munition, and great shotte, mak∣ing the fortresse vp againe, the better to de∣fend the Iland, trusting no more in the Por∣tingales. In that Iland are the most part of the Netherlanders ofspring, yet they vse the Portingales language, by reason they haue béene so long conuersant among them, and those that vsed the Dutch tongue are all dead: they are greatly affected to the Netherlan∣ders and strangers.

From Fayael Southeast thrée miles, and from Saint George Southwest foure miles, and from Tercera Southwest and by West twelue miles, lyeth the Iland called Pico, which is more then fiftéene miles in length. It is so named of a high mountain that stan∣deth therein called Pico, which is so high, ••t some thinke it is higher then the Pico of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 When it is cleare weather, it may as perfectly beseene in Tercera, as if it were not halfe a mile from thence, and yet it lyeth aboue twentie fiue miles from it: for it is at the furthest end of the Iland towards Fayael The toppe of it is seene cleare and bright, but the nether part is couered with cloudes, and with the Horizon, whereby the Iland is much spoken of. It is verie fruitfull of all kinds of victuals, like Fayael, and hath great store of woode, as Cedars & all other kinds, and also the costly wood Te••xo. There they build many Caruels and small ships: & from thence by reason of the abundance of woode, they serue the other Ilands with woode. It is also inhabited as the rest are, their chiefe traf∣fique being Cattle and husbandrie. It hath much wine, and the best in all those Ilands, and it hath the sauorest and pleasantest Oran∣ges that are throughout all Portingal: so that they are brought into Tercera for a present, as being ther verie much esteemed, and in my iudgement they are the best that euer I ta∣sted in any place. And because the towne of Angra, in the Iland of Tercera is the chiefe towne and ruler ouer al the Flemish Ilands, I thought good to set it downe in this place, in the full proportion, with all the stréetes, Forts, and Road or open Hauen, together with the hilles called Bresil, where the senti∣nell is holden, for all shippes that come into those Ilands: al liuely described as in my sim∣ple skill I could comprehend and deuise it.

The 98. Chapter. Of the Ilands of Coruo and Flores.

FRom Tercera westwarde to the Iland named Flores are seuentie miles: it is a∣boute seauen miles com∣passe, it is also inhabited by Portingales, and hath no speciall marchandise, but onely some wood, it is full of Cattle, and other necessarie pro∣uisions, and lyeth open to all the world, and to whosoeuer will come thether, as well En∣glishmen as others: for that the inhabitants haue not the power to resist them. A myle from thence Northward, lyeth a little Iland of two or three miles in compasse called De Coruo. The inhabitants are of the same peo∣ple that dwel in Flores. Betwéene those two Ilands and round about them, the English∣men doe commonly stay, to watch the ships that come out of the West: for those are the first Ilands, that the shippes looke out for and descrie, when they sayle vnto Tercera, wher¦by the inhabitants doe but little prosper, be∣cause they are at the pleasure and commaun∣dement of all that will come vnto them, and take their goods from them, as oftentimes it happeneth. Yet for all their pouertie, not to loose both landes and goods, they must content themselues, and Sayle with euerie winde.

The Ile of Tercera lyeth vnder thirtie nine degrees, in the same height that Lisbone lyeth: and is distant from Lisbone lying right East and West two hundred and fiftie Spanish miles. This shall suffice for the des∣cription of the Flemmish Ilands, called the Azores, which by dayly traueling vnto them are sufficiently knowne: for that at this time many of our nation doe sayle thether, so that euerie Marchant knoweth them. This briefe description therfore is by me set town for the instruction of such as deale not in the trade of Marchandise, and know them not▪ where∣by they may sée what manner of Countries they are▪ &c.

The 99. Chapter. Of cer••aine notable and memorable acci∣dents that happened during my conti∣nuance in Tercera.

THe second of October An. 15••9. at the towne of Vil∣la dan Praya, in the Iland of Tercera, two men being in a field hard without the towne were killed with lightning.

The ninth of the same month there arri∣ued in Tercera fourteene shippes, that came from the Spanish Indies, laden with Co∣chenile, Hides, Golde. Siluer, Pearles, and other riche wares. They were fiftie in com∣panie, when they departed out of the Iland of Hanana, whereof, in their comming out of the Channell, eleauen sunke in the same Channell by soule weather, the rest by a storme were scattered and seperated one from the other. The next day there came an other ship of the same companie, that sayled close vnder the Iland, so to get into the Roade: where she met with an English shippe, that had not aboue three cast peeces, and the Spa¦niyard twelue. They fought a long time to∣gether, which we being in the Iland might stand and behold: whereupon the Gouernour of Tercera sent two Boates of Musketiers to help the shippe: but before they could come at her, the English shippe had shot her vnder water, and wee saw her sinke into the Sea, with all her sayles vp, and not any thing seen of her aboue the water. The Englishmen with their Boate saued the Captaine and a∣bout thirtie others with him, but not one pe∣nie worth of the goods, and yet in the shippe there was at the least to the value of two hundred thousand Ducats in Golde, Siluer, and Pearles, the rest of the men were drow∣ned, which might bee about fiftie persons, a∣mong the which were some Fryers and wo¦men, which the Englishmen would not saue. Those that they had saued they set on land: and then they sayled away. The twentie sea∣uenth of the same month, the saide fourteene ships hauing refreshed themselues in the I¦land, departed from Tercera towards Saul, ••nd comming vpon the coast of Spaine▪ they were taken by the English ships, that laye there to watch for them, two onely excepted which escaped away, & the rest were wholly carried into England.

About the same time the Earle of Cum∣berland, with one of the Queenes shippes, and fiue or sixe more, kept about those Ilands and came often times so close vnder the I∣land, and to the Road of Angra, that the peo∣ple on land might easily tell all his men that hee had a bord, and knew such as walked on the Hatches: they of the Ilande not once shooting at them, although they might easily haue done it, for they were within Musket shotte both of the towne and Fort. In these places he continued for the space of two Mo∣neths, and sayled round about the Ilands, and landed in Gratiosa, and Fayael, as in the description of those Ilands I haue alreadie de∣clared. Here he tooke diuers shippes and Car∣uels, which he sent into England: so that those of the Iland, durst not once put foorth their heads, at the same time about three or foure daies after the Earle of Cumberland had beene in the Iland of Fayael, and was depar∣ted from thence, there arriued in the saide I∣land of Fayael ••i••e Indian ships, whole Ge∣nerall was one Iuan Doryne••▪ & there they discharged in the Iland 40. myllions of Gold and Siluer. And hauing with all speed refresh∣ed their shippes, fearing the comming of the Englishmen, they set sayle, and arriued safe∣ly in Saint Lucas, not meeting with the ene∣mie, to the great good lucke of the Spaniards and hard fortune of the Englishmen: for that within lesse then two daies, after the Golde and Siluer was laden againe into the Spa∣nish shippes, the Earle of Cumberland, say∣led againe by that Iland: so that it appeared that God would not let them haue it, for it they had once had sight thereof, without doubt it had beene theirs, as the Spaniardes themselues confessed.

In the Moneth of Nouember▪ there arri∣ued in Tercera two great ships, which were the Admirall and Viceadmirall of the Fleete laden with Siluer, who with stormie wea∣ther were seperated from the Fleete▪ and had beene in great torment and distresse, and rea¦die to sinke: for they were forced to vse all their Pumps: so that they wished a thousand times to haue met with the Englishmen to whom they would willingly haue giuen their Siluer, and all that euer they brought with them, onely to saue their liues. And although the Earle of Cumberland, lay still aboute those Ilands, yet they met not with him so that after much paine and labour they got in∣to the Road before Angra, where with all speed they vnladed, and discharged aboue fiue myllions of Siluer▪ all in peeces of 8. and 1•• pound great: so that the whole Raye lay co∣uered with plates and Chests of Siluer, full of Ryales of eight, most wonderful to behold: each myllion being 10. hundred thousand Du∣cats, besides Pearles, Gold, and other stones,

which were not registred. The Admiral and chiefe commaunder of those shippes & Fléete called Aluaro Flores de Quiniones was sicke of the Neapolitan disease, & was broght to land, whereof not long after he dyed in Sy∣uilia. He brought with him the Kings broad Seale and full authoritie to be Generall and chiefe commaunder vppon the Seas, and of all Fléetes or ships, and of all places and I∣lands, or lands wheresoeuer he came▪ where∣vpon the gouernor of Tercera, did him great honour, and betwéen them it was concluded, perceiuing the weaknesse of their ships, and the daunger of the Englishmen, that they would send the ships emptie with Souldiers to conueye them, either to Syuil or Lisbone, where they could first arriue, with aduise vn∣to his Maiestie of all that had past, and that he would giue order to fetch the Siluer, with good and safe conuoy. Whereupon the saide Aluaro Flores stayed there, vnder colour of keeping the Siluer, but specially because of his disease, and for that they were affraide of the Englishmen. This Aluaro Flores had alone for his owne part aboue 50. thousand Ducats in Pearles, which hee shewed vnto vs, and sought to sell them, or barter them with vs for Spices, or bils of exchange. The said two shippes set sayle with thrée or foure hundred men, as well Souldiers as others, that came with them out of India, and being at Sea had a storme, wherewith the Admi∣rall burst and sunke in the Sea, and not one man saued. The Vice Admirall cut downe her Mast, and ranne the ship on ground hard by Sentuual, where it burst in péeces, some of the men sauing themselues by swimming, that brought the newes, but the rest were drowned.

In the same month, there came two great ships out of the Spanish Indies, and being within halfe a mile of the Road of Tercera, they met with an English shippe, that af∣ter they had fought long together, tooke them both. About 7. or 8. Monthes before, there had béene an English shippe in Tercera, that vnder the name of a Frenchman came to tra∣ffique in the Iland, there to lade woode, & be∣ing discouered was both shippe and goods con∣fiscated to the Kings vse, and all the men kept prisoners: yet went they vp and downe the streetes to get their liuings, by labouring like slaues, being in déede as safe in that Iland, as if they had beene in prison. But in the end vp∣on a Sunday, all the Saylers went downe behind the hils called Bresil: wher they found a Fisher boate, whereinto they got, & rowed into the Sea to the Earle of Cumberlands ship, which to their great fortune chanced at that time to come by the Iland, and Ankered with his shippes about halfe a mile from the Road of Angra, hard by two small Ilandes, which lye about a Bases shot from the Iland and are full of Goates, Buckes, and shéepe, belonging to the inhabitants of the Iland of Tercera. Those Saylers knew it well; and thereupon they rowed vnto them with their Boates, and lying at Anker that day, they fetched as many Goates and shéepe as they had neede of: which those of the towne and of the Iland well saw and beheld, yet durst not once goe forth, so there remained no more on land but the Master, & the Marchant, of the said English ship. This Master had a brother in lawe dwelling in England, who hauing newes of his brothers imprisonment in Ter∣cera, got licence of the Quéene of England, to set forth a ship▪ therewith to sée if hee could recouer his losses of the Spaniards, by tak∣ing some of them, and so to redéeme his bro∣ther, that laye prisoner in Tercera, and he it was, that tooke the two Spanish ships before the towne. The Master of the ship aforesaid, standing on the shore by me, and looking vp∣on them, for he was my great acquaintance, the ships being taken, that were worth 300. thousand Ducats, he sent all the men on land sauing only two of the principal Gentlemen, which he kept a borde, therby to ransome his brother: and sent the Pilot of one of the Indi∣an ships that were taken, with a letter to the Gouernour of Tercera: wherein hee wrote that he should deliuer him his brother, and hée would send the two Gentlemen on land: if not, he would sayle with them into England, as indeed he did because the Gouernor would not doe it, saying that the Gentlemen might make that suite to the King of Spaine him∣selfe. This Spanish Pilot we bid to supper with vs, and the Englishmen likewise, wher hee shewed vs all the manner of their fight, much ••••mmending the order and manner of the Englishmens fighting, as also for their curteous vsing of him: but in the end the En∣glish Pilote likewise stole away in a French ship, without paying any ransome as yet.

In the month of Ianuarie 159••. there ar∣riued one shippe alone in Tercera, that came from the Spanish Indies, & brought newes, that there was a Fleete of a hundreth shippes which put out from y^e Firm land of the Spa∣nish Indies and by a storme were driuen vp∣on the coast called Florida, where they were all cast away, she hauing only escaped, wher∣in there were great riches, & many men lost, as it may well be thought: so that they made their account that of 22••. ships, that for cer∣taine were knowne to haue put out of Noua Spa••g••a, Santo Domingo, Hauana, Capo∣verde, Brasilia, Guinea &c. In the yeare

1589. to sayle for Spaine and Portingall, there were not aboue fourteene or fiftéene of them arriued there in safetie, all the rest be∣ing either drowned, burst or taken.

In the same Moneth of Ianuarie, there arriued in Tercera 15 or 16 shippes that came from Siuilia, which were most Flie∣boates of the lowe countries, and some Bri∣tons that were arrested in Spain: these came full of soldiers, and well appointed with mu∣nition, to lade the siluer that lay in Tercera, and to fetch Aluares de Flores by the kings commandement into Spain. And because that tyme of the yeare there is alwaies stormes about those Ilandes, therefore they durst not enter into the road of Tercera, for that as then it blew so great a storme, that some of their shippes that had ankered, were forced to cut downe their mastes, and were in dan∣ger to be lost: and among the rest a shippe of B••lcay ranne against the land, and was stri∣ken in péeces, but al the men saued thēselues. The other shippes were forced to keepe the sea, and separate themselues one from the o∣ther, where wind and weather would driue them, vntill the 15 of March: for that in all that time they could not haue one day of faire weather to anker in, whereby they indured much miserie, cursing both the siluer and the Iland. This storme being past, they chanced to meet with a small English ship of about 40 tunnes in bignes, which by reason of the great wind could not beare all her sayles: so they set vpon her, and tooke her, and with the English flagge in their Admiralles stern they came as proudly into the hauen, as if they had conquered all the Realme of Eng∣land: but as the Admirall that bare the En∣glish flagge vpon her sterne, was entering into the road, there came by chance two En∣glish shippes by the Iland, that payd her so well for her paynes, that they were forced to cry Misericordia▪ and without all doubt had taken her, if she had bene but a myle further in the sea: but because she got vnder the For∣tresse, which also began to shoot at the En∣glishmen, they were forced to leaue her, and to put further into the sea, hauing slayne 5. or 6. of the Spaniardes. The English men that were taken in the small shippe were put vnder hatches, and coupled in boltes, and af∣ter they had beene prisoners three or foure dayes, there was a Spanish Ensigne-bearer in the shippe, that had a brother slayne in the fleet that came for England, who as then, mynding to reuenge his death, and withal to shew his manhood to the English captiues, that were in the English shippe, which they had taken, as is aforesayd, tooke a poinyard in his hand, and went downe vnder the hat∣ches, where finding the poore Englishmen sitting in boltes, with the same poinyard hee stabbed sixe of them to the heart: which two others of them perceyuing, clasped each other about the middle, because they would not bee murthered by him, threw themselues into the sea, and there were drowned. This act was of all the Spaniardes much disliked and verie ill taken, so that they caryed the Spani∣ard prisoner vnto Lisbon, where béeing ari∣ued, the King of Spaine willed he should bee sent into England, that the Queene of Eng∣land might vse him as shee thought good: which sentence his friends by intreaty got to be reuersed, notwithstanding he commanded he should without all fauor be beheaded: but vpon a good Fryday, the Cardinall going to Masse, all the Captaines and Commanders made so great intreaty for him that in the end they got his pardon. This I thought good to note, that men might vnderstand the bloodie and honest mindes of the Spaniardes, when they haue men vnder their subiection.

The same two English shippes, which followed the Spanish Admirall, till he had got vnder the Fort of Tercera, as I said be∣fore, put into the sea, where they met with an other Spanish ship, béeing of the same Fléet, that had likewise bene scatered by the storme and was onlie missing, for the rest lay in the road: this small shippe the Englishmen tooke, and sent all the men on shore, not hurting a∣ny of them: but if they had knowne, what had beene done vnto the foresaid English cap∣tiues, I beleeue they would soone haue reuen∣ged themselues, as afterwards manie an in∣nocent soule payed for it. This ship thus ta∣ken by the English men, was the same that was kept and cōfiscated in the Iland of Ter∣cera, by the English men that got out of the Iland in a fisher boate (as I sayd before) and was sold vnto the Spaniardes, that as then came from the Indies, wherewith they say∣led to S. Lucas, where it was also arrested by the Duke, and appointed to goe in company to fetch the siluer in Tercera, because it was a shippe that sayled well: but among the spa∣niardes fleet it was the meanest of the com∣pany. By this meanes it was taken from the Spaniards, and caryed into England, and the owners had it againe, when they least thought of it.

The 19 of Marche, the aforesaid shippes, being 19 in nūber, set sayle, hauing laden the Kings siluer, and receiued in Aluaro Flores de Quiniones, with his company, and good prouision of necessaries, munition and soldi∣ers, that were fullie resolued (as they made shewe) to fight valiantly to the last man, be∣fore they would yeeld or lose their riches: and

although they set their course for S. Lucas, the wind draue them vnto Lisbon, which as it seemed) was willing by his force to helpe them, and to bring them thether in safetie: al∣though Aluaro de Flores, hoth against the wind and weather would perforce haue say∣led to Saint Lucas, but being constrained by the wind, and importunitie of the Saylers, that protested they would require their losses and damages of him▪ he was content to sayle to Lisbone: from whence the Siluer was by land carried into Siuilia. At Cape Saint Vincent, there lay a Fleete of twentie Eng∣lish shippes, to watch for the Armada, so that if they had put into Saint Lucas, they had fallen right into their handes, which if the wind had serued they had done. And therefore they may say that the wind had lent them a happie Viage: for if the Englishmen had met with them▪ they had surely beene in great danger, and possibly but few of them had es∣••••ped, by reason of the feare wherewith they were possessed, because fortune or rather God ••as wholly against them. Which is a suffi∣cient cause to make y^e Spaniards out of hart, to the contrarie to giue the Englishmen more courage, and to make them bolder for that they are victorious, stout and valiant: and seeing al their enterprises doe take so good effect, that thereby they are become Lordes and masters of the Sea, and neede care for no man, as it well appeareth, by this briefe dis∣course.

* 1.100In the month of March 15••••. There was a blasing Starre with a tayle seene in 〈◊〉〈◊〉, that continued foure nights toge∣ther, stretching the taile towards the South.

In the Month of May, a Caruel of Fay¦•• arriued at Tercera, in the Hauen or Roade of Angra, laden with Oxen, sheepe, Hennes, and all other kinds of victuals, and full of people, which by a storme had broken her Ruther whereby the Sea cast her about and therewith shee sunke, and in her were drowned three children, and a Frier Franci∣scan, the rest of the men saued themselues by swimming, and by helpe from the shore, but all the Cattle and Hennes came drowned to land: the Frier was buried with a great pro∣cession and solemnitie, esteeming him for a Saint, because hee was taken vp dead with his Booke between his armes: for the which cause euery man came to looke on him as a myracle, giuing gret offerings to say Masses for his soule.

The first of August, the Gouernour of Tercera, reeceiued aduise out of Portingall and Spaine, that two yeares before the date of 〈…〉〈…〉, there were sayled out of Eng¦land 〈◊〉〈◊〉 great shippes wel apointed, with full resolution to take their fourme, seuen of them into the Portingall Indies, and the o∣ther fiue to Ma••: of the which fiue, two were cast away in passing the Straightes of Magellane••, and three sayled to Malac•••• but what they had done there▪ was as then not knowne. The other seuen passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, and arriued in India, where they put into the coast of Ma∣labar, and there tooke sixe Foistes of the Malabares, but let them goe againe: and two Turkish Gallies, that came out of the Straightes of Mecca or the redde Sea, to whome likewise they did no hurt. And there they laded their shippes with Spices, and re∣turned backe againe on their way: but where or in what place they had laden, it was not certainely knowne, sauing onely that thus much was written by the Gouernour of In∣dia, and sent ouer land to Venice, and from thence to Mad••.

The seuenth of August a Nauie of Eng∣lish shippes was seene before Tercera, being 20. in number, and fiue of them the Quéenes shippes: their Generall was one Martin Furbu••her, as wee after had intelligence. They came purposely to watch for the Fleet of the Spanish Indies, and for the Indian shippes, and the ships of the countries in the West: which put the Ilanders in great feare, specially those of Fay••el, for that the Eng∣lishmen sent a Trumpet to the Gouernour to aske certaine wine, flesh, and other victu∣als for their mony, and good friendship. They of Fayael did not onely refuse to giue eare vn∣to them, but with a shot killed their messen∣ger or Trumpeter: which the Englishmen tooke in euill part, sending them word that they were best to looke to themselues, & stand vppon their gard, for they ment to come and visite them whether they would or no. The Gouernor made them answere, that he was there in the behalfe of his Maiestie of Spaine and that he would doe his best, to keepe them out, as he was bound: but nothing was done, althogh they of Fayael were in no litle feare, sending to Tercera for aide, from whence they had certaine Barkes with poulder and munition for warre with some Bisket and o∣ther necessarie prouision.

The 3. of August we receiued very cer∣taine newes out of Portingal, that ther were 80. ships put out of y^e C••••••nl••o, laden with victuals, Munition, money, and Souldiers, to goe for Britaine to aide the Catholicks, and Leaguers of Fraunce, against the King of Nauarre. At the same time two Netherland Hulkes, comming out of Portingall to Ter∣cera, being halfe the Seas ouer, met with foure of the Queenes ships their General be∣ing

S. Iohn Hawkins, that stayed them, but let them goe again, without doing them any harme. The Netherlanders reported, that each of the Queenes ships had 80 peeces of Ordinance, and that Captaine Drake lay with 40 shippes in the English Channell, watching for the Army of the Carunho: and likewise that there lay at the Cape S. Vin∣cent tenne other English shippes, that if any shippes escaped from the Ilandes, they might take them. Those tidings put the Ilanders in great feare, least if they fayled of the Spa∣nish Fleet, and got nothing by them, that thē they would fall vpon the Ilands, because they would not returne emptie home, whereupon they held straight watch, sending aduise vn∣to the king what newes they heard.

The first of September, there came to the Iland of S. Michael a Portingall shippe, out of the Hauen of Pernanbuco, in Brasilia, which brought newes that the Admirall of the Portingall fleet, that came from India, hauing missed the Iāld of S. Helena, was of necessitie constrayned to put in Parnanbu∣co, although the King had expressie vn∣der a great penaltie forbidden him so to doe, because of the wormes that there doe spoile the ships. The same ship wherin Bernaldin Rybero▪ was Admirall, the yeare before 1589,* 1.101 sayled out of Lisbone into the Indies with 5. ships in her company, whereof but 4. got into India, the 5 was neuer heard of, so y^t it was thought to be cast away: The o∣ther foure returned safe againe into Portin∣gale though the Admirall was much spoiled, because he met with two English ships, that fought long with him, and slew many of his men, but yet he escaped from them.

The 5. of the same moneth, there arriued in Tercera a caruell of the Island of Cor••o and brought with her 50. men that had been spoiled by the english men, who had set them on shore in the Iland of Cor••o, being taken out of a shippe that came from the Spanish Indies, they brought tydinges that the eng∣lish men had taken foure more of the Indian ships, and a caruell with the king of Spaines letters of aduise for the ships comming out of y^e Portingal Indies, & that with those which they had taken, they were at the least four∣ty English shippes together, so that not one Barke escaped them but fel into their hands, and that therefore the Portingall ships com∣ming out of India, durst not put into the I∣lands, but tooke their course vnder 40. and 42. degrees▪ and from thence sayled to Lis∣bon, shunning likewise y^e cape S. Vincent, otherwise they could not haue had a prospe∣rous iourney of it, for that as then the sea was ful of English ships. Whereupon the king aduised the fleet, lying in Hauana, in the Spanish Indies ready to come for Spain that they should stay there all that yeare, till the next yeare, because of the great danger they might fal into by the Englishmē, which was no small charge, and hinderance to the Fléet, for that the ships that lie there doe con∣sume themselues & in a manner eat vp one an other, by reason of the great number of peo∣ple, together with the scarsetie of al things so that many ships chose rather, one by one to aduenture thēselues alone, to get home, then to stay there: all which fell into the English mens hands, whereof diuers of the men were brought into Tercera, for that a whole day we could sée nothing els, but spoyled men set on shore, some out of one ship, some out of an other, that pittie it was to see, al of them curs∣ing the Englishmē, and their owne fortunes, with those that had bin the causes to prouoke the Englishmen to fight, and complayning of the small remedie and order taken therein by the king of Spaines Officers.

The 19 of the same month, there came to Tercera a Caruel of Lisbon, with one of the kings officers, to cause the goods that were saued out of the ship, which came from Ma∣lacca, (for the which we stayed there) to be laden, and sent to Lisbon. And at the same tyme there put out of the Carunha one Don Alonso de Bassan, with 4 great shippes of warre to come vnto the Ilāds, ther to watch for the fleet of the Spanish & Portingall In∣dies, and the goods of the Malacca ship being laden, they were to conuoy them all together into the riuer of Lisbon: but being certaine daies at sea, alwaies hauing a contrary wind they could not get vnto the Ilands: only two of them that were scattered from the fleet, ar¦riued at Tercera, & not finding the fleet, they presently returned backe to seek them: in the meane time the King changed his mind, and caused the fleet to stay in India, as I said be∣fore: & therfore he sent word vnto Don Alō∣so de Bassan, that he shuld return again to y^e Carunho, which he presently did (without do∣ing any thing, nor once approching neere the Ilāds▪ sauing only the 2 foresaid ships, for he wel knew y^t the Englishmē lay by the Iland of Co••uo, but he would not visit them: and so he returned to the hauē of Carunha, wherby our goods that came from Malacca, were yet to ship, and trussed vp again, and forced to stay a more fortunat time, w^t patiēce p••rforce

The 23 of Octob. there arriued in Terce∣ra a Caruel, with aduise out of Porting••le,* 1.102 y^t of 5 ships, which in the yere 159•• wer ladē in Lisbon for y^e Indes, 4 of them wer turned again to portin after they had bin 4 mōths a∣brod, & that the Admiral, wherin the Viceroy called Mathias d' Alburkerke sayled▪ had

only gottē to India, as afterward news ther∣of was brought ouer lande, hauing beene at y^e least 11. monthes at sea and neuer saw land, & came in great miserie to Malacca. In this shippe there dyed by the way 280. men, accor∣ding to a note by himselfe made, and sent to the Cardinal at Lisbone, w^t the names & sur∣names of euery man, together w^t a description of his voyage, & the miserie they had indured: which was only done, because he wold not lose y^e gouernment of India: & for that cause he had sworne eyther to lose his life, or to arriue in India, as in déede he did afterwardes, but to the great daunger, losse and hinderance of his companie, that were forced to buy it with their liues, and onely for want of prouision, as it may well be thought: for hee knew full wel that if he had returned backe againe into Portingal, as the other shippes did, he should haue béene cassiered from his Indian regi∣ment, because the people beganne alreadie to murmure at him, for his proude and loftie mind. And among other things that shewed his pride the more, behind aboue the gallery of his ship, he caused Fortune to be painted, & his owne picture with a staffe standing by her, as it were threatening Fortune, with this posie. Queroque veneas▪ that is, I will haue thée to ouercome: which being read by the Cardinall and other Gentlemen (that to honour him brought him abord his shippe) it was thought to be a point of exceeding folly: but it is no strange matter among the Por∣tingalles, for they aboue all others must of force let the foole peepe out of their sleeues, spe∣cially when they are in authoritie: for that I knew the said Mathi••s d' Alburke••k in In∣dia, being a soldier and a Captaine, where he was esteemed and accounted for one of the best of them, and much honoured, and belo∣ued of all men, as behauing himselfe courte∣ously to euery man: whereby they all desi∣red that he might be Viceroy. But when he once had receyued his Patent with full po∣wer and authority from the king to be Vice∣roy, he changed so much frō his former beha∣uior, that by reason of his pride they al began to feare & curse him▪ & that before he departed out of L••sb••ne, as it is often seene in many men that are aduanced vnto state & dignity.

* 1.103The 20. of Ianuarie Anno 1591. there was newes brought out of Portingall into Tercera▪ that the Englishmen had ta∣ken a shippe, that the king had sent into the P••rtingall-Indie, with aduise to the Vice∣roy, for the returning again of the foure ships that should haue gone to India, & because the ships were come backe againe, that ship was stuffed and laded as full of goods as possible it might bee, hauing likewise in ready money 500. thousand duckets in Rials of 8. besides other wares. It departed from Lisbone in the month of Nouember 1590. & met with y^e Englishmē, with whom for a time it fought: but in y^e end it was takē & caried into England with men & all, yet whē they came there, the men were set at libertie, & returned into Lis∣bone, where the Captaine was committed prisoner: but he excused himselfe, & was relea∣sed, w^t whom I spake my selfe, & he made this report vnto mee. At the same time also they tooke a ship that came from the Mine laden w^t gold, & 2. ships laden with Pepper, and spices that were to saile into Italie, the pepper onely that was in them, being worth 170. thou∣sand duckets: all these ships were caried into England, and made good prise.

In the month of Iuly an. 1591. there hap∣pened an earthquake in the Iland of S. Mi∣chael, which continued from the 26. of Iuly, to the 12. of August: in which time no man durst stay within his house, but fled into the fields fasting & praying, w^t great sorrow for y^e many of their houses fel down, & a towne cal∣led Villa Franca, was almost cleane razed to y^e ground, all the cloisters and houses shaken to the earth, & therein some people slain. The land in some places rose vp, and the cliffes re∣moued from on place to another, & some hils were defaced and made euē with the ground. The earthquake was so strong that the ships which lay in the road, & on the sea, shaked as if the world would haue turned round: there sprang also a fountaine out of the earth, from whence for the space of 4. daies, there flowed a most cleare water, & after that it ceased. At the same time they heard such thunder▪ & noise vnder the earth, as if all the Deuils in hel had been assembled together in that place, where∣with many dyed for fear. The Iland of Ter∣cera shooke 4. times together, so that it seemed to turne about, but there happened no misfor∣tune vnto it. Earthquakes are common in those Ilandes for about 20. yeares past there happened another earthquake, wherein a high hill that lyeth by y^e same towne of Villa Franca, fell halfe downe, and couered all the towne with earth, and killed many men.

The 25. of August, y^e kings Armada cōming out of Far•••• ariued in Tercera, being in all 30. ships, Biska••es Portingals & Spaniards: & 10. Dutch ••lieboats, y^t were arested in Lis∣bone to serue y^e king, besides other smal ships Pataros, y^t came to serue as messengers frō place to place & to discouer the seas. This na∣uie came to stay for▪ & conuoy the ships that shold come frō the Spanish Indies, & the ••lie∣boates were apointed in their returne home▪ to take in the goodes y^t were saued in y^e lost ship y^t came frō Malacca, & to c••̄uoy it to Lisbon.

The 13. of September the saide Armado ariued at the Iland of Coruo, where the En∣glishmen with about sixtéene shippes as then lay, staying for the Spanish Fleete: whereof some or the most parte were come, and there the English were in good hope to haue taken them. But when they perceyued the kings Army to be strong, the Admirall being the Lorde Thomas Howard, commaunded his Fléete not to fall vpon them, nor any of them once to seperate their shippes from him, vn∣lesse he gaue commission so to doe: notwith∣standing the Vice Admirall Sir Rychard Greenfield, being in the ship called the Re∣uenge went into the Spanish fléete, and shot among them, doing them great hurte, and thinking the rest of the company would haue followed: which they did not, but left him there, and sayled away: the cause why could not be knowne: which the Spaniardes per∣ceiuing, with seuen or eight shippes they bor∣ded her, but she withstood them all, fighting with them at the least 12. houres together, and sunke two of them, one being a newe double Flie boat. of 1200. tunnes, and Admi∣rall of the Flie boates, the other a Biscaine: But in the ende by reason of the number that came vppon her she was taken, but to their great losse: for they had lost in fighting, and by drowning aboue 4••••. men, and of the En∣glish were slaine about a hundred, Sir Ry∣chard Greenfield himselfe being wounded in his braine, whereof afterwardes hee dyed. He was borne into the ship called the Saint Paule, wherein was the Admirall of the fléet Don Alonso de Barsan: there his woundes were drest by the Spanish Surgeons, but Don Alonso himselfe would neither see him, nor speake with him: all the rest of the Cap∣taines and Gentlemen went to visite him, and to comfort him in his hard fortune, won∣dring at his courage, and stout heart, for that he shewed not any signe of faintnes nor chan∣ging of colour. But feeling the hower of death to approch, hee spake these wordes in Spanish, & said: Here die I Richard Gr••en∣field, with a ioyfull and quiet mind, for that I haue ended my life as a true soldier ought to do, y^t hath fought for his countrey▪ Queene, religion, and honor, whereby my soule most ioyfull departeth out of this bodie, and shall alwaies leaue behinde it an euerlasting fame of a valiant and true soldier, that hath done his dutie, as he was bound to doe. When he had finished these or such other like words, hee gaue vp the Ghost, with great and stout cou∣rage, and no man could perceiue any true signe of heauinesse in him.

This Sir Richard Greenfield was a great and a rich Gentleman in England, and had great yearely reuenewes of his owne in∣heritance: but he was a man very vnquiet in his minde, and greatly affected to warre: in so much as of his owne priuate motion hee offered his seruice to the Queene, he had per∣formed many valiant actes, and was greatlie feared in these Islands, and knowne of euery man, but of nature very seuere, so that his owne people hated him for his fiercenes, and spake verie hardly of him: for when they first entred into the Fleete or Armado, they had their great sayle in a readinesse, and might possiblie enough haue sayled away: for it was one of the best ships for sayle in England, and the Master perceiuing that the other shippes had left them, and followed not after, commā∣ded the great sayle to be cut, that they might make away: but Sir Richard Greene∣field threatned both him, and all the rest that were in the ship, that if any man laid hand vp∣pon it, he would cause him to be hanged, and so by that occasion they were compelled to fight, and in the end were taken. He was of so hard a complection, that as he continued a∣mong the Spanish Captaines while they were at dinner or supper with him, he would carouse three or foure glasses of wine, and in a brauerie take the glasses betweene his teeth and crash them in peeces and swallow them downe, so that often times the blood ran out of his mouth without any harme at all vnto him, and this was told me by diuers credible persons that many times stoode and behelde him. The English men that were left in the ship, as the captaine of the souldiers, the Ma∣ster and others were dispersed into diuers of the Spanish ships that had taken the, where there had almost a new fight arisen betweene the Biscaines and the Portingales: while ech of them would haue the honour to haue first borded her, so that there grew a great noise and quarrell among them, one taking the chiefe ancient & the other the flagge, and the Captaine and euerie one held his owne. The ships that had borded her were altogether out of order, and broken, and many of their men hurt, whereby they were compelled to come into the Island of Tercera, there to repaire themselues▪ where being ariued, I & my chā∣ber fellow, to heare some newes went abord on of the ships being a great at Biscaine, and one of the twelue Apostles, whose Captaine was called Bertandono, that had bin Gene∣rall of the Biscaynes in the fleete that went for England. Hee séeing vs called vs vp into the gallerie, where with great curtesie hee receiued vs, beeing as then set at dinner with the English Captaine that sate by him, and had on a sute of blacke veluet, but he could not tell vs any thing, for that he could speake

no other language, but English and Latine, which Ba••tandano also could a little speake. The English Captaine got licence of the go∣uernour that hee might come on land with his weapon by his side, and was in our lodg∣ing with the Englishman that was kept prisoner in the Iland, being of that ship wher∣of the saylers got away, as I said before. The Gouernour of Tercera bad him to dinner▪ & shewed him great curtes••e. The Master likewise with licence of Bartandano came on land, and was in our lodging, and had at the least ten or twelue woundes, as well in his head, as on his body, whereof after that being at sea, betwéene Lisbone & the Ilands he died. The Captaine wrote a letter, where∣in he declared all the manner of the fight, and left it with the English Marchant that lay in our lodging, to send it to the Lord Admiral of England. This English Captaine com∣ming vnto Lisbone, was there well receiued, and not any hurt done vnto him, but with good conuoy sent to Sentinial, & from thence sayled into England, with all the rest of the Englishmen that were taken prisoners.

The Spanish armie stated at the Island of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 til the last of September to assem∣ble the rest of the fleet together: which in the end were to the number of 14••. saile of ships partly comming from India, and partly of the Army & being altogether ready vnto saile to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in good company, there sodaine∣ly rose so hard and cruell a storme, that those of the Island did affirme, that in mans me∣morie there was neuer any such seen or heard of before▪ for it seemed the sea would haue swallowed vp the Islands, the water moun∣ting higher than the Cliffes, which are so high that it amaseth a man to beholde them: but the sea reached aboue them, and liuing fi∣shes were throwne vppon the land. This storme continued not only a day or two with one wind but seauen or eight dayes continu∣ally the wind turning round about, in all pla∣ces of the compasse, at the least twice or thrice during that time, and all alike, with a continuall storme and tempest most terrible to behold, euen to vs that were on shore, much more then to such as were at sea: so that only on the coastes and Cliffes of the I∣land of Tercera, there were aboue twelue ships cast away, and not only vppon the one side, but round about it in euery corner: wher∣by nothing els was heard but complayning, crying, lamenting and telling here is a shippe broken in peeces against the Cliffes, & there another▪ and all the men drowned: so that for the space of 20. dayes after the storme, they did nothing els but fish for dead men, that continually came driuing on the shore. A∣mong the rest was the English ship called the Reuenge, that was cast away vpon a Cliffe nere to the Iland of Tercera, where it brake in a hundred péeces and sunke to the ground, hauing in her ••••. men Gallegos, Biscaines, and others, with some of the captiue English∣men, whereof but one was saued that got vp vpon the Cliffes aliue, and had his body and head all wounded, and hee being on shore brought vs the newes, desiring to be shriuen, & thervpon presently died. The Reuenge had in her diuers faire brasse péeces, that were all sunke in the sea, which they of the Island were in good hope to waigh vp againe. The next summer after among these shippes that were cast away about Tercera, was like∣wise a Flie boat, one of those that had bin a∣rested in Portugall to serue the king, called the white Doue. The Master of her, was one Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland, and there were in her one hundred souldiers, as in euerie one of the rest there was. He being ouer ruled by the Captaine, that he could not be Master of his owne, say∣ling here and there at the mercie of God, as the storme droue him, in the end came within the sight of the Island of Tercera: which the Spaniards perceiuing, thought al their safety only to consist in putting into the road, com∣pelling the Master and the Pilot to make to∣wards the Island, although the Master refu∣sed to doe it, saying, that they were most sure there to be cast away, and vtterly spoyled: but the Captaine called him drunkard, and Heriticke, and striking him with a staffe, commanded him to do as he would haue him. The Master séeing this, and being compel∣led to doe it said: well then my Masters, seeing it is the desire of you all to bee cast away, I can but loose one life, and therwith desperate∣ly he sayled towards the shore, and was on that side of the Island, where there was no∣thing els but hard stones and rockes, as high as Mountaines, most terrible to behold, where some of the Inhabitantes stood with long ropes and corke bound at the end there∣of, to throw them downe vnto the men, that they might lay hold vpon them and saue their liues: but few of them got so neere, most of them being cast away, and smitten in péeces before they could get to the wall. The ship sayling in this manner (as I said before) to∣wards the Island, & approching to the shore, the master being an old man, and ful of yeres, called his sonne that was in the shippe with him, and hauing imbraced one another, and taken their last farewell, the good old Father willed his sonne not to take care for him, but seeke to saue himselfe: for (said he) sonne thou art yong, and may haue some hope to saue

thy life, but as for me it is no great matter (I am old) what become of me, and therewith each of these shedding many teares, as euerie louing father and kinde childe may well con∣sider, the ship sell vpon the Cliffes & brake in peeces the father on the one side, the sonne on the other side falling into the sea, each laying hold vpon that which came next to hand, but to no purpose: for the sea was so high and fu∣rious, that they were all drowned, and onelie fourteene or fifteene saued thēselues by swim∣ming, with their legges and armes halfe bro∣ken and out of ioint, among the which was the Masters son, and soure other dutch bo••es: the rest of the Spaniards and Saylers, with the Captaine and Master were drowned: whose heart would not melt with teares to behold so grieuous a sight, specially conside∣ring with himselfe that the greatest cause thereof was y^e beastlines and insolencie of the Spaniards, as in this only example may wel bee seene: whereby may be considered how the other ships sped, as wee our selues did in part behold, and by men that were saued did heare more a•• la••••e, as also some others of our Countrimen that as then were in the like danger ••an well witnes.

On the other Islandes the losse was no less•• then in Ter••e••••: for on the Island of Saint Georg•• there were two ships cast a∣way: on the Island of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 two shippes: on the Island Gra••o: three ships, and besides those there came euerie where round about diuers peeces of brok•• ships, and other things fleeting towards the Islands, wherewith the sea was all couered most pittifull to behold. On the Island of S. Michaell, there were foure ••hips cast away, and betweene Terce∣ra and S. Michael••, three more were sunke, which were seene and heard to crie out, wher∣of not one man was saued. The rest put into the sea without Masts, all torne and rent: so that of the whole Fleete and Armado, being 140. ships in al, there were but 3••. or 33. ari∣ued in Spaine and Portingall, yea and those few with so great miserie paine & labor, that not two of them ariued there together, but this day o••e, and to morrow another, next day the third, and so one after the other to y^e number aforesaid. All the rest were cast a∣way vpon the Islands, and ouerwhelmed in the sea: whereby may bee considered what great los••e and hinderance they receaued at that time: for by many mens iudgementes it was es••••med to be much more then was left by their armie that came for England, and it may well bee thought, and presumed, that it was no other but a iust plague purposely sent by God vpon the Spaniards, & that it might truely bee said, the taking of the Reuenge was iustlie reuenged vppon them, and not by the might or force of man but by the power of God, as some of them openly sa•• in the Isle of Tercera, that they beleeue•• ve∣rily God would consume them, and that hee tooke part with Lutheranes and Heretickes: saying further y^t so soone as they had throwne the dead bodie of the Viceadmirall Sir Ri∣chard Greenfield ouer borde, they verily thought that as he had a deuilish faith and re∣ligion, and therefore y^e deuils loued him so hee presently sunke into the bottome of the sea, & downe into Hell, where he raysed vp all the deuilles to the reuenge of his death: and that they brought so great stormes and tormentes vpon the Spaniardes, because they onely maintained the Catholike and Romish reli∣gion: such and the like blasphemies against God, they ceased not openly to vtter without that any man reproued them therein ••or for their false opinions, but the most part of them rather said and affirmed, that of truth it must needes be so.

As one of those Indian Fleetes put out of Noua Spaigna, there were ••••. of them by storme and tempest cast away and drowned in the sea, being 5••. in all▪ so that but 〈◊〉〈◊〉 es∣caped. Of the fléete that came from Santo Domingo, there were 14. cast away, com∣ming out of the channell of Hauana, whereof the Admirall and Viceadmirall were two of them: and from Terra Fi••ma in India, there came two shippes laden with gold and siluer, that were taken by the Englishmen▪ and be∣fore the Spanish Armie came to ••oru••, the Englishmen at time, had taken at the least 20. shippes, that came from S. Domingo, India, Brasilia, &c. and al sent into 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Whereby it plainly appareth, that m••y end God wil assuredly plague the Spaniards ha∣uing already blinded them, so that they haue not the sence to perceiue it▪ but still to remain in their obstinate opinions: but it is lost la∣bour to str••ue against God, and to trust in man, as being foundations created vppon the sands, which with the wind are blome down, and ouerthrowen as we dayly see before out eyes, and now not long since in many places haue euidently obserued: and therefore let e¦uery man but ••ooke into his owne actions, & take our Low countries for an example▪ wherein we can but blame our owne sinnes and wickednesse, which doth so blind vs, that wee wholly forget and reiect the benefites of God, continuing the seruantes & yoke slaues of Sathan. God of his mercie euen our eyes and hearts, that wee may know our onely health and sauiour Iesus Christ▪ who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 can helpe, gouerne, and p••ue vs▪ and ••e vs a happie ende in all our assures. By this

destruction of the Spaniardes and their euill successe, the lading and shipping of the goods that were saued out of the shippe that came from Ma••a•• to ••ercera, was againe put off: and therefore we must haue patience till it please God to send a fitter time, & that wee receiue further aduise and order from his Maiestie of Spaine.

All this being thus past, the Farmers of pepper and other Marchants that had their goods in Tercera, which were taken out of the lost ship that came from Malacca, seeing that the hope of any Armada, or any ships in the kinges behalfe to be sent to fetch it, was all in daine: they made request vnto his Ma∣iestie, that he would grant them licence euery m••n particularly to ship his goods in what ship he would at his owne aduenture, which in the end after long sute was granted, vpon condition that euery man should put in suer∣ties, to deliuer the goods in the custome house at Li••bone, to the end the king might be pa••∣ed his custome, as also that the goods that should bee deliuered vnto them in Tercera, should all bee registred: wherevpon the Far∣mers of pepper with other Marchants agre∣ed with a Flushinger, to fetch al the Cloues, Nutmegs, Mace, and other spices and goods that belonged vnto them, the Pepper onely excepted, which as then the King would not graunt to lade. The same shippe arriued in Tercera about the last of Nouember, and be∣cause it was some what dangerous, being the latter end of the yeare, wee laded her with all the speed we could, for as then the coast was cleare of Englishmen. To bee short, this Flushinger being laden with most part of the goods, sauing the Pepper that was left be∣hind, we set saile for Li••bone, passing some small stormes, not once meeting with a∣ny ship, but onely vppon the coast where wee saw ten Hollanders, that fayled with corne towards 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and other places in Italie, and so by Gods helpe vpon the second of Ia∣nuarie,* 1.104 Anno ••5••••. we arriued in the riuer of Li••bone, being nine yeares after my de∣parture from thence, and there I stayed till the mouth of Iulie▪ to dispatch such things as I had to doe, and vpon the seuenteenth of the same month, I went to Sentinial, where certaine Hollanders lay, with whom I went for 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

The 2••. of Julie wee set saile being in all twelue ships, and because we had a contrarie winde, we put out higher into the sea. The 2••. of the same month wee had a lasting storme, whereby wee ranne against another ship, being both in a hundred dangers to bee sunke for we were within a spanne of touch∣ing one another: but God holp vs, and wee parted from each other, which almost séemed impossible: for that the bore sprite of the ship, that came against vs, strake vpon our Fank∣yard, and there with brake in peeces, and pre∣sently thereupon his Fouke-maste fell ouer borde, whereby hee was forced to leaue the fléete. Another also of our companie had a leake, so that he made towardes the coast a∣gaine, where to saue the men hee ran the ship on shore, as afterwards we vnderstood, and so we remained but ten in companie.

The 1. of August, being 90. miles in the sea, because the wind held contrarie, so that we could not keepe our right course, we espy∣ed three strange shippes: but were not long before we lost the sight of them againe. The 4. of August there came three other shippes among our fléete, which we perceiued to bee Biscaines, whereupon wee made towardes them, and shot certaine peeces at them and so they left vs.

The 16. of August the winde being yet contrarie, and because wee were about 15. passengers aborde our shippe, our victuailes (specially our drinke) beganne to faile, so that wee were constrained to keepe an order, and to stint euery man to his portion, being as then 120. miles from He••ssant inwardes in the sea, vnder 46. degrees, which is called the half sea. The 18. we had a storme, where∣by three of our fleet were left behind, because they could not follow vs. The 24. of Au∣gust we cast out the lead, and found ground, wherewith wee were all glad, for it was the entrance into the channel betweene England and Fraunce. The ••••. of August being in the channel, there came two small English shippes to view our floete, but presently put in againe to the coast of England. The ••••. we descried land, being loofeward from vs, which was Goutste•• and D••rtmouth. The next day we passed by the Isle of Wight, sayling alonge the coast. The 30 of August we put into the head betwene Douer and Calleys, where there laye one of the Queenes ships, but she hoised anker and sailed to the coast of England, without lookinge after vs, so wee set fower men on shore: and then we had a scant winde, wherwith wee entred into the North sea, not seeing any bodie. The 1 of September being clowdie, we had a storme out of the northwest, wherby we could not descerne land: but in the euening we met with two shippes that came out of the East countries, which told vs they had seene land, saying it was the Terel, willing vs to follow them, and so we discouered lande, being the Vlie: but wee thinking it to bee the Te••ell, would no longer follow the other ships, but put so neare vnto it that wee were in great

danger: and then we perceiued that we had deceiued our selues, and saw the other ships to take another course towards the Terell: but we had the wind so scant and were fallen so low that wee could hardly gette from the shore, and withall we had a sodaine storme, wherewith our Fouke maste brake, our maine maste being alreadie crackt: where∣vppon wee were fully determined to anker there, and stand vpon good comfort and hope in God: and sodainely the wind came better, so that with great paine and labour about Sunne setting wee entred the mouth of the Terel, without any Pylot: for that by rea∣son of the great winde they durst not come out: so that to conclude we got in, and there with thankes giuen vnto God, we ankered. In the morning being the seconde of Sep∣tember, our Gunner thinking to charge the Peeces, and for ioy to shoote them off before the towne, by fortune a ladle full of powder tooke fire, and with the force thereof strake off all his right hande, and burnt him in ma∣ny places of his bodie, wherewith our ioy was wholly quailed, and abated. The third of September wee ariued in Enchuisen, where I founde my mother, brother and si∣ster, all liuing and in good health, it being twelue yeares, nine monethes and a halfe after my departure from thence. For the which God Almighty with his sonne Christ Jesus our Sauior, be praised and bles∣sed, to whom belongeth al power, honor and glorie now and for euermore, Amen.

The end of the first booke

Notes

• * 1.1

  Anno 1576 the 6. of December we sailed from the Tassell.
• * 1.2

  Annotatio D. Pa••l.
• * 1.3

  This was a twinne of my forena∣med bro∣ther decea∣sed.
• * 1.4

  1581.
• * 1.5

  1582.
• * 1.6

  1583.
• * 1.7

  1582.
• * 1.8

  1585.
• * 1.9

  1584.
• * 1.10

  Annotatio D. Pall.
• * 1.11

  Annotatio D. Pall.
• * 1.12

  Annotatio. D. Pall.
• * 1.13

  1539.
• * 1.14

  1546.
• * 1.15

  A fable of the people of Benga∣len concer∣ning the heade or spring of y^e riuer Ganges.
• * 1.16

  The superst∣tious opini∣ons of the Indians concerning the Riuer of Ganges.
• * 1.17

  The 〈…〉〈…〉 Ben∣g••ns.
• * 1.18

  The Ben∣g••lians ••aw for adulte∣ry▪
• * 1.19

  Victuailes good cheap in Bengala.
• * 1.20

  Strange cu∣stoms of the Peguans.
• * 1.21

  The men of ••hina pray the Deuil
• * 1.22

  Annoint. D. Pall.
• * 1.23

  15••2
• * 1.24

  158••
• * 1.25

  158••
• * 1.26

  Annotat. D. Pall.
• * 1.27

  A co••••••e kynde of chaine 〈◊〉〈◊〉 women 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wea••e.
• * 1.28

  An Ape•• Tooth had in great es∣timation
• * 1.29

  They are called W••-lyce, be∣cause the breede 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wal••: B•• in true E••¦glish the•• are called M••dges, in Latin, C••mice••.
• * 1.30

  Anno••. D. P.
• * 1.31

  Anno••a. D. Pa••l.
• * 1.32

  Annota. D. Pall.
• * 1.33

  Annota. D. P.
• * 1.34

  Annota. D. Pall.
• * 1.35

  Anno•• D. 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 1.36

  Annota. D. Pall
• * 1.37

  Annota. ••. Pall.
• * 1.38

  ••nnota. D. Pall.
• * 1.39

  Annota▪ D. Pall
• * 1.40

  Anno•• D. 〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.41

  Annota. D. Pal,
• * 1.42

  Anota D Pal
• * 1.43

  Annot•• D. P.
• * 1.44

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.45

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.46

  ••nota. •• Pal.
• * 1.47

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.48

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.49

  An••nota. D. Pal.
• * 1.50

  Annota. D. Pall.
• * 1.51

  Annot•• D. P••
• * 1.52

  Annota▪ D. Pall▪
• * 1.53

  Annota. D. Pall.
• * 1.54

  Some 〈◊〉〈◊〉 this 〈…〉〈…〉 the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ca••led 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Mo••.
• * 1.55

  Annota. D Pall.
• * 1.56

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.57

  Annota. D. Pall.
• * 1.58

  Annota. D. Pa••.
• * 1.59

  〈1 paragraph〉〈1 paragraph〉
• * 1.60

  An. 1555
• * 1.61

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.62

  ••ta. ••. Pal.
• * 1.63

  〈1 paragraph〉〈1 paragraph〉
• * 1.64

  Annota. D. Pal••▪
• * 1.65

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.66

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.67

  Annota. ••. Pa••.
• * 1.68

  Anno••a▪ D 〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.69

  Annota. D. Pal
• * 1.70

  1535
• * 1.71

  〈1 paragraph〉〈1 paragraph〉
• * 1.72

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.73

  A••o••a. D. Pal.
• * 1.74

  Annota. ••. Pal.
• * 1.75

  Anota. D. Pal.
• * 1.76

  Annota. D. Pal.
• * 1.77

  Annota. D. P••.
• * 1.78

  Annota. D. Pall.
• * 1.79

  Annota. D. Pall
• * 1.80

  Annota. D. Pa••
• * 1.81

  〈1 paragraph〉〈1 paragraph〉
• * 1.82

  〈1 paragraph〉〈1 paragraph〉
• * 1.83

  An•• D. 〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.84

  Ann•• D. P••.
• * 1.85

  Of this •• Newbery▪ you may read more in M. Hack∣luy••es boke of Engl••she voyages.
• * 1.86

  1584
• * 1.87

  1••86.
• * 1.88

  ••4.
• * 1.89

  〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.90

  〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.91

  〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.92

  〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.93

  1587.
• * 1.94

  158••.
• * 1.95

  ••587.
• * 1.96

  1588
• * 1.97

  158••.
• * 1.98

  ••588.
• * 1.99

  1580
• * 1.100

  15••••.
• * 1.101

  ••89.
• * 1.102

  159••
• * 1.103

  ••591
• * 1.104

  1••••2